Home

Contents - Alcatel-Lucent Documentation Center

1. Applications O Tasks User User group Domain Controlled objects NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 1 User management Introduction The User Administration and Profiling application is started via the NAM access bar by clicking on the third icon Figure 4 1 Access bar NAM R1 9 4 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User 4 2 User 4 2 1 Create user Introduction This chapter describes the process to add a new user to the system Before add ing a new user to the system please pay attention to the following remarks m The NAM administrator must have a system login The user must be created via OS m The NAM administrator should know the login ID of the user to be created and the group the user shall belong to Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a new user Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up showing the Users Table User Name Description Default EM Administrator useri nbg Figure 4 2 User Administration amp Profiling window Users table 3 Click New The User Profile window pops up NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 3 User management User User Profile Login Marne User Hame Description ase
2. gt NOTE For the protection O DS1these fields are empty and the buttons are disabled m Physical DS1 id Physical address of the DS1 feeders Format ds1 slot port e g ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Logical DS1 id This field shows the id used to identify the logical feeder Possible values vfdr 1 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA m Add Logical DS1 This button provides access to the Logical DS1 window The button is available only if a row in the table is selected and there is no logical DS1 cross connected to this physical DS1 m Edit This button is associated with an option menu Possible values Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Physical DS1 is always enabled logical DS1 is enabled only if a cross connection exists between the DS1 ids of the selected row Therefore the Edit button provides access to the Phys ical DS1 window cf Chapter 7 2 3 1 page 7 20 or Logical DS1 window cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 ms Remove Logical DS1 This button can be used to re move a cross connection from the list The button is enabled only if a row with existing cross connection is selected This field displays the current DS1 regeneration state clear or set The Label button is used to set or clear the physical DS1 regeneration Depending on the state reflected this button dis plays the possible operation Clear if the state is set Set if the state is cleared NAM R1 9 36
3. 8 3 4 5 Help Help is provided for every window The help text describes the purpose of the win dow how to use it and a description of each field of the window is given In the Menu Bar of each NAM application there are two help options m Index Displays the help index allowing the user to navigate through the NAM help information NAM R1 9 8 24 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring E SS m On window Displays the help information of the window where the user is currently working 8 3 5 Alarm Viewer functions Summary The Alarm Viewer provides the user with different functions for managing alarm information Manual reload of alarms m Acknowledge alarms The user can acknowledge one several or all reported alarms The NAM allows different users to acknowledge the same alarm The name of the last user who has acknowledged the alarm is stored Clear alarms The user can clear one several or all platform alarms communication alarms are platform alarms that cannot be cleared by the user If not all se lected alarms could be cleared the user is informed about the alarms for which this action failed Print alarm lists cf Chapter 8 3 4 1 page 8 19 Before performing alarm acknowledgment and alarm clearance select the alarms you want to acknowledge or clear Starting actions select the desired alarm viewer action If you want to Result Notes manually retrie
4. Figure 5 37 AFM NVDS Backup window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 6 14 5 page 5 94 to select create the directory example of the file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt AFM and the file name of the backup file gt NOTE Do not insert any blank in the backup file name Such a file cannot be re stored si Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field File name in the AFM NVDS Backup window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the backup An n Progress window pops up NAM R1 9 5 92 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management NVDS Backup on lt NE NAME gt in progress After finishing the backup process successfully the In Progress window disappears 5 Press Close to exit the AFM NVDS Backup window gt NOTE Pressing the Close button during the backup execution will cancel the backup operation 5 6 14 4 Data restore data agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data restore from a data agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Restore gt Data via cursor menu The AFM NVDS Restore window pops up AFM NVDIS Restore Figure 5 38 AFM NVDS Restore window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 6 14 5 page 5 94 to select the directory example of the
5. Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager TestScheduler Release 1 7 1 administration as lt LuTeSc gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 TestScheduler bin TestScheduler opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 TestScheduler cfg TestScheduler cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuTeSc gt was successful MIB Browser in Processing package instance lt LuMIB gt from stallation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager 1 9 MIB Browser sparc LuMIB_ 59 2 4 OK No previous package LuMIB has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 39 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Processing system information Installing AnyMedia Element Manager MIB Browser as lt LuMIB gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent LUMOS bin browser opt lucent LUMOS bin mib_browser sh verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuMIB gt was successful Network profiles Processing package instance lt LuNPB gt from installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Network Profiles information 1 9 Administration sparc LuNPB 59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies
6. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_ 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuTeSc has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia Network Profiles information 1 9 Administration as lt LuNPB gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script NAM R1 9 2 40 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Creating data bases Starting NPBDbPopulate process Creating DataBase NPBDataBase db lt list of created profiles gt exit OK 25662 Killed orbixd daemon pid 25662 has been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuNPB log Installation of lt LuNPB gt was successful Subscriber Id ad Processing package instance lt LuSID gt from o instal lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24 gt ation AnyMedia Element Manager Release 1 9 Subscriber ID Administration sparc LuNPB_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
7. After provisioning of the subshelf server pack its server ports are automati cally created in the system are retrievable and can be used for further pro visioning If for example a subshelf server pack ap 1 3 is provisioned the related subshelf server ports are identified with the AID iatsp 3 1 5 The number of server ports created will depend on the IAT Server pack in serted If it is an LPS100 2 IAT Server Ports will be created if it is an LPS104 4 IAT Server Ports and if it is an LPS105 5 IAT Server Ports Subshelf controller pack provisioning The controller pack of a subshelf needs not to be provisioned manually as this is automatically done with the subshelf provisioning Drops at subscriber interface APs are automatically created Also one or more subshelf feeder ports dependent on the controller pack type are cre ated in the system m Cross connect mainshelf to subshelf The bearer channel bandwidth available at the subshelf depends beside the capacity limits of the server pack and subshelf controller pack on the number of links to the subshelf The links between mainshelf and subshelf are provisioned with a cross connection command which connects a main shelf server port with a subshelf feeder port m Subshelf AP and subscriber provisioning The provisioning model of APs and subscribers in the subshelf is according to the existing provisioning model in the mainshelf except the newly intro duced subshelf p
8. B 1 2 NAM client GUI configuration vari ables The following table provides an alphabetical list of the configuration parameters for AnyMedia GUI Table 2 2 SystemPreferences ini configuration file Name Description Site settings SITE The city or the location where the NAM is working This value is used for printing pur poses it is mandatory at installation time LOC_LANG en Default locale of the application These LOC _COUNTRY US value cannot be modified The following variable should be used to change the timezone That should be done only if some problems has been detected by default In order to notify to the application that the time zone should be change the value of TZ_userDefined should be set to true In order to set properly the time zone to be used in the AnyMedia application we have to set the following variables TZ_rawOffset TZ_ID TZ_startMonth TZ_startDay TZ_startDayOfWeek TZ_startTime TZ_endMonth TZ_endDay TZ_endDayOfWeek TZ_endTime TZ _userDefined Possible values true false Default value false TZ_rawOffset Defines the difference in milliseconds be tween local time and UTC NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 B 7 Configuration parameters ee User view settings Alarm viewer set tings B 8 Issue 1 Name TZ ID TZ_startMonth TZ_startDay TZ_startDayOfWeek TZ_startTime TZ_endMonth TZ_endDay TZ_endDayOfWeek TZ _endTime USERVIEW ALM_VIEW ALM_FILTER NA
9. Deprovision f the NE has been provisioned and no value has been changed Operational The option menu Administrative State shows the possible State values Managed Not Managed This option menu is disabled if the telephony agent is not provisioned The text field Operational State shows the current state of the data agent Possible values Communication Stopped Communication Stopped Releasing Communication Trying Communica tion Trying Problem Detected Communication Established Communication Established Synchronizing More Details This button provides access to the Synchronization Telephony window cf Chapter 5 6 2 3 page 5 51 It is available only if the administrative state of the agent is Managed NAM R1 9 5 42 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Connect a Network Element E SS 5 5 2 4 Modify NE Management data tele phony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to manage an NE telephony agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Browser or in the background map and NE Management via the cursor menu The NE Management window pops up This window can also be reached from the Groups amp NEs window tab NEs by clicking on NE Management cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 30 If you want to then provision the NE enter or change the values for IP Ad dress TID Login or Password in the Provisioning Information field and press Provision deprovision an provi
10. Description This list box can be used to include a descrip tion of the network profile Network Profile Pattern This option menu is used to select a template for a new profile and to display its data in the field Network Profile Data see below None can also be se lected In this case all parameters in the field Network Pro file Data are reset to zero Network Profile Data Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 minutes one day for the up stream direction m Errored Seconds ES Possible values 0 900 for 15 min 0 86400 for one day m Loss of Signal LOS Possible values 0 90 for 15 min 0 8640 for one day m High Bit Error Rate HBER Possible values 0 90 for 15 min 0 8640 for one day Loss of Frame LOF Possible values 0 90 for 15 min 0 8640 for one day Command but The Affected Objects button provides access to the Af tons fected Objects window This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated The Resynchronize button can be used to force the re syn chronization of the selected profile with all the AFMs cur rently controlled by the NAM This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated NAM R1 9 9 24 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles E SS 9 6 4 1 Create an SDSL PM thresholds net work profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to create an SDSL PM threshol
11. NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 3 Performance monitoring ADSL performance monitoring data ee Parameters Buttons Description Performance Upstream Four text fields show the values for four different Monitoring time periods Current 15 minutes Previous 15 minutes Cur rent day Previous day m Errored Seconds ES Possible values 0 900 for 15 minutes 0 86400 for one day Loss of Signal LOS Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day m High Bit Error Rate HBER Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day Loss of Frame LOF Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day Valid Data Four check boxes show whether the data for the time period are reliable or not Downstream Four text fields show the values for four differ ent time periods Current 15 minutes Previous 15 minutes Current day Previous day m Errored Seconds ES Possible values 0 900 for 15 minutes 0 86400 for one day Loss of Signal LOS Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day m High Bit Error Rate HBER Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day Remote Failure Indication RFI Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day Valid Data Four check boxes show whether the data for the time period are reliable or not The Get button is used to retrieve the PM data of the se lec
12. CPE Customer Premises Equipment NAM R1 9 AB 2 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Abbreviations SS cps cell per second CR Critical alarm severity CRV Call Reference Value CSA Customer Serving Area CTAG Correlation Tag CTD Cell Transfer Delay CTRL Control CTC Common Transit Clock CTU Craft Test Unit CU Channel Unit D DB Database DC Direct Current DCN Data Communication Network DDS Digital Data System DFL Default DID Direct Inward Dial DMT Discrete Multitone DPT Dial Pulse Termination NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 AB 3 Abbreviations E SS A E ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in EIA Electronic Industries Association EM Element Manager EM AM Element Manager AnyMedia ENT Enter EOC Embedded Operations Channel EQPT Equipment ES Errored Seconds ESF Extended Super Frame ETO Equalized Transmission Only EVT Event TE F FAF Facility Failure FEF Family of Equipment Failure FDL Facility Data Link FLT Fault FS SuperFrame with Datalink FTP File Transfer Protocol FXO Foreign Exchange Office NAM R1 9 AB 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Abbreviations ee G GS Ground Start GSF General Service Function GSFN Generic Signalling Function GSI Graphical System Interface GUI Graphical User Interface H HBER High Bit Error Ratio HDD
13. Chapter 3 5 1 Close Dismiss this window but without closing other instances of the Alarm Viewer Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 13 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring Table 8 3 Views Menu Select a view from the predefined views Chapter 8 3 4 2 Reload Display a fresh copy of the current informa tion shown in the window Only alarms which match the filter criteria will be included Table 8 4 Filters menu Open Open Open a user defined filter pre Preden AE viously stored No modifica tions allowed Predefined Filters Selection of filter criteria for Chapter 8 3 4 3 MEMS e E E E displaying alarm information page 8 20 Critical Raised Alarms Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s Critical Alarms not cleared Owned Acknowledge Alarms Clear Alarms All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter All Alarms page 8 19 Table 8 5 Actions menu Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms their status Chapter 8 3 5 Acknowledge i will change to acknowledged page 8 25 Clear Clear all selected alarms their status will change to cleared Table 8 6 Help menu Menu display Meaning Information in Ta Index Display the index help allowing the user to Chapter 8 3 4 5 navigate through the NAM help information page 8 24 On Window Display the help information of the window where the user is currently working NAM R1 9
14. Figure 7 2 Provisioning data for a TR 08 POTS subscriber line Port assignment As mentioned above the AnyMedia Access System may contain 1 TR 303 VRT and or up to 20 TR 08 VRTs and INA VBs in any combination subject to the limit imposed by the 20 available DS1 network interfaces A physical distribution port may be assigned to only 1 logical line on 1 VRT or INA VB similarly a logical line can be assigned to only 1 physical distribution port TR 303 VRT The single TR 303 VRT can support any number of physical lines up to the full 608 line 768 1920 maximum capacity of the AnyMedia Access System The log NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 3 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony lt A ical lines of the TR 303 VRT are identified by call reference values CRVs which may be any of 672 integer values 1024 from 1 to 2048 A physical distribution port in the system can be assigned to any CRV of the TR 303 VRT The TR 303 VRT includes full access concentration between its logical line DSOs and available time slots on the feeder DS1s 24 time slots associated with the VRT full access means that if there is an available feeder time slot it is possible to assign a logical line DSO to that time slot For time slot management the TR303 VRT supports the following process Dynamic time slot assignment a time slot assignment made via the timeslot management channel TMC for locally switched application This time slot a
15. Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 sparc solaris Build 3 0 run time OK No previous package LULUMRT has been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail Capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11161 75649 13 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4250252 2274970 66 homelocal dev dsk cO0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1204840 40 1204800 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cdl 500736 500736 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Enter install directory opt lucent LUMOS q 5 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Checking your DNS domain name The DNS domain name found was es lucent com What is your DNS domain name default es lucent com q 6 Type your NIS domain name if DNS is available and press Return gt NOTE NAM does not need NIS If no DNS is available press Return to continue Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q NAM R1 9 2 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure gt NOTE The list above and the number 4 in the followi
16. Slot format comdac 1 1 2 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 15 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Slot Information The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value COMDAC Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values COM 101 COM102 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp This field is described in Chapter 5 6 9 page 5 68 Protection Software Ver NE Type Displays whether the NE is a COT or not sion Possible value for this release REMOTE TERMINAL SW Version Software version that has been obtained from the NE at connection time The NAM will have to verify whether the mentioned SW Version is manageable by the system Ongoing Tasks These check boxes indicate operations in progress which can
17. h l R O i fi NES O 02 2001 1 I o rr Contents 1 II 1 5 Issue 1 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 3 1 4 3 1 1 4 3 1 1 Fault identification 1 4 3 1 2 Fault localization and diagnosis Network planning and physical installation Configuration management Network Operation amp Surveillance Fault management 1 4 3 1 3 Fault clearance 1 4 3 2 Network modification 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and removal of an NE 1 4 3 2 2 Modification of NEs 1 4 3 3 Performance monitoring 1 4 4 System security and user groups Network configuration 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 1 5 4 NAM server without clients and external OS LAN NAM server with clients and without external OS LAN NAM server without clients and with external OS WAN NAM Server with Clients and external OS WAN NAM R1 9 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description 1 1 Scope Purpose Contents 363 211 497 About this subject This chapter describes the Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 This re lease covers the following NE releases m narrowband NB releases R1 2 2 5 R1 2 3 R1 7 0 R1 7 1 and R1 7 2 m broadband BB releases R1 1 2 R1 7D and partial R1 11D gt NOTE For the NAM the terms telephony data are used instead of narrow band broadband This chapter provides an overview of the NAM and tries to give an insight into the functioning of the NAM by providing detailed information on the NAM features menti
18. Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee If you want to then remove a cross connection select a row with an existing cross con nection in the Physical DS1 Informa tion list and press Remove A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DS1 will be removed Ok to proceed change the DS1 regeneration state use the label button in the field DS1 Re only for NE R1 2 2 generation exit the window click on Close 6 3 2 View the COMDAC parameters Overview The COMDAC common data and control pack performs the main bandwidth management and control functions for the system Procedure Complete the following procedure to view the COMDAC data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COM101 or COM102 in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack COMDAC in Shelf View window The COMDAC window pops up NAM R1 9 6 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS COMDAC Window Figure 6 7 COMDAC window This window contains all the information related to the COMDAC It can be dis played even when the pack is not inserted The following table shows the view edit options of the COMDAC window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id Slot number where the COMDAC is plugged in
19. File gt Print gt Print Table File gt Print gt Print Window File gt Print gt Preview File gt Exit Help gt On Window Help gt Index 363 211 497 NAM R1 9 The table below provides an overview of menus which have the same function in Function of Frequently Used Menus Function Prints the contents of text lists in the window cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 34 Opens the Print Dialog window to set parameters for the print out Prints a screenshot of the whole window cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 34 Opens the Print Dia log window to set parameters for the print out Shows how it will be printed if the Print Table option is used Opens directly the Print Preview window Closes all windows of this application Displays online help for this window Displays online help index Issue 1 02 2001 3 15 System management System administration ee 3 4 System administration 3 4 1 General 3 4 1 1 Introduction and definitions Introduction The NAM functionality is given by a set of processes of different types whose exe cution is controlled by the System Administration subsystem In order to make possible the managing of all the processes running under the NAM these will be grouped according to functionality start up and recovery dependencies into dif ferent levels The lower one is the process level and the upper one is the NAM level These levels are visible to the NAM administrators who have managi
20. NAM R1 9 1 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Network configuration 1 5 2 NAM server with clients and without external OS LAN NAM server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a LAN NAM server TCP IP LAN Hub NE NE O NE Figure 1 10 NAM server with clients and without external OS LAN NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 33 Functional description Network configuration ME SS NAM server without clients and with 1 5 3 external OS WAN NAM server connected to the NEs using a LAN and connected to one or more ex ternal OSs using a WAN link WAN link ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM TCP IP PPP _ N Modem Si j ISDN network adapter Lo om SON SS Bridge Router TCP IP Hub NAM server TCP IP LAN NE NE oo o NE Figure 1 11 NAM server without clients and with external OS WAN 363 211 497 NAM R1 9 1 34 Issue1 02 2001 Functional description Network configuration E SS 1 5 4 NAM Server with Clients and external OS
21. NAM R1 9 6 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is provisioned mation Otherwise the read only text fields provide the following in formation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values cf Table 6 1 page 6 34 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPA380 LPA380C LPA300 LPA350 LPU116 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code lists the Info only avail provisioned packs and the value None for unprovisioning POETEN The None value can be used to unprovision the AP The cur rent window will be closed and the Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 Operation The check box Slot required can be us
22. Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the OAP is inserted Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information mation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values LPF500 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPF500 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning In The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code shows the formation provisioning info LPF500 or the value None for unprovi sioning Operational The option menu Administrative State provides the possi State from Data ble states that can be used Locked OOS Unlocked IS View The field Operational State shows the state obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Fault condition Under reboot Under testing Under
23. Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters VRT VB id This option menu lists all VRT VB ids of the selected type NAM R1 9 7 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a Parameters Buttons Description VFDE Two radio buttons Enable Disable are used to modify the VFDE status by clicking on Apply The Apply button is available only if the VFDE status has been modified Network Loss The Network Loss slider can be used to define the network Information loss value Possible values 0 6 The Set button is used to set the network loss value Datalinks amp Pro Primary Link Secondary Link Displays the logical DS1 id tection of the primary and secondary link These entries are avail able if logical DS1 id is present Possible values are v3fdr 1 1 28 The Edit Logical DS1 buttons provide access to the Logi cal DS1 window to change the timing reference EOC Datalink m Working Standby EOC Displays the logical DS1 id used by the working standby EOC embedded opera tions channel Possible values v8eoc 1 2 1 2 m Manual Switch This button performs a manual switch between working and standby EOCs It is available only if both working and standby EOCs are present and the standby path is not out of service Forced Switch This button performs a forced switch between working and standby EOCs It is avail
24. They are created and deleted using the TL1 commands ENT CRS T1 and DLT CRS T1 The creation of a T1 cross connection acts as a trigger within the NE to instantiate the associ ated VRT or VB m TO cross connections provide links between the logical ports of a VRT or an INA VB and the physical distri bution ports of the NE They are created and deleted by the TL1 commands ENT CRS T0O and DLTI CRS TO m Finally the undifferentiated term cross connection describes an actual bandwidth assignment within the system s TSI fabric Such bandwidth assignments are administered dynamically by the TR 303 TMC they are administered semi permanently by the TR 303 EOC and they are created automatically by the NE in re sponse to provisioning activities on TR 08 VRTs and INA VBs Circuit This refers to the devices and functions built on or provided by an AP for one port In some documents this is also called facility The subscriber line is not included NAM R1 9 GL 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Glossary Client An entity that initiates requests to a server For the AnyMedia Access System a client could be a PC with a GUI in terface a telnet session or an OS like the NAM NB Client Application A group of one or more user modules that offer related functionality Client Host A machine where one or more user modules are installed Common Data and Control Pack COMDAC This performs the main bandwidth management and control functions of the sy
25. Where is Orbix cfg file located Orbix_path cfg q m Finally after the ObjectStore installation the user must execute the oscon fig server command to configure the ObjectStore daemon 2 2 3 Cancel installation There are two ways to cancel the installation as follows m internal cancellation when the install_AMEM or pkgadd command de tect through information files or installation scripts that something is invalid m external cancellation if the administrator kill the process kill 9 or Ctrl C In both cases the system informs about if files have been installed on the sys tem In this case the administrator must use the pkgrm command to remove the installation NAM R1 9 2 68 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package installa tions In order to remove any AnyMedia package installations the administrator must ex ecute the script remove_ANy This script works exactly the same way than the in Sstallation one and allows to remove full or partial installations and individual pack ages also It will ask confirmation for every package to be removed When a package is removed all files installed by it or created during the AnyMedia operation such as data bases and temporal data files are erased in the target system Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove packages Step Procedure 1 Type remove_ANY and
26. button Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the VRT TR303 Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu VRT VB id to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to then edit the VFDE state use the radio buttons Enable Disable and click on Apply gt NOTE Switching to disable will cause a warning message that this action can be service affecting VFDE disabling of a TR303 may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the NAM will send an allowed VFDE message in case of enable or an inhibit VFDE message in case of disable to the NE The following n Progress message will be shown in the status bar Disable Enable VFDE launched change the timing reference for primary click on the corresponding Edit Logi and or secondary link cal DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 NAM R1 9 7 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning E SS 363 211 497 If you want to change the switch mode of EOC and or TMC change the network loss value get the current service states of the VRT VB add a logical DS1 add a logical DSO open the Physical DS1 List window open the Logical DSO List window close the window NAM R1 9 Service provisioning telephony then use the corresponding buttons Manual Switch Forced Switch use the slider Network Loss and click on Set click on Get in the Operat
27. fied NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 19 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile Network Profile Name This text field shows the profile Information name The entry can be changed in create and edit mode Status This option menu is used to define the status of the profile Activated Deactivated Activated means that the pro file can be used in cross connections Description This list box can be used to include a descrip tion of the network profile Network Profile Pattern This option menu is used to select a template for a new profile and to display its data in the field Network Profile Data see below None can also be se lected In this case all parameters in the field Network Pro file Data are reset to zero Network Profile Data Errored Seconds ES Four text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two direc tions upstream and downstream Possible values 0 900 for 15 min 0 86400 for one day Loss of Signal LOS Four text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two direc tions upstream and downstream Possible values 0 90 for 15 min 0 8640 for one day High Bit Error Rate HBER Four text fields show the val ues for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two directions upstream and downstream Possible values 0 90 for 15
28. he System AnyMedia EM software It provides a set of services allowing an operator to manage the AnyMedia NE System Failure Any problem that prevents the EM system from continuing to work eee T TO This is the descriptor used for the TL1 interface to refer to parameters concerning a DSO 64 kbps service or facil ity T1 This is the descriptor used for the TL1 interface to refer to parameters concerning a DS1 1 544 Mbps service or facility TAS Terminal Access Server This adapts local area networks LAN to wide area networks WAN TASs have the ability to integrate remote net work elements in a local network TASs support different LAN protocols e g Ethernet and WAN protocols e g PPP TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A crossing of a parameter threshold that is generally considered to be a transient condition TELNET This ia a remote terminal interface protocol which allows remote login capability into a system on a network from any other node on that network that is also running TELNET TELNET is a TCP IP application Test Access Path TAP There are up to two TAPs one consisting of two pairs TAP B and the other of six pairs TAP A both providing in ternal and external metallic test access to the circuits Test Session This is the procedure including all necessary functions to test a subscriber This includes the setup of the test path as well as the release of the test equipment The test session runs in
29. m System Internal Events It contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the NAM or indicate errors which occurred in the NAM Autonomous Reports It contains all TCAs Threshold Crossing Alert from NB and BB and all ac tions performed in the NEs that imply changes in the NAM data base Alarms It contains all alarms received from the platform NAM telephony agent and data agent m ADSL Performance m SDSL Performance m AIM Performance a AIM Traffic Statistics m DS3 Feeders Performance 3 7 2 Configuration of logs Log size The following values can be configured cf Appendix B for the log system by the administrator m Minimum number of days incl current day in the log default 7 days m Maximum size of all logged data default 5 Mbyte per NE The maximum log size is configured per log type and applies per NE each NE can have stored logs of a type up to the maximum size configured for that log type NAM R1 9 3 46 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Log management Log grows too big The logs are stored as separate files one file holds one day of one log type If the size of the logged data has reached the size limit and a new event to be logged occurs some of the already logged data has to be deleted The oldest recorded day of one of the logs holding the largest number of days is always deleted Alarms The log system issues an
30. marks of Lucent Technologies and other companies are in italics and the trade marks modify a noun e g the system name contains a trademark AnyMedia Access System A trademark is not treated as an acronym it is not spelled out or expanded NAM R1 9 XVI Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 About this document General safety information a Lucent Technologies trademarks are identified with the registered mark or trademark symbol the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter Lucent Technolo gies trademarks Trademarks of The trademarks of other companies are identified with a footnote reference the other companies first time the trademarks are used in a chapter Typographical con The following table gives examples of the typographical conventions used in this ventions chapter Table 0 5 Typographical conventions Object Example Meaning Keyboard ReturnoraA Return or A key on the keyboard Shift Ctrl B Shift Ctrl and B key pressed simultaneously Esc A and B key pressed one after the other Push but Apply Apply push button in a window ton Menu File gt Exit Menu option Exit in File menu Objects in Designates the object Date in a window e g windows text field check box spin box etc 6 General safety information This section lists the safety information needed for the AnyMedia Access System for system turn up after installation has been completed operating provisioning and maintaining the system
31. opt lucent OrbixWeb3 1 q NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 57 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee 7 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Package lt LUJRERT gt jre 1 2 2 05 has been found in opt lucent JDK_1 2 2_05 Checking your NIS domain name The NIS domain name found was es lucent com What is your NIS domain name default es lucent com q 8 Type your NIS domain name and press Return or press Return to ac cept the default name Enter the NIS hostname masc216 q 9 Type the host name of the server side and press Return or accept the default hostname if it is the correct one by pressing Return only Wait Do you agree with NIS hostname lt masc216 gt IP address lt IP address gt y n q 10 Type y andpress Return if the IP address is correct A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q 11 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the pa
32. portant and Notice The classification is shown in the following table DANGER Serious injury is definite or likely WARNING Serious injury is possible CAUTION Minor injury is definite likely or possible or material damage to the product or in the product environment is definite or likely IMPORTANT Material damage to the product or in the product environment is possible NOTICE A fault i e considerable impairment to operation will be caused or may be caused NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 XIX About this document Related documentation 7 Related documentation Document List The following is related documentation for the NAM and for additional compo nents Table 1 List of documents CIC ordering Component Manual type Comcode number AnyMedia Access System Applications Planning and 108298639 363 211 101 Ordering Guide APOG AnyMedia Access System Installation Manual IM 108298654 363 211 102 AnyMedia Access System Commands and Procedures 108361155 363 211 103 a For the ordering address see Chapter 8 How to order this document 7 1 Print copy hard copy Document All listed documents are available in print packaging and format 7 2 CD ROM The User Service Manual and the Functional Description are available in PDF for mat on CD ROM and an Adobe Acrobat Reader is provided to view them Table 2 Customer documentation on CD ROM Component CD ROM CIC Ordering number NAM R1 9 Customer Document
33. row pointing to the right gt These menu options have a submenu that will open as soon as you click on the menu option A submenu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option gt Submenu option e g NE gt Program Copy gt Data A submenu option again may offer a submenu then an appropri ate number of gt is added 3 3 7 Cursor menu Menu at the cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop position up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a menu bar or a window frame The cursor menu is not available in all windows The functions which can be executed using this cur sor menu depend on the application of the respective window Select menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu option Step Procedure 1 Press the right mouse button 2 Move the cursor onto the desired menu option 3 Click the left or right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and click somewhere outside the menu NAM R1 9 3 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management General information on keyboard 3 3 8 Workspace manager After logging in to the operation system SUN Solaris the workspace manager window Is situated at the bottom of the screen offering a range of functions and in formation A fu
34. tabase General There are three commands to manage the SID database which populate the database with parameters from a text file m remove redundant entries from the SID database and m export the contents of the SID database to a text file Populate the SID Use the following command to populate the SID database from a text file If you from a file enter none of the parameters an empty database structure is created populateSIDdb r f info file Parameter description f Replace mode Existing data are removed from the database and replaced with the new data The script asks for confirma tion If the SID server process is running the scripts aborts with a warning f To fail mode The database populate stops at the first line with a wrong format Changes made to the database by the populate process until then are undone and the database re mains as it was before the process started neither r nor f Append to end mode The info_file is read to the end All lines with the correct format cf Chapter 7 4 2 2 page 7 84 are added to the database while incorrect lines are ignored Existing data are maintained in the database and new data are added Default info_file The input data are taken from the info_file The parameter for info_file can include a directory e g tmp siddata if no directory is specified the file is expected to be in the current directory For the format of the file see Chapter 7 4 2 2 page 7 84 Cancel a pop
35. tional field is available Two radio buttons COMDAC View AFM View can be used to select the de sired view A text field explains the type of mismatch NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 37 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee 6 3 9 1 Modify an MDSU Complete the following procedure to modify the MDSU server data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt MDSU in the NE Browser and View via the cursor menu or single click on the pack MDSU in Shelf View window The MDSU window pops up 2 Use the option menu Slot Id to select the desired MDSU If you want to then unprovision the MDSU use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 change the required state use the check box Slot required exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 6 38 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs 6 3 10 IAT Server window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases The integrated access terminal server IATS provides up to 24 equivalent DSO services switched or non switched voice or data per feeder DS1 Mamas Cres Sonanin Figure 6 15 IAT Server window The following table shows the view edit options of the IAT Server window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 c
36. tors Table 8 9 Relational operators Operation Symbol equal less than lt less than or equal lt greater than gt greater than or equal gt NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 23 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring ee Alarm field names The alarm field names and their possible values from the following table have to and values be used Table 8 10 Alarm field names and possible values Field name Possible values index integer gt 0 node integer gt 0 for NE identifiers or O for NAM source_type Agent_BB or Agent_NB object AID parameter in TL1 REP T ALAM e g ap 1 1 cause CONDTYPE parameter in TL1 REPT ALAM e g AIS severity indeterminate critical major minor warning OF cleared serv_aff sa Or nsa event_type AIDTYPE parameter in TL1 REPT ALAM e g COMM ack_state ack or noack ack_user any string which can be a valid user login num raises integer gt 0 f c time integer number of seconds since Jan 1 1970 UTC 1_c time integer number of seconds since Jan 1 1970 UTC correlation correlated _ source no_correlated or correlated result 8 3 4 4 2 Example for filter file The following expressions are examples for filters m Alarms which are in the state ack and do not have the severity major ack_state ack amp amp severity major Alarms which have the severity minor or are not service affecting severity minor serv_aff nsa
37. 1 8 AP slot amasUnknownPackType unknown Minor pack detected DUP_PACK_MISMATCH incompatible Major pack type Minor IMPROPRMVL improper re Major moval Minor amasAFMPackRe AP has been Minor movedAlarmCS removed DUP_PACK_RMVL pack removal Major Minor NAM R1 9 8 60 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms Table 8 12 Correlated alarms Service Probable Cause Summary Severity Object_Id Description PRCDERR mismatch of Critical subsh 1 8 logical sub shelf number amasSubShelfAssocia association Major subsh 1 8 tionMismatchAlarm mismatch re ported DUP _SUBSHELF_MISM incompatible Critical yes subsh 1 8 illegal subshelf ATCH subshelf type type in parent slot NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 61 Fault management and maintenance Alarms BE SeS NAM R1 9 8 62 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Contents 9 1 Overview 9 2 ADSL performance monitoring data 9 2 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window 9 2 2 Modify the ADSL performance monitoring 9 3 SDSL performance monitoring data 9 3 1 SDSL Performance Monitoring Data window 9 3 2 Modify the SDSL performance monitoring 9 4 AFM feeder performance monitoring 9 4 1 AFM PM Data window 9 4 2 Modify the PM data of the AFM feeder 9 4 3 AFM Feeder PM Threshold window 9 4 3 1 Define AFM Feeder PM thresholds 9 5 ATM traffic monitoring 9 5 1 ATM Traffic Monitoring
38. 1 x subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x drop 1 1 19 1 x for BAIU x is the number of drops supplied by the server NAM R1 9 8 36 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management Parameters Buttons Description Test Program Direction This option menu is used to define the direction of ming the test Possible values Upstream Downstream Test Duration sec This numeric field is used to define the test duration in seconds Possible values 0 511 The Apply button is used to execute the corrupted CRC test Test Results Test Results This field shows the test result Possible values PASS PASS WARNING FAIL IN PROGRESS ABORTED NOT STARTED INVALID TEST Additional Information This field shows additional informa tion related to the CRC test If the CRC has been passed the number of the detected CRC is displayed 3 Use the option menus in the Test Programming field to define the test parameters and click on Apply The In Progress window pops up ADSL CRC Corrupted CRC Test Launched 4 Wait until the test is finished and view the test result in the ADSL Cor rupted CRC Test window Test Results see above 5 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 37 Fault management and maintenance Test management ME SS 8 4 2 3 ADSL port BIST test Procedure Proceed as follows to set up an ADSL port BIST test Step Procedure 1 Open one of th
39. 363 211 497 In the Group Map a background map of a selected NE group is shown By double clicking on a group icon all components of this group will be displayed The same result can be reached by double clicking on the group name in the Network Browser By clicking on the Show Parent Group icon in the tool bar the background map of the parent group with all its components will be displayed By double clicking on an NE icon the NE Browser is displayed with the selected NE as root node NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 5 21 NE management Initial windows There are three kinds of icons Group icon NE icon BAIU icon Move icons lt is possible to move an icon group or NE over the background map by Drag and Drop as well as moving icons between Network Browser and the background map Once an NE is dropped the mouse pointer converts to a clock until the action has finished This clock pointer is shown over the browsers and over the background map window group map The old parent group and the new parent group update their group status to the new group status high severity alarm this group status depends on the domain to which the operator belongs 5 3 6 Status bar Feedback from the NE is displayed on screen as is progress information related to the commands issued by the NAM This feedback is provided by the status bar incorporated at the bottom of screens which execute commands Message area f
40. 5 2 5 Navis AnyMedia new equipment configuration features 5 14 5 2 6 Data applications 5 15 5 2 6 1 Data system description 5 15 5 2 6 2 Network interfaces 0 16 5 2 6 3 DS3 OC 3c timing 5 16 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 I o rr Contents 5 2 6 4 Equipment configuration related tasks data agent 5 16 5 2 7 Configuration of combined tasks 5 17 5 3 Initial windows 5 18 5 3 1 Menu bar 5 19 5 3 2 Tool bar 5 20 5 3 3 Network browser 5 20 5 3 4 NE Browser 5 21 5 3 9 Background Map 5 21 5 3 6 Status bar 5 22 ae T Cursor menu 5 23 5 3 7 1 Cursor menus entries 5 24 5 3 7 1 1 Network Browser 5 24 9 3 1 2 NE Browser 5 25 5 4 Groups and NEs management 5 26 5 4 1 Groups management 5 26 5 4 2 NEs management 5 29 5 4 3 Groups and NEs window 5 30_ 5 4 3 1 Groups window 5 30 5 4 3 2 Create modify groups 5 32 5 4 3 3 Delete a group 5 32 5 4 3 4 NEs window 5 33 5 4 3 5 Create modify NEs 5330 5 4 3 6 Remove an NE 5 35 5 5 Connect a Network Element 5 36 9 9 1 Add a network element 5 36 5 5 2 Connection states NAM telephony agent 5 49 5 5 2 1 Changing connection states 5 40 5 5 2 2 Association maintenance 5 40 5 5 2 3 NE Management window tab Telephony 5 41 5 5 2 4 Modify NE Management data telephony agent 5 43 55 3 Communication states NAM data agent 5 43 5 5 3 1 Changing connection states 5 44 5 5 3 2 Association maintenance 5 45 5 9393 NE Management window tab Data 5 45 5 5 3 4 Modify NE Management data data agen
41. 6 1 General notes on safety This system has been developed in line with the present state of the art and fulfils the current national and international safety requirements It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of development expe rience and continuous stringent quality checks in our company The system is safe in normal operation There are however some potential sources of danger that cannot be completely eliminated In particular these arise during the m opening of housings or equipment covers manipulation of any kind within the equipment even if it has been discon nected from the power supply m disconnection of optical or electrical connections through possible contact with m live parts m laser light NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 XVII About this document General safety information lt lt hot surfaces m sharp edges or m devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge 6 2 General safety requirements In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum it is imper ative to observe the following rules m Installation configuration and disassembly must be carried out only by expert personnel and with reference to the respective documenta tion Due to the complexity of the unit system the personnel requires special training The unit system must be operated by expert and authorized users only The user must operate the uni
42. 8 15 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring ee 8 3 3 4 Alarm table The last section in the Alarm Viewer window is a table that contains zero or more alarms belonging to a domain This table allows the user to sort the alarms cf Chapter 8 3 3 4 2 page 8 18 by clicking on a specific table header The user also can select them for acknowledgment or clearance The mechanism to acknowl edge or clear is the same the user has to select one or more alarms After select ing the alarms click on Acknowledge or Clear in the tool bar or select Actions gt Acknowledge or Actions gt Clear via the menu bar LORRA LLL M E m m T Figure 8 6 Alarm list section 8 3 3 4 1 Alarm parameters For each alarm the following alarm fields depending on the selected view can be displayed m Index Sequence number for each different alarm reported to the NAM the maxi mum sequence number is 100 000 m Probable Cause Identifies the probable cause of the alarm This field contains a unique identification string for each alarm type m Severity Contains the default severity of the alarm Critical CR Major MJ Minor MN Indeterminate N Warning WR Cleared CL m Service Affecting Specifies whether the alarm is subscriber service affecting or not Possible values Yes No NAM R1 9 8 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring E
43. 8 4 1 1 Port test Purpose By means of a port test you are able to run a series of self diagnostic routines for a particular port on a specified AP except AFM ADSL SDSL APs and CUs on MDS2 or MDS2B subshelves NE R1 7 0 gt NOTE The port test can be executed via GUI and via TL1 command 8 4 1 1 1 Port test via GUI Procedure Proceed as follows to start a port test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Open one of the following windows m Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 3 5 a Logical DSO window cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 27 Fault management and maintenance Test management LL 2 Select the user port where you intend the test to run 3 Use the option menu in the Test Management field to select Port Test and click on Apply After confirming the test execution a Warning window pops up showing the following message Port Test may be service affecting Do you want do con tinue After confirming this warning the following n Progress message pops up Port Test Launched 4 Wait until the Port Test Result window appears and view the test result Test result The Port Test Result window shows the test results of a series of self diagnostic routines on a specific port circuit NE Name SHELF20_NB O O oS Physical Drop Id drop 1 4 2 Apparatus Code LPU112 Result Pass Close Figure 8 9 Port Test Result window The text fields are display only t
44. AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuSID has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 41 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Processing system information Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Release 1 9 Subscriber ID Administration as lt LuSID gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 Oject Store path set to LuOSRT ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 3 5 1_SP2 Run Time bin 1lib osversion Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_ 2 3c2 Creating data bases Reading configuration vars Checking SIDServer is not running Checking another SIDDbPopulate rinnung Creating SID Data Base SID database created successfully exit OK 25771 Killed orbixd daemon pid 25771 has been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuSID log Installation of lt LuSID gt was successful kx kBoot process
45. COMDAC The software download procedure is as follows m start download m load software into the standby COMDAC Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is already connected and the NE hardware platform is prepared to receive and work with the new program version NAM R1 9 5 78 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management 5 6 11 2 COMDAC Software Download win dow COMDAC SW Download foo LK TOV Figure 5 29 COMDAC Software Download window This window provides the functionality needed to download files to an NE or to a set of NEs with telephony agent The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Two radio buttons are used to define the target of the down ria load file Single The target is the pre selected NE only its name is in the Selected NEs list see below The Add and Remove buttons are disabled Multiple The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs By means of the Add button the NEs can be moved to the Se lected NEs list NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 79 NE management Network Element management ee Parameters Buttons Description Target The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs with tele phony agents sorted alphabetically The Selected NEs list shows all NEs to which the download is being done The Add gt gt button can be used to move the selected NE
46. Hard Disk Drive HDLC High Level Data Link Control HP Hewlett Packard HW Hardware IAT Integrated Access Terminal IATS Integrated Access Terminal Server ICC InterChangeability Code ICMS Integrated Configuration Management System ID Identifier IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 AB 5 Abbreviations SS IIOP Internet Interoperability Protocol IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM IN Information alarm severity INA Integrated Network Access IP Internet Protocol IS In Service ISP Internet Service Providers ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ITC Independent Transmit Clock ITU International Telecommunication Union a L LAN Local Area Network LBER Low Bit Error Ratio LDS Logical Digital Switch LED Light Emitting Diode LIC License LLN Logical Line Number LOF Loss of Frame LOS Loss of Signal LPBK Loop Back NAM R1 9 AB 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Abbreviations ee LS Loop Start M MDS Metallic Distribution Server MDSU Metallic Distribution Server Unit MEA Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes MHz Megahertz MJ Major alarm severity MLT Mechanized Loop Testing MM Module Manager MN Minor alarm severity MON Degraded Signal MR Modification Request MSC Metallic Shelf Controller N NAM Navis AnyMedia NAR North America Region NB Narr
47. In this case only one MDSU is needed in the AnyMedia shelf A partially equipped half MDS2 MDS2B shelf requires one power test unit PTU and one MSC The MDSUs utilize the same timing signals as the narrowband APs A single 8 MHz clock and 8 kHz sync are supplied by an MDSU to an MCS in the MDS2 MSD2B for timing the MDS2 MSD2B link Side selection of the clock and sync from the COMDACs is performed by the MDSU The MDS2 shelf shown in Figure 5 3 is arranged to accommodate 12 CU packs one PTU and one MSC pack per section The first or left section is a mirror im age of the second or right section Main shelf I Cc cc lt c Fuses and Jacks gs and Jacks Figure 5 3 MDS2 shelf layout The MDS2B shelf shown in Figure 5 4 is arranged to accommodate 12 CU packs one PTU and one MSC pack per section The first or top section is a mirror im age of the second or bottom section NAM R1 9 5 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Metallic shelf con troller Power test units Channel units 363 211 497 Overview of the controlled systems Main shelf c c Fuses and Jacks DDM 2000 Figure 5 4 MDS2B shelf layout The MSC provides the required shelf interface and central control for half of the shelf Each MSC is two slots wide but has only one backplane connector An 8 MHz MDS2 link is provided to interface with the AnyMedia Access System shelf On the distribution side the MSC supports 3 4
48. Meaning All old logs have been deleted Because more available space was necessary the log type of the current day has been deleted too The Object_Id shows which log type has been deleted Abbreviation LOG DEL FULL Severity Major Service affecting No Effects There are no old logs available and not all logs of the current day are available to be viewed or stored Possible cause s There may be a problem or abnormal situation in the NAM or the selection of the configurable size limits of the log system was too small NAM R1 9 8 44 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms a Corecive acions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the NAM for problems or abnormal situations Have any problems or abnormal situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 2 No Continue with step 2 2 Check the size limits of the log system Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Set the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits 8 5 4 3 LOG_DEL_PART Meaning A log type not yet archived has been deleted due to lack of available space Abbreviation LOG DEL PART Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects The respective log type can neither be viewed nor archived Possible cause s There may be a problem or an abnormal situation in t
49. NOTE When changing from Un locked to Locked the following warning message appears The operation may be service affecting Continue anyway NAM R1 9 6 82 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS If you want to then reset the data part of the pack click on Reset The following warning message pops up Resetting the ONU Application Pack may affect Data services Do you want to continue 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 83 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ME SS NAM R1 9 6 84 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Contents 7 1 Lee 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 363 211 497 Introduction Service provisioning telephony 7 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 7 2 1 3 7 2 1 4 7 2 1 5 7 2 1 6 1 2 1 7 7 2 1 8 7 2 2 1 7 2 3 1 7 2 3 2 7 2 3 3 7 2 3 4 7 2 4 1 7 2 4 2 7 2 4 3 7 2 4 4 7 2 4 5 7 2 4 6 1 2 4 1 7 2 4 8 Network interface VRT VB List window Use the VRT VB List VRIT TR303 window Modify the VRT TR303 VRT TRO8 window Modify the VRI TR08 VB INA window Modify the VB INA Physical DS1 List window Modify the physical DS1 list Creation of VRT VB logical feeder T1 cross connection Physical DS1 window Modify the physical DS1 Logical DS1 window Modify logical DS1 Creation of VRT VB logical TO subscriber Logical DSO list window Modi
50. Network Profile Network Profile Name This text field shows the network Information profile name The entry can be changed in create and edit mode Status This option menu is used to define the status of the profile Activated Deactivated Activated means that the pro file can be used in cross connections Description This list box can be used to include a descrip tion of the network profile Network Profile Pattern This option menu is used to select a template for a new profile and to display its data in the field Network Profile Data see below None can also be se lected In this case all parameters in the field Network Pro file Data are set to default value Network Profile Data Line Type This option menu is used to select a sub type of the profile Full Lite Type of Rate Adaptation This option menu is used to se lect one of the following values Explicit default Flexible Options Rate The parameters in this field are enabled or disabled depending on the selected value in the Type of Rate Adaptation field The following two parameters are en abled only if the Type of Rate Adaptation is Flexible Max Bit Rate kbps This option menu allows to the op erator to select the maximum bit rate Possible values 144 272 400 528 784 1168 1552 2320 Kbps Min Bit Rate kbps This option menu allows to the operator to select the minimum bit rate Possible val ues 144 272 400 528 784 1168 15
51. Network Profile to select the desired profile and press Edit The ADSL Transmission Network Pro file window cf Chapter 9 6 5 or the ADSL Transmission NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 3 pops up Back in the ADSL Drop window after modifying the profile press Apply to confirm the changes use the option menu PM Threshold Network Profile to select the desired profile and press Edit The ADSL PM Threshold Network Profile window cf Chapter 9 6 3 or the ADSL PM Threshold NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 1 pops up Back in the ADSL Drop window after modifying the profile press Apply to confirm the changed profile use the option menu Administrative State gt NOTE When changing from Un locked to Locked the following warning message appears Changing the administrative state of the ADSL drop may be service affecting Do you want to continue 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS If you want to then get access to the ATM Cross Connec click on Cross Connections List tion List window The ATM Cross Connection List win dow pops up cf Chapter 7 3 1 start the BIST test use the option menu near the Apply button to select BIST Test and press Apply See also Chapter 8 4 2 3 start the corrupted CRC test use the option menu near the Apply button to select Corrupted CRC Test and press Apply See also Chapter 8 4 2 2 edit the ADSL PM data
52. Not Applicable can not be se lected Once the Line Code has been changed the Apply button has to pressed for confirmation The Apply button is available only if Timing Sync Mode has been changed m Timing Sync Mode is External DS1 and either the Line Code or the Framing Format have been changed m Synchronization Mode is Loop Timed and at least one source has been modified gt NOTE During the apply operation the Get and Switch but tons see below are disabled The whole subpane will be updated as a result of the operation NAM R1 9 5 58 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS Parameters Buttons Description Active Timing If the Get button has not been pressed the following field is Reference empty Active Timing Sync Source Shows the active timing sync source of the NE Possible values Free Running Loop Timed PRI Loop Timed SEC External DS1 Ext1 External DS1 Ext 2 Exter nal Clock Ext1 External Clock Ext 2 The Get button can be used to retrieve the Active Timing Synchronization Source and the operational state of pri mary and secondary sources if applicable from the NE gt NOTE During the get operation the Apply and Switch but tons are disabled The provisioned timing reference subpane will also be updated as a result of this opera tion The Switch button can be used to switch between the work ing and standby sources of synchronization In
53. OOS Unlocked IS gt NOTE The communication with daisy chained NEs can be lost when changing from Unlocked to Locked The field Service State shows the state of the AFM feeder obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Testing Unknown Dor mant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State This button provides access to the AFM PM Data window This button provides access to the AFM Feeder PM Threshold window NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 6 55 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee 6 4 2 1 Modify an DS3 AFM feeder This window is reached from the DS3 AFM window cf Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 50 by pressing the Edit button Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an AFM feeder Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu Feeder Port to select the desired port If you want to then get the performance monitoring data click on PM Data The AFM PM Data window pops up cf Chapter 9 4 1 modify the performance monitoring click on PM Thresholds The DS3 thresholds FM Feeder PM Threshold window pops up cf Chapter 6 4 4 page 6 60 change the administrative state use the option menu Administrative State of Second Feeder gt NOTE The communication with daisy gt NOTE chained NEs could be inter When changing from Unlocked rupted when changing from Un to Locked the following warning locked to Locked
54. Physical distribution port circuits in APs and CUs LLN CRV 1 Feeder 1 PLN 1 IO DS1 LLN CRV 2 H LOG FDR wed 1 ie PLN 2 1 LLN CRV 2048 2 i inal LOG FDR DS1 1 ae an Feeder 4 s TR 08 LOG FDR DS1 4 VRT e 1 LLN 96 T1 Cross TO Cross connection connection e function LLN 1 function uNa LLN 2 LOG FDR DS1 1 ae TR 08 s LOG FDR DS1 4 VRT PLN 512 20 LLN 96 Feeder 1 IO DS1 5 i PLN 513 il INA VB 1 7 1 Feeder 4 eu Physical DS1 feeder K port circuits in I O DSis P CU o o Jr PLN 608 INA VB 20 Provisionable LLNs gt 640 LOG FDR Logical feeder LLN Logical line PLN Physical line Figure 7 1 Cross connection diagram TO cross connec TO cross connections link a distribution port a tip ring pair to a VRT or VB A tions maximum of 769 TO cross connections 768 one for the ROC 1537 NE R1 7 2 LPS104 1921 NE R1 7 2 LPS105 can be created in the AnyMedia Ac cess System they are limited by the maximum number of distribution ports in the system NAM R1 9 7 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BE SS DS0 data Each logical DSO may contain provisioning data for its associated physical sub scriber line In addition the DSO data for locally switched services and ISDN lines on the TR 303 VRT can be administered by the LDS through its EOC When a physical subscriber line is TO cross c
55. Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf In this release the only possible values are ap 1 16 for FAST shelf and ap 1 0 for BAIU shelf Inband Manage VPI This field is used to define the VPI used to communi ment Channel cate with the NE Possible values 1 225 VCI This field is used to define the VCI used to communi cate with the NE Possible values 32 63 If the VPI is equal to a shelf VPI the VCI must be 32 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the text fields above NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 77 Service provisioning Service provisioning data p ee Parameters Buttons Description QoS Parame Shelf PCR cps Two fields are used to specify the up ters stream and downstream Peak Cell Rate cells per second for this shelf Possible values for DS3 150 104000 Possible values for OC 3c 800 353200 Shelf Overbooking factor Four fields are used to specify the overbooking factors for the four service classes CBR rt VBR nrt VBR UBR Possible values 1 10 in steps of 0 5 Cell Transfer Delay CTD msec Two fields are used to specify the cell transfer delay for the service classes CBR and rt VBR Possible values 0 1000000 Cell Delay Variation CDV msec Two fields are used to specify the cell delay variation for the service classes CBR and rt VBR Possible values 0 1000000 Cell Lost Ratio CLR Three fields are use
56. Provides access to the Add Edit Subscriber window for adding a new SID File gt Close Closes the instance of the Subscriber Identi fier window File gt Exit Closes the SID application NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 79 Service provisioning Subscriber Identifier BE SeSe Parameters Buttons Description Filter This field is used to search for a SID in the SID database It contains two option menus and one editable text field The first option menu includes the following values SID Ad ditional Info NE Name The second option menu includes the following values Con tains Starts with Equals The following combinations are possible SID Starts with SID Equals NE Name Starts with NE Name Equals Additional Info Starts with Additional Info Equals Additional Info Contains The Search button requests the search on the SID data base The result will be displayed in the Search Result table see below Search Result The information in this field is displayed in a 4 column table SID Additional Info NE Name and Physical Drop Id For the Physical Drop Id the following format is used drop 1 1 16 1 32 or subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 32 or iatvdp 1 80 1 1 24 or m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 The Edit button provides access to the Add Edit Sub scriber Identifier window edit mode The button is enabled if a row has been selected The Remove button is used to delete the
57. TO4 2RVT 2LO COIN2 DFLT2 DPO DS01 DS02 FXS EMO FXOD FXSO NO OCUO Unknown The Add Logical DS0 button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 In this case the physical DSO id will be transferred This button is enabled only if a physical DSO id is selected with no cross connection to a logical DSO id The Edit Logical DSO button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 where the operator will be able to edit the logical DSO parameters whenever this is possible or even remove the existing cross connection remove logical DSO of the selected phys ical DSO from the list This button is enabled only if a physi cal DSO cross connected to a logical DSO is selected The Remove Logical DSO button removes the cross con nection selected in the list see above NAM R1 9 6 24 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS Parameters Buttons Description Test Manage The Apply button is used together with the option menu be ment side it to execute one of the following tests AP card test Port test For more information refer to Chapter 8 4 Two radio buttons COMDAC View AFM View can be used to select the de sired view in the Main Shelf In ONU subshelf only the AFM View is possible 6 3 5 1 Modify a telephony AP Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the telep
58. The Cross Connections List button provides access to the ATM Cross Connection List window The Apply button can be used to start the Port BIST Test or the Corrupted CRC Test The desired test is selected by means of the option menu For more information refer to Chapter 8 4 2 Reset This button can be used to reset the pack Two radio buttons COMDAC View AFM View can be used to select the de sired view in the Main Shelf In ONU subshelf only the AFM View is possible NAM R1 9 6 62 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS 6 4 4 1 Modify an ADSL application pack Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ADSL pack Step Procedure I Select NE gt Main Shelf Subshelf gt ADSL in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on ADSL in the Shelf View Subshelf window The ADSL AP window pops up If you want to then unprovision the AP use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code to select NONE and press Apply The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 change the administrative state use the option menu Administrative State gt NOTE When changing from Un locked to Locked the following warning message pops up Changing the administrative state of the ADSL pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue edit an ADSL drop select the
59. User Status Humber of sessions opened User Groups Not Assigned User Groups Assigned Monitoring Figure 4 3 User Profile window 4 Enter a new login name in the Login Name field this is mandatory 3 to 12 characters and extra information like last name first name email etc in the User Name Description field this is optional O to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 5 Select one or more user groups the user shall belong to in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 6 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 2 2 page 4 5 NAM R1 9 4 4 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User a 4 2 2 Modify user Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information or profile of a user Before modifying the information or profile of a user please pay attention to the following remarks Ilo modify the information or profile of a user the NAM administrator must have a NIS based login m The NAM administrator is not able to change the system login information of a user i e system login and password Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information or prof
60. Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 33 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Verifying disk space requirements Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Security Release 1 9 Administration as lt LuSec gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 ObjectStore path set to LuOSRT ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 3 5 1 SP2 Run Time bin 1ib osversion Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c0O2MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_ 2 3c2 Creating data bases Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK New Security datbase sucessfully created SECDbPobulate finished 25225 Killed orbixd daemon pid 25225 has been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install _LuSec log Installation of lt LuSec gt was successful Combined Shelf in Processing package instance lt LuShelf gt from stallation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Shelf Release 1 7 1 Administration sparc LuShelf 59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk NAM R1 9 2 34 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software
61. WAN NAM server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a WAN link and connected to one ore more external OSs using a LAN connection L Client N Mo dem J N EN ooo ISDN network adapter NAM server awed pE SS Bridge Router N J TCP IP PPP J P WAN link ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM Modem ISDN network adapter TCP IP PPP Bridge Router Hub TCP IP LAN NE NE eye fee fe fe le fe NE NE Figure 1 12 NAM server with clients and external OS WAN NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 35 Functional description Network configuration ME SS NAM R1 9 1 36 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Contents 2 1 General 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 Installation procedure 2 2 1 Full installation 2 2 1 1 Server side installation 2 2 1 1 1 Installation of the third party software 2 2 1 1 2 Installation of the common packages 2 2 1 1 3 Installation of the telephony agent optional 2 2 1 1 4 Installation of the data agents optional 2 2 1 2 Client side installation 2 2 1 3 Post install actions 2 2 1 3 1 NAM server 2 2 2 Installing individual packages 2 2 3 Cance
62. dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 713 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11326 75484 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4355134 2170088 67 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache Swap 1201416 64 1201352 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cdl1 500736 500736 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Where should OrbixNames be installed opt lucent OrbixNames1 1c q 13 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Multi threaded Orbix installation detected is this correct y y n 14 Press Return A list of available users and groups pops up NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 15 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q 15 Type 4 and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system informati
63. drop 1 1 16 1 32 for APs m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 for CUs GSFN Generic signalling function The following val ues are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O S A B C D TO4 2RVT FXS EMO FXOD FXSO NO OCUO Unknown Add Logical DS0 This button is available only m if no row in the table is selected and m ifa specific VRT VB id has been selected and the max imum number of logical TOs has not been created yet max 96 for TR 08 max 2048 for TR 303 max 24 for INA NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 31 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Description Logical DSO Edit Logical DSO This button provides access to the Log List ical DSO window to edit the logical DSO parameters when continue ever this is possible gt NOTE This button is disable if GSFN Unknown or 4DO Remove Logical DSO This button can be used to remove the cross connection selected in the list This button is disabled if Physical DSO id roc 1 or the GSFN 4DO 7 2 4 2 Modify the logical DSO list Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the logical DSO list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Logical DSO via the menu bar
64. e g Close The following elements are used within windows Push button Each pushbutton is provided with a designation describing its function If you click on the pushbutton the function will be executed If you click ona pushbutton the designation of which is followed by three dots e g Help a window will open where you may set further parameters Push buttons which alter their designation depending on context are also called Label buttons m Check box Check boxes have the same function as an on off switch Each time you click on a check box you will change its toggle status A pressed check box containing a check mark means that the option at this position is se lected NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 13 System management General information on keyboard BE SeSe Radio button Radio buttons have the same function as check boxes with the difference that of various radio buttons of the same group only one can be pressed at a time As with a radio set a set button will pop out when you press the next one in m Text box Text boxes are used to input text via the keyboard m List box A list box contains read only data in list form To scroll through a list you have to use the scroll bar at the right of the list box If the list box allows the selection of entries more than one entry can be selected by clicking on all desired entries once while the Ctr1 key is pressed If more entries are se
65. function is possible Physical DS1 Equalization This slider can be used to define the cable Information length in ft to the DSX 1 Possible values are 0 to 655 Degrade Threshold This slider can be used to define the physical DS1 signal degrade threshold Possible values are 10e 7 10e 6 10e 5 10e 4 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes It is avail able only if the Equalization and or the Degrade Threshold has been modified Loopback This field displays the current loopback state clear or set for loopback details see Chapter 8 4 1 5 page 8 33 The Label button is used to set or clear the physical DS1 loopback Depending on the loopback state re flected this button displays the possible operation Clear if the loopback is set Set if the loopback is cleared Timing Source Displays whether or not the selected physi cal DS1 is the timing source reference Yes or No The ref erence can be changed via the Edit Timing Source button on the right hand side This button provides access to the Timing Source Control window cf Chapter 5 6 4 1 page 5 57 to allow the modification of the current NE timing source reference NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 21 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BE S Parameters Buttons Description Cross Connec Logical DS1 Id This field displays the logical DS1 id which tion Information is cross connected with the selected physical
66. has alarm monitoring and testing permissions m NE user security privilege levels It is possible to administer the NE users and the privilege levels via the cut through interface m User access is authenticated through user name and password m Single login to access the domain Enables an authorized user to access multiple NEs simultaneously e g multiple windows using a single login and password m Domain partitioning Enables the NEs managed by the NAM to be partitioned into separate se curity domains and permits users access to the domains based on their ar eas of responsibility and profile m User inactivity timer The user terminal will be locked with a screen saver once a configurable in activity timer has expired To unlock the terminal the user has to type his her password The timer has to be configured by the administrator Second inactivity timer Once the terminal is locked the user will be logged out once a second in activity timer has expired The timer has to be configured by the administra tor Lock screen The user is able to lock the screen whenever he she wants To unlock the terminal the user has to enter his her password m OS NAM secure access The NAM provides security for other OSs EMs to access the system via northbound interface 1 provided by the OS System SUN Solaris NAM R1 9 1 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture E S
67. loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de fine gain Only valid if LOSS is Fixed If LOSS is not fixed this control will be disabled Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 Impedance This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Equalization This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default O Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO Central Office to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Busy for 2FX NAM R1 9 7 44 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony E SS 7 2 4 11 2RVO Service Details window Overview The 2RVO 2 wire loop reverse battery originate is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs Figure 7 19 Logical DSO window 2RVO Service Details Parameters Impedance Equalization Balance Mode Balance 363 211 497 Description This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default O This option menu ca
68. lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuPerTr has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Performance Translator Release 1 7 1 administration as lt LuPerTr gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 PerformanceTranslator bin ReportTranslator opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 PerformanceTranslator cfg PerformanceTranslator cfg verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Installation of lt LuPerTr gt was successful Test Scheduler in Processing package instance lt LuTeSc gt from stallation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager TestScheduler Release 1 7 1 administration sparc LuTeSc_ 59 2 4 NAM R1 9 2 38 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuTeSc has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information
69. m Instructions for handling the alarm viewer Chapter 8 3 3 page 8 12 m Structure of the alarm viewer window Chapter 8 3 3 3 page 8 15 and Chapter 8 3 3 4 page 8 16 m System management Chapter 8 3 4 page 8 19 m Alarm viewer functions Chapter 8 3 5 page 8 25 8 3 2 Starting and terminating the Alarm Viewer 8 3 2 1 Starting the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be started in different ways m Clicking on the icon Alarm Viewer in the Access Bar cf Chapter 3 2 3 m Clicking on Alarms in the menu bar of the other NAM applications cf Chapter 3 3 6 In this case only alarms of the NE which is selected in the Network Browser are shown m Selecting File gt New in the Alarm Viewer The displayed window has the title Alarm Viewer and maintains similarities with the other NAM s windows The Alarm Viewer window consists of the sections m Menu bar File Views Filters Actions Help Toolbar buttons for Acknowledge and Clear m General Information Alarm table NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 11 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring ee Figure 8 3 Alarm Viewer window 8 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be terminated as follows m By selecting File gt Exit in the Alarm Viewer menu to close all Alarm Viewers launched by the user m By clicking on Close button to close only the Alarm Viewer being in use Before quitting the Alarm Viewer the user
70. m NE provisioning The operator can create a new manageable NE for the NAM view The op erator must enter the specific configuration data for the new NE such as IP address NE Name NE user id and password Software download to a single NE Provides a storage medium for maintaining a copy of the software and a mechanism for downloading that software to an NE both for data and tele phony agents Software download to multiple NEs Download of new software to multiple NEs on an individual connection ba Sis m NE non volatile data storage restoration Restores NE non volatile data storage upon user request Provides a stor age medium for maintaining a copy of the NVDS for backup and restore purposes for both telephony and data agents m Maintain a local copy of NE inventory The NAM maintains a local copy of specific hardware identifiers and soft ware version identifiers This local copy accepts automatic inventory notifi cations This information can be used for display and report functions in case of loss of communication with the supported NE The hardware iden tifiers include all packs m Maintain a local copy of NE provisioning configuration data The NAM maintains a local copy of all cross connection and parameter set tings for each NE This information can be used for display and report func tions in case of loss of communication with the supported NE m Maintain NE software copies The system keeps a copy of
71. message pops up Changing the administrative state of second AFM feeder may be service affecting if there are daisy chained AFMs Do you want to continue 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 6 56 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee 6 4 3 OC3 AFM window This window is used to show modify the OC3 AFM parameters Figure 6 20 OC3 AFM window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the OC3 AFM is inserted Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf In this release the only possible values are ap 1 16 for FAST shelf and ap 1 0 for BAIU shelf NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 57 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth mation erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values AFM_OC3c Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPA920 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward bac
72. non locally switched The E amp M function is used to provide the E amp M signaling interface FXSO foreign exchange station non locally switched It is applicable to the emu lated SPQ443 phantom channel unit that is used to handle DSO signals routed to a PBX or key system attached to the secondary T1 DSX 1 line at the IAT Figure 7 17 Logical DSO window EMO FXS0 Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the central office CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle NAM R1 9 7 42 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 7 2 4 10 2LS 2GS 2FXLS 2FX Service Details windows Overview The 2LS 2 wire loop start service with enhanced transmission and signaling pro visioning options is applicable to the POTS32 LPA300 PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs channel units The 2GS 2 wire ground start service with enhanced transmission and signaling provisioning options is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs channel units The 2FXLS 2 wire FX loop start is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs The 2FX 2 wire FX ground start is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs 2L5 Service Details Information Figure 7 18 Logical DSO window 2LS
73. page 5 94 to select the di rectory example of the file structure NE Files NVPS AFM R1 that should be downloaded gt NOTE To download all files for all possible data APs would exceed the memory in the AFM To avoid this a directory can be selected including only these files for the APs that are currently present in the NE gt NOTE Make sure that the selected directory contains the necessary download files Selecting an empty directory will result in a download successful message even though no files have been downloaded 6 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field Direc tory name in the AFM Software Download window 7 Click on Apply to initiate the download process A Warning window pops up the Software Download window remains on the screen after the download is finished SW Download is service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while its execution Continue anyway If you decide to continue the NAM starts the download process An AFM SW Download In Progress window pops up NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 85 NE management Network Element management ee AFM SH Download In Progress NEName __ ditional Info Rese Figure 5 32 AFM SW Download In Progress window This window provides the following information NE Name percent of the software download FTP operation executed feedback additional Infor mation such as write software FTP copy mem
74. refer to your SUN documentation for more information NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 2 3 Software installation and commissioning General ee Navis AnyMedia 24 Channel NAM Release 1 9 Disk 1 of 4 contains the common part of the NAM product Source Path tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 readme txt LUuACROBAT LuGUI30 LUuANYHL LuJRERT LuNETSCP LuUOXWRT LuNER LuSysAdm LuAM LuNBI LuBack LuLogg LuSec LuNeED LuSysED LuFiBrow LuShelf LuTrap LuPerCo LuPerTr LuTeSc LuLUMRT LuOSRT LuOX23RT LUOXNSRT LuRWRT LuPerf LuMIB LuNPB LuSID Sun 2 6 README 15jun00 2 6 Recommended tar Z 1 2 2 05 patches_sparc_5 6 tar license txt install Acrobat INSTALLATION pdf SRD pdf install AMEM_gen remove_ANY Figure 2 1 Navis AnyMedia R1 9 distribution tree CD ROM 1 NAM R1 9 2 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning General Navis AnyMedia 24 Channel NAM R1 9 Disk 2 of 4 contains the telephony specific part of the Navis AnyMedia product Source Path tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 I LuAMNB17 readme txt license txt install AMEM_ nb Figure 2 2 Navis AnyMedia R1 9 distribution tree CD ROM 2 Navis AnyMedia 24 Channel NAM R1 9 Disk 3 of 4 contains the data specific part of the Navis AnyMedia product Source Path tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 readme txt LUAMBB112 license txt LUAMBB14 LUAMBB17 install AMEM_ bb Figure 2 3 Navis
75. tab NEs pops up cf Figure 5 13 page 5 30 2 Fill in all NE information for a new NE as described in Chapter 5 4 3 2 page 5 32 3 Press Apply to confirm The Domain Selection window pops up NAM R1 9 5 36 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Connect a Network Element Domain Selection ise aa Perrys Figure 5 15 Domain Selection window Assign domain At creation time the NE must be included in one or several domains for domain creation see Chapter 4 The Domain Selection window consists of two lists Available Domains and Selected Domains The window provides the facilities needed to se lect the domains from which the NE will be accessible 4 Use the Add gt gt button to move the selected domain from the Available Domains list to the Selected Domains one Use lt lt Remove to remove domains from the Selected Domains list The Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove bution are available only after having selected a domain name from the corresponding list 5 Press OK to confirm The NE is assigned to the selected domains and the Domain Selection window is closed gt NOTE If you decide to close this window via Cancel or window controls a Warn ing window pops up informing you of the possible rejection of the NE cre ation At least 1 domain must be selected and confirmed Otherwise the NE creation operation will be rejected Do you want to go back to Domain Selection If yo
76. telephony application Support for the TL1 client application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces TL1 is used for most of the OAM amp P functions see Chapter 1 3 1 2 page 1 14 m Southbound TCP IP FTP client applications telephony application Support for the FTP client application on the southbound TCP IP inter faces FTP is required for software download and NE data backup resiore NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 19 Functional description System and software architecture ee m Southbound TCP IP Telnet client applications cut through telephony ap plication Support for the Telnet application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces Telnet is used to provide a direct command line into the NE i e an equiva lent ASCII terminal interface m Southbound SNMP client applications data application Support for the SNMP application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces SNMP is used for most of the OAM amp P functions on data agents 1 3 2 Hardware platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture Components A number of NAM Clients UNIX Workstations can be added to the NAM Server to support concurrent users or remote access to the server s applications These clients can be connected through a TCP IP infrastructure or a Wide Area Network WAN Examples are shown in Figure 1 9 to Figure 1 12 Tasks of the The tasks of the components are components P NAM server Manages all the NAM applications and provides access to the N
77. the AnyMedia Access System The following end user interfaces are available m 10BaseT Ethernet for LAN interface applications single or multiple users m universal serial bus 5 USB m PC network interface card NIC The ADSL transmission is based on ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 R1 0 and R1 3 In later releases the system additionally supports ADSL transmission based on ADSL lite ATM traffic The AFM pack AFMDS3 AFMO interfaces up to 15 xDSL APs which may be in stalled in the AnyMedia Mainshelf in BAIU shelf up to 19 APs ATM traffic multi plexed to and from the xDSL APs are interfaced to the ATM network via a feeder The feeder can connect the ATM switch directly to the transmission network NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 15 NE management Overview of the controlled systems ee 5 2 6 2 Network interfaces The AnyMedia Access System interfaces the ATM network via a single DS3 44 736 Mbps or via a single OC 3c 155 52 Mbps transmission The AnyMedia Access System provides two DS3 or two OC 3cs interfaces to enable shelf daisy chaining Depending on the site location and the number of shelves configured the shelf DS3s OC 3cs may interface an adjacent shelf or may connect to the ATM network The shelf DS3 OC 3c will provide a subset of the ATM User Network Interface UNI 3 1 4 0 toward the network The DS3 OC 3c format is compatible with SONET multiplexers such as the DDM 2000 and primary ATM switches expected to be in t
78. the current list exit the window click on Close 6 3 12 IAT Server Port information window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases This window is used to change the parameters of the IAT server physical port con figuration IAT Server Port Figure 6 17 IAT Server Port information window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 47 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee The following table shows the view edit options of the IAT Server Port Information window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Port Informa Physical Server Port Id Identifies the port within the AP tion Equalization This slider can be used to define the cable length in feed to the DSX 1 Possible values 0 655 Degrade Threshold This slider can be used to define the signal degrade threshold of the physical port Possible values 10 10 Frame Format This field shows which of the frame formats is being used Possible values ESF Extended Super Frame SF SuperFrame Line Code his field shows which of the line codes is being used Possible values ZCS Zero Code Suppression B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero Suppression Loopback This field displays the current loopback state clear or set This state can be changed via the label button on the right hand side Label This button is used to set or clear the physical DS1 loopback It is
79. the number of clients that require service from this process If the load level be comes higher it can be useful to add more processes to the module so that the load can be distributed among the processes NAM R1 9 3 28 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration Recover process When a process has an operational state of OOS it can be recovered Kill process lt is also possible to kill the physical process The NAM process is not automati cally removed Remove process The NAM process the object visible in the Edit MG window can be removed from the module to shutdown the process from the NAM s viewpoint In this case the physical process is automatically killed Module informa Next to MG Name the name of the selected MG is displayed The table under tion Modules in MG displays the following information for all modules in the MG Table 3 18 Module information Table entry Meaning ID The internally assigned ID of the module Name The internally assigned name of the module Type The type of the module Operational State The operational state of the module displayed when the module is running only Possible values IS if the module is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise The module is running only if the MG it belongs to has an Administrative State of ON Next to Module Name the name of the selected module is displayed The number of processes are expected for this modu
80. 096 Mbps PCM links for connecting 12 channel units The MSC performs the following functions m Translates between 1 5 AnyMedia Access System PCM highways and 3 SLC carrier format PCM buses m Performs rate conversion from incoming 8 MHz link and distributes timing and synchronization to CUs m Translates between one AnyMedia Access System UART link and the SLC carrier bank controller link BCL and PTU control interfaces Control and monitoring for CUs and PTUs Composite clock input and digital data system DDS timing distribution to CUs m Supports signaling bit translation and signaling state transition detection for direct inward dialing DID services m The MSC is a simplex pack The PTU has power converters to distribute 5V and 5V power to the CUs and 5V power to the MSC Each PTU powers 12 CUs and one MSC Positive and neg ative ringing inputs are looped through each PTU so that each PTU distributes ringing to the 12 CUs to which it provides power The PTU can detect the loss of its ringing inputs The PTU has relays and protectors for test access It also has terminations and detectors for channel testing Each PTU also supports one test access path TAP The PTU2 TAP TAP A is required for special services testing and local test access the PTU1 TAP TAP B is required for POTS testing SLC carrier SPQ and AUA type channel units CUs will be used All intelligence about the CUs their register formats and locations
81. 1 1 24 Channel Unit drop 1 1 16 1 32 Drop ds1 1 1 5 1 4 DS1 narrowband port feeder side ext 1 1 2 External DS1 Synchronization lat 1 32 Integrated Access Terminal latfdr 1 32 1 1 Integrated Access Terminal iatsp 1 1 16 1 2 Integrated Access Terminal Server Port iods1 1 1 5 DS1 Circuit Pack iods1p 1 DS1 protection pack m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf Drop mds2 1 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf msc 1 1 2 Metallic Shelf Controller ptu 1 1 2 Power Test Unit pwrf 1 1 2 48V Fast Distribution Bank pwrm 1 1 2 48V MDS2 Distribution Bank sh 1 Shelf telnet 1 2 Telnet virtual port tr8dl 1 20 1 TR 008 Mode 1 Data Link v08 1 20 TR 008 VRT v303 1 GR 303 VRT NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 11 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee Abbreviation Meaning v3eoc 1 1 2 GR 303 Embedded Operations Channel v3tmc 1 1 2 GR 303 Timeslot Management Channel string NE TID Target identifier a only available via NAM AIDTYPE Access identifier type This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type List Required Yes Abbreviation Meaning TI T1 EQPT Equipment NTFCNCDE Notification code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes This is notification code associated with a single alarm condition Abbreviation Meaning CR Critical alarm MJ Major alarm MN Minor alarm CONDTYPE Condition type This parameter appears in the Commo
82. 2 Navis AnyMedia startup Package startup DMG startup Process startup Process recovery MG recovery Navis AnyMedia re covery Package DMG and process shutdown Navis AnyMedia shutdown 363 211 497 System administration Start up shutdown and recovery The NAM administrators can control the start up and shutdown at four levels NAM level package level DMG level only for optional DMGs and process level The NAM can be started up in two ways m At boottime Root can configure the system to make the NAM start up at boot time indi cating the packages to be started up NB BB Administration or any combi nation of them m Via command line The administrator can start NAM via command line indicating the pack ages to be started up NB BB Administration or any combination of them Once the NAM is up the administrator can start up from a GUI any non running package For example if only Administration package is started up on NAM start up NB and BB packages can be started up later Those DMGs which are not mandatory for the NAM to be up can be as well started up and shutdown by the NAM administrators The set of processes running under the NAM is also visible to the administrator and he has the opportunity to start up new processes up to a maximum number An NAM process is able to detect that its associated physical process is not work ing properly and in that case a recovery is automatically in
83. 2 wire loop start and 2RVO 2 wire loop reverse battery originat ing side Global Program This defines the information presentation to the user according to the user s preferred language and customs A global program is one that has been internationalized and can be localized GSI This is an intelligent terminal which may be a laptop PC that supports Graphical User Interface GUI software and the TL1 protocol interface to the AnyMedia Access System GSI NB The Graphical System Interface for narrowband services This is a Windows 95 based PC which uses TL1 com mands for the management of AnyMedia Network Elements GUI The Graphical User Interface of the AnyMedia Element Manager System H Host A machine where one or more modules are installed Hub or Multiport Repeaters These have 8 12 16 or more ports With their help multiple devices with 10BASE T interface can be connected to a single LAN They have at least one additional port for connecting an additional segment of a LAN Incremental Backup This copies new files and files that have changed since a previous backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines which files are backed up A certain level incremental backup will save all the new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level Inhibit Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to inhibit a side switch irrespec tive of the
84. 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 31 NE management Groups and NEs management ME SS 5 4 3 2 Create modify groups Complete the following procedure to create modify a group Step Procedure 1 Select the group in the Network Browser or in the background map and New or Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt New or View gt Object via the menu bar or click on the open icon in the tool bar The Groups amp NEs window tab Groups pops up cf Figure 5 13 page 5 30 If you want to then edit the parameters of an existing use the option menus Group Name group Selection and Group Identification to select the desired group edit the parameters in the field Group Representation and press Apply create a new group use the option menu Group Name Se lection to select the NEW option enter an appropriate name in the text field Group Name use the option menu Parent Group to select the desired parent group define the parameters in the field Group Representation and press Ap ply 2 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 3 3 Delete a group Procedure Complete the following procedure to create modify a group Step Procedure 1 Select the group in the Network Browser or on the background map and click on Remove in the cursor menu or select File gt Remove via the menu bar or click on the remove icon in the tool bar A Warning window pops up dis playing the following message You are about to delete Group Name Do you
85. 4 2 DS3 AFM Feeder window This window is used to configure the DS3 AFM feeder parameters It can be reached from the DS3 AFM window cf Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 50 D53 AFM Feeder gs 1 16 2 z Figure 6 19 DS3 AFM Feeder window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AFM Feeder This option menu displays the available feeder ports which Port can be selected NAM R1 9 6 54 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs Parameters Buttons Feeder Parame ters Operational State PM Data PM Thresh olds 363 211 497 Description Timing Source This text field shows the used timing source Free Running or Looped Timed Line Length This field shows the line length Possible value Low Level 0 224 feet High Level 225 450 feet Frame Format his field shows which of the frame formats is being used HEC or PLCP Cell Scrambling This check box shows if the scrambling of cells is enabled or disabled HSC Single Bit Error Second This check box indicates whether or not all cells with uncorrected header errors will be discarded Feeder PM Enable This check box can be used to en able disable the creation of performance monitoring data The option menu Administrative State provides the possi ble states that can be used Locked
86. 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install_AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths usr bin usr sbin and usr ucb for instance export PATH PATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkk Would you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode 1 ADM lt Administration package installation gt 2 GUI lt Client package installation gt Enter selection 7 7 q gt NOTE Type to get help type to repeat the prompt and type q to exit from the installation 4 Type 1 and press Return Packages to install LULUMRT LuRWRT LuOX23RT LUuOXNSRT LuOSRT LUMOS build 3 0 Processing package instance lt LuLUMRT gt from installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 9 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee
87. 7 3 2 ATM Cross Connections window 7 67 7 3 3 Add an ATM cross connection 7 70 7 3 4 Modify an ATM cross connection 7 71 7 3 9 Remove an ATM cross connection 7 71 7 3 6 AFM Feeder VPs List window 7 72 Toefl AFM Feeder VP window 7 74 7 3 8 AFM Global Parameters window 7 77 NAM R1 9 VIII Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Contents 7 4 Subscriber Identifier 7 79 7 4 1 Subscriber Identifier window 7 79 7 4 2 Manage the SID database 7 82 7 4 3 Hints for the administrator 7 84 T 8 Fault management and maintenance 8 1 8 1 Overview 8 1 8 2 Alarm management 8 1 8 2 1 Overview 8 1 8 2 2 Maintain up to date alarm information 8 2 8 2 3 Alarm notification to the user 8 3 8 2 4 Provide access to the current alarm data 8 7 8 2 5 Managing the raising of alarms 8 7 8 2 6 Manage alarm acknowledgment 8 8 8 2 7 Managing the clearing of alarms 8 9 8 2 8 Alarm data synchronization 8 9 8 2 9 NAM alarm log handling 8 9 8 2 10 Periodical deletion of cleared alarms 8 10 8 3 Alarm monitoring 8 11 8 3 1 General 8 11 8 3 2 Starting and terminating the Alarm Viewer 8 11 8 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer functions 8 12 8 3 4 System management functions Bo 8 3 5 Alarm Viewer functions 8 25 8 4 Test management 8 26 8 4 1 Telephony tests 8 2 _ 8 4 2 Data tests 8 34 8 5 Alarms 8 42 8 5 1 Overview 8 42 8 5 2 Alarm types 8 42 8 5 3 Network element alarms 8 44 8 5 4 General element manager platform alarms 8 44 8 5 5 Element manager alarms concerning network eleme
88. 8 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring 8 3 3 2 Toolbar The toolbar contains often used functions and consists of two buttons Table 8 7 Toolbar Function Meaning Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms Their status im vy mediately changes to acknowledged The oa User_Ack is set to the login of the user who has acknowledged the alarm Clear Clear all selected alarms Their status immedi ra ately changes to cleared Clear 8 3 3 3 General Information The first section is a frame titled General Information this frame includes controls showing information about the number of alarms of each alarm severity in the do main where the user is working x 8 Critical Displays the number of critical CR alarms Major Displays the number of major MJ alarms Minor Displays the number of minor MN alarms m Information Displays the number of information IN alarms a Total Displays the total number of alarms all severities Additionally the frame contains two option menus which show the filter cf Chapter 8 3 4 3 page 8 20 and view cf Chapter 8 3 4 2 page 8 19 currently being used In this two option menus the user can select filters and views General Information Critical 2 Major 1 Minor 4 Indeterminated 0 Warning 0 Total 41 View Filter Alarms from a Host s E Figure 8 5 General Information frame NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001
89. 8 48 8 50 8 55 toolbar 5 20 Trademarks XVI Typographical conventions XVII NAM R1 9 IN 4 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Index U UNABLE TO SYNC ALARM 8 56 UNABLE TO SYNC CONFIG 8 57 Unassign controlled objects from domains 4 12 user groups access from applications 4 23 user groups access from domains 4 22 user groups access from tasks 4 24 users from user groups 4 6 User Create 4 3 Delete 4 7 Modify 4 5 User administration 4 1 User group Create 4 14 Delete 4 24 Modify 4 19 W Window controls 3 6 3 7 maximize button 3 8 menu bar 3 8 minimize button 3 7 scrollbar 3 8 title bar 3 7 window frame 3 7 window menu 3 8 Window controls AEM NB windows 3 12 Window menu 3 9 Close 3 9 Lower 3 9 Maximize 3 9 Minimize 3 9 Move 3 9 Restore 3 9 Size 3 9 Windows basics 3 6_ Workspace manager 3 11 Workspace menu 3 11 Logout 3 12 Minimize Restore Front Panel 3 12 Programs 3 12 Refresh 3 12 Restart Workspace Manager 3 12 Shuffle Up Down 3 12 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 IN 5 Index NAM R1 9 IN 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497
90. Administration Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuSysAdm_59_0 2 Do you want to remove this package 4 Enter y and press Return Removing installed package instance lt LuSysAdm gt This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of removing this package Do you want to continue with the removal of this package y n q 9 Enter y and press Return Verifying package dependencies NAM R1 9 2 70 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Processing package information Executing preremove script Removing pathnames in class lt common gt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 restored opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 netfiles opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 intallation opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 lt shared pathname not removed gt opt amasem_pmbb_logs Executing postremove script Updating system information Removal of lt LuSysAdm gt was successful The following package is currently installed LUAM AnyMedia Element Manager Alarms Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuAM_59 0 2 Do you want to remove this package The described steps 4 and 5 are the same for all the installed ADM packages 2 2 5 PC GUI client installation This type of installation uses the install_AMEM bat script This script and all necessary files are included on Disk 4 of 4 m readme txt m licence txt insta
91. Affected Objects List NE Name Number of Affected objects System 2 0 S Figure 9 7 Affected Objects window The following table shows the options of this window Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile This text field displays the name of the network profile Name Network Profile This field shows the selected network profile type Possible Type values ADSL PM Thresholds SDSL PM Thresholds ADSL Transmission SDSL Transmission ATM Traffic Affected Ob This table lists the NE Name and the Number of Affected jects List Objects of the selected profile For ATM traffic network profiles the associated objects are cross connections For the rest of the network profiles the af fected objects refer to ADSL or SDSL drops 9 6 3 ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window This window is used to create view modify ADSL PM thresholds network profiles NAM R1 9 9 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles ADSL PM Thresholds Network Frotile New Network Profle 7 press Iv Figure 9 8 ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile This option menu contains all the ADSL PM threshold net work profiles for editing existing in the NAM and the entry New Network Profile for creating a new profile Default profiles are available These profiles cannot be modi
92. AnyMedia R1 9 distribution tree CD ROM 3 Navis AnyMedia 24 Channel NAM R1 9 Disk 4 of 4 contains the PC GUI application of the Navis AnyMedia product Source Path tmp lucent readme txt license txt install AMEM bat anymediaemr1 7 zip jre 1_2 2 005 win i cc32d473 Figure 2 4 Navis AnyMedia R1 9 distribution tree CD ROM 4 Installation scripts The install AMEM_ gen install AMEM_nb or install AMEM_bb scripts run in the korn shell lt ksh gt environment The install AMEM bat on CD ROM 4 runs on Mi crosoft windows NT TCP ports The following TCP ports must be available in order to successfully run the NAM R1 9 m 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 5 Software installation and commissioning General ee m 1575 Used by Lumos m 1591 to 1641 As CORBA servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned to a port that clients can communicate with Time zone The time zone must be the same for the AnyMedia client lt GUI gt LUMOS Net work Element and OS Update process en Since the number of NAM processes is so high further process environment cus vironment tomizing is needed on the server related to IPC semaphores Carry out the following command to verify the value of the SEMMNU parameter sysdef grep SEMMNU The output of this command is like this 30 undo structures in
93. Ap applications plications amp Tasks The window changes its display as shown below NAM R1 9 4 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User groups group 3 kest group Applications System Administration User Administration amp Profiling Log viewer Alarm Viewer Groups and NEs Management Alarms View Alarms Clear Alarms Acknowledgement Figure 4 19 User Group Profile window tab Applications amp Tasks Select one or more applications in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 Removing To disable the access to applications select one or more applications in the Appli applications cations Assigned field and click lt lt Remove For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and this access permissions cannot be modified gt NOTE If the user select an application in the Applications Assigned field all tasks that are under it will be expanded in the Tasks Assigned and Tasks Not As signed fields Adding tasks To give the selected user group access to further tasks select one or more tasks in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 2
94. Change to tab Applications amp Tasks The window changes its display as shown below NAM R1 9 4 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User groups group 3 test groug System Administration User Administration amp Profiling Log Viewer Alarm Viewer Rrounc and Klee hananaman t Figure 4 15 User Group Profile window tab Applications amp Tasks 10 Select one or more applications the user group shall has access to in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt The corresponding tasks are displayed for selection 11 Select one or more tasks the user group shall has access to in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt 12 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 4 2 page 4 19 4 4 2 Modify user groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the properties of a user group Be fore modifying the properties of a user group please pay attention to the following remarks m The NAM administrator must have a system login m The administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and tasks and these access permissions cannot be modified NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 19 User
95. Default value true BAM association heartBeat Maximum number of missing heartbeats to the Number NE Possible values 1 to 5 times Default value 3 BAM association heartBeat Time between two heartbeats to the NE Time Possible values 0 to 15 minutes Default value 5 BAM association snmpTimeout Time out for all SNMP commands Possible values 1 to 5 Default value 4 BAM association snmpRetries Maximum number of times for a SNMP re transmission Possible values 1 to 10 Default value 3 BAM association nextAttempt Time to wait after anew SNMP communica tion attempt Possible values 0 to 50 minutes Default value 5 BAM alarmSync period Time between periodic alarm synchronization Possible values 3600 to 86400 seconds Default value 21600 BAM cfgSync period Time between periodic config synchronization NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 B 5 Configuration parameters Overview BE S Name Description BAM timeSync delay Maximal time delay when a time synchroniza tion is not needed Possible values 0 to 30 seconds Default values 30 BAM cfgSync maxRetries Maximum number of retries of full synchroni zations Possible values 0 to 5 times Default value 3 BAM trapHandler queueSize Maximum size of the trap s queue Possible values 1 to 1000 elements Default value 1000 OAM settings OAM backup archiveDirectory Destination of the log files archived by the AnyMedia archiv
96. Effects It is not possible to manage the telephony agent The TL1 communication session and the TCP IP connection are lost Possible cause s A loss of the TCP IP connection has been detected or the TCP IP connection has been closed as a consequence of a loss of the TL1 communication session Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the telephony agent state after a waiting period of 1 minute Comment When the NE state is CONNECTED and the TCP IP con nection is lost or closed the NE state is moved to TRY ING and the loop process to re establish the connection with the NE is started by the NAM Is the state CONNECTED Yes O K No Continue with step 2 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 53 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee 2 Check for Data Communication Network DCN being in service Is the DCN in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 8 5 5 13 SW_VR_ILLEGAL Meaning The software version currently stored in the agent is not supported by the NAM Abbreviation ILLEGAL_SW_VERSION Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects lt is not possible to manage the agent Agent software version is not supported Possible cause s The software version currently stored in the agent is not supported by the NAM or the NAM is trying to establish the communication with a agent while its COM DAC AFM initialization process
97. Events Disapled D Db Giranged Disabled E I Events Disabled Figure 5 20 Synchronization Telephony window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Configuration The Processing State represents the synchronization state between the NAM and NE This information is automatically updated Possible values SYNC and ASYNC The Label button Resync or Sync is used to change the synchronization state Alarms The Processing State represents the alarm processing state between the NAM and NE This information is automat ically updated Possible values PROC and BLOCK The Resync button is used to re synchronize the alarm pro cessing state NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 51 NE management Network Element management ee Parameters Buttons Description Autonomous Check boxes show the state of the autonomous outputs Output States check box is marked disabled check box is not marked en abled TCA Events Disabled Switch Reports Disabled DB Changes Disabled Other Events Disabled Alarms Disabled Environmental Alarms Disabled This information is obtained from the NE by means of the Get button After pressing this button the states can be changed by clicking in the boxes Apply This button confirms the changes of the autonomous output states The button is enabled only after the Get button has been
98. If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 6 26 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS 6 3 6 MSC window The metallic shelf controller MSC pack provides the required shelf interface and central control for half of the MDS2 shelf or MDS2B shelf D SntReqiired Figure 6 11 MSC window This window contains all information related to MSC It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the MSC window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows which one of the two slots available for the MSC is being used Possible values msc 1 1 2 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 27 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information manon Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values MSC Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code t
99. Installation of lt LuANYHL gt was successful GUI installation Processing package instance lt LuGUI24 gt from lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Release 1 9 Client sparc LuGUI24 59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk OK No previous package LuGUI24 has been found Where should AnyMediaEM GUI be installed opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 GUI24 q NAM R1 9 2 62 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS 16 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Package lt LuOXWRT gt OrbixWeb Version 3 1 Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixWeb3 1 Package lt LUJRERT gt jre 1 2 2 05 has been found in opt lucent JDK_1 2 2_05 Package lt LuUNETSCP gt Netscape Version 4 6 has been found in opt lucent Netscape Package lt LuANYHL gt Help LuANYHL 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 Help A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment Select owner and group for package files N
100. Issue 1 02 2001 8 39 Fault management and maintenance Test management ME SS 8 4 2 4 SDSL port BIST test Procedure Proceed as follows to set up an SDSL port BIST test Step Procedure ile Open one of the following windows m SDSL Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 4 6 mw SDSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 7 2 Use the option menu near the Apply button to select SDSL BIST Test and click on Apply If the drop is in the unlocked administrative state a Warning window pops up otherwise the n Progress window pops up see below Performing a BIST Test on SDSL drop may be service af fecting Do you want to continue 3 Enter y and press Return The In Progress window pops up BIST Test Launched 4 Wait until the SDSL BIST Test Result window appears and view the test result ADSL Port BIST Test Result Figure 8 15 SDSL Port BIST Test Result window NAM R1 9 8 40 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management E SS The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This field shows the port of the drop affected by the test Id Possible values drop 1 1 15 1 x subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x drop 1 1 19 1 x for BAIU x is the number of drops supplied by the server Test Results Test Results This field shows the test result Possible values PASS
101. It also provides the mecha nisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection switches Use the following table to define the IO DS1 Protection Switch Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 5 74 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management Parameters Buttons Description Protection Displays the protection scheme used in the NE for lO DS1 Scheme Possible values Enabled 1O DS1 p present or Disabled no IO DS1 p Only in the case of protection scheme Enabled is the Pro tection Switch field available Protection In The 10 DS1 option menu shows all O DS1s present or ab formation sent in the NE Selecting one of these IO DS1 enables the Active Switch Request and Protection State read only fields see below The possible values for Active Switch Request are m Clear No active switch in effect Any protection switch is allowed for the specified IO DS1 Lockout If this is selected for the protection IO DS1 access to the protection pack for the group is not al lowed When applied to a service IO DS1 access to the protection pack is prevented No protection switches will be done on the specified service slot until the switch is reset Only Clear protection switch will be allowed Forced Switch to Protection Applicable to O DS1 only No automatic or manual switches will be done un til the force
102. MDS2B side association is detected IAT Server FLT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack from NE wae ow Lit when a failure of either IAT RT carrier link R1 7 0 on aa the IAT to the IATS is detected ial i Lit when a configuration error or mismatch is detected as follows m the IATS is placed in an AP slot not pro visioned for the IAT server pack type the IATS faceplate DS1 cable is discon nected there is a mismatch between the host T0 provisioning and the IAT phantom CU equipage IAT01 only yellow Lit when a failure of either link from the IATS to the IAT IAT RT link working is detected NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 5 Equipment configuration Shelf View AFMDS3 FLT red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack ACT green Indicates that this AFM is active CR MJ red Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical or major yellow Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor lt N CLF 1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS3 port 1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS3 port 2 AFMO FLT red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack ACT green Indicates that this AFM is active ALM red Lit red when a critical or major ATM xDSL yellow alarm condition is detected CLF2 Lit yellow when a minor ATM xDSL alarm con dition is detected yellow Lit green when the OC 3c port 1 facility
103. NAM R1 9 User Service Manual for a detailed description of the NAM backup procedure Backup the NE If the NE Management databases are not backed up the system will lose the ad Management data ministrative state of the NEs managed These databases are not saved by the bases NAM R1 9 backup utility therefore the ObjectStore command osbackup must be used to copy the NE Management databases to a temporary directory To back up the NEM BAM and Configuration Management databases manually proceed as follows 1 Go to SANYMEDIAPATH 2 Type osbackup a f lt file gt AMU NB_R17 db nem db AMU_BB_R112 db bam db AMU BB_R14 db bam db AMU_BB_R17 db bam db AMU_NB_R17 db CM _ db AMU_BB_R112 db CM_ db AMU_BB_R14 db CM_ db AMU_BB_R17 db CM_ db and press Return NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 75 Software installation and commissioning Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 ee The osbackup command will fail if any of the paths passed as parame ters are not valid so you must not include those of the AMUs that are not in use since their databases will not have been created yet Remember also that ile must contain the full path since the osbackup takes the current directory as default and the backup file should be placed outside the NAM directory structure for safety reasons Finally file must not exist already or the osbackup operation will abort 2 3 1 4 Backup NAM log files It is highly recommended to back
104. NAM control The COMDAC LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the system The indi vidual pack unit LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the pack unit Fault localization is performed at AP level m NE alarm log handling The NAM is able to retrieve the NE alarm log via the cut through interface Customized alarm filters and views It is possible to filter the alarm records for one or for a list of NEs The items to be displayed can be sorted in ascending or descending order m NE alarm cut off functionality via GUI m Alarm audits data application The system performs periodic automatic and on demand audits on the NE to ensure integrity of the alarm data Performance The Performance Management provides the following functionality features management m Handling of performance records Records can be displayed printed and stored in a user defined file NAM R1 9 1 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture E SS m OSs retrieval of data performance data The NAM provides a mechanism for other OSs to retrieve data perfor mance data m Displaying printing and storage of the TCA records m Retrieve performance counter thresholds only applicable to BB agents The user can request the NE to report the assignment of the performance counter thresholds m 8 Set Modify performance counter thresholds only applicable to BB agents The user can set modify the performance cou
105. NE Browser and Profiles gt ADSL Transmission via the cursor menu The ADSL Transmission Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 5 page 9 26 2 Use the option menu Network Profile to select New Network Profile 3 Use the text field Network Profile Name in the field Network Profile In formation to enter a profile name 4 Add a description of the new profile in the corresponding list box and click on Apply to confirm 9 Click on Close to exit the window 9 6 5 2 Modify the ADSL transmission net work profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ADSL transmission network pro file Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Profiles gt ADSL Transmission via the cursor menu The ADSL Transmission Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 5 page 9 26 This window can also be reached from the ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 by pressing the Edit button for the transmission network profile NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 29 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee 2 When coming from the NE Browser use the option menu Network Profile to select the desired profile This step is not necessary when coming from the ADSL Drop window via Edit If you want to then modify the profile information use the text fields Network Profile Name and Description to change the not possible for the default profiles information data and click on Apply modify th
106. NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 65 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Physical Drop These fields display the ADSL drop id by means of three op Id tion menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an ADSL pack is provi sioned Format 1 16 for FAST shelf 0 19 for BAIU shelf or 1 8 for subshelf None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated on the previous list 1 x Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x for FAST drop 1 0 19 1 x for BAIU or subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x None is also allowed depending on the ADSL type x can be 4 or 8 Network Pro Transmission Network Profile This option menu lists all files transmission network profiles assigned to this port Un known XX indicates an NE profile Selection of a profile is possible only if the administrative state is locked The first eight profiles are default profiles Edit This button provides access to the ADSL Transmis sion Network Profile window cf Chapter 9 6 5 or ADSL Transmission NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 3 PM Threshold Network Profile This option menu lists all PM threshold network profiles Unknown XX indicates a no
107. Service Details Parameters Description Enable Full When a check mark is set in the check box the transmission Time Transmis circuits in the AP or CU remain active when the subscriber is sion on hook Possible values Set Not set Default Set Balance Mode his option menu can be used to define whether the AP or CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Auto NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 43 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BE S Service Details Parameters Description Balance This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default O Loss Mode This option menu can be used to specify whether the AP or CU will automatically adjust its transmit receive loss to con trol the overall loop loss to approximately 2 or 5 dB or use prescription set values Possible values 2 5 Fixed Default 2 Receive TLP This slider is used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in GB RTLP Negative values define loss positive values define gain Only valid if LOSS is Fixed If LOSS is not fixed this control will be disabled Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit TLP This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or TTLP
108. The Hard Reset button is used to hard reset the AFM pack A warning indicates that the operation is service affecting 6 4 1 1 Modify a DS3 AFM Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify a DS3 AFM pack Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt LPA900 LPA907 in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on AFM DS3 in the Shelf View window The AFM window pops up If you want to then edit the location information edit the parameters in the field Loca tion Information and press Apply edit an AFM feeder select the desired feeder and press Edit or double click on the row entry The DS3 AFM Feeder window pops up cf Chapter 6 4 2 page 6 54 soft reset the AFM pack click on Soft Reset The following warning message pops up A Soft Reset of the AFM Pack will drop the NMS communication with the AFM Do you want to continue NAM R1 9 6 52 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS If you want to then hard reset the AFM pack click on Hard Reset The following warning message pops up A Hard Reset of the AFM Pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue modify the global parameters click on Global Parameters 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 53 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee 6
109. The Logical DSO List window pops up This window can also be reached from the VRT VB List window cf Chapter 7 2 1 1 page 7 6 and VRT VB windows cf Chapter 7 2 1 3 page 7 8 Chapter 7 2 1 7 page 7 14 2 Use the radio buttons in the Selection Criteria field to choose a desired VRT VB If you want to then add a logical DSO click on Add Logical DSO The new VRT VB id will be inserted into the Logical DSO List edit a logical DSO select an appropriate row in the Logi cal DSO List and press Edit Logical DS0 The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 NAM R1 9 7 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a If you want to then remove a logical DSO select an appropriate row in the Logi cal DSO List and press Remove Logi cal DSO A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops Up Redlined logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 33 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee 7 2 4 3 Logical DSO window This window is u
110. The corre sponding Service Details windows pops up for modifying the GSFN Back in the Logical DSO window click on Ap ply to confirm add a cross connection use the option menus Logical DSO id to select a desired VRT VB with a as sociated text field grey background use the option menus Physical DSO id to select the desired physical DSO and click on Apply modify the subscriber parameters use the text field CLEI and the check box Red Line to enter define the corre sponding values and click on Apply exit the window click on Close gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up after confirming the edit action Redline Logical DSO will be edited Ok to proceed NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 39 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 7 2 4 6 Use the Select Logical DSO window The Select Logical DSO window can be reached only from the Logical DSO win dow cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 Select Logical DS0 Id Logical Ds0 Id inadlsO 1 None OK Close Figure 7 15 Select Logical DSO window Procedure Complete the following procedure to select a logical DSO Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DSO Id to select the desired VRT VB and the corresponding logical DSO number 2 Click on OK to confirm the selection The Logical DSO window is one the screen again 7 2 4 7 Common parameters in service details windows The
111. They are connected via an electrical in terface through one or two MDSUs that in effect extend the PCM highway from the AnyMedia Access System backplane to the MDS2 MDS2B An MDSU can be located in any AP slot however the MDSUs will normally be located in AP slots 14 and 15 to simplify shelf cabling One MDSU extends 1 5 PCM highways to a metallic shelf controller MSC in the MDS2 MDS2B shelf In order to extend 3 PCM highways to both sections of the MDS2 MDS2B shelf two MDSUs must be installed MSU100 SAPQADMBAA BAIU shelves The BAIU Broadband Access Interface Unit can consist of up to six shelves Each shelf can accommodate up to 19 APs A mix of telephony and data APs is possible Figure 5 2 page 5 3 shows an example of a BAIU shelf Please note that the NAM R1 9 only manages the data agent of the BAIU NAM R1 9 5 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Overview of the controlled systems NE management ee LSA Ol LSA Ol yoed uoleoiddy yoed uoneoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uoneoijddy yoed uoleoiddy yoed uoleoiddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uoieoiddy yoed uoieoiddy LSA Ol disd Ol AnyMedia shelf layout Figure 5 1 yoed uoneoijddy yoed uoneoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uoleojddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uoneoijddy yoed uoln
112. This field indicates agement the number of ATM cross connections related to the SDSL port The Cross Connections List button provides access to the ATM Cross Connection List window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 77 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Test Manage The Apply button can be used to start the BIST Test MEN For more information refer to Chapter 8 4 2 4 PM Data This button provides access to the SDSL PM Data window NAM R1 9 6 78 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs 6 4 7 1 Modify an SDSL drop This window is reached from the SDSL Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 4 6 page 6 70 by pressing the Edit button in the Drop Information field Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an SDSL drop Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the desired SDSL drop If you want to edit a transmission profile edit a threshold profile change the administrative state NAM R1 9 363 211 497 then use the option menu Transmission Network Profile to select the desired profile and press Edit The SDSL Transmission Network Pro file window cf Chapter 9 6 6 or the SDSL Transmission NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 4 pops up Back in the SDSL Drop window after modifying the profile press Apply to confirm the changes u
113. VP Upstream VP Shelf VP1 Shelf VP2 Shelf VP3 Shelf VP4 This menu is disabled in edit mode The Apply button is used to confirm the changes NAM R1 9 7 74 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning data E SS 7 3 7 1 Add an AFM feeder VP Procedure Complete the following procedure to add an AFM feeder VP Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Feeder VP via the cursor menu The AFM Feeder VPs List window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 6 page 7 72 2 Click on Add in the Feeder VPs List field The AFM Feeder VP window pops up 3 Use the text field and the option menus in the Feeder VP Information field to define the desired parameters and click on Apply 4 Click on Close to exit the window 7 3 12 Modify an AFM feeder VP Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an AFM feeder VP Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Feeder VP via the cursor menu The AFM Feeder VPs List window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 6 page 7 72 2 Select the corresponding row in the Feeder VPs List and click on Edit 3 Use the text field VP Number and or the option menu Service Category in the Feeder VP Information field to change the parameters and click on Apply 4 Click on Close to exit the window ledel Add a Shelf VP Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a Shelf VP Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List
114. agent and the data agent is able to respond to NAM queries and to send traps to the EM COMM_ESTABLISHED_SYNCHRONIZING The EM is trying to update its internal information by uploading data from the BB agent COMM STOPPED RELEASING The EM is deleting all the information related to the communication being stopped COMM_STOPPED and COMM _ STOPPED RELEASING are sub states of the general state Communication Stopped COMM_TRYING and COMM_TRYING_PROBLEM_ DETECTED are sub states of the general state Communication Trying COMM_ESTABLISHED and COMM_ESTABLISHED_ SYNCHRONIZING are sub states of the general state Communication Established 5 5 3 1 Changing connection states The connection state changes can be initiated by the user via the GUI or they are initiated by the NAM Communication The communication protocol used between the NAM and the data agent is simple protocol network management protocol SNMP over user datagram protocol UDP IP COMM_STOPPED The user can initiate the communication establishment process with a data agent in connection state COMM_STOPPED After initiating this process the connection state changes to COMM_TRYING COMM_TRYING When the communication state goes COMM_TRYING the NAM tries to establish a connection with the data agent by sending a SNMP PDU After the successful connection the NAM checks if the NAM supports the software version of the data gent If the software version is supported the connect
115. alarm if one of the logs is shortened to a number of days below the minimum num ber of days l e also if a log is shortened that already holds fewer than the minimum number of days Alarm name LOG_DEL_PART m the current day log is deleted Alarm name LOG_DEL_FULL Restore log files When log files are restored cf Chapter 3 6 page 3 38 the log of the current day is not overwritten 3 7 3 Log Viewer window The logs can be viewed by means of the Log Viewer application The logged en tries in the Log Viewer cannot be edited Start Log Viewer The Log Viewer is started up by clicking on the log viewer icon in the access bar After start up the default log type is displayed this value can be configured de fault Actions Access permission The log types which are visible to you depend on your user group The following table shows the log types which the different user groups are allowed to see Table 3 34 Visibility of a log type for a certain user group Log type Visible for user group Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Reports Administrator Maintenance Monitoring this log type includes autono mous reports alarms and perfor mance of ADSL ATM and Feeder NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 47 System management Log management ee SHELF1 7_BB Figure 3 18 Log Viewer Meaning of The following table explains the meaning of the column
116. and the telephony agent configuration data are out of synchronization and or configuration reports are inhibited and or the NAM configuration message buffer is overflowing For more information refer to the NE documentation for the NE releases 5 6 2 2 Alarm information synchronization Overview In general alarms can be considered independently of each other any alarm re port can be processed by the NAM independent of other alarm reports The NAM distinguishes two possible states for alarm handling alarms from telephony agent are enabled or they are inhibited Two telephony agent alarm processing states can be considered PROC The NAM alarm database is consistent with the current telephony agent alarms If NE alarm and or environment alarm reports are inhibited the NAM database is only a snapshot of telephony agent alarm information at a certain moment in time m BLOCK The NAM alarm database and the current telephony agent alarms are out of synchronization due to alarm buffer overflow The NAM alarm da tabase is only a snapshot of telephony agent alarm information at a certain moment in time For more information refer to the NE documentation for the NE releases NAM R1 9 5 50 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS 5 6 2 3 Synchronization Telephony window Synchronization Telephony SHELF17 NB Tu B Switen Report Di samed Mema Wisapied E Enviroment Alarms Disapled Bj Other
117. are used with NAM m adetailed information about each parameter These configuration parameters are distributed in three configuration files as fol lows AnyMediaEM cfg for variables used by the AnyMedia servers m AnyMedia ini and SystemPreferences ini for variables used by the GUI Only the configuration parameters the AnyMedia administrator can modify are ex plained in this chapter modify these configuration variables with caution as they may adversely affect the correct operation of the application To modify the other configuration parameters stored in the configuration files please contact with Lu cent Technologies TCL B 1 1 NAM server configuration variables The following table provide an alphabetical list of the configuration variables for AnyMedia servers The directories can be defined either absolute or relative to the environment vari able SANYMEDIAPATH NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 B 1 Configuration parameters Overview o BE S Table 2 1 AnyMediaEM cfg File Name Description Configuration AM clearHour Hour of the day in 24h format at which the re management set moval process of the alarm database is exe tings cuted every day It is OPTIONAL If not present default value is taken Possible values 0 to 23 Default value 1 AM clearMinute Minute within the AM clearHour at which the removal process of the alarm database is exe cuted every day It is OPTIONAL If not present default valu
118. at layer 2 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 at layer 2 10BaselT at layer 1 10BaselT at layer 1 10BaselT at layer 1 Figure A 4 NAM protocol profiles A 6 Recommended DCN configu rations If a data network is not yet available between the central site where the NAM is lo cated and the remote site where the NEs are located the following two configura tions are recommended m ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN cf Chapter A 6 1 page A 6 Communication with remote NEs using inband ATM PVC cf Chapter A 6 2 page A 9 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 A 5 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations ee A 6 1 ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN Configuration The assumptions for this configuration are m The LAN based element manager is located in the central office collocated with the Local Digital Switch LDS m The NEs are located at remote locations m The OAM amp P information mapped in the 64 kbit s ROCs is transported from the NAM in the central office to the remote locations via a semi per manent leased line SPLL using either TR 08 or TR 303 access technolo gies A router bridge is used for interfacing the channelized T1 I F to the LAN in the central office The router bridge performs the translation from LAN to HDLC DS0O access via channelized T1 interfaces m For layer 2 the HDLC Protocol is used between 24 channel NEs and the route
119. be restored to its original size Menu bar The menu bar contains the menu names each of them containing options related to the topic These options may be selected to control the process running in this win dow cf Chapter 3 3 6 page 3 10 Tool bar The tool bar contains icons that provide quick access to most commonly used ac tions such as new open copy and print cf Chapter 5 3 2 Tooltips are also pro vided for these action icons Window menu Click this button to open the window menu cf Figure 3 5 page 3 9 Double click to button exit the application NAM R1 9 3 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management General information on keyboard a 3 3 5 Window menu A window can be provided with a window menu The window menu allows to alter the appearance of the window or to exit the application represented by the win dow Restore Alt F5 Move Alt F7 Size Alt F8 Minimize Alt F9 Maximize Alt F10 Lower Alt F3 Alt F4 Figure 3 5 Window menu To open the window menu shown in Figure 3 5 click on the window menu button or click with the right mouse button on the window frame The menu options in the window menu are listed in the following table Table 3 1 Window Menu Items and their Function Menu Item Function Restore A window currently being represented as an icon or in its maxi mum size is restored to its original size Move Allows you to move the window interactively on the screen The wi
120. button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Get button retrieves the VRT VB service state NAM R1 9 7 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Description Command But Three buttons provide access to other windows one Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to different windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DSO window Physical DS1 List This button provides access to the Physical DS1 List window Logical DSO List This button provides access to the Log ical DSO List window 7 2 1 6 Modify the VRI TRO08 The VRT TR08 window can be reached only from the VAT VB List window via Edit VRT VB button Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the VRT TR08 Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu VRT VB id to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to then change the network loss value use the slider Network Loss and click on Set get the current service states of the click on Get in the Operational State VRT VB field add a logical DS1 use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DS1 and click on Add The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 add a logical DSO use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DSO and click on Add The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3
121. button provides access to the Domain Selection tons window cf Figure 5 15 page 5 37 to include the NE in one or several domains The button is available only if the NE name is present NE Management This button provides access to the NE Management window cf Figure 5 16 page 5 38 to config ure the selected NE NAM R1 9 5 34 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Groups and NEs management 5 4 3 5 Create modify NEs Complete the following procedure to create modify an NE Step Procedure Vi Select the NE in the Network Browser or on the background map and New or Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt New or View gt Object via the menu bar or click on the Open icon in the tool bar The Groups amp NEs window tab NEs pops up cf Figure 5 14 page 5 33 If you want to then edit the parameters of an existing NE use the option menus NE Name Selec tion and NE Identification to select the desired NE edit the parameters in the field NE Representation and press Apply create a new NE use the option menu NE Selection to select the NEW option enter an appropriate name in the text field NE Name use the option menu Parent Group to select the desired parent group define the parameters in the field NE Representation and press Apply The Domain Selection window pops up cf Figure 5 15 page 5 37 configure the NE click on NE Management The NE Management window pops up cf Fig ure 5
122. by the real time call processing software of the TR 303 Local Digital Switch LDS and in communicating with the VRT over the TMC and or EOC about these feeder DS1s The AnyMedia Access System provides only 20 physical feeder DS1 ports so only a subset of the logical feeder DS1s can be in service NAM R1 9 GL 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Glossary Logical Line This is a logical customer termination provided by the NE on either a TR 303 TR 08 VRT or an INA VB Logical Line Number LLN This is the Access Dentifier AID used externally by the Element Manager to identify uniquely a VRT or INA Vir tual Bank distribution side logical drop M MAC Address This is a 6 byte hardware address which identifies a unique participant worldwide in an Ethernet LAN A MAC ad dress is used in OSI layer 2 Manual normal Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only is in service and not faulty Migration This refers to converting an NE from one software release to another by installing a different software release Module An executable installed on a Host N NE AnyMedia Access System Network Element NEM Network Element Management Subsystem Non Volatile Data Storage NVDS This refers to a capability of the AnyMedia Access System to store information in such a way as to survive indefi nite peri
123. click on PM Data The ADSL PM Data window pops up cf Chapter 9 2 1 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 69 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs 6 4 6 SDSL Application Pack window This window includes inventory data operation and protection information as well as general drop information Figure 6 23 SDSL Application Pack window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This field displays the slot id Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf or subap 1 8 1 8 NAM R1 9 6 70 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth mation erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values SDSL Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPS716 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is
124. command line System message Command syntax In the following description of the commands square brackets e g c indicate optional parameters The pipe symbol indicates alternative options from which one has to be chosen e g INC FULL All parameters not enclosed in brackets are mandatory Each command is entered without enclosing parameters in brackets Backup files Use the following command to make a backup of a database or directory If you enter none of the optional parameters a backup of all data necessary to restore the NAM will be done AEM backup c h H p backup file path backup_file_ name t backup_type 1 dump_level Parameter description C Aborts a running backup operation h H Display command syntax h or additional help H p backup_file_path The backup_file_path is the directory or device to back up Default value of the variable OAM backup backupDirec tory which is set in the file AnyMediaEM cfg f backup_file_name Location of the backup file backup_file_name can be a lo cal file or a locally mounted file in case a local tape device is used backup_file_name specifies a soft label Default file names EM_SYSBCK_yyyymmdd fullbck for full backup EM _SYSBCK_yyyymmdd incbck for incremental backup with yyyy year mm month dd day of the backup t backup_type Type of backup incremental INC or full FULL Default FULL This parameter is ignored if I 0 is
125. commissioning Installation procedure 12 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q 13 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing Netscape Navigator 4 6 Stand Alone for AnyMedia EM R1 9 as lt LUNETSCP gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuNETSCP 1log Installation of lt LuNETSCP gt was successful NAM R1 9 2 60 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Help installation Processing package instance lt LuANYHL gt from lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 9 Help sparc LuANYHL 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Any
126. common window alarm viewer to show all alarms re ported by the managed NEs or generated by the management system it self The display shows all the information pertaining to the alarm including alarm type severity service affecting indication date time of occurrence and clearing NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 11 Functional description System and software architecture ee m 8 Alarm display filters lt is possible to filter the items shown in the alarm viewer for instance to see only the critical alarms Alarm notification to user The user is informed by visual alerts when a new alarm has been reported to the NAM Alarm correlation Alarms coming from the same NE point through NB and BB agents i e the same alarm is reported via both controller cards are correlated into one single alarm m Clearing of alarms Alarms in the management system will automatically be cleared when the faults are removed at the source such as in the NEs or in the platform Some platform alarms can be cleared by the user The alarm information will contain the date and time of alarm clearance m Acknowledged alarms The operator can acknowledge a raised alarm alarm still active but being investigated Alarm colors The management system provides a color scheme based on alarm severi ties m Enable Disable of autonomous alarms on an NE basis Fault localization Provides fault localization across all NEs under the
127. con trolled by the NAM None will be displayed if there is no se lected profile The Edit button provides access to the ATM Traffic Net work Profile window cf Chapter 9 6 7 The option menu Administrative State provides the possi ble states that can be used Locked and Unlocked The field Service State shows the state of the ATM cross connection obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Mismatch of Equipment Dormant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State This button is used to confirm the changes creation of a cross connection or modifying an existing cross connection NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 7 69 Service provisioning Service provisioning data 7 3 3 Add an ATM cross connection gt NOTE When creating a cross connection with CBR rt VBR or nrt VBR as service category please make sure that the minimum transmission rate kbps cf xDSL Transmission Network Profile associated to the selected drop is greater than the peak cell rate cps cf ATM Traffic Network Profile associ ated to the cross connection Otherwise the create cross connection action will be rejected by the AFM Please apply the proper conversion rate be fore comparing both values 1 kbps 2 5 cps Procedure Complete the following procedure to add an ATM cross connection Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt ATM Cross Connections List
128. corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply get the active timing synchronization press the Get button in the Active source and the source states Timing Reference field switch between the working and press the Get button in the Active standby sources of synchronization Timing Reference field to get the active values and click on Switch exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 5 60 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management Le 5 6 5 Date amp Time Telephony window This window can be used to set the date and time of the telephony agent of the managed NE Also it is possible to retrieve the date and time of any NE ate amp Time Telephony Figure 5 23 Date amp Time Telephony window The following values are possible m 12 00 AM to 11 59 PM for time m Jan 1 1980 to Dec 12 2036 The format follows the locale and platform conventions e g for Spain the date for mat is day month year NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 61 NE management Network Element management ee Procedure Complete the following procedure to retrieve set the date and time of the tele phony agent of an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the NE in the NE Browser and Date amp Time gt Telephony via the cursor menu The Date amp Time Telephony window pops up If you want to then to retrieve the current date and time Click on Get in the Current Date amp d
129. cursor Conventions The keys on the keyboard are represented in the text in the following way Ctrl Backspace A B Two or more of these keys connected by a hyphen indicate that they must be pressed simultaneously Shift Ctr1 A for example means that the A key must be typed while holding down Shift and Ctrl Keys that are separated by blanks only must be pressed one after the other Esc A B for example means that Esc must be pressed first followed by A and then B 3 3 2 Mouse Conventions When using the mouse you will frequently find the following terms m Click or Select Position the cursor on an object and press the left mouse button Double click Click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 5 System management General information on keyboard ee m Drag Move the mouse keeping the left mouse button pressed 3 3 3 Different aspects of the cursor The aspect of the cursor will vary to indicate the actions you may currently under take using the mouse The following symbols show examples for possible cursor aspects AN The arrow up pointing to the left is used to select objects and to press buttons T The I beam is used within a text field to indicate the position where text is to be inserted The clock cursor indicates that in the window where the cursor is positioned a CG process requiring a lot of processing time is running and no mouse or
130. desired ADSL drop in the Drop Information table and click on Edit or double click on the row entry The ADSL Drop window pops up cf Chapter 6 4 5 page 6 65 deprovision a drop select the desired ADSL drop and click on Deprovision Assigned profiles are deleted also as well as cross connec tions get access to the ATM Cross Connec click on Cross Connections List tion List window The ATM Cross Connection List win dow pops up cf Chapter 7 3 1 start the BIST test use the option menu near the Apply button to select BIST Test and press Apply See also Chapter 8 4 2 3 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 63 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee If you want to then start the corrupted CRC test use the option menu near the Apply button to select Corrupted CRC Test and press Apply See also Chapter 8 4 2 2 reset the pack Click on Reset The following warning message pops up Resetting the ADSL Pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 6 64 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS 6 4 5 ADSL Drop window This window is used to configure the ADSL drops It can also be used to remove the related cross connections Figure 6 22 ADSL Drop window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name
131. diversion with toll diversion LSNS LSRS GSNS LSNS is applicable to the SPQ444 channel unit which is intended for use in non locally switched loop and ground start special services loop start normal simplex loop start reverse simplex ground start normal sim plex ground start reverse simplex The FX S T 1 2 3 5 4 wire foreign exchange no toll diversion with toll diversion LSNS LSRS GSNS LSNS is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which provides one channel of service to be used in the MDS2 MDS82B loop start nor mal simplex loop start reverse simplex ground start normal simplex ground start reverse simplex D 4N Service Details Information Figure 7 24 Logical DSO window DX4N Service Details Parameters Description Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Receive Attenu This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 NAM R1 9 7 50 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a Service Details Parameters Description Load Non Load This option menu can be used to select whether the transmit equalizer mast be loaded or non loaded distribution cable Possible values N L Default N Bandwidth BW This slider can be used to control the frequency response charac
132. enter a profile name 4 Add a description of the new profile in the corresponding list box and click on Apply to confirm 9 Click on Close to exit the window 9 6 3 2 Modify the ADSL PM thresholds net work profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ADSL PM thresholds network pro file Step Procedure le Select NE in the NE Browser and Profiles gt ADSL PM Thresholds via the cursor menu The ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 3 page 9 18 This window can also be reached from the ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 by pressing the Edit button for the PM thresholds network profile 2 When coming from the NE Browser use the option menu Network Profile to select the desired profile NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 21 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee This step is not necessary when coming from the ADSL Drop window via Edit If you want to then modify the profile information use the text fields Network Profile Name and Description to change the not possible for the default profiles information data and click on Apply modify the profile data use the option menu Network Profile Pattern to display the profile data use the text fields in the field Network Profile Data to modify the parameters and click on Apply not possible for the default profiles view the affected objects click on Affected Objects button which is only a
133. feeder of the second IO_DS1 pack is the default secondary input The network provider can tailor the set of valid timing inputs and their priorities via provisioning The primary and secondary reference signals can be selected from any physical feeder inputs on any two IO_DS1 packs or from two feeder inputs on the same pack The NE can continue to derive timing from the reference inputs if one or both of the physical inputs are switched to the pro tection IO_DS1 pack For more information refer to the network elements documentation Upon initialization the NE selects the primary input as the active reference and the secondary input as its alternate source If the primary reference fails the NE hardware switches to the alternate source providing synchronization reference source protection is available cf Chapter 5 6 10 page 5 70 NAM R1 9 5 56 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management 5 6 4 1 Timing Source Control Telephony window This window provides the operator with the facilities needed to configure the NE timing source for telephony service Timing Source Control Telephony Figure 5 22 Timing Source Control Telephony window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Provisioned Timing Sync Mode This option menu displays the current Timing Refer timing synchronization mo
134. fields titled Working COMDAC and Standby COM DAC showing the corresponding slot number and software versions used in each of the COMDACs Slot id Identifies which COMDAC is where e g Working COMDAC in slot 1 and Standby COMDAC in slot 2 SW Version Obtained from the NE The SW version of the working COMDAC will be taken as the NE SW version 2 Press Apply to start the software copying An n Progress window pops up Program Copy from COMDAC 1 to COMDAC 2 on lt NE NAME gt in Progress After finishing the copying process successfully the n Progress window disappears 3 Press Close to exit the COMDAC Program Copy window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 87 NE management Network Element management E SS 5 6 13 AFM program copy and validation Overview This function is used to exchange the newly loaded software with the currently ac tive version in the flash memory and reboot the AFM to activate the new software This should always be the next step after software download except when the copying and validation is started automatically after software download cf Chapter 5 6 11 4 page 5 83 Procedure Complete the following procedure to exchange the new software with the currently active version Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Program Copy gt Data via cursor menu The AFM Program Copy amp Validation window pops up AFM Program Copy amp Validation Figure 5 34 AFM P
135. file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt AFM an the file name of the re store file 3 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field File name in the AFM NVDS Restore window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the restore A Warning window pops up NVDS Restore may be service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while the execution Continue anyway NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 93 NE management Network Element management ME SS 5 Press Yes to confirm this message An n Progress window pops up NVDS restore on lt NE Name gt in progress After finishing the backup process successfully the n Progress window disappears 6 Press Close to exit the AFM Restore window 5 6 14 5 File Browser window This window is composed of a list where all files and or subdirectories are shown included in the selected directory The File Browser can be launched from the Software Download windows m the Backup windows m the Restore windows and m the Groups amp NEs window Figure 5 39 File Browser window The following table shows the parameter of this window Parameters Buttons Description Selected File This text field displays the selected file The field is editable only if the file browser has been accessed from a backup window In this case the Available Files Directories list is used to select the
136. guarantees about the order in which responses are sent to the OS NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages TL1 cf Command and Message Manual TCP pea Authorization Authentication Info Navis AnyMedia TL1 R1 0 R1 1 R1 7 TCP IP NEs The light grey NEs can not be accessed by the external OS Figure C 1 Northbound interface The number of concurrent northbound interface sessions supported by a single NE will depend on the number of available virtual circuits on the NE The NAM will provide the independence of the northbound interface sessions and the NAM GUI interface so an operator using the NAM GUI will not get to know whether a northbound interface session is running or not C 3 Northbound interface specific TL1 messages some TL1 messages feature more parameters when invoked via NAM These TL1 messages are described in this section namely REPT ALM Report Alarm m RTIRV ALM Retrieve Alarms m RIRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment m RTIRV HDR Retrieve Header NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 3 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee
137. has been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuNER 1log Installation of lt LuNER gt was successful Northbound Inter Processing package instance lt LuNBI gt from face installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24 gt AnyMedia North Bound Element Manager Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuNBI_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuNBI has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory NAM R1 9 2 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Processing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia North Bound Element Manager Release 1 9 Administration as lt LuNBI gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 NBI bin PassThrough opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 1 NBI bin PassThroughConfig opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 NBI cfg NBIDomains cfg opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 NBI cfg NBILog log verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Installation of lt LuNBI gt was successful Log Management Processing package instance lt LuLogg gt fr
138. has no group icon nor group coordinates as it is never shown from an upper layer Instead it has a background map to display the icons of the items of the first level Root level Root group background map Third level Group 1 2 2 Group 1 2 1 Figure 5 10 Tree hierarchy of groups and NEs View levels The root group is a special group that is created at the first start up and can never be deleted It is the only item in the root level of Figure 5 10 From this level only the items of the first level are visible for example Group 1 Group 2 and NE1 are directly reachable from the root level Allocation to back To facilitate the visualization of the child items of a group a background map can ground maps be allocated to each group to depict the group s child items on it To implement this each group must have the following parameters m Group name This identifier must be unique within the group level groups with the same parent group Group icon to graphically identify the group when displaying the items of the group s parent group m Background map map on which the group s child items are displayed m Group coordinates to specify the position of the group icon on the back ground map of the group s parent group Allowed names Two different groups can have the same group name except when their parent groups are the same It is therefore possible to have two groups named Group C with Group A and Gr
139. in circuit packs periodically NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 13 Functional description System and software architecture ee Loopback test on the feeder side lt is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders m Testing on daisy chained NEs The NAM is able to perform tests on any line of any NE sharing one TAP 100 Data test manage The data test management provides the following tests meni ADSL SDSL port BIST tests ADSL port corrupted CRC tests administration of the set of tests stored in the AFM 1 3 1 2 General components The components of this group do not have or require any knowledge of the NEs the NAM is managing They provide a platform on which the other NAM compo nents can operate and isolate them from the underlying customer platform OAM components The OAM components provide operation administration maintenance and secu rity functionality This is based on third party tools i e orbix and a set of specific applications The OAM components provide the following functionality features 1 Operation Administration Maintenance m Standard reports The system allows the user to generate a set of predefined reports from the information kept by the NAM The reports cover the following areas alarms equipment configuration service provisioning NE inventory performance The reports are available for displaying printing and saving in a postscript file m Stand
140. in the NAM database Possible cause s AFM problem NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 57 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee Carrecive acuons Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct AFM configuration 8 5 5 19 AGENT_RPOFILE_WITH_NO_NP Meaning There are NE profiles within the agent that are not associated to a network profile in the NAM Abbreviation AGENT RPOFILE_ WITH _NO_NP Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects The atfected NE profiles data can not be used to create cross connections in the NAM Possible cause s The NE profile is not defined as network profile in the NAM Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Define the NE profile as network profile in the NAM 8 5 5 20 DUPLICATED_AGENT_PROFILE Meaning There are several NE profiles within the agent with the same content as one net work profile Abbreviation DUPLICATED AGENT PROFILE Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects Only one of the duplicated NE profiles is recognized by the NAM Possible cause s It has been detected that there is more than one NE profile with the same content as the considered network profile NAM R1 9 8 58 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee Corrective actions Use the GSI to remove the duplicated profiles The IDs of the profiles can be looked up in the NAM s internal events log files Step Pro
141. installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuShelf has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Shelf Release 1 7 1 Administration as lt LuShelf gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 CombinedShelf bin NECombined opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 CombinedShelf cfg CombinedPacks cfg opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 CombinedShelf cfg CombinedShelves cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuShelf gt was successful General Event Dis Processing package instance lt LuSysED gt from tributor installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager System Even Dist Release 1 9 administration sparc LuSysED_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkk NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 35 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSys
142. is prompted for confirmation 8 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer functions The Alarm Viewer provides different possibilities to perform internal functions and alarm management functions These functions can be initiated via m Menu Tool bar In most cases the choice depends on the user s personal preference NAM R1 9 8 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring 8 3 3 1 Menu bar The menu is used to activate alarm viewer functions gt NOTE The executable functions depend on your user privileges E ie File View Filter Actions Options Help Figure 8 4 Menu bar of the Alarm Viewer Selection is achieved m By opening the menu by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor to the desired option in the menu or m By opening the menu via the keyboard by entering Alt plus the underlined letter of the relevant menu to open the menu option and then entering the letter underlined in the desired menu option Table 8 2 File menu Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer Chapter 8 3 4 1 Print gt Print Ta Print all alarm items displayed in the cur ble rently displayed table or save the items into page 8 19 an ASCII file The Print dialog cf Chapter 3 5 2 is opened Print gt Preview Show the Preview Frame window cf Chapter 3 5 3 Print gt Print Print a screen shot of the whole window Window The Page Setup dialog is opened cf
143. keyboard inputs are possible 3 3 4 Basics on windows The window which contains the input focus evaluates all keyboard and mouse in puts The window containing the input focus is easy to distinguish from other win dows opened on the screen by the different colour of its window frame Use the mouse to direct the input focus to a defined window Click on a position within the window or place the cursor on the window The window shown in Figure 3 3 page 3 7 labels the different window controls which allow the user to change the aspect of the window on the screen and the process represented by the window NAM R1 9 3 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management General information on keyboard TT E Window menu button Title bar Minimize button Maximize button Text Editor unnamed File Edit Search Format Menu bar Slider Window frame with Slider Horizontal scroll bar Vertical scroll bar resize corners Figure 3 3 Specimen window and window controls The individual window controls shown in Figure 3 3 are Figure 3 4 Controls in a window Window part Function Window frame The frame delimits the window on the screen and its colour indicates whether this with resize cor window contains the input focus Drag the frame to shift and resize the window By ners dragging the window corners the window size may be modified to both limiting sides at the same time Title bar The title bar informs you about the function of the win
144. main installation directory For changing default locations refer to Appendix B Table 3 27 Default File Names for Backup and Archive Database File File name Directory File Network registry database NER db ner db System Administration database SystemAdministrator do SysAdmData base db NE management database One directory for each AMU y 1 2 3 AMU_NB_Rxx db nem_y db or AMU_BB_Rxx db nem_y db with xx NB BB release Security database Security do Security db Alarm database AM db AlarmDataBase db Performance database PerformanceConfig db Performance db System Identifier database SID db sid db NB release database One directory for each AMU y 1 2 3 AMU_NB_Rxx db CM_y db with xx NB re lease BB release database One directory for each AMU y 1 2 3 AMU_BB_Rxx db CM_y db with xx BB re lease Network Profiles Broadband da NPB db NPBDataBase db tabase Backup could fail The backup fails if one of the database files from the above table does not exist Manual backup The configuration files cfg are not backed up by the AEM_backup command A backup of these files can be done manually e g with the tar command NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 39 System management Backup and restore BE SeS After each backup archive or restore command a result message is displayed which indicates whether the operation was successful or not This message is dis played only if the command was entered on the
145. management User groups ee Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt User Groups via menu bar The User Groups Table ap pears User Administration amp Profiling Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Monitoring Group Description group 7 group 7 description group 3 test group New user group Successful Figure 4 16 User Administration amp Profiling window User Groups Table 4 Select one user group of the User Group Name field and click Open The User Group Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user group NAM R1 9 4 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management Change user group name Change user group description Adding users Removing users Adding to domains 363 211 497 User groups group 3 kest group Figure 4 17 User Group Profile window tab Users To change the user group name enter the new name in the User Group Name field 3 to 30 characters Any characters are allowed To change the user group description enter the new information in the Descrip tion field
146. min 0 8640 for one day Remote Failure Indication RFI Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the downstream direction Possible values 0 90 for 15 min 0 8640 for one day Loss of Frame LOF Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the upstream direction Possible values 0 90 for 15 min 0 8640 for one day The Apply button is used to confirm the changes Command but The Affected Objects button provides access to the Af tons fected Objects window This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated The Resynchronize button can be used to force the re syn chronization of the selected profile with all the AFMs cur rently controlled by the NAM This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated NAM R1 9 9 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles E SS 9 6 3 1 Create an ADSL PM thresholds net work profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to create an ADSL PM thresholds network pro file Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Profiles gt ADSL PM Thresholds via the cursor menu The ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 3 page 9 18 2 Use the option menu Network Profile to select New Network Profile 3 Use the text field Network Profile Name in the field Network Profile In formation to
147. month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respec tively O0 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively OCRTM Occurrence time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes This indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format HH MM SS hours minutes seconds ALMMSG Alarm message This parameter appears in the Common Block Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 40 Alarm Message Use alarm message instead of condition description Refer to the Correlation Tables for the default environmental alarm conditions The 40 charac ters include a pair of escaped quotes NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 19 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee C 3 3 6 Generic error responses Code Definition Reason for code CLOS NE Connection Not Available Connection with the lt NE TID gt is not available LITA Input Invalid Target Identifier TID does not match with SID has not allowed characters or string is too long Eo Input Invalid Correlation Tag Incorrect CTAG ITCNV Input Command Not Valid The command verb or a modifier is invalid not recogniz able by the system PICC Privilege Illegal Command Code Command not supported at this interface a only available via NAM NAM R1 9 C 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 3 4 RTRV HDR
148. not cleared 5 Owned acknowledge alarms 6 All ac knowledge alarms 7 None filter all alarms Default value 3 363 211 497 Configuration parameters Overview o BE SS Name Description DEFAULT LOG_TYPE Default Options Window of Log Viewer Possible values Act_ TASK lee_ TASK Ao TASK Default value Act_ TASK Cut through set LOGTELNET Login to connect to NAM server for cut tings through purposes Default value defined at installation time PASSTELNET Password to connect to NAM server for Cut through purposes Default value defined at installation time SERVER Server host where the NAM application is running Default value defined at installation time Help settings HELP_URL Contains the URL where the help files are located HELP _BROWSER HELP BROWSER Solaris Setting this property should contain the name of browser being used netscape in our case the full path is not necessary HELP_BROWSER Windows Setting how ever in windows it is necessary to specify the full path where the browser is located remember that in this case it is needed to use double back slashes For example C Program Files Netscape Communicator Program netscape exe Default value netscape Event settings EVENT DELAY This is the delay applied to all events re ceived by the GUI except those ones man aged by the System Events Distributor That is the delay between the GUI event reception and the event handler proc
149. not more than two re sponses may be lost otherwise the connection is closed by the NAM Default values for monitoring These values can be configured by the user via the system variables NEM asso ciation heartBeatNumber and NEM association heartBeatTime in the file ANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg 5 5 2 3 NE Management window tab Tele phony This window shows the provisioning information and allows the provisioning and deprovisioning of an NE telephony agent NE Management Figure 5 17 NE Management window tab Telephony Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 41 NE management Connect a Network Element ME SS Parameters Buttons Description Provisioning In Once the connection is established the following fields can formation not be edited unless the connection is interrupted connec tion state Not Managed Communications Info This field contains the editable text fields IP Address and TID This information is mandatory to get a NAM NE connection Authentication Information This field contains the text fields Login and Password This information is also manda tory to get a NAM NE connection The Label button is used to provision deprovision the NE Provision lf the NE is not provisioned or any value has been changed Provisioning is enabled only if the administra tive state is Not Managed see below
150. of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted Physical Server This field contains a table displaying port information This Port Informa information is presented in a 4 column table The table is tion sorted by Physical Server Port Id A scroll bar allows navi gation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add and remove cross connections through the use of the buttons described below Physical Server Port Id Identifies the port within the server pack in which the IAT subshelf is cross con nected m Feeder Port Id Specifies the IAT subshelf Id Up to 32 IAT cross connections are possible within a Mainshelf NAM R1 9 6 40 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS Parameters Buttons Description Action Physical Server The Add Cross Connection button provides access to the Port Informa IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 6 3 11 page 6 43 This tion continued button is enabled only if a physical server port id is selected which is not cross connected Edit This button is connected with an option menu Possible values Cross Connection and Physical Port Cross Connection is enabled if the selected row is cross connected and provides access to the IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 6 3 11 page 6 43 Physical Port provides access to the IAT Server Port Infor mation window cf Chapter
151. one another Shuffle Down moves the window from the top of the pile to the very bottom Refresh The contents of the windows on the screen and the screen backdrop are refreshed Minimize Re The workspace manager window is reduced to an icon or If store Front Panel already iconized restored to a window Restart Work The workspace manager is restarted Some of the changes space Manager to the user interface become valid only after the restart of the workspace manager The restart must be acknowledged in a window Log out A logout from the system can be initiated 3 3 10 Controls in NAM windows Introduction The windows of the NAM display certain controls buttons text fields etc These controls are the same in all NAM windows and explained in this chapter Grayed controls All controls within a window can be activated by clicking on them only if they are not grayed NAM R1 9 3 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management General information on keyboard a Shelf Protection Oy x Tab COMDAC I0 D51 ME Name Protection Schema Protection Schema Text box Protection Switching ID D51 ds1 1 1 Menu button Active Switch Request Protection State Protection Switch Radio button Clear i Inhibit Appl Push button Forced Switch to Protection _Apely Manual Switch to Protection Close Figure 3 8 Example of an NAM window Convention The following font is used when a button is mentioned
152. only It must not be deleted or managed because this file is only created and managed by Ob jectStore Note that without this file ObjectStore is not able to work and also if a NAM R1 9 2 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning General Distribution media 363 211 497 new partition or location is chosen it needs write permissions for the AnyMedia user log in If you choose a directory under AnyMedia location the correct owner and permits will be automatically provided in the installation process of AnyMedia The following table shows the recommended size of the partitions for a maximum of 10 40 100 and 600 NEs NEs part 2 100 100 MB 600 230 MB where part1 contains all the NAM server software and data bases and the part2 is dedicated to the transaction log The NAM distribution media is on CD ROMs which contain all the software plus information and installation scripts Figure 2 1 page 2 4 to Figure 2 4 page 2 5 show the full NAM distribution tree which consist in directories with the installation remove scripts plus the installation and licensing documents Subdirectories named AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 contain the software which is divided in several packages A package contains a collection of files and directories required for the application and scripts to control how where and whether the package Is installed These were built using the application packaging tools offered by Solaris
153. page 8 25 ment clearance 8 2 4 Provide access to the current alarm data Alarm retrieval User domains The user can select lists of alarms filtered by several fields Therefore the user specifies a selection criterion cf Chapter 8 3 4 3 page 8 20 that is taken by the AMS to make the appropriate filters For instance an user can request all the crit ical alarms of an NE or all platform alarms or all alarms which are service affect ing and are raised at the same time The number of alarms stored in the alarm database can be retrieved too The to tal number of alarms can be retrieved as well as the number of alarms per severity number of critical alarms major minor and indeterminate The user domain is the list of NEs and or the NAM the user can manage The user domains are applicable in the AMS to the alarm retrieval operations and to the alarm notification Each user can only request alarms and the number of alarms that are in the user s domain The client and server security filters fill in this information When the alarm retrieval operation arrives at the alarm server in addition to the normal input data it also contains the user domain information added by the user interface 8 2 5 Managing the raising of alarms 363 211 497 An alarm is raised by different types of agents e g telephony and data or by any object of the NAM When an alarm is raised its state and the relevant transmitted data cf Chapter 8 5
154. port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install _AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkk Would you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved NAM R1 9 2 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Please choose the installation mode 1 ADM lt Administration package installation gt 2 GUI lt Client package installation gt Enter selection q 4 Type 1 and press Return The package lt LuLUMRT gt is already installed on the system The package lt LuRWRT gt is already installed on the system The package lt LuOX23RT gt is already installed on
155. pressed for the first time Get This button is used to get the current values of the autono mous output states from the NE 5 6 2 4 Modify the synchronization tele phony parameter Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the synchronization telephony param eter Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Synchronization gt Telephony via the cursor menu The Synchronization Telephony window pops up This window can also be reached from the NE Management window tab Telephony cf Chapter 5 5 2 3 page 5 41 by pressing the More De tails button If you want to then change the processing state use the Label button in the field Configuration re synchronize the alarm processing use the Resync bution in the field state Alarms change the states of the autonomous click on Get in the field Autonomous outputs Output States use the check boxes to define the states and press Apply exit the window Click on Close NAM R1 9 5 52 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management 5 6 3 NAM NE synchronization data agent 5 6 3 1 Configuration information synchroni zation General The data agent is able to inform the NAM of its internal configuration changes The data agent sends traps to the NAM to inform it about these changes Cur rently the data agent only generates traps when specific changes occur Besides that the traps are not responded to by the NAM so t
156. protection Clear or Forced Switch to Protection or Inhibit A Warning window pops up Protection switching may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the switch is finished to show the current state The following events set off error messages 3 363 211 497 The NE is not equipped for the requested protection switching i e the pro tecting slot is empty The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the NAM The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in progress Click on tab IO DS1 to change the window see next section or click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 5 73 NE management Network Element management ee 5 6 10 3 IO DS1 protection switching Overview The NE supports both protected and unprotected DS1 feeder interface opera tions i e the IO DS1 can be 1 N protected 1 lt N lt 5 or without a protection lO DS1 pack IO DS1 protection is controlled by the active COMDAC via the protec tion control bus The NAM cannot provision DS1 pack protection It is automatically invoked when an FAC100 pack is plugged into the IO DS1 protection slot Shelf Frotection Bel Figure 5 28 Shelf Protection window tab IO DS1 This window provides IO DS1 protection information
157. remote NAM craft personal when the GUI does not support certain TL1 commands The NAM will provide the independence between the cut through interface and the GUI interface To open a cut through interface with an NE the operator must provide the connec tion information Login and Password defined in the NE Name Information win dow cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 36 When the NAM receives the request to open a cut through session it opens a tel net connection with the selected NE to avoid conflicts with the current NAM GUI session Then the operator will manage the cut through session through the use of TL1 commands Cut through GUI The NAM GUI behavior but not necessarily the performance is not affected by independence any simultaneous cut through connection running on the platform The operator using the NAM GUI does not need to know about any cut through session running on the NAM platform The performance of the system could be af fected by the load of the hardware but the behavior of the GUI is the same in both cases NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 95 NE management Network Element management ME SS Procedure Complete the following procedure to start a TL1 session 1 Select NE in NE Browser 2 Select Cut through gt Telephony via the menu bar to start a TL1 ses sion The Cut through window pops up Cut Through SHELF17_NE Telephony Figure 5 40 Cut Through window 3 Enter the Login and Password as
158. row selection the corre sponding Logical DSO s through the use of the Edit Logical DSO Add Logical DSO or Remove Logical TO buttons see below m Physical DSO Id Identifies the port within the AP Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop shelf 1 16 1 32 a Logical DSO Id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row only available if the physi cal port is cross connected Possible values v3dp 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA GSFN The generic signalling function GSFN identi fies the service type provided The following values are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O S A B C D TO4 2RVT 2LO COIN2 DFLT2 DPO DSO1 DS02 FXS EMO FXOD FXSO NO OCUO Unknown The Add Logical DSO button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 In this case the physical DSO id will be transferred This button is enabled only if a physical DSO id is selected with no cross connection to a logical DSO id The Edit Logical DSO button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 where the operator will be able to edit the logical DSO parameters whenever this
159. selected item s from the SID database The Drop Info button provides access to the correspond ing user port or drop window depending on the selected ta ble item The following windows can be opened Logical DSO xDSL Drop 7 4 1 1 Add Edit Subscriber Identifier win dow This window is used to add edit entries of the SID database NAM R1 9 7 80 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Subscriber Identifier Edit Subscriber Identifier SID pp NE Name Oc3 Physical Drop Id Emmin Figure 7 40 Add Edit Subscriber Identifier window The 4 fields SID NE Name Physical Drop Id and Additional Info are editable The Apply button is used to confirm the changes It is enabled whenever at least one of the text fields is not empty 7 4 1 2 Add a subscriber identifier Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a Subscriber Identifier Step Procedure 1 Select Tools gt Subscriber Identifier in the Groups amp NEs Manage ment application menu bar or use the Subscriber Identifier icon in the Navis AnyMedia access bar The Subscriber Identifier window pops up cf Chapter 7 4 1 page 7 79 2 Select File gt New The Add Edit Subscriber Identifier window pops up cf Chapter 7 4 1 1 page 7 80 3 Fill the text fields with the desired values and click on Apply The new record will be added to the SID database The window remains open for further actions 4 Cl
160. shall be managed NAM R1 9 A 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations Configuration of the Up to 24 ROCs DS1 Navis AnyMedia SPLL service in the T1 Router Server GU LDS and associate to the DSO channel ie related to ROC _ ee lt DS1 link DS1s TRO8 TR303 Semi Permanent p T a Leased Lines 7 TOPI _ aie Configuration of the ROC ROC over onfiguration of the SPLL service Lo using TL1 commands we NE DS1s Figure A 5 ROC over semi permanent leased line for NAM A 6 2 Communication with remote NEs us ing inband ATM PVC The assumptions for this configuration are m There are data and telephony access technologies collocated in the same NE Data access is oriented to data applications and is based on asynchro nous transfer mode ATM over asymmetrical digital subscriber line ADSL access The data access consists of ADSL application packs and access feeder multiplexer AFM control cards which make the switching between ADSL access traffic and ATM networks using DS3 interfaces 24 channel market m There is an ATM network between central office and remote AnyMedia NEs m In this scenario ATM permanent virtual connections PVCs are used to communicate
161. single click on a non provisioned AP in the Shelf View window The Common AP window pops up Common Application Pack window has two radio buttons that allow the access to COMDAC View and AFM View Depending on which type of pack you want to provision you have to choose one of the view 2 Use the option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code to select the desired AP The corresponding AP window pops up IAT Server cf Chapter 6 3 10 page 6 39 Telephony AP cf Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 ONU for data agent cf Chapter 6 4 8 page 6 81 ADSL cf Chapter 6 4 4 page 6 60 SDSL cf Chapter 6 4 5 page 6 65 AFM cf Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 50 6 3 5 Telephony Application Pack window The APs provide the line side interface functionality that provide service to end users NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 21 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Telephony Application Pact Figure 6 10 Telephony Application Pack window This window contain all information related to the AP It can be displayed even when the pack is not inserted The displayed information differs depending on the type of service The following table shows the view edit options of the Telephony Application Pack window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE Name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot being used as telephony AP Possible values ap 1 1 16 subap 1 1 8
162. start up a DMG select an optional DMG in the table and The selected DMG is started up press Start Up The Administrative State of the DMG must be OFF shut down a DMG _ select an optional DMG in the table The selected DMG is shut down press Shutdown and confirm the shut down in the warning window which pops up The Administrative State of the package must be ON edit a DMG select the DMG and press Edit The Edit DMG window is displayed cf Chapter 3 4 5 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 23 System management System administration BE SeS 3 4 3 4 Administration of module groups Overview The module groups MGs tab in the System Administration window allows for re covering an MG Each displayed MG can be edited MG recovery A manual MG recovery should be made for an MG that is in the OOS state If a process of the MG is in the state OOS and its automatic recovery fails the OOS state is propagated to the MG level The workload of this MG could be distributed among the other MGs which then are overloaded but the OOS state would persist for the failed MG until a new recovery is instigated manually or automatically MGs information The table in the MGs tab displays the following information Table 3 13 MGs information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the MG ID The internally assigned ID of the MG Type The type of the MG Administrative State The administrative state of
163. system SEMMNU If the number appearing e g 30 is less than 200 edit the etc system file by add ing the following line at the end of the file set semsys seminfo_semmnu 200 Reboot the server workstation NAM R1 9 2 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure 2 2 Installation procedure General The NAM distribution includes one installation script per CD ROM called install_AMEM which shall be used in a full installation of the CD ROM it in cludes all packages stored on the distribution media Also the script can be used to install individual packages it will detect if any package is not installed and ask the user to install it cf Chapter 2 2 2 page 2 66 This guide shows the flow of the installation according to the interaction with the administrator using the installation script provided in the distribution Common tasks Common actions must be made in both cases as follows m You need to be logged on as root Get ready your distribution media Insert and mount Insert and mount the CD If the machine is running the vold it will recog the CDROM nize that the CD is in place and mount it on cdrom AnyMediaEMR19 depending on your system configuration cdrom AnyMediaEMR19 might have to be replaced with a different device name Depending on the configuration of vold you may have to append a trailing dot to refer ences to file names on the CD This i
164. take a long time and must be known by the operator They will be refreshed when the window is launched or when refreshing the whole window 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 6 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs 6 3 3 View the CTU parameters The CTU craft test unit provides both channel testing support and a termination for local operations administration maintenance and provisioning Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the CTU data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt CTU in the NE Browser and Edit via the cur sor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack CTU in Shelf View window The CTU window pops up Figure 6 8 CTU window This corresponding window contains all information related to the CTU It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the CTU window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 17 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information manon Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value CTU Serial Number 12 cha
165. telephony TL1 FTP over TCP based and data SNMP over UDP and FTP over TCP based management traffic between NAM and AnyMedia NEs m One ATM PVC will be used for every NE to be managed this ATM PVC carries IP packets related to both COMDAC and AFM management infor mation m ATM PVCs carrying management information related to one NE are origi nated in a LAN environment where NAM is located NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 A 9 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations ee m ADCN device is needed at the Central Office to make the translation be tween 10BaseT MAC amp LLC1 IP and DS3 ATM PVC AAL5 802 2 LLC 802 2 SNAP IP interface to the ATM network The LLC encapsulation method to be supported by that device is that described in RFC 1483 i e this method allows multiplexing multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit Fur ther this method carries connectionless network traffic over the ATM net work Note that this functionality if available can also be performed by the ATM switch connected by means of a LAN connection with the central of fice e g CBX 500 in these cases there is no need of a separate ATM router at the CO m AIMPVCwhich carries IP management information is carried over an ATM network and finally they are inserted in a related NE by means of DS3 data ports IP packets contained in the ATM PVC are extracted in the data AFM card which also support RFC 1483 Pa
166. the current state The following events set off error messages m The NE is not equipped for the requested protection switching i e the pro tecting slot is empty m The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the NAM m The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in progress m The forced switch is denied as the protecting slot is locked out m The manual switch is denied either because there is a higher protection switch active Inhibit Forced or because an automatic switch is already protecting that protected slot 5 6 10 5 Alarm configuration Configuring of the alarm severities is only possible via the cut through interface cf Chapter 5 6 15 page 5 95 The corresponding TL1 commands are available on line using the GSI help on AnyMedia Access System NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 77 NE management Network Element management ee 5 6 11 Network element software upgrade This function is subdivided into two parts NE software download for telephony and data agents and program copy only for telephony agent COMDAC 5 6 11 1 Network element software download telephony agent Overview There are two software versions the one in the active COMDAC and the new one to be downloaded must be placed in ANYMEDIA CM nefiles NVPS It is as sumed that the user has a copy of the software currently running in the active
167. the NAM alarm database At the end of the synchronization the alarms stored in the alarm database must be the same as the alarms retrieved from the NE AMS Only one synchronization per NE can be performed at the same time The AMS rejects any synchronization request for the same NE if the first one has still not finished 8 2 9 NAM alarm log handling lf the user wants to know the different states throughout the alarm life the user will have to see the Log System cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 46 in which all alarm changes are stored Nine types of logs are used The AMS logs the following situations m Actions lt contains all the information on actions performed by users or the NAM and which imply changes in the NAM configuration equipment NE config uration service and subscriber configuration access to the NAM print re ports and backup amp restore That means all operations triggered by the user or the NAM and all subsequent actions Also the results of operations are logged in the actions log m System Internal Events It contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the NAM or indicate errors which occurred in the NAM NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 9 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management ee Autonomous Reports It contains all TCAs Threshold Crossing Alert from NB and BB and all ac tions performed in the NEs that imply changes in the NAM da
168. the NE Time This represents a 24 hour clock function Timeslot Management Channel TMC This is a duplicated DSO data link that a TR 303 VRT and Local Digital Switch LDS use to exchange connection control information with each other as they set up and tear down DSO paths through the system on a per call basis TL1 Transaction Language 1 This is a bellcore standard message language It is the primary means of operating and maintaining the V5DLC system A TL1 message session supports bi directional message transmission and when a TL1 link is established the system can initiate autonomous messages to monitor alarms and changes in system status TR303 VRT TR303 Virtual Remote Terminal This refers to the logical portion of the NE that supports a single TR303 interface acting as a TR303 RDT Only one TR303 VRT can be supported in NE R1 2 NAM R1 9 GL 10 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Glossary U Upgrade Is a type of migration where the software release is changed from an earlier release to a later release Upload The process of moving information from a client to a server at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Intended applications of this capability are software updates and restoring databases User The operator who will use the EM to provision maintain and monitor the AnyMedia Access System User Identifier UID This is a unique user login identifier This string is required and cannot be null
169. the PTU message sets etc reside on the COMDAC The set of SLC channel units supported is shown below NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 5 5 NE management Overview of the controlled systems ee m SPQ429 Quad P phone CF m SPQ442 Quad E SPOTS CS m AUA41B 4W CF inventory ready m AUA45B ringing repeater manual ring down m AUA75 PLAR mw SPQ452 Dual Dataport OCU AUA200 SW 56 2W CU Adtran m AUA232 RS 232 Adtran m SPQ444 Single 4W CS w TDM m SPQ454 Single 4W E amp M Types amp II m MCU 5205 DC alarm CU Tollgrade m MCU 5405 DC bypass CU Tollgrade 5 2 1 2 Virtual remote terminals The AnyMedia Access System can be configured to be logically divided into a number of separate virtual terminals that provide three types of voice frequency service node interfaces TR 303 TR 08 and INA 5 2 1 3 OAMGP interfaces The AnyMedia Access System provides the following maintenance interfaces for operations administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P for telephony services EIA 232D m Local EIA 232D serial port on the CTU DTP100 in the AnyMedia Access System shelf to which a TL1 system interface TL1SI or CIT or a GSI can be connected This interface is typically used during initial installation LAN 10BaseT m A local LAN interface on the AnyMedia Access System shelf provides ac cess to an IEEE 802 3 compliant LAN through a 10BaseT connection All communications through this interface will be over Transmission Contr
170. the face plate of the inserted card with its LEDs if applicable Single clicking on any slot will launch the card specific window even when the card is not inserted NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 3 Equipment configuration 6 4 Issue 1 Shelf View The following tables shows the related sections where the packs are described Apparatus Code Described in COM101 COM102 NE Chapter 6 3 2 page 6 14 R1 7 2 FAC100 Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 10 DTP101 Chapter 6 3 3 page 6 17 02 2001 Card Type COMDAC lO DS1 CTU AP Telephony IAT Server MDSU only for to con nect subshelf AFM_DS3 AFM_OC3c ADSL SDSL Pack lIO DS1 FLT LPU116 LPASOO LPA380 LPA350 LPASOOB LPA300C LPA150 Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 LPS100 LPS104 LPS105 Chapter 6 3 10 page 6 39 MSU100 Chapter 6 3 9 page 6 36 LPA900 LPA901 Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 50 LPA920 Chapter 6 4 3 page 6 57 LPA400 LPA400B LPA408 LPA414 LPA416 LPS716 Chapter 6 4 5 page 6 65 The Shelf View window displays different colors for different types of LEDs The following table describes the colors that are used for each LED type inside every card type The table describes the colors used when the LED is ON or flashing If the LED is OFF the color black is used green CLF2 CLF3 CLF4 yellow yellow yellow Meanings m Lit during pack failure Chapter 6 4 4 page 6 60 m Flashes when the pack executes of
171. the option menu Views in the general information section cf Chapter 8 3 3 3 page 8 15 Response The alarms are displayed according to the selected view 8 3 4 3 Filters Summary For displaying the alarm lists you can select pre defined filters Only those alarms corresponding to the pre defined criteria are displayed The alarm set is displayed without modifying the current view The filters are m Alarms for the last 24 hours all alarms which have been changed in the last 24 hours m Critical Alarms m Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s m Owned Acknowledge Alarms Clear Alarms m All Acknowledge Alarms m None Filter All Alarms Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected filter criteria NAM R1 9 8 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Selecting Filter Proceed as follows to select the desired filter option Step Procedure 1 Select the desired filter option then select Filters gt Pre de If you want to view fined Filters all alarms which have been changed in the last 24 hours all critical raised Critical Alarms alarms Alarm monitoring Result Notes Alarms for the last 24 hours The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all raised alarms Raised Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all alarms from a host Al
172. the provisioned cards is shown The user can switch between the two views via two check box located below the shelf view of the window NAM R1 9 6 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Shelf View The following table describes the representation of the different slot states Description and Repre Trovisioned Viei provisioned in The type of the provisioned grey black grey black serted and match card is the same as the type of the inserted card provisioned in The type of the provisioned grey dark grey gray dark grey serted and mis card is different from the match type of the inserted card provisioned and not The operator has provi black black white inserted sioned this slot associating it to a type of card but no card is inserted in the slot not provisioned and No card type is preprovi grey dark grey gray inserted sioned in the slot but a card is inserted not provisioned and No card type is provisioned black black not inserted and no card is inserted in the slot provisioned notin No card is provisioned no black black grey serted and agent card is inserted in the slot type mismatch and there is mismatch between the telephony and the data agent gt NOTE Pack refers to the slot face plate Label refers to the apparatus code gt NOTE The NE does not send the match indication for a provisioned data AP The shelf view therefore indicates pro
173. the system The package lt LUOXNSRT gt is already installed on the system The package lt LuOSRT gt is already installed on the system The package s were already installed in the System Packages to install LuSysAdm LuAM LuBack LuFiBrow LUNER LuNBI LuLogg LuPerf LuPerCo LUNeED LuSec LuShelf LuSysED LuTrap LuPerTr LuTeSc LuMIB LuNPB LuSID System Adminis Processing package instance lt LuSysAdm gt from tration installation lt cedrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager System Administration Release 1 7 1 Administration sparc LuSysAdm_59_ 2 4 KKK KKK KK KKK KK He e e KK KEK ke ke KEKE KKK KKK k k k k k AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies KKK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK EKER KEKE KKK KKK k k k k k OK No previous package LuSysAdm has been found Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c0O2MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT 2 3c2 Package lt LuOXNSRT gt OrbixNames Version 1 1c NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 21 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixNames1 1ic Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time has been found in opt lucent LUMOS Package lt LuRWRT gt RogueWave Tools and Threads std0130u thr0130u t1s0710u tpr0112u has been found in opt lucent rw
174. the test management 8 2 Alarm management 8 2 1 Overview 363 211 497 The main function of the alarm management is to manage the Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 and network element NE related alarms that are reg istered in the element manager system EMS For the list of the alarms gener ated by the management system refer to Chapter 8 5 4 page 8 44 For the list of alarms concerning network element refer to Chapter 8 5 5 page 8 47 Once the communication connection between the NAM and an NE is established the NAM clears the not connected NE alarm indication if it exist and starts an alarms and environment alarms synchronization process between the NAM alarm database and active NE alarms Finally the NAM will try to update its view of NE configuration data and will start a synchronization process between the NAM data set and the NE configuration information NE NVDS The NE database is always the master NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 8 1 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management ME SS The database does not maintain the alarm history it only stores the current alarm statuses An alarm can be in one of the following states m Severity states m raised m cleared m Acknowledgment states m acknowledged m not acknowledged The main responsibilities of the alarm management subsystem AMS are the fol lowing 8 maintain up to date alarm information m notify alarm changes to alarm clients m provide a
175. to check the functions of the hardware Burst Load Load that can occur in certain well known circumstances where response times are no longer guaranteed but queues handle excess traffic After removing the causes of the burst load and a certain settling time normal oper ation is resumed During burst load there is a graceful degradation no loss of information only a queueing occurs to defer the load to a later moment Busy Hour Load Maximum load that is expected to occur in real life that must be handled with normal response times eee C Call Reference Value CRV This is a numeric value used to identify a logical line on a TR 303 Virtual Remote Terminal VRT in messages ex changed between the HDT and the TR 303 switch when setting up and tearing down individual calls For TR 303 VRTs the CRV is identical to the last field in the AID for a logical line e g 104 is the CRV for the logical line having AID v3dp 1 104 CRVs are numbered between 1 and 2048 A maximum of 768 provisioned logical lines are sup ported by the AnyMedia Access System A CRV can be uniquely associated with a single Distribution Port by set ting up a TO cross connection between that port and the logical line specified by the CRV Cross Connection Several types of cross connections are present in the AnyMedia Access System m T1 cross connections provide links between physical DS1 feeder ports and the logical feeder ports of the VRTs and INA Virtual Banks VB
176. unit EM4C Service Details Information Figure 7 25 Logical DSO window EM4C Service Details Parameters Description Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 25 5 step 0 1 Default 25 5 Receive Attenu This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 25 5 step 0 1 Default 25 5 Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle NAM R1 9 7 52 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o E S 7 2 4 18 ETO4 Service Details window Overview The ETO4 4 wire equalized transmission only function is used in private lines voice or data when equalization of cable transmission characteristics is required It is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit ETO4 Service Details Information Figure 7 26 Logical DSO window ETO4 Service Details Parameters Description Sealing Current When a check mark is set the channel unit applies a current from tip to ring or across the transmission lead simplex of the subscriber interface Possible values Set Not set Default Set Load Non Load his option menu can be used to select whether the transmit equalizer mast be loaded or no
177. via command line 3 18 3 4 3 System administration window 3 19 3 4 4 View distributed module groups of a package 3 26 3 4 5 Editing distributed module groups 3 27 3 4 6 Editing module groups 3 28 3 4 7 Contents of packages and distributed module groups 3 31 3 4 8 Changed NE software 3 33 3 5 Print out reports 3 34 3 5 1 Page Setup dialog 3 34 3 5 2 Print dialog 3 35 3 5 3 Preview Frame dialog 3 36 3 6 Backup and restore 3 38 3 6 1 Basics on backups and NAM databases 3 38 3 6 2 Commands for backup archive and restore 3 39 3 6 3 Backup archive and restore procedures 3 41 3 6 4 Examples for backup schedules 3 43 3 Log management 3 46 3 7 1 Different log types 3 46 3 7 2 Configuration of logs 3 46 3 7 3 Log Viewer window 3 47 3 8 Disaster recovery 3 53 4 User management 4 1 4 1 Introduction 4 1 4 2 User 4 3 4 2 1 Create user 4 3 4 2 2 Modify user 4 5 4 2 3 Delete user 4 7 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 V rr Contents 4 3 Domains 4 8 4 3 1 Create domains 4 8 4 3 2 Modify domains 4 10 4 3 3 Delete domains 4 12 4 4 User groups 4 14 4 4 1 Create user groups 4 14 4 4 2 Modify user groups 4 19 4 4 3 Delete user groups 4 24 4 5 Controlled objects 4 26 4 5 1 Modify controlled objects 4 26 5 NE management 5 1 5 1 Overview 5 1 5 2 Overview of the controlled systems 5 1 5 2 1 Network element R1 2 2 5 telephony 5 2 5 2 2 Network element R1 2 2 R1 2 3 and R1 7 0 telephony 5 8 5 2 3 Network element R1 7 1 telephon
178. via the cursor menu The ATM Cross Connection List window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 1 page 7 64 This window can also be reached from the xDSL Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 4 4 ADSL Chapter 6 4 6 SDSL or from the xDSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 ADSL Chapter 6 4 7 SDSL via ATM Cross Connections List 2 Click on Add The ATM Cross Connection window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 2 page 7 67 3 Use the option menu Network Physical Interface Id to select the net work physical interface type 4 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the xDSL drop in which you want to create a new AIM cross connection If the ATM Cross Connection window has been launched in another way see above an xDSL drop is already selected 5 Use the text fields Network Side and Drop Side to define the VPlIs and VCls 6 Use the text field to define a name for the cross connection and press Ap ply 7 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 7 70 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning data 7 3 4 Modify an ATM cross connection Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ATM cross connection Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt ATM Cross Connections List via the cursor menu The ATM Cross Connection List window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 1 page 7 64 2 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the drop for display in the cross connection lis
179. window 9 5 2 Modify the ATM traffic monitoring 9 6 Network profiles 9 6 1 Network Profiles List window 9 6 1 1 Add a network profile 9 6 1 2 Modify a network profile 9 6 1 3 Remove a network profile 9 6 2 Affected Objects window 9 6 3 ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window 9 6 3 1 Create an ADSL PM thresholds network profile 9 6 3 2 Modify the ADSL PM thresholds network profile 9 6 4 SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window 9 6 4 1 Create an SDSL PM thresholds network profile NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 je ok ff eh N is on T on vu on 7 N rm o a O h I ooh s M T h Oo EN h Oo CO a PN L oO co Si oO EA ok D iN ss D e h N 2 o0 a 0 I NO I NO l KN N U a N On 02 2001 9 I o rr Contents 9 6 4 2 Modify the SDSL PM thresholds network profile 9 25 9 6 5 ADSL Transmission Network Profile window 9 26 9 6 5 1 Create an ADSL transmission network profile 9 29 9 6 5 2 Modify the ADSL transmission network profile 9 29 9 6 6 SDSL Transmission Network Profile window 9 31 9 6 6 1 Create an SDSL transmission network profile 9 33 9 6 6 2 Modify the SDSL transmission network profile 9 34 9 6 7 ATM Traffic Network Profile window 9 35 9 6 7 1 Create an ATM traffic network profile 9 37 9 6 7 2 Modify an ATM traffic network profile 9 38 9 7 NE profiles 9 39 9 7 1 ADSL PM Threshold
180. window for parameter modification and to the Logical DS1 window for logical DS1 parameter and cross connection modification Physical DS1 List Figure 7 8 Physical DS1 List window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 7 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis ria played in the field Physical DS1 List m All The list displays all logical DS1s currently present in the NE for all VRT VBs m TR 303 TR 08 INA In all these cases a option menu is available showing the possible options Selection of one of these VRT VB ids automatically sets the corre sponding radio button If no VRT VB id is selected the radio button is not editable i e the user will not be able to set it gt NOTE For COT NE R1 2 3 VRT TR 303 is not possible and therefore the corresponding radio button is disabled Physical DS1 The information in this field is displayed in a table ee m Physical DS1 Id Displays the physical DS1 id within the VRT VB id Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 a Logical DS1 id Indicates the logical DS1 id within the VRT VB id Possible values v3fdr 1 2 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for
181. you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply 4 3 3 Delete domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a domain from the NAM Before re moving a domain please pay attention to the following remarks m The NAM administrator must have a system login m Before deleting a domain the NAM ensures that there are no controlled ob jects assigned to this domain If this is the case the deletion request will be rejected m After a domain deletion all related information will be removed from the NAM This does not include the devices NEs or any other type which are grouped in that domain or their information Furthermore the access per mission will be automatically unassigned from the user groups that had ac cess to this domain NAM R1 9 4 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management Domains Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a domain Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Domains via menu bar The Domains Table appears User Administration amp Profiling Domain Name Description Domain 1 Domain 1 description Domain 2 Domain 2 description Domain 3 Domain 3 description view domain Successful Figure 4 11 User Administ
182. 0 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install _AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb NAM R1 9 2 48 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkk Would you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 9 installation Please choose one or more Band mode separated by blank 1 LuAMBB112 lt BroadBand R1 1 2 installation gt 2 LUAMBB17 lt BroadBand R1 7 installation gt 3 LUAMBB14 lt BroadBand R1 4 installation gt Enter selection 7 7 q 4 Type 1 2 3 and press Return Packages to install LuAMBB112 LuAMBB17 LUAMBB14 NE data support for Processing package instance lt LUAMBB112 gt from R1 1 2 installation lt
183. 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed To assign further users to the selected user group select one or more users in the Users Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To a create user see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 3 To remove assigned users from the selected user group select one or more users in the Users Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE The last user of user group administrator is protected against deletions To give the selected user group access to further domains change to tab Do mains The window changes its display as shown below NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 4 21 User management User groups jgroup 2 kest group Domain 3 Figure 4 18 User Group Profile window tab Domains Select one or more domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 Removing from To disable the access to domains select one or more domains in the Domains domains Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all domains and this access permissions cannot be modified Adding To give the selected user group access to further applications change to tab
184. 01 9 15 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile This table lists the Name and Status of each profile List The Add Edit button provides access to the following win dows ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile cf Chapter 9 6 3 page 9 18 SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile cf Chapter 9 6 4 page 9 23 ADSL Transmission Network Profile cf Chapter 9 6 5 page 9 26 SDSL Trans mission Network Profile cf Chapter 9 6 6 page 9 31 ATM Traffic Network Profile cf Chapter 9 6 7 page 9 35 If a profile has been selected Edit if no profile has been selected Add The Remove button can be used to delete a profile from the list The button is enabled only if a row has been selected The Affected Objects button provides access to the Af fected Objects List window This button is enabled if the sta tus of the profile is Activated 9 6 1 1 Add a network profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a network profile Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Network Profiles via the cursor menu The Network Profile List window pops up 2 Use the option menu Network Profile Type to select the desired profile type 3 Click on Add The corresponding network profile window pops up 9 6 1 2 Modify a network profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify a network profile Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the N
185. 1 3 E A a Joj cel Figure 6 4 MDS2 Shelf View window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 7 Equipment configuration Shelf View f 934 RINGING eoe8sd TA Tiki EAH amp FLTWFLTWFLT FLT FLT 3 lt a FLT A uu U P P A A amp 4 a sy 4 3 Oo 3 2 G 6 4 CERES CEE ESE ERS Rcd CSTD CST ET ES eS EEE a lt a a FLT FLTWFLTWFLT A 5 CEM 2m CUT CUAL CUAL CU gC USPC Ue CUT Ua Clog ct e GE Witt Go Mite O a Le a Figure 6 5 MDS2B Shelf View window Single clicking on any slot will launch the card specific window cf Chapter 6 3 6 page 6 27 for MSC Chapter 6 3 7 page 6 29 for PTU Chapter 6 3 8 page 6 31 for CU MSC red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack LNK yellow m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is detected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is de tected PTU red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack TST Lit when a channel served by the PTU is under test gt NOTE The state of the LEDs on CU are not reported to the NAM These LEDs will permanently be shown in black For cards which need to be provisioned APs and IO_DS1s it is necessary to rep resent the slot state since the provisioned data may be different to the inserted card There are two possible views of this window m Inserted view apparatus codes of inserted cards are shown m Provisioned view apparatus code of
186. 1 8 for subshelf None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated on the previous list 1 x None is also al lowed x is the number of drops supplied by the server The Edit button provides access to the ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 or the SDSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 7 Network Side Two fields are used to define the VPI and VCI related to the cross connection on the network side These fields are available in creation mode Possible values for VP cross connections 1 255 for net work VPI Possible values for VC cross connections one of the shelf VPls for network VPI 33 1023 for network VCI NAM R1 9 7 68 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning data Parameters Buttons Parameters continued Operational State Apply 363 211 497 Description Drop Side Two fields are used to define the VPI and VCI re lated to the cross connection on the drop side These fields are available in creation mode Possible values for VP cross connections 0 255 for net work VPI Possible values for VC cross connections 0 255 for network VPI 1 1023 for port VCI Circuit Id This text field is used to identify the VP and VC cross connection ATM Traffic Network Profile This option menu is used to modify the ATM traffic network profile associated with a cross connection The list contains all network profiles
187. 1 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 11 Performance monitoring AFM feeder performance monitoring ee Parameters Buttons Description PM Thresholds The following parameters are applicable to all feeders PS Errored Second PSES These text fields show the PSES thresholds for 15 minute 1 day periods A PSES is a second with 44 or more PCVs or one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This gauge is not incremented when UASs are counted The maximum value for 15 minutes is 900 the maximum value for 1 day is 86 400 Unavailable Seconds UAS These text fields show the UAS thresholds for 15 minute 1 day periods The UASs are calculated by counting the number of seconds that the inter face is unavailable The maximum value for 15 minutes is 900 the maximum value for 1 day is 86 400 Apply This button is used to confirm the changes 9 4 3 1 Define AFM Feeder PM thresholds Procedure Complete the following procedure to define the feeder PM thresholds Step Procedure 1 Open the DS3 AFM window cf Chapter 6 4 1 1 2 Select the desired feeder and press Edit or double click on the row entry The DS3 AFM Feeder window pops up cf Chapter 6 4 2 3 Click on PM Thresholds The AFM Feeder PM Threshold window pops up 4 Use the corresponding text fields to define the desired thresholds and press Apply 5 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 9 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring AIM traff
188. 1 feeder which is used for managing the NE ROC over PLL results in loss of the management connection The connection can be re established only via GSI using the serial line of the CIU connector TL1 command RLS LPBK E1 e1 1 1 4 1 4 where e1 1 1 4 1 4 has to be replaced by the corresponding feeder id To avoid the loss of the management connection please make sure that the feeder you intend to test is not the feeder of the management interface Use the TL1 command RTRV ROC AID via GSI or the cut through con nection from the NAM to find out if the feeder is associated to the leased line roc interface Procedure Proceed as follows to set clear a DS1 loopback Step Procedure ie Open one of the following windows m AT Server Port Information window cf Chapter 6 3 12 m Physical DS1 window cf Chapter 7 2 3 1 2 Select the physical feeder where you intend the test to run 3 Click on Set Clear to change the loopback state If the loopback setting is service affecting a Warning window pops up for IAT Server Setting Loopback for a feeder can be service affect ing Do you want to continue for Physical DS1 Set or Clear Loopback may be service affecting Do you want to continue 4 Enter y and press Return to confirm NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 33 Fault management and maintenance Test management ME SS 8 4 2 Data tests 8 4 2 1 xDSL test list Procedure Proceed as foll
189. 10 11 and 12 please pay attention to Table 4 1 It pro vides an overview about the access permissions the user groups shall have Table 4 1 Assignment of user groups to applications tasks System Process Management Administrator Administration User Administration Access Policy Administrator amp Profiling Management Domain Management Administrator NAM R1 9 4 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User groups Table 4 1 Assignment of user groups to applications tasks Log Viewer Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Report Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarms Administrator Maintenance Monitoring ADSL Performance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring SDSL Performance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring AIM Performance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring ATM Traffic Statistics Administrator Maintenance Monitoring DS3 Feeders Perfor Administrator Maintenance mance Monitoring Alarm Viewer Alarms Acknowledge Administrator Maintenance Alarms View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarms Clear Administrator Maintenance Groups and NEs Equipment and Administrator Maintenance Management Service Provisioning Configuration View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Test Management Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Cut through Manage Administrator ment Groups and NEs Config Administrator Mainte
190. 11 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 15 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee C 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm En vironment C 3 3 1 C 3 3 2 C 3 3 3 tid ctag Purpose The RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment command instructs the sys tem to retrieve all currently active environment alarms Input format RTRV ALM ENV tid ctag ALMTYPE Abortable Yes Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None Input format parameters Target ID This parameter appears in the TID Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic Target ID is the name of the system to which the command is addressed Correlation tag This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic This field is used to associate the command message to the response message NAM R1 9 C 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ALMTYPE Alarm Type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type String Required No Default Type none min chars 0 max chars 0 Alarm type is not supported in this release and will be ignored C 3 3 4 Output format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID NTFCNCDE ALMTYPE OCRDAT OCRTM ALMMSG 7 C 3 3
191. 15 1A guinemanage NEslotUnsupported RELEASE _MAP_16 TAP100 guinemanage NEslotTAP Table 2 3 AnyMedia ini configuration file Name Description LV READLINES Line number of server log messages read in Log Viewer Possible values 1 to 50 Default value 50 NAM R1 9 B 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Contents C 1 Overview C 2 Northbound interface basics C 2 1 Northbound interface description C 3 Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 3 1 1 Purpose C 3 1 2 Output format C 3 1 3 Output format parameters C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 3 2 1 Purpose C 3 2 2 Input format C 3 2 3 Input format parameters C 3 2 4 Output format C 3 2 5 Output format parameters C 3 2 6 Generic error responses C 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment C 3 3 1 Purpose C 3 3 2 Input format C 3 3 3 Input format parameters C 3 3 4 Output format C 3 3 5 Output format parameters C 3 3 6 Generic error responses C 3 4 RTRV HDR Retrieve Header C 3 4 1 Purpose C 3 4 2 Input format C 3 4 3 Input format parameters C 3 4 4 Output format NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 C 1 A i oo a A ve aN rs AK ra Bay ee _ a n r a z y D T D 2 D v D i i v J NO O N E u a be a Ee NO NO 02 2001 CC OO OOOO OOOO O Contents C 3 4 5 Output format parameters C 22 C 3 4 6 Generic error res
192. 16 page 5 38 2 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 3 6 Remove an NE Select the NE in the Network Browser or on the background map and click on Remove in the cursor menu or select File gt Remove via the menu bar or click on the remove icon in the tool bar NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 35 NE management Connect a Network Element 5 5 Connect a Network Element 5 5 1 Add a network element The following steps are necessary to add an NE m Create NE m Assign Domain To add an NE the following requirements must be fulfilled m The PC based GSI is used to set the NE to a state where NVDS non vola tile data storage is populated with the minimum values i e target id IP ad dress user id m All these parameters are assumed to be known by the user The data communication network DCN link with the NEs is available cf Appendix A m Domains are already created cf Chapter 4 3 1 gt NOTE The windows shown in this chapter are merely meant as an example The contents text within a window as well as the window itself may slightly dif fer from the window as shown on your system Procedure Complete the following procedure to add an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the NE in the Network Browser or on the background map and New or Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt New or View gt Object via the menu bar or click on the open icon in the tool bar The Groups amp NEs window
193. 166 for more information 1 DK DENMARK 2 DE GERMANY 3 FR FRANCE 4 IT ITALY 5 CN CHINA 6 ES SPAIN 7 GB UNITED KINGDOM 8 US UNITED STATES Enter selection q 23 Type 8 and press Return Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Release 1 9 Client as lt LuGUI24 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt channels_24 gt Executing postinstall script kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Execute AnyMediaEM GUI sh to set the environment kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuGUI24 log Installation of lt LuGUI24 gt was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 9 was successful lt GUI side installation gt NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 65 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee 2 2 1 3 Post install actions 2 2 1 3 1 NAM server To be able to start up the server it is necessary previously to execute the following script lt AnyMedia_path gt cfg AnyMediaEM sh This would set all the necessary environment variables It is recommended to in clude this line in the user profile or to create an alias to facilitate the use 22 2 Installing individual packages The installation script install AMEM_ can be used to install in
194. 2 page 8 42 are updated The alarm information provided NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 8 7 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management ME SS by these agents can be different and with different formats The NAM will convert this information to a common format this common format is based on the ITU T Recommendation X 733 Special care has to be taken if the alarm is raised repeatedly see Repetitive and fluctuating alarms In this case the already existing alarm is put into the raised state The user acknowledge identification if available is removed from the alarm This way a raised condition of an existing alarm is considered as a new raising not a new alarm The number of occurrences is increased every time the same alarm is raised Repetitive and fluc A repetitive alarm is an alarm that is raised several times before it is cleared A tuating alarms fluctuating alarm is an alarm that is raised and cleared alternatively several times in a short period at least less than the NAM constant for the cleared alarms see Chapter 8 2 10 page 8 10 To handle these alarms three fields are defined and maintained for each alarm First Raised Time m Last Changed Time Number of Occurrences The alarm viewer can obtain the following information m The Number of Occurrences is the number of times the alarm has been raised between when it was first raised and the current time only the raised alarms are counted In thi
195. 2 2 Fault management The fault management supports the operator in detecting displaying localizing and logging any faults occurring in the managed network The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m handling of alarm severity critical major minor warning m reception of autonomous alarm messages m retrieval of alarms per NE pack application pack m retrieval of alarm and event logs from NE m initialization of tests for fault analysis purposes m filters to display pre selected alarm types only NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 3 Functional description Introduction ee 1 2 2 3 Performance management The performance management provides facilities for retrieving storing and print ing of the NE performance and data to ensure the quality of service 1 2 2 4 Security management The security management functions which are based on UNIX control the ac cess to the NAM and to the managed NEs The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m NAM user administration m NAM user security profile m No additional NE login for current NAM user NAM access via login name and password Inactivity user session time out 1 2 3 Applications The NAM provides 6 applications which give access to the management function ality as described in Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 The following applications are avail able m Sys
196. 2 3c02 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 9 sparc solaris Version 2 3c0O2MT Run Time OK No previous package LuOX23RT has been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail Capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 713 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11285 75525 13 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4313833 2211389 67 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1201856 56 1201800 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cdl1 500736 500736 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Where should Orbix be installed opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 q 10 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 13 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Checking your DNS domain name The DNS domain name found was es lucent com What is your DNS domain name default es lucent com q 11 Type your DNS domain name and press Return or press Return to ac cept the default name A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under t
197. 2 4 3 AP Telephony User Port IAT from NE R1 7 on IAT Server IAT Server Port from NE R1 7 on from NE R1 7 on page 7 34 SDSL Object F774 Windows with Network Browser f s lt several tabs ONU Subshelf _ window set of windows Figure 6 1 Screen navigation for equipment configuration NAM R1 9 6 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Shelf View 6 2 Shelf View The purpose of this window is to provide a simple graphical representation of the NE shelves in case of multiple shelves Procedure Complete the following procedure to display the shelf view Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf in the NE Browser and View via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar The Shelf View window pops up amp a ELTA LECTII LELT I O 4 I O 5 2 ame Soe CON tH COUN te C4Wr urn I O P I O 1 COM1 COM2 CTU AP 1 AP 2 AP 3 AP amp AP 5 AP 6 AP 7 AP 8 AP 9 AP 10 AP 11 AP 12 AP 13 AP 14 AP 15 AP 16 a Inserted View _ Provisioned View Figure 6 2 Shelf View window This window provides general inventory information as well as provisioning and alarm information through the LEDs Each slot will show either the apparatus code of the inserted card default view or the apparatus code provisioned in that slot provisioned view or otherwise no apparatus code If the slot is empty no card will be shown otherwise the slot will display
198. 28 J e T1 Cross o connections LOG FDR DS1 1 LOG FDR DS1 4 VRT IO DS1 5 INA VB Figure 7 9 T1 Cross connections NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 19 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BE SS 7 2 3 1 Physical DS1 window This window displays physical information of single physical DS1 and cross con nection information It provides access to the Logical DS1 window for adding or editing the logical DS1 depending on the cross connection state of the physical DS1 Physical DS1 Figure 7 10 Physical DS1 window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 7 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a Parameters Buttons Description Physical DS1 These fields display the physical DS1id by means of three option menus m The first menu contains the ds1 shelf ds1 1 m The second menu contains the slot number inside NE 1 5 m The third menu shows the feeders 1 4 inside the se lected slot Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Selecting a slot number second option menu results in an update of the third option menu feeder gt NOTE Feeder which are not yet cross connected are marked with a white background add function is possible the other feeders are marked with a grey background edit
199. 2LO R1 2 3 For these GSFNs the More Details but ton is disabled see below Logical DSO Id Three lines show the logical DSO id s by means of a option menu and a text field The option menu contains the VRT VB list the text field shows the logical DSO number inside the selected VTR VB A command button pro vides access to the Select Logical DSO window for adding or editing cross connections Possible values for the option menu v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 v3dp 1 2 1 2048 for TR 303 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA gt NOTE Existing DSOs are marked with a grey background edit function is possible for empty fields white back ground only the add function is possible The second line is available only when the GSFN field is populated with BRI not for TR 303 NO1 NO2 or OCU1 OCU2 OCU3 for a second entry in bundle logical DSOs The third line is available only when the GSEN field is popu lated with BRI not for TR 303 for a third entry in bundle log ical DSOs NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 35 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BE S Parameters Buttons Description Logical DSO Physical DSO Id These fields display the physical DSO id by General Infor means of three option menus mation contin ued m the first menu contains the drop shelf type drop 1 for AP m2drop 1 for MSD2 iatvdp 1 32 for IAT m the second menu contains the slot number inside the
200. 3 User management User groups Removing tasks To disable the access to one or more tasks select one or more tasks in the Tasks Assigned field and click lt lt Remove For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 gt NOTE If the task View is removed from the Alarm Management or Groups and NEs Management the remaining tasks from the respective application are no more possible but not removed gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all tasks and this access permissions cannot be modified 5 Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Ap ply 4 4 3 Delete user groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a user group from the NAM Before removing a user group please pay attention to the following remarks m The NAM administrator must have a system login m The administrator user group is protected against deletions After a user group deletion all related information is removed from the NAM This does not include the contained users or their information but these users will lose the ability to invoke the applications tasks devices and maps for which the user group had permission Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user group Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1
201. 3 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS 6 3 1 1 Configure IO_DS1 Complete the following procedure to modify the IO DS1 data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt FAC100 in the NE Browser and View via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack IO_DS1 in the Shelf View window The O DS1 window pops up If you want to then change the required slot state use the check box Slot Required in the field Operation amp Protection and click on Apply modify the protection scheme click on O DS1 Protection button to open the Shelf Protection window lO DS1 tab cf Chapter 5 6 10 3 page 5 74 add a logical DS1 select a Physical DS1 Id in the list with no cross connected logical DS1 id and press Add Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 The same result will be obtained by double clicking on the corresponding row edit a physical DS1 use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select Physical DS1 and press Edit The Physical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 1 page 7 20 edit a logical DS1 select a row with an existing cross con nection in the Physical DS1 Informa tion list use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select Logical DS1 and press Edit The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 13
202. 3 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 41 System management Backup and restore BE SeS Different users When different users perform backup archive or restore operations the system will display a message asking whether temporary data which remained from the previous user should be deleted If such a message is displayed you must confirm the deletion of these data 3 6 3 1 Backup procedure The backup operation needs no user interaction after the backup command was executed 3 6 3 2 Archive procedure The archive operation needs no user interaction after the archive command was executed 3 6 3 3 Restore procedure 3 6 3 3 1 General Default locations When a backup is restored all files are restored to their original location When for restored data archives are restored they are copied into the directory restored relative to the main installation directory Restore one of sev When more than one backup is placed on a tape and a particular one shall be re eral backups from stored the name of this backup must be known and the tape must be positioned tape at the beginning of this backup The name can be determined by using the tar command For example tar tv dev rmt Omn The positioning is done as described below Position tape If you know the order of the backups on tape you can position the tape at the be ginning of the desired backup as follows Rewind the tape e g with mt f dev rmt Om rewind and issue a tar command see exa
203. 4 27 Remove VRT VB logical DSO Subscriber 7 62 7 3 Service provisioning data 7 64 7 3 1 ATM Cross Connections List window 7 64 7 3 2 ATM Cross Connections window 7 67 7 3 3 Add an ATM cross connection 7 70 7 3 4 Modify an ATM cross connection 7 71 7 3 9 Remove an ATM cross connection 7 71 7 3 6 AFM Feeder VPs List window 7 12 1 3 7 AFM Feeder VP window 7 74 7 3 7 1 Add an AFM feeder VP 7 75 7 3 7 2 Modify an AFM feeder VP 7 75 7 3 7 3 Add a Shelf VP 7 75 7 3 7 4 Modify a Shelf VP 7 76 7 3 8 AFM Global Parameters window 7 77 7 3 8 1 Modify the AFM global parameters 1 18 7 4 Subscriber Identifier 7 79 7 4 1 Subscriber Identifier window 7 79 NAM R1 9 7 II Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Contents 7 4 1 1 Add Edit Subscriber Identifier window 7 80 7 4 1 2 Add a subscriber identifier 7 81 7 4 1 3 Edit a subscriber identifier 7 81 7 4 1 4 Delete a subscriber identifier 7 82 7 4 2 Manage the SID database 7 82 7 4 2 1 Commands for managing the SID database 1 83 7 4 2 2 Input file format 1 84 7 4 3 Hints for the administrator 7 84 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 A SSS Contents NAM R1 9 7 IV Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning 7 1 Introduction This chapter describes the service provisioning possibilities of the Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 It addresses the following topics m Screen navigation m Service provisioning telephony m Service provisioning data Modification o
204. 40 Possible values for downstream 32 13120 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 27 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile The following four parameters are enabled only if the Type Information of Rate Adaptation is explicit Options Rate continued Bit Rate Option 1 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 1 bit rate Possible values for upstream 32 1440 Possible values for downstream 32 13120 m Bit Rat Option 2 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 2 bit rate Possible values for upstream 32 1440 Possible values for downstream 32 13120 Bit Rate Option 3 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 3 bit rate Possible values for upstream 32 1440 Possible values for downstream 32 13120 m Bit Rate Option 4 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 4 bit rate Possible values for upstream 32 1440 Possible values for downstream 32 13120 Latency Two option menus upstream and downstream al low the following values to be selected Interleaved Fast Parity Bytes per RS These two option menus upstream and downstream allow the following values to be selecte
205. 5 2 Clicking on one of the column headers sorts the inventory data according to the column entries Clicking again reverses the sort order 3 Click on Close to exit the window 5 6 8 Network element working mode Selection of the working mode via GUI is not yet implemented It is only possible via Cut Through interface cf Chapter 5 6 15 page 5 95 using TL1 commands Set CFG ISDN SW CFG The system supports an active system configuration which is currently used and a standby system configuration which is set with the command Set CFG ISDN Possible values for the configurations are POTS or POTS ISDN Mixed The standby system configuration is activated with the switch configuration com mand SW CFG NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 67 NE management Network Element management ee 5 6 9 Simplex COMDAC protection scheme Overview The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode or duplex mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then the alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Required and the NAM is not able to change it until one of the COMDACs is removed When a COMDAC is removed the NAM is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled simplex 5 6 9 1 COMDAC window COMDAC Window Figure 5 26 COMDAC window This window includes hardware and software data inventory as well as the oper ational and protection state The Inventory Information fie
206. 5 Frame Discard This option menu is used to de fine whether to discard entire frames during conges tion rather than a few cells from many frames Possible values Yes No m Cell Tagging This option menu is used to specify whether to tag nonconforming cells i e change CLP 0 to CLP 1 Otherwise nonconforming cells will be dropped Possible values Yes No This field is dis abled if CLP 0 1 NAM R1 9 9 36 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile PCR CDVT nsec This text field is used to specify the Cell Information Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT corresponding to the PCR continued when a connection is provisioned Possible values 680 1330000000 SCR CDVT nsec This text field is used to specify the CDVT corresponding to the SCR when the SCR for a con nection is provisioned Possible values 680 1330000000 Two text fields upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the following parameters m Peak Cell Rate PCR cps Possible values for up stream 75 5424 Possible values for downstream 75 14500 Sustainable Cell Rate SCR cps Possible values for upstream 1 3250 Possible values for down stream 1 11000 Maximum Burst Size MBS cells Possible values for upstream 1 100 Possible values for downstream 1 210 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes Comma
207. 5 Output format parameters AID Access identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes AID is the access identifier of the contact closure Abbreviation Meaning mc 1 1 8 Miscellaneous Contact Closure NTFCNCDE Notification code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 17 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee NTFCNCDE is the alarm level Abbreviation Meaning CR Critical Alarm MJ Major Alarm MN Minor Alarm ALMTYPE Alarm type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes Alarm Type Use alarm type instead of condition type for RTRV ALM ENV Abbreviation Meaning ACF AC Loss AC Input Power Failure BD Battery on Discharge FAN Fan Unit Failed MISC1 Miscellaneous 1 MISC2 Miscellaneous 2 MISC3 Miscellaneous 3 MISC4 Miscellaneous 4 MISC5 Miscellaneous 5 MISC6 Miscellaneous 6 MISC7 Miscellaneous 7 MISC8 Miscellaneous 8 MJF Fuse Major MNF Fuse Minor NONE None PMJ Power Major PMN Power Minor PWR One of the 48V power feeds failed TAMPER Intrusion Door Open NAM R1 9 C 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages a OCRDAT Occurrence date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes This indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year
208. 52 2320 Kbps The following parameter is enabled only if the Type of Rate Adaptation is explicit Explicit Bit Rate kbps This option menu allows to the operator select the Explicit Bit Rate Possible val ues 144 272 400 528 784 1168 1552 2320 Kbps m Tx Rx Scramble This option menu allows to the oper ator enable the SDSL Scramble function Possible val ues Enable Disable m COSET This option menu allows to the operator en able the SDSL COSET function Possible Values En able Disable NAM R1 9 9 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles E SS Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile ATM Cell Scramble This option menu allows the oper Information ator to enable the SDSL ATM Cell Scramble function continued Possible Values Enable Disable The Apply button is used to confirm the changes The win dow remains open for further use Command but The Affected Objects button provides access to the Af tons fected Objects window This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated The Resynchronize button can be used to force the re syn chronization of the selected profile with all the AFMs cur rently controlled by the NAM This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated 9 6 6 1 Create an SDSL transmission network profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to create an SDSL transmission network profile St
209. 6 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Enter install directory opt lucent rw q 8 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q 9 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff has been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information NAM R1 9 2 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure Processing system information Installing RogueWave Libraries Runtimes for AnyMedia EM R1 9 as lt LURWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuRWRT 1log Installation of lt LuRWRT gt was successful OrbixMT 2 3c patch Processing package instance lt LuOX23RT gt from 02 installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt Orbix
210. 6 3 12 page 6 47 The Remove Cross Connection button removes the cross connection selected in the list see above 6 3 10 1 Modify an IAT Server Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the IAT server data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Mainshelf gt IAT Server in the NE Browser and View via the cursor menu or single click on the pack IAT Server in Shelf View window The AT Server window pops up 2 Use the option menu Slot Id to select the desired IAT If you want to then unprovision the IAT server use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 change the required state use the check box Slot required add a cross connection select a row in the Physical Server Port Information list with no cross connection and press Add Cross Con nection The Subshelf window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 11 page 6 43 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 41 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee If you want to then edit a cross connection select a row in the Physical Server Port Information list with an existing cross connection use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select Cross Connection and press Edit The Subshelf window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 11 page 6 43 edit a physical port select a row in the Physical Server Port Informati
211. 7 System management Backup and restore ee 3 6 Backup and restore The backup functions of the NAM allow you to copy NAM related file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption The NAM system files and database backup allows to back up and restore system files and databases belonging to the installed applications e g configuration files Archiving is possible for NAM log files The restore functions allow you to restore file systems by copying reasonably cur rent backup files from removable media to a working directory 3 6 1 Basics on backups and NAM data bases Definitions The following table gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Table 3 26 Definitions Term Meaning Backup process of copying file systems to removable media Such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption Archive process of copying file systems to removable media Such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed Up Restore process of copying backup files from removable media to a work ing directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged Full Backup copies a complete file system or directory Incremental copies new files and files that have changed since a previous Backup backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines which files are backed up A certain level incre mental backup will save all th
212. 7 step 1 Default O This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 This slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 7 55 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 7 24 20 OCU 1 2 3 Service Details windows Overview The OCU 1 2 3 office channel unit dataport 1 2 or 4 data rates is applicable to the SPQ452 dual OCU data port which is primarily used in an end link of a DDS private line data service ee OCUL Service Details Information GoFN cUi _ All Zero Code _ Secondary Channel _ Quality Monitoring Subseriber Data Rate Error Correction OK Close Reload Successful ervice Details Information 192 f None Figure 7 28 Logical DSO window OCU 1 Service Details Parameters All Zero Code Secondary channel Quality Monitor ing 7 56 Issue1 02 2001 Description All Zero Code allowed when a check mark is set the chan nel unit will not allow a word containing 8 zeros to be sent to ward the digital facility Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCUS Set Secondary channel used when a che
213. 8 1 8 1 x or drop 1 0 19 1 x for BAIU None is also allowed x is the number of drops supplied by the server NAM R1 9 9 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring SDSL performance monitoring data E SS Parameters Buttons Description Log All PM This check box can be used to define whether the NAM is Drops Data collecting and logging the performance monitoring data for all the SDSL drops in the NE or not Performance Upstream Four text fields show the values for four different Monitoring time periods Current 15 min Previous 15 min Current day Previous day m Errored Seconds ES Possible values 0 900 for 15 minutes 0 86400 for one day m Loss of Signal LOS Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day m High Bit Error Rate HBER Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day Loss of Frame LOF Possible values 0 90 for 15 minutes 0 8640 for one day Valid Data Four check boxes show whether the data for the time period are reliable or not The Get button is used to retrieve the PM data of the se lected drop The Reset Counts button can be used to restart the perfor mance monitoring of the selected drop The Reset All Drops Counts button can be used to restart the performance monitoring of all SDSL drops within the NE 9 3 2 Modify the SDSL performance moni toring Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify t
214. 9 OK No previous package LuPerCo has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Performance Monitoring Release 1 9 Administration as lt LuPerCo gt Installing part 1 of 1 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 31 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 PerformanceConfig bin PCDbCreate opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 PerformanceConfig bin StatConfig opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 PerformanceConfig db PCDSchema adb verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 Object Store path set to LuOSRT ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 3 5 1 SP2 Run Time bin 1ib osversion Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c0O2MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Creating data bases Starting PCDbCreate process exit OK 25073 Killed orbixd daemon pid 25073 has been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install _ LuPerCo log Installation of lt LuPerCo gt was successful NE Event Distribu Processing package instance lt LuNeED gt from tor installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24
215. 97 NE management Groups and NEs management The following table shows the view edit options of the group parameters Parameters Buttons Description Group Name This option menu shows all defined group names belonging Selection to the user domain The first option is NEW If NEW is se lected all parameters within the fields Group Identification and Group Representation are deleted for a new definition Group Identifi Group Name This text field shows the selected group name cation or is empty in case of NEW is selected Parent Group This option menu shows all defined group names of the system One of them must be selected to en able the creation of a subordinate group Group Background Map This text field is used to enter the path to Representation the map related to the group Browse This button is used to open the File Browser win dow in order to select the background map Group Icon This text field is used to enter the path to the icon related to the group Browse This button is used to open the File Browser win dow in order to select the icon X Coord This text field is used to set the x coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Y Coord This text field is used to set the y coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Apply This button is used to confirm the changes The button is available only if the Group Name is present NAM R1 9
216. 97 Issue 1 02 2001 9 25 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee If you want to then modify the profile data use the option menu Network Profile Pattern to display the profile data use the text fields in the field Network Profile Data to modify the parameters and click on Apply view the affected objects click on Affected Objects button which is only available if the profile is in status Activated The Affected Objects window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 2 not possible for the default profiles page 9 18 resynchronize the profile with all con use the option menu Status to select trolled AFMs Activated if necessary and click on Resynchronize 3 Click on Close to exit the window 9 6 5 ADSL Transmission Network Profile window This window is used to create view modify ADSL transmission network profiles ADSL Transmission Network Profile Figure 9 10 ADSL Transmission Network Profile window NAM R1 9 9 26 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles E SS The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile This option menu contains all the ADSL transmission net work profiles for editing existing in the NAM and the entry New Network Profile for creating a new profile Default profiles are available These profiles cannot be modi fied Network Profile Network Profile Name This text field show
217. A 1 File Transfer Protocol TL ee cei used for cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 RS232 RS232 Figure A 1 COMDAC R1 4 remote access to CIT port protocol profiles 363 211 497 External system LAN interface LAN interface is available via the shelf connection panel SCP connector on the AnyMedia Access System Mainshelf It provides access to an IEEE 802 3 compliant LAN through a 10BaseT connection All communications through this interface occur over the transmission control protocol internet protocol TCP IP to the GSI or NAM The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 2 page A 4 NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 A 3 Data communications network DCN configuration NE communication capabilities TL1 over TCP COMDAC File Transfer Protocol TL1 over Telnet also SNMP AFM COMDAC and AMF used for cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 UDP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 at layer 2 at layer 2 10BaselT at layer 1 10Basel at layer 1 10BaselT at layer 1 Figure A 2 AnyMedia external LAN interface profiles Remote Operations Channel ROC ROC is a 64 kbps timeslot within the payload of a DS1 link bound to a feeder of the network element The AnyMedia Access System provides ac cess for a remotely located OS if it communicates via TCP The protocol profile in the NE for this s
218. AFM must be pro visioned On the AFM a routing table must be configured i e so that IP packets related to the COMDAC are forwarded to the AFM LAN port and IP packets related to the AFM are terminated at the AFM The user must connect the AFM LAN port with the COMDAC LAN port located on the SCP of the AnyMedia Mainshelf by means of an Ethernet cross over cable A 6 2 3 Navis AnyMedia server configuration The NAM server configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1 3 page A 7 A 6 2 4 Navis AnyMedia client configuration The NAM client configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1 4 page A 8 A 6 2 5 Transport elements configuration The ATM switches which will transport the ATM PVCs carrying the IP manage ment traffic need to be provisioned i e a table must be provisioned in these switches saying that the cells from a specific VPI VCI are related to a VPI VCI pair in another interface The ATM router and AnyMedia Access System must be at tached to the ATM network by using DS3 links for the ATM router other links may also be used e g DS1 STM 1 OC 3 etc If the switch supports directly NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 A 11 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations ee RFC1483 a direct LAN connection between the switch and the CO LAN environ ment must be provisioned in this case there is no need of ATM router at the CO side lf SDH ADMs are used the
219. Adm_59_ 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuSysED has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager System Even Dist Release 1 7 1 administration as lt LuSysED gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuSysED gt was successful Trap Dispatcher in Processing package instance lt LuTrap gt from stallation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Trap Dispacher Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuTrap_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuTrap has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information NAM R1 9 2 36 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Trap Dispatcher Release 1 7 1 Administration as lt LuTrap gt Installing p
220. BR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 q 17 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected What is the AnyMediaEM Server Host masc216 q 18 Type the host name where the AnyMedia NAM servers were installed and press Return or press Return to accept the default name masc216 Wait Login for CutThrough functionallity q 19 Type a valid log in of an NAM user and press Return NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 63 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Password for CutThrough functionallity q 20 Type a valid password of the same NAM user and press Return The name of the location where the EM is working 1s needed for printing facility What is the name of the location q The location name will appear in the document header of the printing fa cility 21 Type your NAM location name e g Tres Cantos Lab and press Return Code for the representation of names of languages Refer to ISO 639 1988 E F for more information 1 da Danish 2 de German 3 f French 4 it Italian 5 zh Chinese 6 es Spanish 7 en English Enter selection q 22 Type your language code e g 7 and press Return Code for the representation of names of countries NAM R1 9 2 64 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Refer to ISO 3
221. C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 3 1 1 Purpose A REPT ALM Report Alarm message is generated autonomously by the NE to report the occurrence of an equipment facility or system alarm condition to the OS NAM and CIT An alarm condition reported via the REPT ALM message has a corresponding REPT ALM clearance message that is generated when the alarm condition clears Abortable No Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None C 3 1 2 Output format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time AC atag REPT ALM AIDTYPE AID NTFCNCDE CONDTYPE SRVEFF OCRDAT OCRTM CONDDESCR C 3 1 3 Output format parameters AID Access identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes AID is the address of the equipment or facility for which an alarm is being re ported Abbreviation Meaning ap 1 1 16 Application Pack comdac 1 1 2 COMDAC Ctu 1 Craft Test Unit cu 1 1 24 Channel Unit NAM R1 9 C 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages a Abbreviation Meaning drop 1 1 16 1 32 Drop ds1 1 1 5 1 4 DS1 narrowband port feeder side ext 1 1 2 External DS1 Synchronization lat 1 32 Integrated Access Terminal latfdr 1 32 1 1 Integrated Access Terminal iatsp 1 1 16 1 2 Integrated Access Termina
222. COMDAC NVDS Backup window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 6 14 5 page 5 94 to select create the directory example of the file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt COMDAC R1 and the file name of the backup file gt NOTE Do not insert any blank in the backup file name Such a file cannot be re stored 3 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field File name in the COMDAC NVDS Backup window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the backup An n Progress window pops up NVDS Backup on lt NE NAME gt in progress After finishing the backup process successfully the In Progress window disappears 5 Press Close to exit the COMDAC NVDS Backup window gt NOTE Pressing the Close button during the backup execution will cancel the backup operation NAM R1 9 5 90 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS 5 6 14 2 Data restore telephony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data restore from a telephony agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Restore gt Telephony via cursor menu The COMDAC NVDS Restore window pops up COMDAC MVIS Restore Figure 5 36 COMDAC NVDS Restore window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 6 14 5 page 5 94 to select t
223. COMMUNICATION_LOST Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the data agent NAM R1 9 8 48 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms Possible cause s Heart beat messages are not responded to by the data agent Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct data agent state Yes Continue with step 2 No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 2 Check for DCN being in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 5 COMM_PROBLEM Meaning The data agent does not respond the NAM while trying to establish a communica tion Abbreviation COMM PROBLEM Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects lt is not possible to manage the data agent Possible cause s Invalid IP address Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for DCN being in service Yes Continue with step 2 No Put the DCN into service 2 Check the IP address of the data agent Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Correct the IP address NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 49 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 6 COMM_RES_NOT_AVAILABLE
224. D1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 9 sparc LUAMBB14_ 59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager x c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkk NAM R1 9 2 52 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 AnyMedia EM R1 9 path opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuAM gt Alarms LuAM 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNER gt NER LuNER_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNeED gt NetEvenDist LuNeED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSec gt Security LuSec_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuShelf gt ConbinedShelf LuShelf_ 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSysED gt SystemEventDist LuSysED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuTrap gt SystemEventDist LuTrap_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time has been found in opt lucent LUMOS OK No previous package LUAMBB14 has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processin
225. DS1 id If there is no cross connection this field is empty Add Logical DS1 This button provides access to the Log ical DS1 window to add a new logical DS1 to the selected physical DS1 The button is available only if there is no logi cal DS1 cross connection to the selected physical DS1 Edit Logical DS7 This button provides access to the Log ical DS1 window to edit the logical DS1 parameters The but ton is available only if there is a logical DS1 cross connec tion to the selected physical DS1 Remove Logical DS1 Removes the selected physical DS1 logical DS1 cross connection Operational The Operational State shows the service state obtained State from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button The Get button is used to retrieve the service states NAM R1 9 7 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a 723s Modify the physical DS1 The Physical DS1 window can be reached from the IO DS1 window cf Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 10 Logical DS1 window cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 and Physical DS1 List window Chapter 7 2 2 page 7 16 Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the physical DS1 Step Procedure if Use the option menus Physical DS1 id to select the desired feeder If you want to th
226. Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 7 64 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning data Parameters Buttons Drop Id ATM Cross Con nections List 363 211 497 Description These fields display the physical drop id by means of three option menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 All or None is also al lowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an xDSL pack is in serted Format 1 16 for FAST shelf 0 19 for BAIU shelf or 1 8 for subshelf All or None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated in the previous list 1 x All or None is also allowed Format drop shelf slot drop Possible values for FAST drop 1 1 16 1 x Possible values for BAIU drop 1 0 19 1 x Possible values for subshelf subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x None is also allowed depending on the ADSL type x can be 4 8 16 or 32 Selecting a drop updates the cross connection table unless None is selected in one of the related option menus Please note the following relation between the associated option menus drop number can be selected only if a slot number has been selected beforehand and a slot number can be selected only if a shelf subshelf has been selected beforehand This list shows the cross connection param
227. E Browser and List gt Network Profiles via the cursor menu The Network Profile List window pops up 2 Use the option menu Network Profile Type to select the desired profile type 3 Select the desired profile in the Network Profile list and click on Edit The corresponding network profile window pops up NAM R1 9 9 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles 9 6 1 3 Remove a network profile gt NOTE Default profiles cannot be deleted Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a network profile Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Network Profiles via the cursor menu The Network Profile List window pops up 2 Use the option menu Network Profile Type to select the desired profile type 3 Select the desired profile in the Network Profile list and click on Re move 4 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 17 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee 9 6 2 Affected Objects window This window is used to show the number of affected objects of the selected net work profile It can be reached from the following windows ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile ADSL Transmission Net work Profile SDSL Transmission Network Profile ATM Traffic Network Profile H Affect Objects Network Profile Hame Default ADSL Full Explicit WE R17 Network Profile Type ADSL Transmission
228. Es the da tabase and the external OS NAM client Formats the display of the application screens and manages the users ses sions with the application e g database access Conceptional Figure 1 4 is a conceptual representation of the various generic components representation GUI NAM client User AnyMedia server database sieni NAM System Figure 1 4 Hardware components NAM R1 9 1 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture Examples of Two examples of an NAM system are shown in Figure 1 5 NAMs NAM system 1 NAM system 2 client client client NAM server NAM server Figure 1 5 Examples of NAMs 1 3 2 2 Requirements Server clients A SUN SOLARIS work station can be used as NAM server as well as NAM client Peripherals The NAM system may use a number of peripherals with the following tasks m CD ROM Used for installing the system software m Tape drive or another removable device optional Used for backup and restore functions m Printer Used for obtaining hard copies e g configuration alarm reports or perfor mance monitoring measurement information NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue1 02 2001 1 21 Functional description Working with NAM 1 4 Working with NAM Goal of this This chapter will outline the management activities and processes in the NAM chapter The main emphasis is on presenting everyday ope
229. Explicit default Flexible Options Rate The parameters in this field are enabled or disabled depending on the selected value in the Type of Rate Adaptation field The following two parameters are en abled only if the Type of Rate Adaptation is Flexible m Max Bit Rate kbps Two numeric fields upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the maximum bit rate m Min Bit Rate kbps Two numeric fields upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the minimum bit rate The following four parameters are enabled only if the Type of Rate Adaptation is explicit Bit Rate Option 1 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 1 bit rate m Bit Rat Option 2 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 2 bit rate Bit Rate Option 3 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 3 bit rate Bit Rate Option 4 kbps Two numeric fields up stream and downstream can be used to define the val ues for the option 4 bit rate Latency Two fields upstream and downstream show the value Interleaved Parity Bytes per RS These two fields upstream and down stream show the following values to be selected 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 These fields are enabled only if the Type of Rate Adapta tion is Explicit NA
230. FM Software Download window AFM Sh Download SHELF17_BB ot pees pel ejye Figure 5 31 AFM Software Download window This window provides the functionality needed to download files to an NE or toa set of NEs with data agent The following table shows the parameters of this win dow Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Two radio buttons are used to define the target of the down ria load file Single The target is the pre selected NE only its name is in the Selected NEs list see below The Add and Remove buttons are disabled Multiple The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs By means of the Add button the NEs can be moved to the Se lected NEs list NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 83 NE management Network Element management ee Parameters Buttons Description Target The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs with data agents sorted alphabetically The Selected NEs list shows all NEs to which the download is being done The Add gt gt button can be used to move the selected NE from the Available NEs list to the Selected NEs list The lt lt Remove button can be used to remove domains from the Selected NEs list The Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove button are available only after having selected an NE from the corresponding list Three radio buttons can be used to define the download pro cedure m FTP only only download Activate after next reboo
231. Grouping of UID string values for this command is not allowed The valid UID value is a 3 to 10 case sensitive alohanumeric character string User Module A module that provides an interface to the users or to other external systems to the AnyMedia EM functionality V VB Virtual Bank This is the entity that groups a feeder and various drops for permanent leased line services in a simi lar way to the VRTs for switched traffic W Workload or Load A mix of actions and their frequencies from all possible input points that need processing in some way in the sys tem Z Z port A Z port is circuitry built on a POTS AP to provide a Z interface for analog subscribers Note that more than one Z port is housed on an AnyMedia POTS AP e g the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Z port for transmission only This is a Z interface normally used for services other than telephony e g data transmission This type of Z inter face does not support DC feeding and does not support out band signaling This interface can support Analog Leased Line ALL service NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 GL 11 Glossary B NAM R1 9 GL 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Index A Access bar 3 4 Access protection 1 30 Access to the testroutines 8 26 Actions 1 15 3 46 AGENT _NP_SYNC_ PROBLEM 8 44 Alarm log 1 27 monitoring 1 25 Classification 8 42 Alarm Reporting 8 3 Alarm Severities 8 43 Alarm Viewer Alarm Table 8 16 General I
232. ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code lists all AP Info types available for the NE release in the view selected COMDAC or AFM The default value is NONE so this window is launched when there is not any provisioned pack in the selected slot It shows only telephony or data APs depending on the view se lected COMDAC or AFM Once the operator has selected the provisioned apparatus code pack type this window will be replaced by the specific AP window e g IAT Server window Possible values for telephony None IAT Server Possible values for data None ADSL SDSL AFM NAM R1 9 6 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs 6 3 4 1 Provisioning a slot via common AP Procedure Complete the following procedure to provision a non provisioned slot Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf Subshelves gt not provisioned AP in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or
233. INA The Add Logical DS1 button is available only if a VRT VB id has been selected without cross connection to a logical DS1 and the maximum number of logical DS1s has not yet been created max 4 for TR 08 max 20 for TR 303 max 1 for INA This button provides access to the Logical DS1 window to add a new logical DS1 Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Edit button access to different windows Physical DS1 win dow Logical DS1 window Edit Physical DS is always available Edit Logical DST is available only if the selected physical DS1 is cross connected to the a logical DS1 The Remove Logical DS button can be used to remove the physical DS1 logical DS1 cross connection selected in the list NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 17 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee 7 2 2 1 Modify the physical DS1 list Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the physical DS1 list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Physical DS1 via the menu bar The Physical DS1 List window pops up This window can also be reached from the VAT VB List window cf Chapter 7 2 1 1 page 7 6 and the VRT VB windows Chapter 7 2 1 3 page 7 8 Chapter 7 2 1 5 page 7 12 Chapter 7 2 1 7 page 7 14 2 Use the radio buttons in the Selection Criteria field to choose a desired VRT VB If you want to then add a logical DS1 select the desired physica
234. K Keyboard 3 5 Keys special Alternate 3 5 Backspace 3 5 Control 3 5 Delete 3 5 Escape 3 5 Return 3 5 ee L LAN interface external system A 3 Life cycles network 1 22 List box 3 14 Log alarm 1 27 Log alarms 3 47 Log management 3 46 Log out workspace menu 3 12 NAM R1 9 IN 2 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Index Log size 3 46 Log type Actions 1 15 3 46 Autonomous Reports 1 15 3 46 8 10 System Internal Events 1 15 3 46 8 9 Log Viewer application 3 47 LOG DEL FULL 8 44 LOG DEL PART 8 45 Login 3 2 5 38 Logout manually from System 3 3 Loopback Test 8 33 LUMOS Installation 2 9 M MDS2 shelf 5 4 MDS2B Shelf 5 4 5 5 MDS2B Shelf View 6 7 Menu Actions 8 14 File 8 13 8 19 Filters 8 14 8 20 Help 8 14 Views 8 14 Menu bar 3 10 menu bar 5 19 Menus often used File gt Exit 3 15 File gt Print 3 15 Help gt Index 3 15 Help gt On Window 3 15 Metallic Distribution Shelf 5 4 Metallic Shelf Controller 2 2 5 5 Minimize Restore Front Panel workspace menu 3 12 Modifying network 1 28 network element 1 29 Mouse 3 5 MSD2 view 6 7 N Navis AnyMedia external system LAN interface A 5 Navis AnyMedia protocol profiles A 5 NE Memory Administration 5 8 NE Software Administration 5 8 NE synchronization 5 50 NE _ASSOC_FAILED 8 53 NE AM Alarms 8 42 NEASSOC_LOST 8 53 o E Network life cycle 1 22 modifying 1 28 normal operation 1 25 physical installation 1 23
235. L SDSL tests stored in the data agent 3 Select an entry in the test list and click on Remove to remove a test from the list or proceed with step 4 4 Click on Close to exit the window gt NOTE lf a test is already running status In_Progress a new start ADSL cor rupted CRC test cf Chapter 8 4 2 2 page 8 36 ADSL SDSL BIST test Chapter 8 4 2 3 page 8 38 resp Chapter 8 4 2 4 page 8 40 of the same kind of test will provoke a warning If the test exists in the table remove it and launch the test again Therefore it is recommended to remove a test from the list after the execu tion has been finished NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 35 Fault management and maintenance Test management ME S 8 4 2 2 ADSL corrupted CRC test Procedure Proceed as follows to set up an ADSL corrupted CRC test Step Procedure 1 Open one of the following windows m ADSL Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 4 4 m ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 2 Use the option menu near the Apply button to select Corrupted CRC Test and click on Apply The ADSL Corrupted CRC Test window pops up ADSL Corrupted CRC Test eS Figure 8 13 ADSL Corrupted CRC Test window The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Drop Id This field shows the port of the drop affected by the test Possible values drop 1 1 15
236. LEI and ECI codes Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted NAM R1 9 6 30 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs Le 6 3 7 1 Configure a PTU Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the PTU data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt MDS2 MDS2B Shelf gt PTU in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or single click on the pack PTU in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window The PTU window pops up If you want to then change the required state use the check box Slot required exit the window click on Close 6 3 8 Channel Unit Window The channel unit CU packs provides the line side interface functionality that pro vide service to end users Channel Unit Figure 6 13 Channel Unit window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 31 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee The corresponding window contains all information related to CU packs It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the CU window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This option menu shows the slot in which the CU is inserted in the MSD2 MSD2B Possible values cu 1 1 24 Inventory Infor The r
237. Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 Package lt LuLogg gt Loggin LuLogg_59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuPerf has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly NAM R1 9 2 30 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Performance Release 1 9 Administration as lt LuPerf gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 Logging Performance bin LogWriter lt symbolic link gt opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 9 LoggingPerformance cfg Logging cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuPerf gt was successful Performance Moni Processing package instance lt LuPerCo gt from toring installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Performance Monitoring Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuPerCo_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1
238. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel Release 1 9 User Service Manual 363 211 497 Issue 1 February 2001 Copyright 2000 Lucent Technologies All rights reserved Printed in U S A This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries It may not be reproduced distributed or altered in any fashion by any entity either internal or external to Lucent Technologies except in accordance with applicable agreements contracts or licensing without the express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business management owner of the material Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Ordering Information The order number for this document is 363 211 497 For more ordering information refer to How to order documents in the section About this document How to Comment on This Document A feedback form is located immediately after the legal page of this document Please send or fax your comments and suggestions to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Trademarks Acrobat Reader is registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AnyMedia is a trademark of Lucent Technologies Internet Explorer is a copyright of Microsoft Co
239. M R1 9 02 2001 Overview Description The syntax necessary to define a TZ ID is the following GMT hh mm For example you might specify GMT 14 00 as a custom time zone ID The time zone that is returned when you specify a custom time zone ID does not include daylight savings time then it is necessary to use the rest of variables to set the day light saving time for this time zone The daylight savings starting month Month is O based e g O for January The daylight savings starting day of month The daylight savings starting day of week in month Day of week are 1 based 1 is SUNDAY 2 is MONDAY and so on The daylight savings starting time in local wall time which is standard time in this case The daylight savings ending month Month is O based e g O for January The daylight savings ending day of month The daylight savings starting day of week in month Day of week are 1 based 1 is SUNDAY 2 is MONDAY and so on The daylight savings ending time in local wall time which is daylight time in this case Default view in User Administration and Profiling application Possible values users user groups do mains or objects Default value users Default view of the Alarm Viewer Range of values 1 to 5 Default value 3 Default alarm filter of the Alarm Viewer Possible values O Last 24 hours 1 Critical raised alarms 2 Raised alarms 3 Alarm from a Host s 4 Critical alarms
240. M R1 9 9 42 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring NE profiles Parameters Buttons Description NE Profile Data Interleave Depth These two text fields upstream and Options Rate downstream are enabled only if the value for Latency is In continued terleaved DMT Symbols per RS These two fields upstream and downstream are enabled only if the Type of Rate Adapta tion is Explicit SNR Margin dBm These two fields upstream and down stream shows one of the following values 0 3 PSDM dBm Hz This field shows the line power for the downstream direction 9 7 4 SDSL Transmission NE Profile win dow This window can be reached from the SDSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 7 and is exclusively used to view the data of an SDSL transmission NE profile SDSL Transmission NE Profile Figure 9 16 SDSL Transmission NE Profile window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 43 Performance monitoring NE profiles ee The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This text field shows the drop inside the NE with this NE pro Id file is associated NE Profile This text field shows the name of NE profile NE Profile Data Line Type This option menu is used to select a sub type of the profile Full Lite Type of Rate Adaptation This option menu is used to se lect one of the
241. Meaning The communication between NAM and NE cannot be established Abbreviation COMM_RES_NOT_AVAILABLE Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the NE Possible cause s The limit of connections that the NAM can manage has been reached Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Start new instances of the progress es in charge of communication man agement 8 5 5 7 CONFIG_AO_NOT_PROCESS Meaning The NAM is discarding the configuration AOs coming from the telephony agent Abbreviation CONFIG_AO NOT PROCESS Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The configuration data of the NAM does not match the configuration data of the telephony agent The configuration data synchronization state is moved to ASYNC Possible cause s Configuration buffer overflow NAM R1 9 8 50 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms a Corecive acions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual configuration synchronization process to upload the configuration data and to start processing AOs 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 8 CONFIG_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS Meaning The NAM is discarding the configuration traps coming from the data agent Abbreviation CONFIG_EVENT NOT PROCESS Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The configuration data of the NAM do
242. Meanings Lit when a fault is detected on the pack green Indicates that this AFM is active oe red when a critical or major ATM xDSL alarm condition is detected Lit yellow when a minor ATM xDSL alarm con dition is detected Lit green when the OC 3c port 1 facility is okay Lit yellow when an OC 3c port 1 near end er ror is detected e g LOS Lit green when the OC 3c port 2 facility is okay Lit yellow when an OC 3c port 2 near end er ror is detected e g LOS 24ch Shelf View FLT FLT FLT L P A 3 E 0 TfO F 183 1 COMI COM CTU AP 1 AP 2 AP 3 AFP AP 5 AP amp AP T AP amp AP 9 AP 10 AP 11 AP 12 AP 13 AP 14 AP 15 AP 16 FG ineredview 5 Provisioned View fe Inserted View FG ineredview 5 Provisioned View Provisioned View Figure 8 2 Example of a shelf view NAM R1 9 8 6 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management Alarm information m MDS2 Shelf View Window Pack Bre Meanings Lit when a fault is detected on the pack e m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is de tected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is detected red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack i Lol Lit when a channel served by the PTU is un der test For more information on the reported alarm open the Alarm Viewer cf Chapter 8 3 page 8 11 Alarm Acknowledging alarms and clearing alarms is described in Chapter 8 3 5 acknowledg
243. Media Element Manager k c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OK No previous package LuANYHL has been found Where should AnyMediaEM Help be installed opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 Help q 14 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path AnyMedia EM R1 9 Help path opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 Help A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment NBR USER GROUP 1 am_es int halt other prueba staff root other smtp root syi_embb int syi_mr int Oo I O WO A U DN syi_oam int Enter selection q ken Type 8 and press Return NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 61 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee User syi_oam and Group int have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 9 Help as lt LUuANYHL gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuANYHL 1log
244. Monitoring Reload Successful Figure 7 29 Logical DSO window SW56 Service Details Parameters Description Enhanced When the enhanced switched 56 kbps check mark is set the Switch channel unit supports the transmission of call progress tones to the customer premises equipment CPE Possible values Set Not set Default Not set AB Signaling The AB signaling parameter check mark is normally not set which causes the channel unit to operate in the software sig naling mode Possible values Set Not set Default Not set NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 57 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee Service Details Parameters Description Quality Monitor When the quality monitoring parameter check mark is set ing the channel unit will send abnormal station code to the net work upon detecting an excessive number of bipolar viola tions from the loop Possible values Set Not set Default Not set 7 2 4 22 TDIO SILA B C D Service Details windows Overview TD O S A B C D 4 wire tandem office and 4 wire tandem subscriber 4 state Type Il Type l and 2 state Type II Type I The tandem function is used for pro viding a back to back carrier interface for loop or ground start circuits It is appli cable to the SPQ444 channel unit TOOA Service Details Information CSF DOA ervice Details Information Trunk Condition Idle 0 0 Transmit G
245. NAM user is contained in the rlogin file 3 Enter the name of the host where the ITM SNC is installed 4 Enter q and press Return io exit 5 6 16 3 Delete a host Complete the following procedure to delete a host for Fiber Reach 1 Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 and press Return The following message Is shown List of available hosts 1 mahp1 2 mascusal4 a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter d that identifies the option Del Host and press Return The next message pops up Host to be removed 3 Enter the number that identifies the host on the list Select q and press Return to exit NAM R1 9 5 98 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management 5 6 17 Delete network element If the NE should not be managed by the NAM any longer it shall be deleted from the NAM database Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete an NE Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Remove via the cursor menu or select File gt Remove via the menu bar A Warning window pops up You are about to delete lt NE Name gt Do you want to continue If you select No the deletion of the NE is rejected Otherwise the NE will be deleted gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the NAM database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the NAM and the NE will be closed and
246. NE is no longer managed by the NAM the administrator deletes it from the NAM database gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the NAM database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the NAM and the NE will be closed and the management access via the NAM is not possible until the NE is created and connected again 1 4 3 2 2 Modification of NEs Adding a pack NEs can be modified by adding or removing packs The NAM recognizes automat ically which pack has been plugged and where As only default settings are set on the new pack the system administrator must adapt the configuration Removing a pack Before removing a pack it must be ensured that there is no traffic running via this pack 1 4 3 3 Performance monitoring Tasks of perfor Performance management guarantees that the transmission quality does not fall mance monitoring below a minimum performance threshold Another task is the recording of data for analysis at a later stage e g storing alarms in logs and printing them NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 29 Functional description Working with NAM ee 1 4 4 System security and user groups Protection from The NAM provides mechanisms which protect the system from unauthorized ac unauthorized cess The user groups play a very important role in this context as they define dif access ferent levels of access rights for the individual users User groups By default there are 3 user groups the
247. NE through the use of the Get button The Get button is used to retrieve the service states Apply Depending on the selected logical DS1 id this button provides different functions For logical DS1 not cross connected white background Add Logical DS1 For logical DS1 cross connected gray background Edit Logical DS1 This function is available only in the following situations m VRT VB type is TR 08 and the Line Code has been modified m VRIT VB type is INA and the Frame Format and or Line Code has been modified NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 7 27 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony lt lt 7 2 3 4 Modify logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window can be reached from the IO DS1 window cf Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 10 Physical DS1 window cf Chapter 7 2 3 1 page 7 20 VRT VB List window cf Chapter 7 2 1 1 page 7 6 VAT VB windows cf Chapter 7 2 1 3 page 7 8 Chapter 7 2 1 7 page 7 14 Physical DS1 List window cf Chapter 7 2 3 1 page 7 20 Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the logical DS1 window Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DS1 to select the desired DS1 id If you want to then add a logical DS1 use the option menu Logical DS1 to select a logical DS1 with a white back ground and click on Apply change the frame format only possible use the option menu Logical DS1 to for INA select the desired logical DS1 grey background use the opt
248. Network Browser 5 20 Network element modifying 1 29 registration 1 24 Network Element Browser 5 21 Network planning 1 23 Normal Alarms 8 42 NP_SYNC_ PROBLEM 8 46 NVDS backup backup restore restore data 5 92 telephony 5 90 data 5 93 telephony 5 91 O ObjectStore Configuration 2 18 ObjectStore Installation 2 17 Off line backup database 3 38 OK button 3 14 On line backup database 3 38 Option menu 3 14 OrbixMT Installation 2 13 OrbixNames Installation 2 15 Ordering Document XX EE P Pass through interface C 1 Password 5 38 Path through interface TL1 messages C 3 Performance monitoring 1 29 Periodical Alarm Deletion 8 10 Platform Alarm 8 42 Port test 8 27_ Port test result 8 28 Power Test Units 5 5 Print reports 3 34 PRINT_ALARM 8 46 Product safety Classification XIX Programs workspace menu 3 12 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 IN 3 Index protection forced switching 5 70 inhibit switching 5 70 manual switching 5 70_ side switching 5 70 Protection mode COMDAC 5 73 Protection Switching COMDAC 5 72 lO DS1 5 75 Provisioning network 1 24 provisioning model 6 1_ Pushbutton 3 13 Q Quitting the Alarm Viewer 8 12 R Radio button 3 14 Reaction to fault identification 1 27 Recovery 1 27 Refresh workspace menu 3 12 Remote Operations Channel definition A 2 Remote Operations Channel protocol profiles A 4 Remote Operations Cha
249. Network Element Parameters Buttons Provisioning In formation Operational State More Details 363 211 497 Description Once the connection is established the following fields can not be edited unless the connection is interrupted connec tion state Not Managed Communications Info This field contains the editable text field IP Address This information is mandatory to get a NAM NE connection Format xxx xxx xxx xxx where x IS a numeric 0 9 Authentication Information This field contains the text field Security Id This information is also mandatory to geta NAM NE connection The Security Id has a range from 3 to 10 characters The Label button is used to provision deprovision the NE Provision lf the NE is not provisioned or any value has been changed Provisioning is enabled only if the administra tive state is Not Managed see below Deprovision lf the NE has been provisioned and no value has been changed The option menu Administrative State shows the possible values Managed Not Managed The text field Operational State shows the current state of the data agent Possible values Communication Stopped Communication Stopped Releasing Communication Trying Communica tion Trying Problem Detected Communication Established Communication Established Synchronizing This button provides access to the Synchronization Data win dow cf Chapter 5 6 3 3 page 5 54 It is available only if
250. OCESS Meaning The NAM is discarding the alarm traps coming from the data agent Abbreviation ALARM_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The alarm data of the NAM does not match the alarm data of the data agent NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 47 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee Possible cause s Alarm buffer overflow Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual alarm synchronization process to upload the alarm data and to start processing traps 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 3 COMM_DENIED Meaning An unsuccessful reply has been detected when the NAM sends the request to es tablish a connection with the telephony agent Abbreviation COMM_DENIED Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects The alarm will be cleared when the connection between the NAM and the tele phony agent has been successfully established lt is not possible to manage the telephony agent Possible cause s The NAM is trying to establish the connection with an agent while its COMDAC initialization process Is in progress Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check if the COMDAC is in the initialization process and wait until this process is finished 8 5 5 4 COMMUNICATION_LOST Meaning Communication with data agent lost Abbreviation
251. OK or Apply The following fields are read only fields to display data of the selected controlled object Controlled Object Type Displays the controlled object type Possible values are EM and NE Value Displays the characteristics of the selected controlled object If the controlled ob ject is EM it displays AnyMedia if it is NE it displays the NE Id number NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 4 27 User management Controlled objects BE S NAM R1 9 4 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Contents 5 1 Overview 5 1 5 2 Overview of the controlled systems 5 1 5 2 1 Network element R1 2 2 5 telephony 5 2 5 2 1 1 MDS2 MDS2B shelf layout 5 4 5 2 1 2 Virtual remote terminals 50 5 2 1 3 OAM amp P interfaces 5 6 5 2 1 4 External interfaces for circuit testing 5 6 5 2 1 5 Synchronization interfaces 7 5 2 1 6 Plug amp play capabilities 5 7 5 2 1 7 Equipment configuration related tasks 7 5 2 2 Network element R1 2 2 R1 2 3 and R1 7 0 telephony 5 8 5 2 2 1 DS1 regeneration AnyMedia R1 2 2 only 5 8 5 2 2 2 Pack provisioning 5 9 5 2 2 3 Central office terminal mode AnyMedia R1 2 3 only 5 9 5 2 2 3 1 COT configuration 5 10 5 2 2 3 2 Routing 5 11 5 22 9393 Alarm test unit ATU S 5 2 2 4 Subshelves management Integrated access terminal IAT R1 7 0 and the subsequent releases 5 11 5 2 2 4 1 IAT provisioning model 5 12 5 2 3 Network element R1 7 1 telephony 5 13 5 2 4 Network element R1 7 2 telephony 5 13
252. Overview of the controlled systems ee POTS switched and non switched voice services and data services are sup ported by the IATS Timeslots supporting voice telephony services use robbed bit signalling between the AnyMedia host and the IAT data services are supported on 64Kb clear signal timeslots NxDSO Supported services Fusing lO_DS1 7 7 O Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack IAT Server Application Pack IAT Server p COMDAC COMDAC IO_DS1 IO_DS1 IAT IAT IAT IAT Figure 5 6 Examples of IAT subshelves 5 2 2 4 1 IAT provisioning model This model contains the following components m Server pack provisioning The server pack provisioning is equal to the AP provisioning in the main shelf NAM R1 9 5 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Overview of the controlled systems E SS m Subshelf provisioning A subshelf must be provisioned to define the type of the subshelf This type also defines the used controller pack in the subshelf After provisioning of the subshelf its supplied slots are automatically cre ated in the system These slots include the controller pack slot s and AP slot s both identified by the subshelf slot AID The subshelves defined in this release are IAT01 and IATO2
253. PASS WARNING FAIL IN PROGRESS ABORTED NOT STARTED INVALID TEST Additional Information This field shows additional informa tion related to this test 5 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 41 Fault management and maintenance Alarms 8 5 Alarms 8 5 1 Overview An alarm is reported for any condition that needs user attention since it may im pact the normal operations of any system under user responsibility e g NAM NE 8 5 2 Alarm types Alarm classification Detected alarms are classified as one of the following a Platform Alarm Alarm related to the NAM application or its hardware software platform Generated raised by any object of the NAM when it detects an abnormal condition to be reported to the user Information provided Probable Cause Severity Service Affecting NAM Object Identifier Alarm Type Identifier Occurrence Time m NE AM Alarms Generated raised by the NE AM Refer to Chapter 8 2 5 page 8 7 to see how the information comes from the NE AM to the NAM The NE AM alarms are classified in two groups Normal alarms Data provided Access Identifier Condition Type Notification Code Service Affect ing Access Identifier Type Occurrence Date Occurrence Time Environment alarms Data provided Access Identifier Alarm Type Notification Code Occurrence Date Occurrence Time For all alarm types several alarm
254. Q signal comprising two B channels and one D channel plus overhead BRI Service Details Information GoFN BRI Service Details Information 2B 0 pa Figure 7 21 Logical DSO window BRI Service Details Parameters Description Service VC Switched virtual connection for ISDN This option menu can be used to select the combination of bearer B channels provided to the subscriber Possible values 2B D B1 D B2 D D Default 2B D NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 47 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony BE S 7 2 4 14 TO Service Details window Overview The TO transmission only no sealing current is used for a private line application with no DC signal It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit which provides four channels of service which can be used for 2 wire non switched private lines TO Service Details Information w k soo 7 Figure 7 22 Logical DS0 window TO Service Details Parameters Description Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Default 600 Balance This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 3 Receive Gain This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit Gain Thi
255. R1 9 9 40 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring NE profiles The following table shows the view options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This text field shows the drop inside the NE with this NE pro Id file is associated NE Profile This text field shows the name of NE profile NE Profile Data Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 minutes 1 day for the upstream direction m Errored Seconds ES Loss of Signal LOS High Bit Error Rate HBER Loss of Frame LOF 9 7 3 ADSL Transmission NE Profile win dow This window can be reached from the ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 and is exclusively used to view the data of an ADSL transmission NE profile ADSL Transmission NE Profile Figure 9 15 ADSL Transmission NE Profile window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 41 Performance monitoring NE profiles ee The following table shows the view options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This text field shows the drop inside the NE with this NE pro Id file is associated NE Profile This text field shows the name of NE profile NE Profile Data Line Type This field shows the sub type of the profile Full Lite Type of Rate Adaptation This field shows one of the follow ing values
256. Retrieve Header C 3 4 1 Purpose The RTRV HDR Retrieve Header command is used by an OS or an external in terface user to request the AnyMedia Access System to return a normal comple tion response This command is used as a keep alive hand shaking signal by an OS This command can also be used to obtain the Date and Time information for the system C 3 4 2 Input format RTRV HDR tid etag Abortable No Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None C 3 4 3 Input format parameters tid ctag 363 211 497 Target ID This parameter appears in the TID Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic Target ID is the name of the system to which the command is addressed Correlation tag This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic This field is used to associate the command message to the response message NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 C 21 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee C 3 4 4 Output format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD C 3 4 5 Output format parameters None C 3 4 6 Generic error responses EIDA Input Invalid Target Identifier TID does not match with SID has not allowed characters or string is too long ET Input Invalid Correlation Tag Incor
257. S m NAM specific login and password management The system provides a login and password management independent from the operation system Common servers Common Servers offer general purpose services A common server m manages the NAM history and security logs m logs the history and security data of other processes upon request m provides log information upon request m provides a facility to generate and print client reports in the NAM printers m provides event distribution services based on a supplier consumer model 1 3 1 3 Software platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software bus CORBA The communication between the NAM processes is based on the common object architecture request broker architecture CORBA standard The heart of the CORBA architec ture is the object request broker ORB The ORB is a software bus to which differ ent applications can connect to offer their services and or to use other applica tions services from which they are clients The ORB provides a transport mechanism that makes connected servers loca tion platform and implementation transparent to their clients making applications easier to distribute and scale Protocol The protocol used by the ORB is the internet inter operability protocol IIOP 1 3 1 3 2 Repository Introduction The repository contains all the NAM information that must be persistent It is sup ported by an object oriented database ObjectStore and the underlying operating file system A
258. S3 interfaces Create routing tables for both AFM and COMDAC e g those IP packets to be sent to COMDAC and AFM addresses should be routed to the IP ad dress of the related PVC NAM R1 9 A 10 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations o BE SS A 6 2 2 Configuration of AnyMedia Access System A 6 2 2 1 Configuration of COMDAC On the AnyMedia telephony part of NE the user must configure the local LAN port The initial provisioning has to be done via pre provisioning factory settings or a local GSI RS 232C To do so the user must configure the COMDAC LAN port IP address the default router address address of AFM LAN port and the subnet mask of the NE local LAN port We use TL1 commands to configure the NE as it is shown in the next example set ip shelf 135 88 4 2 defrouter 135 88 17 1 submask 255 255 240 0 A 6 2 2 2 Configuration of AFM On the AFM it is necessary to configure the in band ATM permanent virtual con nection PVC which is carrying telephony and data management information This ATM PVC will be terminated at the AFM and the IP packets contained in it will be extracted For this PVC the VPI should be 0 and the VCI greater than 31 ATM PVCs may be provisioned in the AFM by means of the GSI via the local CIT together with the AFM IP addresses one for the DS3 interface and another one for the LAN port IP Net Mask and Gateway addresses for the
259. SS m Acknowledge State Reflects if the alarm has been acknowledged by a user m Acknowledge User The login of the last user who has acknowledged an alarm m Node A unique text label For NE alarms it is the NE Name of the NE the alarm belongs to For platform alarms the string EM is used except for commu nication alarms Source Type Defines the type of alarm reporting source For NE alarms the agent type e g NarrowBand BroadBand NarrowBand Broadband is used For plat form alarms the string EM is used m Entity Object identifier referring to the alarm Examples of objects are network el ements ap 1 1 etc m Alarm Text Contains text briefly describing the alarm The summary text is unique in the NAM Description This field contains a full description of the alarm Agent Description For the NE alarms this field contains the description sent in the TL1 mes sage or in the trap without internationalizing For platform alarms this field is empty m Date amp Time First Change Date and Time of the first severity change m Date amp Time Last Change Date and Time of the last severity change in the life cycle of one alarm m Number Raises Number of times the alarm has been raised between the first raised time and the current time Correlation State This field reflects if one alarm has been correlated or not In the case of correlated alarms it also identifies if it is a Source
260. Start northbound interface session Close northbound interface session Maintaining au thentication infor mation Close virtual cir cuits with NEs Routing of TL1 messages Messages from NEs C 2 Issue 1 02 2001 Northbound interface basics ee Before the telnet session for the northbound interface is opened the TERM variable must be set correctly Set the TERM variable either to dtterm xterm or vt 100 While a northbound interface session is already open another session of a differ ent type must not be opened for the same NE When a northbound interface session is opened it is recommended to send the message ALW MSG vc all ALL to avoid changes in the configuration of the NE introduced by another manager interfering with the application To start a northbound interface session the OS must open a TCP IP connection with the NAM Then a TL1 interface see Command and Message Manual is used This done by the ACT USER message authenticating and authorizing the OS The NAM opens a dedicated TL1 virtual circuit with every NE included in the domain of the external OS When the connections are open any TL1 command typed by the OS operator will be sent to the proper NE and the responses to these com mands as well as all the available autonomous output messages AO will be routed to the proper OS To close the northbound interface session the external OS uses the CANC USER TL1 message When this message rea
261. State provides the possi State ble states that can be used Locked OOS Unlocked IS The field Operational State shows the state of the ADSL drop obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Testing Unknown Dor mant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State Service Man Number of ATM Cross Connections This field indicates agement the number of ATM cross connections related to the ADSL port The Cross Connections List button provides access to the ATM Cross Connection List window Test Manage The Apply button can be used to start the BIST Test or the ment Corrupted CRC Test The desired test is selected by means of the option menu Chapter 8 4 2 2 PM Data This button provides access to the ADSL PM Data window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 67 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee 6 4 5 1 Modify an ADSL drop This window is reached from the ADSL Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 4 4 page 6 60 by pressing the Edit button in the Drop Information field Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ADSL drop Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the desired ADSL drop If you want to edit a transmission profile edit a threshold profile change the administrative state NAM R1 9 6 68 Issue 1 02 2001 then use the option menu Transmission
262. T subshelf is cross connected Virtual Drop In This field contains a table displaying virtual drop information formation This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by Virtual Drop Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add and remove single row selection logical DSO through the use of the buttons described below m Virtual Drop Id Identifies the port within the AP Logical DSO Id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row NAM R1 9 6 44 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS Parameters Buttons Description Physical DSO m GSFN The generic signalling function identifies the sig Information nalling and transmission function of the provided ser continued vice The following values are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O S A B C D TO4 2RVT 2LO COIN2 DFLT2 DPO DS01 DS02 FXS EMO FXOD FXSO NO OCUO Unknown The Label button provides access to the Logical DSO win dow cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 Two possible values are available Add Logical DSO enabled only if a physical DSO id is se lected with no cross connectio
263. TE This button is disabled if several rows are selected The Remove button can be used to remove a selected cross connection This button is enabled only if a cross con nection is selected NAM R1 9 7 66 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning data a 7 3 2 ATM Cross Connections window This window is used to add view modify ATM cross connections over an xDSL drop 47M Crass Connection Figure 7 35 ATM Cross Connection window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 67 Service provisioning Service provisioning data ee Parameters Buttons Description Parameters Network Physical Interface Id This option menu is used to select the physical interface id It is enabled only in creation mode Possible values ds3 1 16 1 for FAST ds3 1 0 1 for BAIU The Edit button provides access to the DS3 AFM Feeder window cf Chapter 6 4 2 Drop Id This parameter is only enabled in creation mode The physical drop id is displayed by means of three option menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an xDSL pack is in serted Format 1 16 for FAST shelf 0 19 for BAIU shelf or
264. The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt User Groups via menu bar The User Groups Table appears NAM R1 9 4 24 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User groups E S User Administration amp Profiling File View group 3 test group Figure 4 20 User Administration amp Profiling window User Groups Table 4 Select the user group which shall be deleted in the User Group Name field and click Delete gt NOTE The administrator user group is protected against deletion 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 25 User management Controlled objects 4 5 Controlled objects 4 5 1 Modify controlled objects Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information about existing con trolled objects The controlled object creation and deletion are not covered by this document For NE creation and deletion refer to Chapter 5 5 1 and Chapter 5 6 17 Before modifying the information about any controlled object the NAM administra tor must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information about existing con trolled objects Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select th
265. Where should System Admin be installed opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 q 5 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn or press Return to accept the default path A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment The installation path selected for AnyMedia EM R1 9 is opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q 6 Type 4 and press Return NAM R1 9 2 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 3 package pathnames are already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager System Administration Release 1 9 Administration as lt LuSysAdm gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script s1224 OrbixNames Release 1 1 s1369 OrbixOTM package Release 1 0 Checking AnyMedia EM R1 9 naming contexts Creating data bases Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Starting Sy
266. a problem in the printer the spoolers the network or the NAM Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check if a default printer is defined Yes Continue with step 2 No Define a default printer NAM R1 9 8 46 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms 2 Check if the printer is working properly Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support for check ing the network or the NAM No Have the printer repaired 8 5 5 Element manager alarms concerning network element This chapter provides alarm descriptions of the NAM platform alarms concerning the data agent including proposals for corrective maintenance actions Alphabetical order In the following the NAM platform alarms are listed alphabetically 8 5 5 1 ALARM_AO_NOT_PROCESS Meaning The NAM is discarding the Alarm AOs coming from the telephony agent Abbreviation ALARM_AO NOT PROCESS Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The alarm data of the NAM does not match the alarm data of the telephony agent The alarm synchronization state is moved to ASYNC Possible cause s Alarm buffer overflow detection Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual alarm synchronization process to upload the alarm data and to start processing AOs 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 2 ALARM_EVENT_NOT_PR
267. able only if both working and standby EOCs are present and regardless of the service condition of the standby path TMC Datalink m Working Standby TMC Displays the Logical DS1 id used by the working standby TMC Timeslot Manage ment Channel Possible values v8tmc 1 2 1 2 m Manual Switch This button performs a manual switch between working and standby TMCs It is available only if both working and standby TMCs are present m Forced Switch This button performs a forced switch between working and standby TMCs It is available only if both working and standby TMCs are present Operational The Operational State shows the VRT VB service state ob State tained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Get button retrieves the VRT VB service state NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 9 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee Parameters Buttons Description Command But Three buttons provide access to other windows sons Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to different windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DSO window Logical DSO List This button provides access to the Log ical DSO List window Physical DS1 List This button provides access to the Physical DS1 List window 7 2 1 4 Modify the VRT TR303 The VRT TR303 window can be reached only from the VAT VB List window via Edit VRT VB
268. able 3 30 Backup levels of each backup Tue Wed Thu Fri NAM R1 9 3 44 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Backup and restore The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 31 Example for files in backup for two weeks 1st week 2nd week 3 6 4 3 Daily incremental weekly cumulative backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be done Table 3 32 Backup levels of each backup 1st of month Of 2nd week 3 The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 33 Examples for files in backup for two weeks Fri 1st week abcdefghi 2nd week jklmnopor NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 45 System management Log management ee 3 7 Log management The log management records information on events in the NAM The logged events can be viewed with the Log Viewer 3 7 1 Different log types There are nine log types within the Log Viewer Actions lt contains all the information on actions performed by users or the NAM and which imply changes in the NAM configuration equipment NE config uration service and subscriber configuration access to the NAM print re ports and backup amp restore That means all operations triggered by the user or the NAM and all subsequent actions Also the results of operations are logged in the actions log
269. able appears NAM R1 9 4 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management Domains User Administration amp Profiling File View Domaint Drm 1 description Domain2 Domain 2 description Figure 4 7 User Administration amp Profiling window Domains Table 4 Click New The Domain Profile window pops up Domain Profile Domain Mame Description Controlled Objects Controlled Objects Not Assigned Assigned EM eae User Groups User Groups Not Assigned Assigned Monitoring ae preiet Figure 4 8 Domain Profile window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 9 User management Domains 5 Enter a new domain name in the Domain Name field this is mandatory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional O to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Select one or more controlled objects that shall belong to the new domain in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value 7 Select one or more user groups that shall have access to the new domain in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 8 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new do main does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings cl
270. ackage NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 21 System management System administration ee 3 4 3 3 Administration of distributed module groups Overview The distributed module groups DMGs tab in the System Administration window allows for start up and shutdown of optional DMGs For each displayed DMG the contained MGs can be viewed and the DMG can be set up to be launched auto matically when its package is started up DMGs information The table in the DMGs tab displays the following information Table 3 11 DMGs information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the DMG ID The internally assigned ID of the DMG Type The types of the MGs in this DMG Administrative State The administrative state of the package Possible values ON if the package is up OFF otherwise The Administrative State is changed whenever a star tup or shutdown command is issued Operational State The operational state of the package displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise NAM R1 9 3 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration Combin 2 Comb Figure 3 10 System Administration window DMGs Actions in DMGs The following table lists all actions you can perform in the DMGs tab of the System tab Administration window Table 3 12 Actions for the administration of DMGs
271. acks E SS 6 4 7 SDSL Drop window This window is used to configure the SDSL drops It can also be used to remove the related cross connections SDSL Drop sub C Se O O meenuma nit S bee Stes cetendpantcurentstaus succes Figure 6 24 SDSL Drop window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 75 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Drop Id These fields display the SDSL drop id by means of three op tion menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an SDSL pack is in serted Format 1 16 for FAST shelf 0 19 for BAIU shelf or 1 8 for subshelf None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated on the previous list 1 x Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x for FAST drop 1 0 19 1 x for BAIU or subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x None is also allowed depending on the ADSL type x can be 4 or 8 Network Pro Transmission Network Profile This option menu lists all files transmission network profiles assigned to this port Un known XX indicates a non network profile NE profile Selectio
272. ad is completed successfully the copy can also be done later by means of the COMDAC Program Copy window cf Chapter 5 6 12 page 5 86 NAM R1 9 5 80 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS 5 Click on the Browse button in the Download Information field to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 6 14 5 page 5 94 to select the file example of the file structure NE Files NVPS COMDAC R1 that should be downloaded 6 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field File name in the COMDAC Software Download window 7 Click on Apply to initiate the download process A Warning window pops up the Software Download window remains on the screen after the download is finished SW Download is service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while its execution Continue anyway If you decide to continue the NAM starts the download procedure The COMDAC SW Download In Progress window pops up COMDAC SW Download In Progress mE Nme ditional Info Resule Figure 5 30 COMDAC SW Download In Progress window This window provides the following information NE Name percent of the software download FTP operation executed feedback Additional infor mation such as write software FTP copy memory and the result of the software download operation successful or unsuccessful This information is shown for each NE for which the software download is being perform
273. administrator maintenance and monitoring user group More groups can be added Access rights Table 1 1 provides an overview of the access permissions the user groups should have Table 1 1 Assignment of user groups to applications tasks System Process Management Administrator Administration User Administration Access Policy Administrator and Profiling Management Domain Management Administrator Log Management Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Report Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarms Administrator Maintenance Monitoring ADSL Performance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring SDSL Performance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring ATM Performance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring ATM Traffic Statistics Administrator Maintenance Monitoring DS3 Feeders Perfor Administrator Maintenance mance Monitoring Alarm Management Acknowledge Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Clear Administrator Maintenance NAM R1 9 1 30 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Working with NAM Table 1 1 Assignment of user groups to applications tasks Application Groups and NEs Management Subscriber Identifier Equipment and Service Provisioning Administrator Maintenance View Test Cut through Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Administrator Mainte
274. age 7 8 Chapter 7 2 1 7 page 7 14 Logical DSO List window cf Chapter 7 2 4 1 page 7 30 Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 Channel Unit window cf Chapter 6 3 8 page 6 31 IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 6 3 11 page 6 43 by clicking on Add Logical DSO Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a logical DSO Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DSO id to select a desired VRT VB with a associated empty text field white background 2 Click on Apply to confirm 3 Click on Close to exit the window 7 2 4 5 Modify a logical DSO Launch the Logical The Logical DSO window can be reached DSO window from Logical DSO List window cf Chapter 7 2 4 1 page 7 30 Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 Channel Unit window cf Chapter 6 3 8 page 6 31 IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 6 3 11 page 6 43 by clicking on Edit Logical DSO NAM R1 9 7 38 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit a logical DSO of a VRT VB Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DSO id to select a desired VRT VB with a associated text field grey background to select a logical DSO other than the pre selected if desired If you want to then modify the GSFN use the option menu GSFN to select the desired generic signalling function and click on More Details
275. age in the sys tem that was completely installed and has the same version Previous completely installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install lt Package_Version gt m The following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was partially installed and has the same version NAM R1 9 2 66 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure Previous partially installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install lt Package_Version gt But it is partially installed Better to use pkgrm lt Package_Version gt and installed it again m The following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was partially or completed installed and has different version Current administration requires that a unique instance of the lt Package_Name gt package be created However the maximun number of in stances of the package which may be supported at one time on the same system has already been met No changes were made to the system After this step the installation looks for its packages dependencies If a needed package is found the following message will appear Package lt Package_Name gt lt Application_Name gt lt Application_Version gt has
276. agement Move icons New background group New NE Browser Initial windows be expanded only groups can be expanded Any expanded object can be col lapsed by clicking on the symbol related to it The branch can also be ex panded by double clicking on a group gt NOTE The display is not automatically refreshed The changes are only visible af ter re expanding the branch clicking on the sign lt is possible to move an NE or a group from an origin group to a target group by drag and drop Once an NE is dropped the mouse pointer converts to a clock un til the action has finished This clock pointer is shown over the browsers and over the background map window group map The old parent group and the new parent group update their group status to the new group status high severity alarm this group status depends on the domain to which the operator belongs Clicking or double clicking on a group icon launches a new background map of the selected group Clicking or double clicking on an NE icon launches a new NE Browser displaying the selected NE 5 3 4 NE Browser The NE Browser displays all the components of the previously selected NE through the Network Browser or by double clicking on NE icons within the back ground map shelves and packs The NE Browser shows the slot_ld if the slot is not equipped If the slot is equipped the apparatus code of the inserted pack is shown 5 3 5 Background Map
277. ain Reload Successhul tC Le Figure 7 30 Logical DSO window TDOA Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 11 6 step 0 1 Default 11 6 NAM R1 9 7 58 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 7 24 23 TO4 Service Details window Overview The T04 4 wire transmission only function is used in voice or data private lines It is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which may be used in the MDS2 MDS82B interfacing with a switch other transmission equipment data equipment or cable T04 Service Details Information Figure 7 31 Logical DSO window TO4 Service Details Parameters Description Sealing Current When a check mark is set the channel unit applies a current from tip to ring or across the transmission lead simplex of the subscriber interface Possible values Set Not set Default Set 7 dB Transmit This option menu can be used to control a 7 dB pad in the transmit path When the Black option is selected the chan nel unit Supports an input TLP range of 9 0 to 7 5 dB When the White option is selected the cha
278. ains TRY ING and the NAM continues its attempts to establish a connection The user can cancel these attempts via the GUI which will change the connection state to NOT CONNECTED Connected The user can request to close a TL1 communication session with a telephony agent via the GUI When the communication session is closed by the NAM the connection state is changed to NOT CONNECTED When the connection state is CONNECTED and the connection is lost the connection state becomes TRYING Ifa TL1 communication session loss is detected and the TCP IP connection is still established the NAM closes the TCP IP connection and the connection state also becomes TRYING 5 5 2 2 Association maintenance Association An association between the NAM and an telephony agent is established if the TCP IP connection and the TL1 communication session is open The connection state changes to CONNECTED Agent monitoring The NAM monitors the association state of the telephony agent by periodically sending messages to the telephony agent If the NAM does not receive a re sponse to a certain number of messages within a certain time it assumes that the connection to the telephony agent is lost and tries to connect to the telephony agent again NAM R1 9 5 40 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Connect a Network Element E SS By default these messages are sent by the NAM every five minutes The response to a message must be received within four minutes and
279. al alarm in its group status because it contains two NEs NE 2 with minor as its highest severity alarm and NE 1 with critical as its highest sever NAM R1 9 5 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Groups and NEs management ity alarm If there are no more alarms in the system the root group will inform of a critical alarm Each time a new alarm is reported by a NE or an existing alarm changes its state the following process must be followed m calculate the new group status of the parent group m If this group status has changed calculate the group status of the parent group of the parent group the grandparent group and so on The process will finish when the group status of a group remains unchanged or the root group is reached Moving groups A group can be moved between parent groups All the items included in the group are also moved There are two constraints to this feature m The new parent group cannot be a descendant of the group to be moved to avoid inconsistencies m The group name of the group being moved is not allowed to exist in the new parent group After having moved a group both old and new parent groups check if their group status have changed If a group status has changed the system will rebuild the group status for both parent groups and for the groups above them in the tree hier archy of groups 5 4 2 NEs management Group identifier NEs management involves the addition of a new NE to the se
280. alarm from the telephony agent as well as the amasAFMAPNoRe sponseAlarmCS alarm from the data agent effects the DUP_NO_RESP_POLL alarm in the NAM Table 8 12 Correlated alarms Probable Cause Summary POLL not respond ing to poll amasAFMAPNoRespon AP not re seAlarmCS sponding to AFM poll DUP_NO_RESP_POLL not respond ing to poll INT internal hard ware failure amasAFMPackFailA AP self test larmCS pack failure reported amasAFMAPFailA AFM self test larmCS pack failure reported Severity Service Affecting Object_Id Description yes ap 1 1 16 no subap 1 8 1 8 Major Minor Major yes ap 1 1 16 subap 1 8 1 8 Minor Major yes ap 1 1 16 AP pack not re Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 sponding to poll yes ap 1 1 16 no subap 1 8 1 8 Major Minor Major yes ap 1 1 16 subap 1 8 1 8 Minor Major yes ap 1 1 16 Minor subap 1 8 1 8 DUP_PACK_FAIL internal hard Major yes ap 1 1 16 AP self test ware failure Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 pack failure re ported PRCDERR procedural er Major yes ap 1 1 16 illegal unknown ror Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 pack in AP slot no ap 1 1 16 subap 1 8 1 8 yes ap 1 1 16 illegal pack in no subap 1 8 1 8 AP slot yes ap 1 1 16 missing pack in no subap 1 8 1 8 AP slot yes ap 1 1 16 subap 1 8 1 8 yes ap 1 1 16 missing pack in no subap 1 8
281. always accessible Alarm notification The Alarm Notification icon displays a flag If new alarms are received the flag is raised and an audible signal is issued The alarm notification can be acknowl edged the flag goes down by clicking on the icon Help icon The Help icon provides access to the NAM online help If you click on the Help icon the help index is displayed NAM R1 9 3 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management General information on keyboard 3 2 4 Capacity For the recommended server and client platforms the NAM allows for a maximum of 30 simultaneous users m 600 NEs to be managed 3 3 General information on key board and windows 3 3 1 Keyboard The keyboard offers special keys which are pressed individually or in combination with others to perform specific actions Special keys The most important special keys are Return to confirm an entry or to start a new line when a text consisting of several lines is entered m Esc Escape to initiate an escape sequence i e the keys pressed after pressing Esc are interpreted as an instruction and not as entered text m Ctrl Control to initiate a control sequence Ctr1 is always used in combination with one or several other keys and represents an instruction Alt Alternate is pressed in combination with one or more other keys thereby assigning these keys another meaning m Backspace or Del Delete to delete all characters to the left of the
282. an OC3 AFM 6 59 6 4 4 ADSL Application Pack window 6 60 6 4 4 1 Modify an ADSL application pack 6 63 6 4 5 ADSL Drop window 6 65 6 4 5 1 Modify an ADSL drop 6 68 6 4 6 SDSL Application Pack window 6 70 6 4 6 1 Modify an SDSL application pack 6 73 6 4 7 SDSL Drop window 6 75 6 4 7 1 Modify an SDSL drop 6 79 6 4 8 ONU Application Pack window 6 81 6 4 8 1 Modify an OAP 6 82 NAM R1 9 6 II Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration 6 1 Introduction Overview Provisioning model 363 211 497 This chapter describes the Groups and NEs Management application of the Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 It addresses the following topics m Shelf views m Shelf subshelf provisioning m configuration of the packs Configuration of specific equipment data is the process of preparing the NAM for control of the AnyMedia Access System by configuring and setting the required parameters First the NAM must have some knowledge of the equipment The NAM gets this data during the NE creation process which is usually followed by pack configura tion Then during NE management some other tasks regarding equipment configura tion can be performed by the NAM e g date amp time management timing synchro nization management protection management etc Finally if the NE is no longer managed by the NAM it is deleted from the NAM da tabase The AnyMedia Access System uses a provisioning model to provide serv
283. an be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 61 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee 7 2 4 26 Overview of APs and GSFNs Overview The following table provides an overview of the general service functions and the compatible AP CU GSFN Apparatus codes DFLT 2LS LPA300 LPA350 LPA380 SPQ440C 2GS LPA350 LPA380 SPQ440C 2FX 2FXLS 2RVO 2NOS LPA350 LPA380 ISDN LPU116 COIN LPA350 lines 1 16 only 4DO ROC DATA AUA200 DPX AUA232 EBS SPQ429 SPQ328 AC AUA45B LR AUA75 NO1 NO2 MCU5205 MCU5405 BRI AUA293 ISDN BRITE TO SPQ442 SPQ443 LPA200 DPT SPQ442 SPQ456 LPA200 FXO SPQ442 LPA200 DX4 N R FX S 1 1 2 3 5 ETO4 TO4 AUA41B FX O P 1 2 3 5 TD O S A B C D SPQ444 FXS SPQ443 FXSO EMO NE R1 7 0 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 SPQ454 FXOD NE R1 7 0 OCU 1 2 3 SPQ452 SW56 SPQ452 SPQ334 OCUO NE R1 7 0 7 2 4 27 Remove VRT VB logical DSO Sub scriber There are several ways to initiate the deletion of logical DSOs The corresponding button Remove Logical DSO exists in the CU AP and Logical DSO List win dows this button is disabled in CU and AP windows for R1 5 Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a logical DSO 1 Select the logical DSO in the corresponding list 2 Click on Remove Logical DS0 A Warning window pops up NAM R1 9 7 62 Issu
284. any Fiber Reach ses sions running on the NAM platform The performance of the system could be affected by the load of the hardware but the behavior of the GUI is the same in both cases 5 6 16 1 Start a Fiber Reach session Complete the following procedure to start a Fiber Reach session 1 Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 and press Return The following message Is shown List of available hosts 1 mahp1 2 mascusal4 a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter the host number where the ITM SNC is installed from the list of available hosts or enter a for include a new one cf Chapter 5 6 16 2 page 5 98 3 Enter the Login and Password defined on the ITM SNC documentation Now you are able to use the ITM SNC application NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 97 NE management Network Element management ee 5 6 16 2 Add a host Complete the following procedure to add a host for Fiber Reach 1 Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 and press Return The following message Is shown List of available hosts a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter a that identifies the option Add Host and press Return The next message pops up Host to be added gt NOTE The host is reachable by Fiber Reach if the user name and the IP address of the
285. apter 3 6 4 page 3 43 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 53 System management Disaster recovery BE SeS NAM R1 9 3 54 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management Contents 4 1 Introduction 4 2 User 4 2 1 Create user 4 2 2 Modify user 4 2 3 Delete user 4 3 Domains 4 3 1 Create domains 4 3 2 Modify domains 4 3 3 Delete domains 4 4 User groups 4 4 1 Create user groups 4 4 2 Modify user groups 4 4 3 Delete user groups 4 5 Controlled objects 4 5 1 Modify controlled objects NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 gt j oO J T do T cn T N gt Co T Co T h s N P L P IN i IN T h O N D id N O iN N oO 02 2001 4 I A SSS Contents NAM R1 9 4 II Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management 4 1 Introduction This chapter describes the User Administration and Profiling application of the Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 It allows to m create modify delete users m assign unassign users to from user groups m create modify delete user groups m assign unassign user groups access to from applications tasks and do mains m create modify delete domains m assign unassign controlled objects to from domains gt NOTE All actions can only be done by the NAM administrator The following figure shows the relation between user user group applications and tasks domains and controlled objects
286. ard reports on multiple NEs These reports are applicable to one NE as well as to a list of NEs m Backup and restore of system relevant data Relevant data includes all information necessary to restore the situation in case of an NAM crash NAM R1 9 1 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture E SS NAM software upgrades Provides an established release cycle for NAM software upgrades in a way that minimizes incompatibility with NE software releases and allows for up grades to provide for OS compatibility This upgrade does not affect the services provided by NEs m Log administration The logs are capable of being printed and visualized The system limits the size of the system logs It is possible to make backups of the logs and to re move them from the system There are logs for Actions Contains all the information on actions performed by users or the NAM and which imply changes in the NAM configuration equipment NE configuration service and subscriber configuration access to the NAM print reports and backup and restore i e all operations triggered by the user or the NAM and all subsequent actions The results of operations are also logged in the actions log System Internal Events Contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the NAM or indicate errors that oc curred in the NAM Autonomous Repor
287. arms from a Host s NE selection window will open see details below all not cleared critical Critical Alarms not cleared The alarms are dis alarms played according to the selected filter all owned acknowl Owned Acknowledge Alarms The alarms are dis edge alarms played according to the selected filter all cleared alarms Clear Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all acknowledge All Acknowledge Alarms The alarms are dis alarms played according to the selected filter all alarms None Filter All Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The same filter option can be selected via the option menu Filters in the general information section cf Chapter 8 3 3 3 page 8 15 If you selected Alarms from a Host s the NE selection window is dis played cf Figure 8 7 page 8 22 and you have to select one or more NEs and or the NAM for which the alarms should be displayed Press OK in the NE selection window to display the alarms from the selected ob jects in the Alarm Viewer or press Cancel to cancel the operation NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 21 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring ME SS NE SHELF1 _ NB SHELF17_BB SHELF20_NB Figure 8 7 NE selection window 8 3 4 4 Administrator defined filters Administrator priv Only a user with administrator privileges can define own alarm filters in the Alarm ileges
288. art 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 TrapDispatcher bin TrapDispatcher verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LUuOXNSRT gt OrbixNames Version 1 1c Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixNames1 1c Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_ 2 3c2 Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 ln cannot create usr lib libos so sun 4 0 File exists ln cannot create usr lib liboscol so sun 4 0 File exists ln cannot create usr lib libosqry so sun 4 0 File exists ln cannot create usr lib libosthr so sun 4 0 File exists Package lt LURWRT gt RogueWave Tools and Threads std0130u thr0130u t1s0710u tpr0112u has been found in opt lucent rw You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install log_25323 Installation of lt LuTrap gt was successful Performance Trans Processing package instance lt LuPerTr gt from lator installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 gt NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 37 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee AnyMedia Element Manager Performance Translator Release 1 7 1 administration sparc LuPerTr 59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package
289. as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administra tion amp Profiling window pops up showing the Users Table User Administration amp Profiling User Name Description Figure 4 6 User Administration amp Profiling window Users Table 3 Select the user which shall be deleted in the Login Name field and click Delete 4 Confirm your selection The window will be closed NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 7 User management Domains 4 3 Domains 4 3 1 Create domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new domain Before creating a new domain please pay attention to the following remarks m The NAM administrator must have a system login Thecontrolled objects are defined as sets of managed NEs m Only EM and NE controlled object types are supported gt NOTE An EM object is generated by default with Type EM and Value AnyMedia which cannot be deleted Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new domain Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Domains via menu bar The Domains T
290. ase for use the Resync button in the field configuration data Configuration re synchronize the NAM database for use the Resync button in the field alarms Alarms change the state of the autonomous use the check box Traps Disabled to output define the state and press Apply exit the window Click on Close 5 6 4 Configuration of timing source for te lephony only Overview The AnyMedia Access System supports four timing modes External DS1 The line code and framing format for the external DS1 syn chronization input must be provided External composite office clock Free running mode For free running operation the NE derives timing from an internal crystal oscillator XO with an accuracy not worse than 32 parts per million ppm over full power supply temperature and life time The free running mode is intended only for turn up and failure condi tions NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 55 NE management Network Element management ee Loop timed mode In this mode a selected feeder DS1 signal synchro nizes an internal phase locked loop The NE can loop time to any feeder DS1 input as required by TR303 However the system will only use two timing inputs selected via provisioning for protection reasons Timing Inputs The two timing inputs are identified as Primary reference source and Second ary protection source The first DS1 feeder of the first IO_DS1 pack is the de fault primary input and the first
291. ata Time field The corresponding data will be shown to set the date and time data use the text fields in the New Date amp Time field to enter the corresponding values and press Apply exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 5 62 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS 5 6 6 Date amp Time Data window This window can be used to set the date and time of the data agent of the man aged NE Also it is possible to retrieve the date and time of any NE Date amp Time Data Figure 5 24 Date amp Time Data window The following values are possible m 12 00 AM to 11 59 PM for time m Jan 1 1980 to Dec 12 2036 The format follows the locale and platform conventions e g for Spain the date for mat is day month year NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 63 NE management Network Element management ee Procedure Complete the following procedure to retrieve set the date and time of the tele phony agent of an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the NE in the NE Browser and Date amp Time gt Data via the cursor menu The Date amp Time Data window pops up If you want to then to retrieve the current date and time Click on Get in the Current Date amp data Time field The corresponding data will be shown to set the date and time data use the text fields in the New Date amp Time field to enter the corresponding values and press Apply exit the window click
292. ata and click on Apply modify the profile data use the option menu Network Profile Pattern to display the profile data use the option menus in the field Network Profile Data to modify the parameters and click on Apply not possible for the default profiles view the affected objects click on Affected Objects bution which is only available if the profile is in status Activated The Affected Objects window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 2 page 9 18 resynchronize the profile with all con use the option menu Status to select trolled AFMs Activated if necessary and click on Resynchronize 3 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 9 34 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles 9 6 7 ATM Traffic Network Profile window This window is used to add view modify the ATM traffic network profiles ATM Traffic Network Profile An ee en 0 eres aah Figure 9 12 ATM Traffic Network Profile window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile This option menu contains all the ATM traffic network profiles for editing existing in the NAM and the entry New Network Profile for creating a new profile Default profiles are available These profiles cannot be modi fied NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 35 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile Netw
293. ation on CD ROM includes 363 211 498 2 User Service Manual USM System Release Description a For the ordering address see Chapter 8 How to order this document 8 How to order this document Ordering number The ordering number for the NAM User Service Manual is 363 211 497 1 Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated NAM R1 9 XX Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 About this document How to comment on this document Order procedure To order additional hard copies of this document and or to request placement on the standing order list send or call in an order as follows Telephone Order Monday through Mail Order Friday Lucent Technologies Within USA 1 888 LUCENT8 Customer Information Center 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST Attention Order Entry Center FAX from USA 2855 N Franklin Road 1 800 566 9568 P O Box 19901 FAX Worldwide Indianapolis IN 46219 1 317 322 6699 a For ordering a purchase order number or charge card number is required with all orders Make checks payable to Lucent Technologies One time orders One time orders include the contents for the current document issue in effect at the time of order Standing orders You may request an update on the standing order list for all later reissues of any document The standing order list for each document provides automatic distribu tion for all reissues of the document 9 How to comment on this document Document com Please
294. band TestScheduler Table 3 22 Module types in a certain module group type Module group type Module type AlarmRead AlarmRead AlarmUpdate AlarmUpdate RemoveAlm AlarmDistributor AlarmDistributor AlarmEventDistributor HighestSeverityAlarmEventDis HighestSeverityAlarmEventDistributor tributor NER NER NEEventDistributor NEEventDistributor NAM R1 9 3 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration ae Table 3 22 Module types in a certain module group type Module group type Module type AMU_NB R17 ConfigReadNBR17 ConfigUpdateNBR17 NEMR17 NEMForwarderR17 SBINBR17 AMU_BB_R112 ConfigReadBBR112 ConfigUpdateBBR1 12 BAMR112 BAMForwarderR1 12 SBIBBR112 PerformanceCollectBBR112 AMU_BB_R14 ConfigReadBBR14 ConfigUpdateBBR14 BAMR14 BAMForwarderR14 SBIBBR14 PerformanceCollectBBR14 AMU_BB_R17 ConfigReadBBR17 ConfigUpdateBBR1 7 BAMR17 BAMForwarderR17 SBIBBR17 PerformanceCollectBBR17 CommAgentEventDistributor CommAgentEventDistributor ConfigtEventDistributor ConfigtEventDistributor AccessPolicyManager AccessPolicyManager AuthorizationService AuthorizationService SecurityEventDistributor SecurityEventDistributor LogRead LogRead LogWrite LogWrite LogWritePert LogWritePertf TestScheduler TestScheduler FileBrowser FileBrowser CombinedShelf CombinedShelf TrapDispatcher TrapDispatcher PerformanceConfig PerformanceConfig SystemAdmin SystemAdmin WatchDaemon WatchDaemon SystemEventDistributor Sy
295. been found in lt Application_Path gt If the package is not found the installation will prompt about its installation path in order to check this path and the correct application version lt Package_Name gt needs lt Application_Name gt lt Application_Version gt to be installed previously If it isn t Answer q to next question and install the package lt Package_Name gt otherwise provide the paths required What is the base path of lt Required_Package_Name gt lt Package_verision gt q When an input is provided the installation checks the path and the version of the application If the path is invalid the following message will appear ERROR Pathname does not exist lf the version is invalid one of the following messages could appear Package lt Required_Package_Name gt has been found but INSTALL PATH is not defined Package lt Required_Package_Name gt has been found but with version lt Package_Version gt not valid for lt Package_Name gt In both cases the installation will prompt again for the required package Also the path where the Orbix cfg file is located is requested in the Orbix Names OrbixTalk and AnyMedia Servers packages installation after the request for the installation path of the OrbixMT the file will be modified by both installations NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 67 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee
296. ccess bar This icon consists of a flag If new alarms are received the flag is raised and an audible signal is issued If the user clicks on the icon the flag goes down Via the Network Browser The Network Browser displays all groups and NEs created in the NAM by the use of icons cf Figure 8 8 page 8 27 The icons change their color to reflect the highest severity alarm critical major minor indeterminate or warning alarms The highest severity alarm of a group is the highest severity alarm of all the alarms of its child groups and NEs The alarm status color is in accordance with the alarm viewer color set red for critical and major yellow for minor white for indeterminate and warning Select Group in the Network Browser and Alarm Monitoring in the cursor menu to look at the group specific alarms Select NE in the Network Browser and Alarm Monitoring in the cur sor menu to look at the NE specific alarms NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 8 3 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management ee Shelf View Window This window cf Figure 8 2 page 8 6 provides general inventory provi sioning and alarm information through the circuit packs LEDs Each slot shows the card type inserted and its alarms via a red FLT LED if avail able If the slot is empty no card will be shown See table below for the list of LEDs provided in each pack The table de scribes the color used when the LED is ON or blinking I
297. ccess to the current alarm data m manage alarm raising m manage cleared alarms m manage acknowledgment of alarms m synchronization of the alarm data per NE m NAM alarm log handling m periodical deletion of cleared alarms 8 2 2 Maintain up to date alarm information During the alarm life time the NAM updates the following information m the date and time of the last severity change Date amp Time Last Change m the last alarm severity change Perceived Severity m the last alarm acknowledge status change Acknowledge State m the last user id which has acknowledged an alarm Acknowledge User m the number of raises the alarm has been raised between the first raised time and the actual time Number Raises m the last alarm correlation state change Correlation State During an alarm life the severity status can change from raised to cleared and vice versa NAM R1 9 8 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management Raise Clear Figure 8 1 Life cycle of an alarm 8 2 3 Alarm notification to the user Overview Visual alarm indi cation 363 211 497 Whenever a new alarm occurs or the status of any alarm changes to raised again an alarm message is reported to the NAM The alarms are indicated if defined vi sually The occurrence of a new alarm of a defined severity default value critical is visu ally indicated in different ways Notification icon displayed in the NAM a
298. cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 gt AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 9 for NE release 112 sparc LuAMBB112_ 59 2 4 KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KEKE KE k k k k KKK k k k k k AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 49 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee AnyMedia EM R1 9 path opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuAM gt Alarms LuAM 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNER gt NER LuNER_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNeED gt NetEvenDist LuNeED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSec gt Security LuSec_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuShelf gt ConbinedShelf LuShelf_ 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSysED gt SystemEventDist LuSysED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuTrap gt SystemEventDist LuTrap_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time has been found in opt lucent LUMOS OK No previous package LUAMBB112 has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory P
299. cedure 1 Use the following table to remove the duplicated profiles IE then one of the duplicated profiles is a de remove all the others fault profile there is no default profile among the keep the profile that has the lowest duplicated profiles number of drops or cross connections associated and remove the others 2 All the drops or cross connections which were associated with the re moved profiles should be associated with the remaining NE profile after the network profile synchronization was performed over the related AFM 8 5 5 21 UNSYNC_NETWORK_ PROF Meaning A NE profile and the network profile have different content and the NAM cannot edit the NE profile Abbreviation UNSYNC_NETWORK_RPOF Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The NE profile data can not be updated according to the network profile Possible cause s The NAM cannot edit the NE profile Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct data agent state Yes Continue with step 2 No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 2 Check for DCN being in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 59 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee 8 5 6 Correlated alarms Introduction The following table contains a list of NAM alarms triggered by alarms from the te lephony or and data agent Example The POLL
300. cenario is shown in Figure A 1 page A 3 This al ternative can be used if no local ethernet LAN is available or the outside plant OSP environment is too severe for a router It does not need a sep arate DCN then it can be a cheaper solution The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 3 TL1 over TCP File Transfer Protocol TL1 over Telnet also used for cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 HDLC HDLC Figure A 3 COMDAC remote operations channel ROC protocol profiles NAM R1 9 A 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Data communications network DCN configuration NAM communication capabilities For establishing communication between the NAM and the NE the NE must be minimally configured with its LAN ROC or CIT parameters as applicable This op tion is the only available as the AnyMedia Access System does not support re mote boot and remote TCP IP configuration The GSI can be used to provide this initial configuration of the NE using the CIT port A 5 NAM communication capabilities The NAM uses for communicating management data an external system LAN in terface The protocol profile in the NAM for this scenario is shown in Figure A 4 TL1 over TCP COMDAC File Transfer Protocol TL1 over Telnet also COMDAC and AMF used for cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 SNMP AFM UDP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1
301. cessfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install _AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 45 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure I ee kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Would you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 9 installation Please choose one or more Band mode separated by blank 1 LuAMNB17 lt NarrowBand R1 7 installation gt Enter selection 7 7 q 4 Type 1 and press Return Packages to install LuAMNB17 NE telephony sup Processing package instance lt LuAMNB17 gt from aes for R1 7 instal lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt ation AnyMedia NB Element Manager Releas
302. cessing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Backup Release 1 7 1 Administration as lt LuBack gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Installation of lt LuBack gt was successful File Browser instal Processing package instance lt LuFiBrow gt from lation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager File Browser Release 1 9 administration sparc LuFiBrow_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuFiBrow has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager File Browser Release 1 9 administration as lt LuFiBrow gt Installing part 1 of 1 NAM R1 9 2 26 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 FileBrowser bin FileBrowser verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuFiBrow gt was successful Network Regist
303. ches the NAM it logs out the external OS closes all the TCP IP connections which are involved in this northbound interface session both sides northbound to the OS and southbound to the NEs managed by the OS and logs the end of the northbound interface link The OS will be authenticated and authorized by the NAM not by the NE Using this mechanism the OS will only have to send one ACT USER TL1 message which will be spawned by the NAM to all the NEs in the network managed by the OS To do that the NAM will have to maintain some information e g the TIDs and IP addresses of all the NEs managed by the OS and a UID PID pair to opena virtual circuiton each NE The NAM operator will be provided with the required set of script tools to maintain this information easily In the same way only one CANC USER message sent by the OS to the NAM will be enough to close all the virtual circuits with the NEs and the northbound inter face session For the routing of the TL1 messages the NEs TID is used and from every NE configuration table the corresponding IP address is determinated Incoming mes sages that have no TID field empty are sent to all connected NEs In case the OS will send a TL1 request message the OS has to support as many completion responses as NEs are connected Messages coming from the NEs responses and autonomous output are queued until they are complete i e re ceived and then sent to the northbound OS There are no
304. ck box Slot Required 3 Click on Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use 4 Click on COMDAC Protection to open the Shelf Protection window COMDAC tab cf Chapter 5 6 10 1 page 5 70 or click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 69 NE management Network Element management ee 5 6 10 Equipment protection switching General Protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism in the AnyMedia Access System when a fault is detected NE entities that are involved in carrying service to a large number of end users are generally required to be protected with a redundant unit However the NE provides customer options to have none or some entities protected with redundant units These entities can be either 1 1 or 1 N protected For 1 1 protected entities one of them serves as the active or pri mary unit and the other serves as a protection or standby unit For 1 N protected entities one entity serves as the protection or standby unit for all N active units If an active unit fails the failure is detected and service is automatically protection switched to the protection unit The protection switching can also be requested on demand Revertive non re Protection switching can be revertive or non revertive Revertive protection switch vertive ing implies that the active and standby units will return to their original configura tion once the failure causing the prote
305. ck mark is set the channel unit supports a low speed telemetry channel in the subscriber s data bits Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCU3 Set When a check mark is set the channel unit will send abnor mal station code to the network upon detecting an excessive number of bipolar violations from the loop Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCUS Not set NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Service Details Parameters Description Subscriber Data This option menu can be used to specify the subscriber data Rate rate in kbps for the subscriber interface Possible values OCU1 24 48 96 192 OCU2 384 560 OCU3 640 Default 192 for OCU1 560 for OCU2 640 for OCU3 Error Correc This option menu can be used to select the error correction tion technique for the DSO path The MVEC option is applicable only for subscriber data rates of 19 2 kops and less SCEC requires two DSO time slots Possible values OCU1 NONE MVEC Default NONE OCU2 OCU3 NONE SCEC Default NONE 7 2 4 21 SW56 Service Details window Overview The SW56 Switched 56 kbps DDS service is also applicable to the SPQ452 dual OCU dataport including enhanced service options to the DDS B SW56 Service Details Information OFM WDG Service Details Information _ Enhanced Switched _ AEB Signalling _ Quality
306. ckage base directory NAM R1 9 2 58 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Processing package information Processing system information Installing OrbixWeb 3 1 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 as lt LUOXWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXWRT 1log Installation of lt LUuOXWRT gt was successful Netscape 4 6 instal Processing package instance lt LuNETSCP gt from lation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 gt Netscape Navigator 4 6 Stand Alone for AnyMedia EM R1 9 sparc solaris Version 4 6 OK No previous package LUNETSCP has been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36997 92538 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401583 167406 713 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 12119 74691 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 3405788 3119434 533 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1194208 8616 1185592 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cd1 500736 500736 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Enter install directory opt lucent Netscape q NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 59 Software installation and
307. client installation cf Chapter 2 2 1 2 page 2 54 a cron process is installed This cron automatically kills the GUI processes every night due security reason The execution time of the cron can be changed by the ad ministrator only NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 3 System management System access 3 2 3 NAM Access Bar The NAM access bar allows access to all NAM applications and offers an alarm indication as well as a help feature Groups amp NEs System Management Administration Users Admin and Profiling Alarm Hel Notification SP Alarm Log Subscriber Viewer Viewer Identifier SID Figure 3 2 NAM access bar Start access bar To start the access bar see Start NAM Access Bar in Chapter 3 2 1 page 3 2 Functions The access bar provides access to the following applications m Groups amp NEs management cf Chapter 5 Alarm Viewer cf Chapter 7 m Users Administration and Profiling cf Chapter 4 m Log Management cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 46 m System Administration cf Chapter 3 4 page 3 16 m Subscriber Identifier SID m Alarm Notification Help Start applications To start an application click on the respective icon Access Control If an icon of the access bar is grayed you are not allowed to access this applica tion or the application is not running Whether access is granted or denied de pends on your user group membership The Alarm Notification and Help icons are
308. components that may be damaged Start the system and check that the workstations and network boot prop erly and the users are able to log into the system 2 Check if the NAM including all third party software remains installed on the machine To list all the packages installed type pkginfo grep application Lu 3 Remove all the listed packages using the pkgrm command cf Chapter 2 2 4 page 2 69 4 Re install the NAM software The procedure is the same as for installing the software for the first time cf Chapter 2 2 1 page 2 7 gt NOTE The packages must be re installed in the same paths as the original instal lation otherwise the data cannot be restored 5 lf any NAM variable was customized remember to reset it the installation sets all values to default Start the NAM server and at least one client All application windows Users Alarms Configuration should open but will show only the initial information 6 Shut down the NAM Restore the latest backup available cf Chapter 3 6 page 3 38 Re start the NAM server and at least one client Now the re stored data shall be shown and the system will be back at the status prior to the latest backup The process between step 2 and step 6 should not take more than 4 hours If the recovery is not successful call Lucent Technologies Technical Support A good backup policy is imperative in order to minimize the data loss Some exam ples can be found in cf Ch
309. conditions of the active unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only Internationalization This is the process of isolating the language and customs dependent code in a computer program from the lan guage independent code The term internationalization is often abbreviated as 78n IO DS1 Pack IO_DS1 This provides four DS1 interfaces to accommodate telephony via standard TR 08 mode TR 303 and INA network interfaces NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 GL 5 Glossary he IO_DS1 Circuit Packs Each circuit pack contains four feeder DS1 port circuits together with the circuitry needed to interface with DS1 sig nals metallic feeder IP Addresses These are distributed according to the worldwide or local configuration The IP address is used in ISO layer 3 A LAN contains tables for making an assignment between MAC address and IP address i L Level 1 Applications The minimum set of server applications that have to run together to provide the minimum functionality of the Any Media NB EM These applications must exist before the Level 2 Application can be started If this group is shut down the NAM NB is shut down Level 2 Applications Server applications that can be started up and shut down individually without affecting the functioning of other ap plications Line Test Also called drop test This checks for open circuits short circuits leakages to ground foreign voltages or other faults on the subscriber line that co
310. corresponding path directory subdirecto ries NAM R1 9 5 94 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS Parameters Buttons Description Available This list box contains all the existing files or subdirectories Files Directo contained in the selected directory If a file is selected this file ries name will be displayed in the Selected File field Label This field displays the current relative path selected in the list above A different path is shown depending on the window the File Browser has been accessed from Create Direc This button can be used to create a directory The directory tory name can be specified by use of the text field on the right hand side OK This button is used to confirm the selection of the file or di rectory If the File Browser has been accessed from a Backup win dow and a new file name has been entered this file will be created in the selected directory 5 6 15 TL1 cut through telephony agent Overview The NAM provides the user with a command line to a TL1 transaction language 1 session with any NE Using this command line the user can type any TL1 com mand send these commands to a selected NE and get the responses to the re quests as well as all the autonomous outputs sent by the NE TL1 used for the provisioning maintenance and administration of the AnyMedia Access System is an ASCIl based command language This cut through interface is used by
311. ction switch has been repaired Non rever tive switching does not return the entities to their original configuration With non revertive switching the repaired unit becomes the new standby unit The AnyMedia Access System supports the following protection features m COMDAC 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf following section m IO_DS1 1 N protection 1 lt N lt 5 revertive switch cf Chapter 5 6 10 3 page 5 74 m Synchronization reference source 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf Chapter 5 6 4 page 5 55 Definitions The different kinds of switching COMDACs and IO_DS1 packs are defined as follows Side switching refers to the operation of deactivating the active core en tity and activating the standby core entity Manual normal switch refers to an NAM initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit is in service and there are no known faults Forced switch refers to an NAN initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch no matter what the conditions of the protection unit Inhibit switch refers to an NAN initiated switch command that instructs the NE to inhibit a side switch no matter what the conditions of the active unit are 5 6 10 1 COMDAC protection switching Overview The COMDAC is the core pack of the AnyMedia Access System The NE supports both duplex and simplex operations i e the COMDAC can be protec
312. ctions can be provisioning defined The following actions are necessary m creation of VRT VB logical feeders m changing of voice frequency data enhancement VFDE for TR 303 VRTs m datalink protection switching for TR 303 VRTs creation of VRT VB logical lines Subscriber cross connection logical line to logical feeder m include data service provisioning configuration of shelf vpi creation of VP services creation of VC services All steps are described in detail in Chapter 6 Network Status After the provisioning phase the NEs can now be controlled and monitored by the after Provisioning NAM and start operation amp surveillance 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance Actions During network operation amp surveillance the administration control and supervi sion of the network mainly include m Fault Management m Network Modification m Performance Monitoring Required The administrator rights are sufficient to perform all required operations The vi rights sual check of parameters and displays on the GUI requires monitoring rights only 1 4 3 1 Fault management Alarm types There are two alarm types alarms generated by the NEs and alarms generated by the NAM itself e g an alarm indicating that log files without archiving is being removed LOG_DEL_ FULL All alarms are displayed in the alarm viewer It al lows the network operator to detect the alarm and to locate its source General fault Figure 1 8
313. ctive COMDAC or AFM NVDS When a loss of data occurs in the NE due to factors such as human error power failure or hardware and software failures the restoration features enable the NAM to restore a previ ous backup to one NE Backup media The NAM is able to store the backup copy in diverse storage media that can in clude HDD hard disk drive tapes removable disk cartridges and any other avail able mass storage medium FTP For database backup and restoration operations the NAM uses an FIP file trans fer protocol connection within the NE FTP allows the NAM to overwrite or copy information residing on the NE The NAM can open only one FTP session per NE at a time where the NAM will support the client role of the FTP session and the AnyMedia Access System will play the server part Failing backup re The backup and restore processes will fail if the time period during which the con store nection is lost exceeds the time out defined in the NAM or the NE time out other wise the process will continue after the connection is recovered NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 89 NE management Network Element management ee 5 6 14 1 Data backup telephony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data backup for a telephony agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Backups gt Telephony via the cursor menu The COMDAC NVDS Backup window pops up COMDAC NYDS Backup Figure 5 35
314. d 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 These option menus are enabled only if the Type of Rate Adaptation is Explicit Interleave Depth These two text fields upstream and downstream are enabled only if the value for Latency is In terleaved Possible values 0 255 DMT Symbols per RS These two option menus upstream and downstream are enabled only if the Type of Rate Ad aptation is Explicit Possible values 1 2 4 8 16 SNR Margin dBm These two option menus upstream and downstream allow the following values to be selected 0 3 PSDM dBm Hz This option menu is used to set the line power for the downstream direction Possible values 60 40 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes The win dow remains open for further use NAM R1 9 9 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles E SS Parameters Buttons Description Command but The Affected Objects button provides access to the Af tons fected Objects window This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated The Resynchronize button can be used to force the re syn chronization of the selected profile with all the AFMs cur rently controlled by the NAM This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated 9 6 5 1 Create an ADSL transmission network profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to create an ADSL transmission network profile Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the
315. d data provisioning A little pane will be always inserted in the Common Application Pack window and specific AP win dows under the Close button to allow the operator to select what view he wants to see the COMDAC view for telephony or the AFM view for data The default view is the COMDAC view The following window is used to provision a non provisioned slot NAM R1 9 6 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs Common Application Pack Figure 6 9 Common Application Pack window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE Name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id Slot number where the AP is plugged in Possible values ap 1 1 16 or subap 1 1 8 BAIU shelf ap 1 0 19 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 19 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth mation erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type Not applicable Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPU116 LPA300 LPA300C LPA380 LPA380C LPA350 LPA400 LPA400B LPA 404 LPA414 LPA408 LPS100 LPA900 LPS716
316. d n the series number CLEI Not applicable ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack Software Ver This field shows the software version of the inserted sion AFMDS3 pack Location Infor malon gt NOTE The following text fields must be filled up Empty fields are not supported by the AFM Location This text field is used to define a location name where the NE is placed Contact This text field is used to enter the name of the peo ple who manage the NE Name This text field can be used to enter a name for the mainshelf The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the text fields above NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 51 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description AFM Feeder In Physical Feeder Id Identifies the feeder port formation Administrative State Indicates the administrative state of the feeder port Locked Unlocked The Edit button provides access to the AFM Feeder window This button is enabled only if a feeder has been selected gt NOTE If one of the parameters is changed the communica tion with the NE could be interrupted Command but The Global Parameters button provides access to the tons AFM Global Parameters window The Soft Reset button is used to soft reset the AFM pack A warning indicates that the operation will drop the communi cation between NAM and AFM
317. d or not Possible Values Enable Disable SNR Margin dB This numeric field indicates the SDSL Noise Margin as seen by this ATU with respect to its re ceived signal ATM Cell Scramble This text field shows whether the SDSL ATM Cell Scramble function has been enabled or not Possible values Enable Disable Downstream Signal Attenuation dB This numeric field indicates the measured difference in the total power trans mitted by the peer ATU and the total power received by this ATU COSET This text field shows whether the SDSL COSET function has been enabled or not Possible Values Enable Disable Upstream Physical Layer Defects This list box field indi cates any physical layer defects Possible values there can be several at the same time No AP communication No defect Loss of Framing Loss of Sig nal Loss of Power Loss of Link Loss of Signal Quality Data init failure Config init failure Protocol init failure No peer ATU present The Get button can be used to retrieve the current values from the NE Operational The option menu Administrative State provides the possi State ble states that can be used Locked and Unlocked The field Operational State shows the state of the SDSL drop obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Testing Unknown Dor mant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State Service Man Number of ATM Cross Connections
318. d special services or 16 lines ISDN There can be up to 16 APs in an AnyMedia Access System shelf Archive Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed up AUDIT Trail A subset of all log messages A record showing who has accessed an NAM and what operation was performed during a given period of time Ga i B b wire One of the wires of the subscriber line Sometimes it is called the ring wire NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 GL 1 Glossary B Backup Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corrup tion BB Broad Band Blinking Alarm An alarm which is continuously changing its status raised clear raised clear Bridge A network layer device that passes packets between two or more network segments that use the same data link communications protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address which LAN component is con nected at which port of the bridge Data packets are only transferred over the bridge if the participant is at another port of the bridge With a bridge data traffic can be kept from a certain part of a LAN Built in Self Test BIST This is a procedure executed by each plug in circuit pack either after power up or on demand The task is
319. d switch is reset Manual Switch to Protection The specified service IO DS1 has been manually switched to protection IO DS1 The Protection State displays the current protection state which will be updated as a result of a Protection Switch see below Possible values are Not Equipped Working Standby NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 75 NE management Network Element management ee Parameters Buttons Description Protection Radio buttons allow protection switching Clear or Inhibit or Switch Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protec tion Clear Clears any active switch request and returns traffic on the protection pack to its original service pack provided this pack is functional Clear does not affect the Automatic Switch This button is always available Inhibit If applied on the protection pack service returns to the protected pack and Protection Scheme changed to Dis able If applied on the protected pack protection for this pack is disabled If this pack was providing service through the protection pack a protection to service switch will occur This protection switch remains in effect till a protection mode is cleared This button is available if the Active Switch Request is Clear Forced Switch or Manual Switch Forced Switch to Protection Switches service from the service pack to the protection pack no matter what Not ap plicable to protection pack The switch remains in t
320. d to specify the cell lost ratio for the service classes CBR rt VBR and nrt VBR Possible values for CBR 0 1000000 x 107 Possible values for VBR 1000 1000000 x 107 The Get button is used to retrieve all the data in the text fields above The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the text fields above 7 3 8 1 Modify the AFM global parameters This window is reached from the DS3 AFM window cf Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 50 Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the AFM global parameters l If you want to then retrieve the QoS parameters click on Get in the QoS Parameters field modify the QoS parameters use the text fields in the QoS Parame ters field to change the parameters and click on Apply 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 7 78 ssue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Subscriber Identifier 7 4 Subscriber Identifier 7 4 1 Subscriber Identifier window This window is used to search for a Subscriber Identifier SID It provides the op portunity to add edit delete SIDs Subscriber Identifier T sio Stars win ao i Cane Birma ripen Figure 7 39 Subscriber Identifier window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description Menu bar File gt Open Launches a new instance of the Subscriber Identifier window File gt Print Provides different print options File gt New
321. data The Reset All ATM Counts button is used to clear all ATM traffic related current PM counts in the AFM and the traffic statistics for the enabled individual cross connections 9 5 2 Modify the ATM traffic monitoring Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the ATM traffic monitoring Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Performance gt ATM Traffic via the cursor menu The ATM Traffic Monitoring window pops up 2 Use the check box Log All Traffic Data to define whether the monitoring data should be logged or not If you want to then retrieve the traffic monitoring data click on Get restart the traffic monitoring data click on Reset Counts counter exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 9 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles 9 6 Network profiles 9 6 1 Network Profiles List window This window is used to display a list of network profiles Network Pratiles List ADSL Transmission marries Eie tien Geiser Figure 9 6 Network Profiles List window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Network Profile This option menu is used to select the network profile type Type Possible values ADSL PM Thresholds SDSL PM Thresh olds ADSL Transmission SDSL Transmission ATM Traffic NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 20
322. data 8 2 5 Managing the raising of alarms 8 2 6 Manage alarm acknowledgment 8 2 7 Managing the clearing of alarms 8 2 8 Alarm data synchronization 8 2 9 NAM alarm log handling 8 2 10 Periodical deletion of cleared alarms 8 3 Alarm monitoring 8 3 1 General 8 3 2 Starting and terminating the Alarm Viewer 8 3 2 1 Starting the Alarm Viewer 8 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer 8 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer functions 8 3 3 1 Menu bar 8 3 3 2 Toolbar 8 3 3 3 General Information 8 3 3 4 Alarm table 8 3 3 4 1 Alarm parameters 8 3 3 4 2 Sorting alarms 8 3 4 System management functions 8 3 4 1 File 8 3 4 2 Views NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 P k p A o0 a T N SN W T N Ki N P Co o T o o T as I s s o0 L l I ook s I s nh T h N ie h N o0 an D oe a oO 7 h oO o_o D T h D T h co T h O o0 L co o0 a 02 2001 8 I arr Contents 8 3 4 3 Filters 8 3 4 4 Administrator defined filters 8 3 4 4 1 Syntax rules 8 3 4 4 2 Example for filter file 8 3 4 5 Help 8 3 5 Alarm Viewer functions 8 4 Test management 8 4 1 Telephony tests 8 4 1 1 Port test 8 4 1 1 1 Port test via GUI 8 4 1 2 AP Card Test 8 4 1 3 Stand by card test scheduling 8 4 1 4 Built in self test 8 4 1 5 Loopback test on the feeder side 8 4 2 Data tests 8 4 2 1 xDSL test list 8 4 2 2 ADSL corrupted CRC test 8 4 2 3 ADSL p
323. data agent can not assure that the NAM has received each of the alarm traps because the NAM does not confirm receipt of the traps The NAM periodically polls the data agent in order to retrieve all the alarms reported by the data agent and to update the NAM database to reflect the current state of the alarms in the data agent This process is called an alarm synchronization process This process is launched in a scheduled way as well as on user demand During the process the data agent state changes from COMM_ESTABLISHED to COMM_ESTABLISHED_ SYNCHRONIZING Two data agent alarm processing states can be considered PROCESSING The NAM is processing all the alarm traps coming from the data agent and is updating the NAM database in accordance with the traps The NAM alarm database is consistent with the current data agent alarms although it is possible that a trap could have been lost NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 53 NE management Network Element management Le NOT_PROCESSING The NAM is discarding the alarm traps coming from the data agent The NAM alarm database is only a snapshot of data agent alarm information at a certain moment in time The alarms shown in the NAM do not match the current alarms of the data agent 5 6 3 3 Synchronization Data window Synchronization Data Figure 5 21 Synchronization Data window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Na
324. data fields are conceptually the same although they convey different values For instance both Condition Type and Alarm Type refer to the type of alarm being raised cleared Battery on discharge Loss of frame NAM R1 9 8 42 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms The following table maps all the equivalent fields to general names that uniquely identify a concept independently of the alarm type Table 8 11 General alarm fields General Name NE Environment Alarm Object_ld Access Identifier Severity Notification Code Date_First_Time Occurrence Time Occurrence Time a a Date_Last_Time and Date Occurrence Date a Time and date YYYY MM DD HH MM SS b Only time HH MM SS c Only date MM DD Alarm severities For each alarm one of the following alarm severities is defined m 8 Critical CR m Major MJ m Minor MN m Warning WR m Indeterminate IN m Cleared CL Alarm identifica The multiple key that uniquely identifies an alarm is non m Host identifier Identifies where the alarm comes from If it comes from an NE then this identifier is the NE name If the alarm is reported by the NAM the host iden tifier is EM For association alarms the host identifier is NE_name m System object identifier Identifies the alarm affected object within the host which is identified by the host identifier For association alarms the system object identifier is ASSOC General ala
325. date in the agents has to be kept in synchronization with the time and date of the NAM Possible values true false Default value true NEM aoHandler fullSyncln Maximum number of retries of full synchroni validTimes zations Possible values 0 to 5 times Default value 3 NEM aoHandler queueSize Maximum size of the event s queue Possible values 1 to 1000 elements Default value 1000 NEM association heartBeat Maximum number of missing heartbeats to the Number NE Possible values 1 to 5 times Default value 3 NEM association heartBeat Time between two heartbeats to the NE Time Possible values 0 to 15 minutes Default value 5 NEM association loop Timer Time to wait after connection to four TCP IP ports have been tried and failed Possible values 0 to 50 minutes Default value 5 NAM R1 9 B 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Configuration parameters Overview o BE SS Name Description NEM timeSync delay Maximal time delay in seconds when a time sync is not needed Possible value 0 to 30 seconds Default value 30 NEM association osContext TL1 context used as parameter in ENT OSAC MAP TL1 command Default value TL1OTHER1 NEM association tl1 Timeout Time out for all TL1 commands Possible values 1 to 5 Default value 4 BAM association timeSync Indicates if the time and date in the agents has to be kept in synchronization with the time and date of the NAM Possible values true false
326. de ence Possible values Free Running Loop Timed External Clock External DS1 In case of Free Running the next two fields Primary Source and Secondary Source are disabled NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 57 NE management Network Element management ee Parameters Buttons Description Provisioned Primary Source If Timing Sync Mode is Loop Timed the Timing Refer primary source working and optionally the secondary ence continued source standby can be selected Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Once the source s of synchronization has have been se lected click on the Apply button Secondary Source If Timing Sync Mode is Loop Timed and Primary Source has been selected the secondary source can be selected as a protection timing synchroniza tion source if the primary source fails Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Once the protection source of synchronization has been se lected click on the Apply button gt NOTE The secondary source must be different from the pri mary source Otherwise there is no protection available Line Code This option menu is available only if the Timing Sync Mode is External DS1 Possible values B8ZS ZCS Not Applicable can not be se lected Once the Line Code has been changed the Apply button has to pressed for confirmation Framing Format This option menu is available only if the Timing Sync Mode is External DS1 Possible values ESF SF
327. defined in the NE Management win dow cf Figure 5 16 page 5 38 Now you are able to enter the appropriate TL1 commands The TL1 descriptions syntax formats parameters are available on line using the GSI help on AnyMedia Access System 5 6 16 Fiber Reach Overview The NAM provides an interface to a integrated transport management sub net work controller ITM SNC session with any DDM 2000 Fiber Reach component on the transport network that interacts with the AnyMedia Access System Using this software package the user can retrieve alarms and configuration related to the transport sub network The Fiber Reach interface is used by remote login when the operator wants to lo cate a failure or defect that is shown on the access system that have been origi nated in the transport network The GUI interface and the ITM SNC are totally in dependent from each other because they are operating on different NEs NAM R1 9 5 96 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management To open a remote session with an ITM SNC the operator must provide the con nection information Login and Password as for the login into an ITM SNC ses sion for more information cf ITM SNC User Manual Fiber Reach GUI The NAM GUI behavior but not necessarily the performance is not affected by independence any simultaneous Fiber Reach connection running on the platform The operator using the NAM GUI does not need to know about
328. dividual packages and will take care of the installation dependencies that is if a needed package is not installed previously it will not allow to continue until you install it If the pack age is already installed on the target system the following actions must be done m the package must be de installed previously refer to Remove AnyMedia package installations on page 69 for more information about packages de installation m in order not to affect the rest of the installed packages the package must be re installed in the same directory as the previous one Installation dependencies are not the same as functional dependencies So the NAM can work all mandatory packages must be installed third parties and com mon packages for the server and full client installation for the client System responses and inputs for this type of installation and for a full installation are similar Only the following differences could be found mw When an installation starts the package checks if a previous installation of the package already exists in the system If no previous package is found the following message will appear OK No previous package lt Package_Name gt has been found gt NOTE Refer to Type 1 and press Return on page 9 to see this response If one of the following messages appears the installation will stop without changes on the system m The following message appears if there is a previous pack
329. documentation must be strictly observed The documentation must also be consulted during the selection of measur ing and test equipment NAM R1 9 XVIII Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 About this document General safety information o BE SS Transport storage and operation of the unit system must be under the permissible conditions only See accompanying documentation and information on the unit system m Calibrations special tests after repairs and regular safety checks must be carried out documented and archived Only use tested and virus free diskettes Do not place the shelves on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the equipment Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 6 2 1 Safety symbols and labels All safety instructions have a uniform appearance They include a signal word that classifies the danger and a text block that contains descriptions of the type and cause of the danger the consequences of ignoring the safety instruction and the measures that can be taken to minimize the danger In some safety instructions a warning symbol is placed underneath the signal word Classification There are five classes of safety instructions Danger Warning Caution Im
330. dow Drag the title bar to shift the window on the screen Minimize button If you click on the minimize button the window will be displayed in its minimum size i e it will appear as an icon on the screen though the process represented by the window will continue running NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 7 System management General information on keyboard E SeS Figure 3 4 Controls in a window Window part Function Horizontal scroll Use the horizontal scroll bar and the slider to shift the visible window section to the bar left or right m Small step to the left or right Click on the left or right scroll bar arrow m Page left or right Click on the scroll bar to the left or right of the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider horizontally until the desired window section becomes visible Vertical scroll bar Use the vertical scroll bar to shift the currently visible window section up or down m Small step up or down Click on the top or bottom scroll bar arrow m Page up or down Click on the scroll bar section above or below the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider up or down until the desired window section becomes visible Maximize button Activate the maximize button by clicking on it to show the window at its maximum size i e the window will occupy the whole screen If you click again on the maximize button thus activated the window will
331. ds network pro file Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Profiles gt SDSL PM Thresholds via the cursor menu The SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 4 page 9 23 2 Use the option menu Network Profile to select New Network Profile 3 Use the text field Network Profile Name in the field Network Profile In formation to enter a profile name 4 Enter a description of the new profile in the corresponding list box and click on Apply to confirm 5 Click on Close to exit the window 9 6 4 2 Modify the SDSL PM thresholds net work profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an SDSL PM thresholds network pro file Step Procedure T Select NE in the NE Browser and Profiles gt SDSL PM Thresholds via the cursor menu The SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 4 page 9 23 This window can also be reached from the SDSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 7 page 6 75 by pressing the Edit button for the PM thresh olds network profile 2 When coming from the NE Browser use the option menu Network Profile to select the desired profile This step is not necessary when coming from the SDSL Drop window via Edit If you want to then modify the profile information use the text fields Network Profile Name and Description to change the not possible for the default profiles information data and click on Apply NAM R1 9 363 211 4
332. e Administration Narrowband Broadband AlarmRead Administration Narrowband Broadband AlarmUpdate Administration Narrowband Broadband AlarmDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband HighestSeverityAlarmEventDis tributor Narrowband Broadband NER Narrowband Broadband NEEventDistributor NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 31 System management System administration ee Table 3 21 Module group types in a certain package Package Module group type Narrowband AMU_NB _ R17 Broadband AMU_BB_ R112 Broadband AMU_BB R14 Broadband AMU_BB_ R17 Narrowband Broadband CommAgentEventDistributor Narrowband Broadband ConfigEventDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband AccessPolicyManager Administration Narrowband Broadband AuthorizationService Administration Narrowband Broadband SecurityEventDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband LogRead Administration Narrowband Broadband LogWrite Broadband LogWritePerf Administration Narrowband Broadband FileBrowser Narrowband Broadband CombinedShelf Broadband TrapDispatcher Broadband PerformanceConfig Administration Narrowband Broadband SystemAdmin Administration Narrowband Broadband WatchDaemon Administration Narrowband Broadband SystemEventDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband NamingService Administration Narrowband Broadband SIDService Administration Narrowband Broadband OrbixDaemon Narrowband Broad
333. e see below COMDAC 1 2 This non editable fields display the current COMDAC working state The following values are possible Working Standby and Not Equipped if there is no COM DAC inserted in the corresponding slot SW Version Shows the SW Version for the respective COMDAC Radio buttons allow protection switching to be specified Only the working COMDAC is inhibited With the Forced Switch to Protection request the working COMDAC becomes standby and vice versa All radio buttons are disabled if the current protection scheme is Simplex The NE rejects a switch request if the Protection Mode is Inhibit Therefore before you can switch from Forced Switch to Protection to Inhibit or vice versa you have to Clear the current protection This field displays the current protection mode which will be updated as a result of a protection switch Possible values Clear Freeze NAM R1 9 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management 5 6 10 2 Modify the COMDAC protection mode Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the protection mode for the COMDAC Step Procedure Select NE gt Main Shelf in the NE Browser and Protection via the cursor menu The Shelf Protection window pops up tab COMDAC This window can also be reached from the COMDAC window cf Chapter 6 3 2 page 6 14 by clicking on the COMDAC Protection but ton Use the radio buttons in field Protection Switch to switch the
334. e 1 9 for NE release 17 sparc LuAMNB17_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 AnyMedia EM R1 9 path opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuAM gt Alarms LuAM 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNBI gt NorthBound LuNBI_59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 NAM R1 9 2 46 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Package lt LUNER gt NER LUNER_59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNeED gt NetEvenDist LuNeED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSec gt Security LuSec_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuShelf gt ConbinedShelf LuShelf_ 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSysED gt SystemEventDist LuSysED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time has been found in opt lucent LUMOS OK No previous package LUAMNB17 has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia NB Elem
335. e Frequency Data Enhancement VPI Virtual Path Identifier VRT Virtual Remote Terminal W WAN Wide Area Network X XO Crystal Oscillator NAM R1 9 AB 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Abbreviations o Y YEL Yellow Alarm E S Z ZCS Zero Code Suppression ZS Zero Suppression NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 AB 13 Abbreviations ee NAM R1 9 AB 14 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 mm ee Glossary 10Base T This is a physical interface used for high speed Ethernet connection It uses twisted pair cables A a wire One of the wires of the subscriber line Sometimes it is called the tip wire Alarm Any condition that needs operator attention since it may impact the normal operations of any system under opera tor responsibility e g Element Manager Network Element AMS Alarm Management Subsystem AnyMedia Access System This is also referred to as the Network Element or just the NE AnyMedia NE AnyMedia Network Element for Narrow Band Services It is the Network Element to which the DCN defined in this document is related Also known as FAST or AMAS AO Autonomous output reports generated by the NEs Application Group of one or more modules that offer related functionality Application Pack AP This is a circuit pack which provides the line side interface functionality for POTS SPOTS ISDN or special service circuits Each AP handles 24 or 32 lines POTS SPOTS COIN an
336. e PM threshold profile assigned to this port Unknown XX indicates a non network profile NE profile m Transmission Network Profile Identifies the trans mission network profile assigned to this port Un Known XX indicates a non network profile NE pro file The Edit button provides access to the SDSL Drop win dow It is enabled if a drop is selected in the table above The Deprovision button is used to deprovision superfluous ports which are not supported by the inserted SDSL type The button is enabled only if a drop is selected and provi sioned The Cross Connections List button provides access to the ATM Cross Connection List window The Apply button can be used to start the BIST Test For more information refer to Chapter 8 4 2 4 Reset This button can be used to reset the pack Two radio buttons COMDAC View AFM View can be used to select the de sired view in the Main Shelf In ONU subshelf only the AFM View is possible NAM R1 9 6 72 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs 6 4 6 1 Modify an SDSL application pack Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an SDSL pack Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf Subshelf gt SDSL in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on SDSL in the Shelf View Subshelf window The SDSL AP window pops up If you want to th
337. e User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Controlled Objects via menu bar The Controlled Objects Table appears User Administration amp Profiling i View object Successful Figure 4 21 User Administration amp Profiling window Controlled Objects Ta ble NAM R1 9 4 26 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management Adding to domains Removing from domains Other fields read only 363 211 497 Controlled objects 4 Select one controlled object type in the Controlled Object Type field and click Open The Controlled Object Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected controlled object Controlled Object Profile Window Jem Anymedia Domains Domains Domain 2 Domain 1 Domain 3 Figure 4 22 Controlled Object Profile window To assign the selected controlled object to further domains select one or more domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 To remove the selected controlled object from domains select one or more do mains in the Domains Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE The EM object generated by default is protected against deletion Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before
338. e files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 2 package pathnames are already properly installed Installing ObjectStore 5 0 _SP3 Runtime for Any Media NB EM R1 9 as lt LuOSRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk Remember execute osconfig to set the environment kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 17 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOSRT 1log Installation of lt LuOSRT gt was successful ObjectStore config Object Store configuration uration I The default copy of ObjectStore to configure is in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 ostore Is this the copy that you want to configure yes 17 Press Return ObjectStore includes shared libraries For ObjectStore applications and utilities to work the dynamic linker must be able to find them The recommended arrangement is to have symbolic links in usr lib to the shared libraries If you choose not to make these links then you will have to instruct all ObjectStore users to add opt lucent 0OS51_ SP2 ostore lib to their LD LIBRARY PATH env
339. e following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth mation erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values ADSL Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPA400 LPA400B LPA404 LPA408 LPA414 LPA416 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning In The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code shows formation ADSL for a provisioned slot and the value None for a non provisioned slot This option menu is available only if the ad ministrative state is Locked gt NOTE The Provisioned Apparatus Code may be different from the Apparatus Code shown in the Inventory In formation field The Apparatus Code is related to a certain card LPA400B whereas the Provisioned Ap paratus Code is related to a family of cards ADSL Operational The option menu Administrati
340. e following windows m ADSL Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 4 4 m ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 2 Use the option menu near the Apply button to select ADSL BIST Test and click on Apply If the drop is in the unlocked administrative state a Warning window pops up otherwise the n Progress window pops up see below Performing a BIST Test on ADSL drop may be service af fecting Do you want to continue 3 Enter y and press Return The In Progress window pops up BIST Test Launched 4 Wait until the ADSL BIST Test Result window appears and view the test result ADSL Port BIST Test Result Figure 8 14 ADSL BIST Test Result window NAM R1 9 8 38 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management E SS The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This field shows the port of the drop affected by the test Id Possible values drop 1 1 15 1 x subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x drop 1 1 19 1 x for BAIU x is the number of drops supplied by the server Test Results Test Results This field shows the test result Possible values PASS PASS WARNING FAIL IN PROGRESS ABORTED NOT STARTED INVALID TEST Additional Information This field shows additional informa tion related to this test 5 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497
341. e interface for the customer to enter the network m Theterm plug in is generally used for circuit pack units COMDAC CIU lO DS1 CTU and application packs APs which have pre designated slots with the capability to plug in the circuit pack Numbering Each fascicle can be identified by its number and contains a chapter which is numbered accordingly e g Chapter 2 is contained in Fascicle 2 The page figure and table numbering begins with 1 in every chapter To be able to identify them easily these numbers are prefixed with the fascicle number For example Figure 2 3 designates the third figure in Fascicle 2 Cross references Cross reference conventions are identical with those used for numbering i e the first number in cross references refers to the corresponding fascicle Keyword blocks To facilitate the location of specific text passages the guide contains so called keyword blocks These are placed to the left of the main text and contain either a keyword or a word which indicates the contents of a paragraph or group of para graphs Abbreviations Each abbreviation used in this guide is listed in fascicle AB Abbreviations of the hardcopy version unless it can be assumed that the reader is familiar with this ab breviation Commands Commands and messages are displayed in constant width font e g sysdef grep SEMMNU Trademarks The trademarks used in this document are identified after the title page Trade
342. e is taken Possible values 0 to 59 Default value 0 AM correlationRulesPath AM configuration file location relative to Any media path It contains the correlation rules needed for the reduced correlation process in the AM subsystem It is MANDATORY It should be present in this file Default value AM cfg CorrelationRules cfg AM minimumClearPeriod Number of days that cleared alarms remain in the database before they are removed It is optional If not present default value is taken Possible values 1 to Default value 3 AM platformAlarm TablePath AM configuration file location relative to Any media path It contains the static information of the platform alarms It is MANDATORY It should be present in this file Default value AM cfg PlatformAlarm Table cfg gt NOTE All CM variables in this file are mandatory and must be defined here NAM R1 9 B 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Configuration parameters Overview o BE SS Name Description CM directoryNVDS NVDS files location This files store informa tion in such a way as to survive indefinite peri ods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are stored in the NVDS directory and hence are the param eter values that will be used on subsequent NE power up Default value CM nefiles NVDS gt NOTE The path is relative to the AnyMedia in Stallation path CM directoryNVPS NVPS files location It keeps software
343. e new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level On line backups performed on user demand Backup Off line backups performed automatically via any scheduling mecha Backup nisms e g cron file Backup types There are three different backup types The following list shows their differences and advantages m Full backup A full backup copies a complete file system or directory e g all NAM data This method requires large numbers of backup tapes that take a long time to write and takes also some time to retrieve individual files because the NAM R1 9 3 38 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Backup and restore backup drive has to move sequentially to the point on the tape where the file is located On the other hand using full backup makes it easier to re trieve small changes in file systems m Incremental backup An incremental backup only includes copies of new files and files that have changed since a previous backup It is available for database files only Re quires less resources but searching for a certain file on the incremental tapes can take time 3 6 2 Commands for backup archive and re store Default locations of If a backup is done the NAM databases are copied to the backup medium If an data for backups or archive is made the log files are moved to the backup medium The files from archives which a backup is done are shown in the table below The location of the files is relative to the
344. e or not The Get button is used to retrieve the performance monitor ing data of the selected feeder The Reset Counts button can be used to restart the per formance monitoring data of the selected feeder 9 4 2 Modify the PM data of the AFM feeder Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the performance monitoring data of the DS3 AFM feeder Step Procedure 1 Click on the PM Data button in the DS3 AFM Feeder window The AFM PM Data window pops up 2 Use the option menu Physical Feeder Id to select the desired feeder NAM R1 9 9 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring AFM feeder performance monitoring 3 Use the check box Log Performance Data to define whether the monitor ing data should be logged or not If you want to then retrieve the performance monitoring click on Get data restart the monitoring data counter for click on Reset Counts the selected feeder exit the window click on Close 9 4 3 AFM Feeder PM Threshold window This window is used to configure the PM threshold parameters of the DS3 feeder It can be reached from the DS3 AFM Feeder window cf Chapter 6 4 2 AFM Feeder PH Thresholds Figure 9 4 AFM Feeder PM Thresholds window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Feeder Type This field displays the feeder type DSS NAM R1 9 363 21
345. e profile data use the option menu Network Profile Pattern to display the profile data use the option menus and spin buttons in the field Network Profile Data to modify the parameters and click on Apply view the affected objects click on Affected Objects button which is only available if the profile is in status Activated The Affected Objects window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 2 not possible for the default profiles page 9 18 resynchronize the profile with all con use the option menu Status to select trolled AFMs Activated if necessary and click on Resynchronize 3 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 9 30 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles E SS 9 6 6 SDSL Transmission Network Profile window This window is used to create view modify SDSL transmission network profiles SDSL Transmission Network Profile New Network Prole Figure 9 11 SDSL Transmission Network Profile window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile This option menu contains all the SDSL transmission net work profiles for editing existing in the NAM and the entry New Network Profile for creating a new profile Default profiles are available These profiles cannot be modi fied NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 31 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee Parameters Buttons Description
346. e provisioning Service provisioning telephony a 1 20330 Logical DS1 window This window can be used to add or edit logical DS1 and to cross connect physical DS1 Logical DS1 Figure 7 11 Logical DS1 window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 25 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BE S Parameters Buttons Description Logical DS1 These fields display the logical DS1 id by means of two op tion menus m The first menu contains the VRT VB list in where it is possible to create a logical DS1 Possible values v3fdr 1 2 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA m The second menu contains the logical DS1 number in side the corresponding VRT VB Selecting a VRT VB first option menu results in an update of the second option menu logical DS1 number gt NOTE Logical DS1 numbers which are not yet cross con nected are marked with a white background add function is possible the other feeders are marked with a grey background edit function is possible Logical DS1 In Frame Format This option menu shows the possible frame formation formats Three possible values ESF Extended SuperFrame FS SuperFrame with Datalink or SF SuperFrame Default values are m ESF for TR 303 not reprovisionable m FS f
347. e script if it is not specified as command line parameter It can be a tape de vice Default value archives OAM backup backupDirectory Destination of the log files and data bases backed up by the AnyMedia backup script if it is not specified as command line parameter It can be a tape device Default value backups OAM backup backupLogDirec Location of the log files of the backup ar tory chive restore scripts execution Default value tmp OAM backup numberOfLog Maximum number of log files per type al Files lowed in the OAM backup backupLogDirec tory Possible values 1 to Default value 10 files per script file OAM log directoryCurrentLogs Default path where the restored AnyMedia logs will be placed from a previous archive Default value log OAM log directoryRestored Location of the AnyMedia log files restored Logs from a previous backup or archive Default value restored NAM R1 9 B 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Configuration parameters Overview a Name Description OAM log minimumDaysKept Number of days a log file should be kept in the system before being removed If space is needed and the log file is still within this pe riod a platform alarm is raised and the file is removed Possible values 1 to Default value 7 days OAM sysadmin clientldleTime Period of inactivity after that a client is forced to log out Possible values 60 to Default value 240 seconds
348. e standby configuration is used to select the ISDN mode of operation as well as to configure the country code m NE disaster recovery from the NAM The NAM is able to reconstruct its NE database by polling the NEs for infor mation and from internally maintained backup copies of data m Fiber Reach support The NAM supports the fiber reach by providing alarm information m Fiber Reach management The NAM is able to launch the DDM 2000 element manager in order to per form DDM 2000 provisioning tasks Data equipment The data equipment management provides the following functions management func aon Configure specific equipment data Circuit pack provisioning configuration AFM DS3 OC3 management e g reset etc NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 9 Functional description System and software architecture ee ADSL SDSL pack management e g change of administra tive state reset etc DS3 feeder management ADSL SDSL drop configuration Date and time management Timing synchronization provisioning for this release no timing syn chronization is made since local timing is the only mode supported Enable Disable traps generation Maintain a local copy of configuration data in the AFM s NVDS Initializing the local copy i e by doing an initial configuration up load Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the AFM i e by using audits trap
349. e whether loop start or Ground Start ground start is used Possible values LS GS Default GS NAM R1 9 7 60 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony TC E SS 7 2 4 25 DPT Service Details windows Overview The DPT dial pulse terminating function is used for a direct inward dial DID with either dial pulse or multi frequency addressing It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit which provides four channels of service which can be used for DID trunks DPT Service Details Information Figure 7 33 Logical DSO window DPT Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signalling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Default 600 Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default O Balance This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 15 Receive Gain This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 1 1 5 step 0 25 Default 1 Transmit Gain This slider c
350. e1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Logical DSO will be deleted OK to proceed gt NOTE If the chosen logical DSO has been configured as red lined cf Chapter 7 2 4 5 page 7 38 the following Warning message will pop up Redlined Logical DSO will be deleted OK to proceed If you decide to continue the NAM will send a delete message to the NE NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 63 Service provisioning Service provisioning data ee 7 3 Service provisioning data The data service functionality covers the connection establishment process be tween an xDSL subscriber interface and an DS3 OC3 network interface This functionality is performed in the same way for all the AFM releases managed by NAM R1 9 Pre provisioning of ATM links and cross connections is possible i e if the packs and ports are pre provisioned the ATM links and cross connections can also be pre provisioned even if the related card is not inserted This chapter describes the creation modification and deletion of ATM virtual path channel links and cross connections in an NE 7 3 1 ATM Cross Connections List window This window displays all ATM cross connections within the NE It can also be used to add edit remove cross connections 35 SDSL Default CBR Figure 7 34 ATM Cross Connections List window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons
351. ead only text fields provide the following information malon Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values cf Table 6 1 page 6 34 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble values cf Table 6 1 page 6 34 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted NAM R1 9 6 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs Parameters Buttons Description Action Physical DSO This field contains a table displaying physical DSO informa Information tion This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by Physical DSO Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add or remove single or multiple
352. ear MM month and DD day located in ANYMEDIAPATH log The file contains also hints about start log ging stop logging and error messages 9 3 1 SDSL Performance Monitoring Data window This window is used to display all SDSL performance monitoring parameters This window also allows you to select data collection or clear counters of either the se lected SDSL drop or all the SDSL drops in the NE Because performance monitor ing data exist for each SDSL drop there are three option menus to select the SDSL drop s concerned NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 5 Performance monitoring SDSL performance monitoring data SDSL PM Data Figure 9 2 SDSL Performance Monitoring Data window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop These fields display the SDSL drop id by means of three op Id tion menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an SDSL pack is provi sioned Format 1 16 for main shelf or 1 8 for subshelf or 0 19 for BAIU None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated in the previous list 1 x Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x or subdrop 1
353. ecessary for uncompressing the in stallation files Swap space In addition to the SUN recommendation 100MB per platform should be configured for object oriented database management system OODBMS requirements The total of RAM and swap memory should be at least 4Gbyte for example 1 Gbyte RAM 3 Gbyte swap or 2 Gbyte RAM 2 Gbyte swap NIS If more than one NAM platform is to be used NIS should be configured in the server so all the NAM clients will share the logins and password which are configured in the server tables All users require a NOT null password in order to manage NAM NFS Network File Sharing is not required even when using a LAN but if NIS is used NFS allows operators to log in in any client platform having access to their home directories NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 2 1 Software installation and commissioning General ee SUN patches All the Solaris patches described in the shopping list and included on CD ROM 1of 4 under SUN directory must be installed before NAM installation m LAN amp WAN configuration E g default router to NEs etc must be available How to install SUN Solaris is described in SUN support SUN Solaris Installation Guide Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that m the hardware required to install the NAM is prepared m the NAM consists of a number of server and client applications The soft ware installation may imply the installation of all these ap
354. ect via the menu bar or single click on AFMO in the Shelf View window The OC3 AFM window pops up If you want to then edit the location information edit the parameters in the field Loca tion Information and press Apply soft reset the AFM pack click on Soft Reset The following warning message pops up A Soft Reset of the AFM Pack will drop the NMS communication with the AFM Do you want to continue hard reset the AFM pack click on Hard Reset The following warning message pops up A Hard Reset of the AFM Pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue modify the global parameters click on Global Parameters 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 59 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ME SS 6 4 4 ADSL Application Pack window This window includes inventory data operation and protection information as well as general drop information Figure 6 21 ADSL Application Pack window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This field displays the slot id Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf or subap 1 8 1 8 NAM R1 9 6 60 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor Th
355. ected ADSL drop or all the ADSL drops in the NE Because performance monitor ing data exist for each ADSL drop there are three option menus to select the ADSL drop s concerned ADSL PM Data O m T el S Figure 9 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 9 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring ADSL performance monitoring data E SS Parameters Buttons Description Physical Drop These fields display the ADSL drop id by means of three op Id tion menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an ADSL pack is provi sioned Format 1 16 for main shelf or 1 8 for subshelf or 0 19 for BAIU None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated in the previous list 1 x Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x or subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x or drop 1 0 19 1 x for BAIU None is also allowed x is the number of drops supplied by the server Log All PM This check box can be used to define whether the NAM is Drops Data collecting and logging the performance monitoring data for all the ADSL drops in the NE or not
356. ed gt NOTE The software download process cannot be cancelled NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 81 NE management Network Element management 8 After the download process is finished click on Close to exit the COMDAC Software Download window This button is disabled while the SW download process is being executed gt NOTE The following errors will stop the download process m NE does not match login and password The NAM returns operation failed to the NAM NE detects that the side switch to the standby COMDAC is not pos sible e g 2nd COMDAC not present and rejects the SW download operation If the download of the data fails an alarm is issued and manual inter vention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or write from the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to back out the partial load duplex configuration see Chapter 5 6 12 page 5 86 m If the software program is not installed successfully on the standby COMDAC In duplex configuration an alarm will be sent to the NAM and man ual intervention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or write from the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to remove the downloaded copy see Chapter 5 6 12 page 5 86 The TCP connection between NAM and NE is lost NAM R1 9 5 82 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management 5 6 11 4 A
357. ed at least to an EM user group EM User Group A logical group of EM users enabled to access one or more domains Permissions to access domains applica tions and tasks are administered on an EM user group basis Embedded Operations Channel EOC A duplicated DSO data link dedicated for exchange operations messages between the LDS and RDT eee F Fault Case For some faults e g DCN failure normal working conditions need to be re established within certain time limits These are fault cases that are taken into account Fault Management For detecting displaying storing filtering and routing fault alarm data Feeder DS1 Ports These are the DS1 circuits that are used to provide virtual remote terminals or INA virtual bank feeder facilities and are provided by O_DS1 circuit packs in the AnyMedia Access System The DS1 port numbers are included as part of the AlDs for these feeder DS1 ports Forced Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch no matter what the conditions of the protection unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only are Full Backup This copies a complete file system or directory NAM R1 9 GL 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Glossary G Generic Signaling Function GSFN This defines the signaling interface for a provisioned distribution port It is part of the TO object data associated with each port Typical values for the GSFN are 2LS
358. ed to change the state of the self slot It can be changed only if the pack is not inserted NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 23 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Physical DSO This field contains a table displaying physical DSO informa Information tion This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by Physical DSO Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add or remove single or multiple row selection the corre sponding Logical DSO s through the use of the Edit Logical DSO Add Logical DSO or Remove Logical T0 buttons see below Physical DSO Id Identifies the port within the AP Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop shelf 1 16 1 32 Logical DSO Id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row only available if the physi cal port is cross connected Possible values v3dp 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA GSFN The generic signalling function GSFN identi fies the service type provided The following values are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O SI A B C D
359. educes manual work Recovery processes vary depending on the type of failure that occurred the struc tures affected and the type of recovery If no files are lost or damaged recovery may require no more than restarting an instance If data have been lost recovery requires additional steps such as database restoration using a previous backup NAM recovery mechanisms are initiated mainly by the following situations m NE software crash m NAM crash m Communication between NAM and an NE is interrupted In the case of an NE crash the NAM configures NEs in accordance with the inter nal state of the NAM database In the event of an NAM crash or an interruption in communication the NAM downloads the current NE configuration from the NE to its database NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 27 Functional description Working with NAM lt lt Interactions Faults software or hardware which cause the NAM cannot eliminate itself by between operator means of a recovery mechanism must then be handled by the user The NAM and NAM supports this The NAM first displays the fault on the user interface The user then Initiates appropriate measures to clear the fault and or to maintain network opera tion This includes access to faulty network units and the redirection of the net work traffic The NAM supports both Initiation of main Sometimes additional maintenance actions are necessary to clear a fault For ex tenance actions amp
360. eedback Progress area Progress bar Modify timing source reference Successful Data are being reloaded oT TTT ical gt Information field Stop Cancel button ae Figure 5 8 Status bar example The status bar is composed of four sub areas m Information field Used to display monitoring information by means of two icons f p Information not updated Information updated m Message area Used to display feedback It indicates what is being done The last feedback message sent by the NE is displayed until a new com mand is sent or the window is closed There is a tooltip available to show the complete message if the message area is smaller than the message NAM R1 9 5 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Initial windows E SS Progress area Informs the user there are jobs running m Stop Cancel button For commands allows cancellation of commands Note that Cancel does not imply undo If the user tries to close the window and the last command executed has not fin ished yet they will be informed Warning window that there are still jobs running You have running jobs Do you want to continue The user has to decide whether to continue or wait until the job is finished Note that closing the window does not imply cancelling the action Additional mes The following can be displayed in the message area a m Feedback see above m Error messages Any time a wrong data is entered in the GUI out of range values inap
361. emental weekly cumulative backups 3 45 3 7 Log management 3 46 Sul sl Different log types 3 46 3 7 2 Configuration of logs 3 46 3 7 3 Log Viewer window 3 47 3 8 Disaster recovery 3 53 NAM R1 9 3 II Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management 3 1 Overview 363 211 497 This chapter provides you with information about accessing the Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 general handling of the workspace and NAM windows starting up and shutting down applications printing out reports from NAM windows backup and restore tasks basics on log management and how to use the Log Viewer disaster recovery NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 3 1 System management System access ee 3 2 System access To access the NAM application you need to have an account in the underlying op erating system and this account has to be accepted as a user account of NAM The user account has to be NIS network information name service based and the NIS can be provided by the AnyMedia Server or by another machine NAM user accounts are managed by the administrator cf Chapter 4 3 2 1 Login to operation system This chapter describes how to log into the system System login Complete the following procedure to log in Step Procedure 1 The system asks for your user name Enter your user name and press Return or click OK 2 The system asks for your password Enter your password and press Return or click OK Login correct I
362. en unprovision the AP use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code to select NONE The Common Application Pack window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 change the administrative state use the option menu Administrative State gt NOTE When changing from Un locked to Locked the following warning messages appears Changing the administrative state of the SDSL pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue edit an SDSL drop select the desired SDSL drop in the Drop Information table and click on Edit or double click on the row entry The SDSL Drop window pops up cf Chapter 6 4 7 page 6 75 deprovision a drop select the desired SDSL drop and click on Deprovision Assigned profiles are deleted also as well as cross connec tions get access to the ATM Cross Connec click on Cross Connections List tion List window The ATM Cross Connection List win dow pops up cf Chapter 7 3 1 start the BIST test click on Apply to launch the BIST Test See also Chapter 8 4 2 4 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 73 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee If you want to then reset the pack click on Reset The following warning message pops up Resetting the SDSL Pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 6 74 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data p
363. en change the values for Equalization use the corresponding sliders and and or Degrade Threshold press Apply change the loopback state use the label button on the right hand side of the corresponding text field A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Set or Clear Loopback may be service affecting Do you want to continue modify the current NE timing source click on Edit button on the right hand reference side of the Timing Source field The Timing Source Control window pops up cf Chapter 5 6 4 1 page 5 57 get the current service states click on Get in the Operational State field add a logical DS1 click on Add Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 edit a logical DS1 click on Edit Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 23 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Ee If you want to remove a logical DS1 exit the window 7 24 Issue1 02 2001 NAM R1 9 then click on Remove Logical DS1 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Deleting Logical DS1 id may be service affecting and may remove existing semi per manent cross connections DSO end points OK to pro ceed If you decide to continue the NAM will send a delete cross connection mes sage to the NE click on Close 363 211 497 Servic
364. ent 5 99 Vn 6 Equipment configuration 6 1 6 1 Introduction 6 1 6 2 Shelf View 6 3 6 2 1 BAIU Shelf View window 6 6 6 2 2 MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window 6 7 6 3 Configuration of the telephony packs 6 10 6 3 1 lO DS1 window 6 10 6 3 2 View the COMDAC parameters 6 14 6 3 3 View the CTU parameters 6 17 6 3 4 Common Application Pack window 6 18 6 3 5 Telephony Application Pack window 6 21 6 3 6 MSC window 6 27 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 VII rr Contents 6 3 7 PTU Window 6 29 6 3 8 Channel Unit Window 6 31 6 3 9 MDSU window 6 36 6 3 10 IAT Server window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases 6 39 6 3 11 IAT Subshelf window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases 6 43 6 3 12 IAT Server Port information window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases 6 47 6 4 Configuration of the data packs 6 50 6 4 1 DS3 AFM window 6 50 6 4 2 DS3 AFM Feeder window 6 54 6 4 3 OC3 AFM window 6 57 6 4 4 ADSL Application Pack window 6 60 6 4 5 ADSL Drop window 6 65 6 4 6 SDSL Application Pack window 6 70 6 4 7 SDSL Drop window 6 75 6 4 8 ONU Application Pack window 6 81 Ve 7 Service provisioning 7 1 7 1 Introduction 7 1 7 2 Service provisioning telephony 7 1 7 2 1 Network interface 1 6 7 2 2 Physical DS1 List window 7 16 7 2 3 Creation of VRT VB logical feeder T1 cross connection 7 19 7 2 4 Creation of VRT VB logical TO subscriber 7 29 7 3 Service provisioning data 1 64 7 3 1 ATM Cross Connections List window 7 64
365. ent Manager Release 1 7 1 for NE release 17 as lt LUuAMNB17 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 Creating data bases You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAMNB17 1log Installation of lt LuAMNB17 gt was successful NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 47 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee 2 2 1 1 4 Installation of the data agents optional General CD ROM 3 of 4 contains the installation scripts of the data agents LUAMBB112 LUAMBB14 and LUAMBB1 7 The installation of these scripts is optional so you can install the ones you need Complete the following procedure to install the data agents Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed on CD ROM 3 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM bb and press Return AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 9 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y 2000 patches indicated in SRD pdf document 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to successfully run the AnyMedia EM 157
366. eoijddy yoed uoleoiddy yoed uoneoijddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uolneoiddy yoed uolneoijddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uoleoijddy yoed uoieoiddy WAV OVANOO OVANOO BAIU shelf layout Figure 5 2 NAM R1 9 02 2001 5 3 Issue 1 363 211 497 NE management Overview of the controlled systems ee 52L MDS2 MDS2B shelf layout Connection with The use of the metallic distribution shelf MDS2 or MDS2B is optional If it is main shelf used one or two AnyMedia Access System AP slots are equipped with the MDSU each of which connects to an MSC in the MDS2 MDS2B shelf The MDS2 MDS2B shelf based on the SLC 2000 MDS has the capacity to hold 24 SLC SPQ or AUA channel units and to serve up to 96 DSO rate services The MDS2 MDS82B Shelf is used to provide specials via SPQ AUA Channel Units A maximum of one MDS2 MDS2B Shelf is supported per AnyMedia Access Sys tem The shelf can serve up to 96 DSOs in 24 slots each MDSU pack on the AnyMedia Access System shelf can serve up to 48 DSOs and up to 12 channel units CU The MDSU APs primarily serve as pass through for the PCM trans mission and the UART messages All control messages to and from the MDS2 MDS2B shelf are routed through the MDSU packs the MDSU 1 pack serves the first 12 slots slots 1 through 12 on the MDS2 the MDSU 2 pack serves the remaining 12 slots 13 through 24 The MDS2 MDS2B shelf may be equipped so that only half of the shelf is opera tional 12 channel units
367. ep Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Profiles gt SDSL Transmission via the cursor menu The SDSL Transmission Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 6 page 9 31 2 Use the option menu Network Profile to select New Network Profile 3 Use the text field Network Profile Name in the field Network Profile In formation to enter a profile name 4 Add a description of the new profile in the corresponding list box and click on Apply to confirm 5 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 33 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee 9 6 6 2 Modify the SDSL transmission net work profile Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an SDSL transmission network pro file Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Profiles gt SDSL Transmission via the cursor menu The SDSL Transmission Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 6 page 9 31 This window can also be reached from the SDSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 7 by pressing the Edit button for the transmission network profile 2 When coming from the NE Browser use the option menu Network Profile to select the desired profile This step is not necessary when coming from the SDSL Drop window via Edit If you want to then modify the profile information use the text fields Network Profile Name and Description to change the not possible for the default profiles information d
368. er to the AEM R1 7 1 User Service Manual for a detailed description of the un installation procedure NAM R1 9 2 76 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 2 3 1 7 Install Navis AnyMedia R1 9 The NAM R1 9 full installation installs all packages contained in the distribution necessary for both Server and Client sides Refer to Chapter 2 2 for a detailed description of the installation procedure It is important to install the NAM R1 9 on the same directories as AEM R1 7 1 was previously installed to avoid incompatibilities Do not reboot the server machine after the installation Reboot only after all up grade steps are finished 2 3 1 8 Restore NAM databases Restore the databases 1 Log in aS AEM Administrator 2 Type cd SANYMEDIAPATH Backup bin to change to the NAM direc tory where the AEM _resiore utility is 3 Type AEM_restore p lt path gt f lt file gt and press Return p lt path gt path is the directory or device to which the restored data should be written If no value is specified the original loca tions will be used f lt file gt Location of the backup file file can be a local file a locally mounted file or a local tape device When AEM_restore asks whether the file to be restored comes from a backup or an archive answer backup Refer to Chapter 3 6 for a detailed description of the NAM restore proce dure 4 The ObjectS
369. errupted Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct data agent state Yes Continue with step 2 No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 2 Check for DCN being in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 17 UNABLE _TO_SYNC_ CONFIG Meaning The Configuration Synchronization process has failed n times NAM R1 9 8 56 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms a SeSe Abbreviation UNABLE TO SYNC CONFIG Severity Major Service affecting No Effects An updated view of the configuration data of the data agent cannot be uploaded Possible cause s The communication with the data agent may be interrupted Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct data agent state Yes Continue with step 2 No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 2 Check for DCN being in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 18 UPLOAD_PROBLEM Meaning Some configuration data have been lost during synchronization Abbreviation UPLOAD PROBLEM Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects Some configuration data are not available
370. es Would you like install the SystemAdmin process on the system boot y n q NAM R1 9 2 42 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure 7 Type y and press Return to define that the NAM starts at boot time An option list pops up Start up MODE 1 ALL to start up all AnyMedia applications 2 ADM to start up Administration AnyMedia aplications 3 NB to start up only NarrowBand AnyMedia applications 4 BB to start up only BroadBand AnyMedia applications Enter selection 7 7 q 8 Type the number for the desired option e g 1 for ALL and press Re turn SystemAdmin ALL will be placed on the system boot Clean up tasks for the AnyMedia EM system will be executed every day at 2 00 AM Would you like change it y n q 9 Type n and press Return Would you like install the Backup process as a cron y n q gt NOTE In order to install the backup process as a cron type y and press Return Then follow the system responses to define the date and time of the auto matic backup procedure refer to your SUN documentation for more infor mation about cron 10 Type n and press Return Would you like install the Archive process as a cron y n q gt NOTE The archive process can also be installed as a cron but it is recommended not to do this since log files will be removed NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 43 Software installation and c
371. es not match the configuration data of the data agent Possible cause s Configuration buffer overflow Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual configuration synchronization process to upload the configuration data and to start processing traps 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 9 CX_CONN_NOT_VISIBLE Meaning Some cross connections in the AFM are not visible Abbreviation CX_CONN_NOT_VISIBLE Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects There are cross connections in the data agent which cannot be managed by the NAM NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 51 Fault management and maintenance Alarms BE SeS Possible cause s There are cross connections in the AFM associated to non provisioned ports This kind of cross connections are ignored by the NAM upload procedure and therefore they are not visible in the NAM Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Use the CIT or the MIB browser to provision the needed APs or to remove the affected cross connections 2 Request a re synchronization after AP provisioning 8 5 5 10 INVALID_MIB_IDENTIFIER Meaning The data agent to communicate with is not a valid data agent Abbreviation INVALID MIB IDENTIFIER Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to start the communication with the data agent P
372. escription Figure 4 12 User Administration amp Profiling window User Groups Table NAM R1 9 4 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User groups 4 Click New The User Group Profile window pops up User Group Name as Description Re Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Users Not Assigned Users Assigned a Figure 4 13 User Group Profile window tab Users J Enter a new user group name in the User Group Name field this is man datory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional O to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Select one or more users that shall belong to the new user group in the Users Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 3 7 Change to tab Domains The window changes its display as shown be low NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 15 User management User groups group 3 test groug Figure 4 14 User Group Profile window tab Domains 8 Select one or more domains the user group shall has access to in the Do mains Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 For carrying out the steps
373. ess Value expressed in milliseconds Default value 5000 Market settings IS NAR MARKET This variables defines if the AnyMedia ap plication is being used either in the NAR market true or in the international market false Default value true NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 B 9 Configuration parameters Overview BE S Name Description Groups amp NEs set i The RELEASE_MAP_X options define a list of key value pairs used to map each ings release related object to the corresponding class which implements the function ality for that object Using this mapping several releases can be mapped to the same class if possi ble allowing for code reuse Agent related classes RELEASE MAP_0 NB_R13 RT guinemanage AgentNB30ch RELEASE MAP_1 NB_R13 COT guinemanage AgentNB30ch RELEASE MAP_2 NB_R131 RT guinemanage AgentNB30ch RELEASE MAP_3 NB_R131 COT guinemanage AgentNB30ch RELEASE _MAP_4 NB_R14 RT guinemanage AgentNB30chR14 RELEASE MAP_5 NB_R14 COT guinemanage AgentNB30chR14 RELEASE _MAP_6 NB_R17 RT guinemanage AgentNB24ch RELEASE MAP_7 NB_R17 COT guinemanage AgentNB24ch RELEASE MAP_8 BB_R112 guinemanage AgentBB RELEASE _MAP_9 BB_R14 guinemanage AgentBB14 RELEASE MAP_10 BB_R17 guinemanage AgentBB1 7 Shelf related classes RELEASE MAP_11 sh guinemanage NEsh RELEASE MAP_12 subsh guinemanage NEsubsh RELEASE _MAP_13 iat guinemanage NEsh RELEASE MAP_14 mds2 guinemanage NEsubsh Pack related class RELEASE MAP_
374. ess to the AFM Feeder VP window If a row in the table above has been selected edit mode the button is labelled Edit If no row is selected add mode the button is labelled Add The Remove bution can be used to remove an entry from the Feeder VPs List This button is enabled if one row in the table is selected and the VP type is one of the following Shelf VP1 Shelf VP2 Shelf VP3 Shelf VP4 Downstream VP Upstream VP NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 73 Service provisioning Service provisioning data 7 3 7 AFM Feeder VP window This window is used to add edit AFM feeder VPs AFM Feeder VP Figure 7 37 AFM Feeder VP window The following table shows the view options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the AFM is inserted Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf In this release the only possible value is ap 1 16 for FAST shelf and ap 1 0 for BAIU shelf Feeder VP Infor VP Number This field indicates the unique sequence mation number for each shelf VPI entry The field is disabled for up stream and downstream feeder VPs Service Category This option menu is used to define the QoS of the feeder VP Possible values CBR rt VBR nrt VBR UBR VP Type This option menu is used to define the type of the feeder VP Possible values Downstream
375. eters Circuit Id Indicates an identifier associated to each VP or VC cross connection Administrative State This field indicates the current ad ministrative state of the cross connection Locked Unlocked Network Physical Interface Id Indicates the network inter face Feeder which is involved in the ATM cross connection Network VPI Indicates the VPI used to create the cross connection on the network side Feeder Network VCI Indicates the VCI used to create the cross connection on the network side Feeder This field is empty if the row represents a VP cross connection NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 7 65 Service provisioning Service provisioning data ee Parameters Buttons Description Cross Connec Physical Drop Id Indicates the drop selected in this win tions List dow continued Drop VPI Indicates the VPI used to create the cross con nection on the drop side Drop VCI Indicates the VCI used to create the cross con nection on the drop side This field can be empty if the row is a VP cross connection ATM Traffic Network Profile Indicates the ATM traffic de scriptor associated with each cross connection Unknown XX identifies an NE profile not controlled by the NAM Command but The Add Edit button provides access to the AJM Cross tons Connection window cf Chapter 7 3 2 page 7 67 If a cross connection has been selected Edit if no cross connection has been selected Add gt NO
376. ew Start up a new Log Viewer File gt Print gt Print Table Print out all logged items displayed in the table of the Log Viewer File gt Print gt Print Window Print a screenshot of the whole window File gt Print gt Preview Shows how it will be printed if the Print Table option is used Opens directly the Print Preview window File gt Close The selected Log Viewer window is closed Other open Log Viewer windows stay open File gt Exit Close all Log Viewer windows View gt Reload Log Data Update the displayed Log Viewer table with newly logged items View gt Reload NE List Update the NEs Selection list Help gt On Window Display help for Log Viewer Help gt Index Display help index Actions The following table lists all actions you can perform in the Log Viewer window Table 3 38 Actions in the Log Viewer window If you want to then Result display acertain log select the desired log type with the pull The log of the selected type and date of type of a specific down control Log Type the desired NE is displayed in the Log date and NE Viewer table select the date of interest with the pull down control Date and select the NE by using the Add gt gt button and press Apply view different log start another Log Viewer with File gt A new Log Viewer window displays the types or dates si New and set the desired Type or Date selected log type and date multaneously print dis
377. f Subscriber Identifier Tae Service provisioning tele phony Overview Service provisioning deactivation means the setting of those parameters needed to provide service to or disconnect service from an individual end customer For distribution ports such parameters include those that specify a TO cross connec tion between a logical DSO on a VRT VB virtual remote terminal virtual bank and an end customer s physical port and the parameters which can be set on the port Service provisioning is typically initiated by a service order although unprovi sioning is sometimes also needed for maintenance purposes or for re configura tion of an existing network e g load balancing Supported Figure 7 1 page 7 2 shows a conceptual diagram of the cross connections be VRTs VBs tween the physical DS1 and subscriber ports of the AnyMedia Access System and the VRTs VBs The AnyMedia Access System supports m uptoone TR 303 VRT m upto 20 TR 08 VRIs m and up to 20 INA VBs NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 1 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee in any combination not exceeding 20 feeder DS1s 4 DS1 feeders for each lO DS1 T1 cross connec T1 cross connections provide feeder bandwidth to VRTs and VBs A maximum of tions 20 T1 cross connections can be created they are limited by the maximum num ber of DS1 feeder ports in the system Logical BW management entities in the AnyMedia Access System
378. f line self test Lit when the pack is service active Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 1 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 2 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 3 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 4 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Shelf View Pack Meanings COMDAC a m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes during software download and turn up ACT green Indicates that this COMDAC is active a Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical red Lit when the highest severity alarm is major a yotow Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor NE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condition is near end FE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condition is far end CTU FLT red m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes on turn up ACT green green Lit when a test Is in progress MISC yellow Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm inputs is active lace For future use All Appli m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack cation m Flashes when the AP executes off line Packs shelf tests red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack MDSU a CRN m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is de tected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2
379. f the LED is OFF the color black is used Table 8 1 LED meanings Pack LED Color Meanings IO DS1 m Lit during pack failure m Flashes when the pack executes off line self test ACT green Lit when the pack is service active CLF1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 1 CLF2 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 2 CLF3 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 3 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the en ane received DS1 port 4 COMDAC nll red m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes during software download and turn up ACT green green Indicates that this COMDAC is active Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical Lit when the highest severity alarm is major Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor NE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condition is near end A Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condition is far end CTU red m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes on turn up ACT fgreen Lit when a test is in progress MISC yellow Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm inputs is active green For future use NAM R1 9 8 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management Table 8 1 LED meanings Pack LED Color Meanin
380. f the login was correct the workspace is displayed Login incorrect lf the login was incorrect a warning message appears Login incorrect please try again Confirm the message by pressing Return or clicking OK and repeat the login procedure Start NAM If the NAM was not yet started an administrator has to do this cf Chapter 3 4 2 page 3 18 before the NAM access bar can be started Start NAM access To start the NAM access bar cf Figure 3 1 page 3 3 after a correct login type in bar a terminal window which you can open via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 cd lt GUI base path gt GUI24 GUI Main amp A splash screen is displayed and then the NAM access bar is shown NAM R1 9 3 2 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System access San Figure 3 1 Workspace with NAM access bar 3 2 2 Logout from operation system This chapter describes how to log out from the system You can log out manually or be logged out automatically after a certain time of mouse and keyboard inactiv ity System logout Complete the following procedure to log out manually Step Procedure 1 Close the NAM access bar window 2 Click on the Exit symbol in the workspace manager or select Log out in the workspace menu 3 A message box pops up Press Return or click OK to confirm the logout Press Cancel not to log out After a logout the login screen is displayed again gt NOTE During the
381. flexible Several processes The scaling feature is provided by the existence of several DMGs several module groups in each DMG and several processes per module which allow the load dis tribution The concept of several DMGs is used to distribute the set of NEs into dif ferent disjoint subsets of NEs This process is automatically done by the NAM However the NAM R1 9 is not yet distributed among several hosts 3 4 1 4 Load balancing General This functionality of the NAM is provided by different types of processes Depend ing on the NAM workload i e the activity due to user requests and NE NAM com munication level less or more processing has to be done by each type of process Administrator tasks In general the number of manageable users and NEs makes it inefficient to start up a process of each type per user or NE The load balancing mechanisms allows the NAM to distribute the current load among the running processes The admin istrator can start up a reasonable number of processes to assure a certain service level according with the expected workload 3 4 2 Start up shutdown of server applica tions via command line The system can be configured at installation time to start up the server applica tions automatically on every reboot An administrator can start up or shut down server applications via a command line interface Commands for The following table shows which commands have to be entered in a terminal win start up and sh
382. following table shows the parameters which are included in all service details windows Parameters Buttons Description GSFN Displays the selected GSFN for the logical DSO Command but The OK button is used to confirm the changes polls The Close button can be used to close the window without changes NAM R1 9 7 40 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 7 2 4 8 DFLT Service Details window Overview The DFLT default POTS SPOTS service is primarily applicable to TR 08 applica tions DFLT Service Details Information GoFN EIS Service Details Information Ww Enable Full Time Transmission Loss Mode Auto Z Figure 7 16 Logical DSO window DFLT Service Details Parameters Description Enable Full When a check mark is set in the check box the transmission Time Transmis circuits in the AP or CU remain active when the subscriber is sion on hook Possible values Set Not set Default Set Loss Mode Use this option menu to specify whether the AP or CU will automatically adjust its transmit receive loss to control the overall loop loss to approximately 2 or 5 dB or use prescrip tion set values Possible values 2 5 Auto Default Auto NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 41 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Sm ee 7 2 4 9 EMO FXS0O Service Details windows Overview These GSFNs are only available for NE R1 7 0 EMO E amp M
383. following values Explicit default Flexible NE Profile Data Options Rate The parameters in this field are enabled or continued disabled depending on the selected value in the Type of Rate Adaptation field The following two parameters are en abled only if the Type of Rate Adaptation is Flexible m Max Bit Rate kbps This option menu allows to the operator to select the maximum bit rate Possible val ues 144 272 400 528 784 1168 1552 2320 Kbps Min Bit Rate kbps This option menu allows to the operator to select the minimum bit rate Possible values 144 272 400 528 784 1168 1552 2320 Kbps Explicit Bit Rate kbps This option menu allows to the operator select the Explicit Bit Rate Possible val ues 144 272 400 528 784 1168 1552 2320 Kbps m Tx Rx Scramble This option menu allows to the oper ator enable the SDSL Scramble function Possible val ues Enable Disable m COSET This option menu allows to the operator en able the SDSL COSET function Possible values En able Disable ATM Cell Scramble This option menu allows the oper ator to enable the SDSL ATM Cell Scramble function Possible Values Enable Disable NAM R1 9 9 44 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Data communications network DCN configuration Contents A 1 Overview A 2 DCN introduction A 3 Terms used in this chapter A 4 NE communication capabilities A 5 NAM communication capabilities A 6 Recomme
384. for The read only text fields provide the following information maton Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble value MSU100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning In The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code lists the formation provisioned packs and the value None for unprovisioning The None value can be used to unprovision the AP The cur rent window will be closed and the Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 There are two different Provisioned Apparatus Codes for the MDSU unit These indicate whether the pack is the left hand or the right hand unit Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted If there is a mismatch between the COMDAC view and the AFM view an addi
385. from the Available NEs list to the Selected NEs list The lt lt Remove button can be used to remove domains from the Selected NEs list The Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove button are available only after having selected an NE from the corresponding list The check box Standby COMDAC Automatic Copy can be used to initiate the automatic copying of the software from the working COMDAC to the standby COMDAC after the software download is completed successfully Download Infor Filename This text field shows the name of the file which mation will be downloaded The Browse button opens the File Browser window where the file can be selected Apply This button is used to start the software download 5 6 11 3 Software download to telephony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to start the software download Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Software Download gt Telephony via the cursor menu The COMDAC Software Download window pops up 2 Use the radio buttons in the field Selection Criteria to define single or multiple download For single download proceed with step 4 for multiple download proceed with step 3 3 Use the Add gt gt button in the field Target to move the desired NEs to the Available NEs list 4 Set the check box Standby Comdac Automatic Copy if you want to copy automatically the software from the working COMDAC to the standby COMDAC after the software downlo
386. ftware architecture is built on a number of components which can be grouped in the following distinct functional groups 1 NE Management Equipment Management Service Management Alarm Management Test Management Performance Management 2 General Components Components for Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM Common Servers 3 Software Platform Software bus Repository third party libraries Graphical User Interface GUI 5 Northbound Interface Southbound Interface Figure 1 3 shows the six functional groups The shadowed blocks are part of the NAM Northbound General Southbound interface NE Management components interface equipment service alarm test performance common S OAM comp Software platform a fe software bus repository third party libraries Hardware platform SUN Solaris Figure 1 3 NAM functional groups NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 7 Functional description System and software architecture ee 1 3 1 1 NE Management The NE management functionality is distributed in 5 areas These are Equipment management Service management Alarm management Performance manage ment and Test management Equipment The equipment management provides the following functionality features a Scrolling list of NEs The NEs are displayed in a single window called Network Element Browser where the NEs and their components can be handled like files in a file browser
387. fy the logical DSO list Logical DSO window Add a logical DSO Modify a logical DSO Use the Select Logical DSO window Common parameters in service details windows DFLT Service Details window NAM R1 9 Issue 1 OP a i fa D Ph op T N T Co x h o D h No T h oo i D T h on r o_o D hs h Co D o_o T rh nN ih N U a N On rs No CO ih N O D S O Pa Go N ia ee D T Go co i Go Co ii D O Pi D he D k 02 2001 7 I or Contents 7 2 4 9 EMO FXSO Service Details windows 1 42 7 2 4 10 2LS 2GS 2FXLS 2FX Service Details windows 7 43 7 2 4 11 2RVO Service Details window 7 45 7 2 4 12 2NOS Service Details window 7 46 7 2 4 13 BRI Service Details window 7 47 7 2 4 14 TO Service Details window 7 48 7 2 4 15 2RVT Service Details window 7 49 7 2 4 16 DX4N DX4R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 Service Details windows 7 50 7 2 4 17 EM4C EM4H PLR1 PLR2 Service Details windows 1 92 7 2 4 18 ETO4 Service Details window 7 53 7 2 4 19 FXO Service Details window 7 54 7 2 4 20 OCU 1 2 3 Service Details windows 7 56 7 2 4 21 SW56 Service Details window 7 57_ 7 2 4 22 TD O S A B C D Service Details windows 75 7 2 4 23 TO4 Service Details window 7 59 7 2 4 24 FXOD Service Details window 7 60 7 2 4 25 DPT Service Details windows 7 61 7 2 4 26 Overview of APs and GSFNs 7 62 7 2
388. g the execution of provisioning and maintenance procedures For example upon insertion of the new pack in the AnyMedia Access System shelf the inventory data of the new pack as well as its serial number slot and pack entity will be reported to the NAM and or GSI interface The removal of any pack unit will be announced also 5 2 1 7 Equipment configuration related tasks The network element NE equipment configuration facilities provided by the NAM cover the operations that control and provision the NE including the following tasks m Configuration specific equipment data which involves m NE creation and deletion m Pack management COMDAC management IO _DS1s management physical feeder management CTU management AFM management AP management m Protection management m Slot alarming configuration m Date amp time management m NE security configuration NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 7 NE management Overview of the controlled systems ee iming synchronization provisioning Maintaining a local copy of the NE inventory which includes a Initializing the local copy when an NE is added to the NAM m Maintaining the local copy of equipment changes m 8 Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the NE and reporting differences m Inventory management system activity of collecting updating and re porting data on AnyMedia Access System equipment and system statu
389. g system information 2 package pathnames are already properly installed Installing AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 9 as lt LUAMBB14 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 53 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Creating data bases You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAMBB14 1log Installation of lt LuAMBB14 gt was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 9 was successful lt y side installation gt 2 2 1 2 Client side installation Complete the following procedure to install the AnyMedia client side Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed DC ROM 1 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM gen and press Return AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 9 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y2000 patches indicated in SRD pdf document 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to successfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order
390. gement for defining view options and for getting help These functions are con tained in the following menus m File m Views m Filters Help 8 3 4 1 File In the file menu you can start the following actions m New Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer m Print cf Chapter 3 5 m Close Close the active window but without closing other instances of the Alarm Viewer Same functionality as the Close button m Exit Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user 8 3 4 2 Views Summary For displaying alarm lists you can select from four pre defined views m View Index Node Entity Severity Date amp Time Last Change Alarm Text m View2 Index Node Entity Severity Date amp Time Last Change m Views Index Node Entity Date amp Time First Raise Date amp Time Last Change Ac knowledge User Number Raises m View4 Index Node Entity Severity Date amp Time Last Change Correlation State m Viewd All alarm fields gt NOTE In order to see the alarm description defined by the NE use the View5 and the filter None Filter All Alarms NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 19 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring ee Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected criteria Selecting Views Proceed as follows to select the desired view option Step Procedure 1 Select Views gt ViewX X 1 to 5 in the menu bar The same view options can be selected via
391. gs All Appli m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack ea m Flashes when the AP executes off line Packs shelf tests FPT FLT fred Lit when a fault is detected on the pack MDSU yellow m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is de tected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is detected ao FLT fred Lit when a fault is detected on the pack yellow Lit when a failure of either IAT RT carrier link R1 7 0 from the IAT to the IATS is detected yellow Lit when a configuration error or mismatch is detected as follows m the IATS is placed in an AP slot not pro visioned for the IAT server pack type the IATS faceplate DS1 cable is discon nected there is a mismatch between the host T0 provisioning and the IAT phantom CU equipage IAT01 only i Lit when a failure of either link from the IATS to e IAT IAT RT link working is detected AFMDS3 Lit when a fault is detected on the pack ACT fgreen Indicates that this AFM is active CR MJ Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical or major Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor Ce yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS3 port 1 CLF2 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS3 port 2 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 5 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management Table 8 1 LED meanings Pack LED AFMO a FAC1 FAC2
392. gt AnyMedia Element Manager Auxiliar Even Dist Release 1 9 administration sparc LuNeED_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk NAM R1 9 2 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuNeED has been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Auxiliar Even Dist Release 1 7 1 administration as lt LuNeED gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuNeED gt was successful Security installa Processing package instance lt LuSec gt from tion lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Security Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuSec_59_2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuSec has been found
393. gt ADSL PM Threshold Profiles gt SDSL Transmission Profiles gt SDSL PM Threshold Performance gt ATM Traffic View Protection for telephony Scheduling Exercise View only for ONU Subshelf for data agent MDS2 or MDS2B Edit only for IAT subshelf View NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 25 NE management Groups and NEs management 5 4 Groups and NEs management The groups and NE management map handling is performed by the following windows m Network Browser m NE Browser Group Map Groups and NEs Management Group Map Root Group E NE Browser SHELF17_ BP SHELF BE 5 Figure 5 9 Groups and NEs Management windows 5 4 1 Groups management Overview Groups management consists of the addition of a new group to the set of groups that can be managed by the NAM as well as the deletion and edition of their at tributes It also involves the movement of a group from a old parent group to a new parent group and the information of the group status parameter NE groups Due to the increase of the number of NEs to be managed by the NAM they are displayed in a layered way displaying sets of NEs instead of the whole set of NEs These groups can contain NEs and or other groups Groups and NEs are distrib uted in a tree hierarchy with the root group as the starting point of the tree NAM R1 9 5 26 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Groups and NEs management a The root group
394. gt Feeder VP via the cursor menu The AFM Feeder VPs List window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 6 page 7 72 2 Click on Add in the Feeder VPs List field The AFM Feeder VP window pops up 3 Use the text field and the option menus in the Feeder VP Information field to define the desired parameters and click on Apply NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 75 Service provisioning Service provisioning data ee 4 Click on Close to exit the window 7 3 7 4 Modify a Shelf VP Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify a Shelf VP Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Feeder VP via the cursor menu The AFM Feeder VPs List window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 6 page 7 72 2 Select the corresponding row in the Feeder VPs List and click on Edit 3 Use the text field VP Number and or the option menu Service Category in the Feeder VP Information field to change the parameters and click on Apply 4 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 7 76 ssue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning data a 7 3 8 AFM Global Parameters window This window is used to show modify the inband management channel and the quality of service parameters SFM Global Parameters Figure 7 38 AFM Global Parameters window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the AFM is inserted
395. gt NetEvenDist LuNeED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSec gt Security LuSec_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuShelf gt ConbinedShelf LuShelf_ 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuSysED gt SystemEventDist LuSysED_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuTrap gt SystemEventDist LuTrap_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time has been found in opt lucent LUMOS NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 51 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee OK No previous package LUAMBB17 has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 2 package pathnames are already properly installed Installing AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 9 as lt LUAMBB17 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 Creating data bases You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAMBB17 1log Installation of lt LuAMBB17 gt was successful NE Data support Processing package instance lt LUuAMBB14 gt from for R1 4 installation lt cdrom cd1 C
396. haracters Slot Id This option menu shows the slot which is being used as IAT Server Possible values iat 1 1 24 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 39 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Action Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information manon Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack LPS100 LPS104 LPS105 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning In The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code lists the formation provisioned pack type and the value None for unprovision ing The None value can be used to unprovision the AP The cur rent window will be closed and the Common Application Pack window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state
397. has been recollected BB Time Stamp Date and Time when a performance data was collected in the NE UAS Indicates the Unavailable Seconds Log types and dis Depending on the chosen log type the table in the Log Viewer displays different in played information formation more or less columns The following table shows which information is displayed for which log type Table 3 36 Log types Log Type Contents Actions Date amp Time Login Conditions Object Method Pa rameters ADSL Performance Date amp Time NE Name IP Address Shelf Id Slot Id Port Id Time Stamp Interval LOF LOS Up ES Up HBER Up RFI LOS Down ES Down HBER Down Parameters Alarms Date amp Time NE Name Index Probable Cause Sever ity Object Id Date amp Time Last Parameters ATM Performance Date amp Time NE Name IP Address Time Stamp Rev Cells High RcvCells Low RevErroredCells Up RcevErroredCells Low Parameters Autonomous Reports Date amp Time NE Name Parameters Feeders Performance Date amp Time NE Name IP Address Shelf Id Port Id Time Stamp Interval Feeder Type ES PSES UAS Parameters System Internal Events Date amp Time Object Event Type Parameters NAM R1 9 3 50 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Log management Menus and func The following table provides an overview of the menus of the Log Viewer and their tions functions Table 3 37 Menus and Functions Menu Item Function File gt N
398. hat in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble value MSC100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted NAM R1 9 6 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs 6 3 6 1 Modify an MSC Procedure Complete the following procedure to configure the MSC data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt MDS2 MDS2B Shelf gt MSC in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or single click on the pack MSC in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window The MSC window pops up If you want to then unprovision the MSC use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 change the required state use the check box Slot required exit the window click on Close 6 3 7 PTU W
399. he NAM or the configurable size limits of the log system have not been chosen correctly Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Archive the remaining logs to prevent them from being deleted 2 Check the NAM for problems or abnormal situations Have any problems or abnormal situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 3 No Continue with step 3 3 Check the size limits of the log system NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 45 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ME SS Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Set the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits 8 5 4 4 NP_SYNC_PROBLEM Meaning The network profile synchronization through the managed agents has not finished successfully Abbreviation NP_SYNC_PROBLEM Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The Network Profile is not synchronized with all the managed agents Possible cause s NAM internal problem Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Resynchronize the related network profile 8 5 4 5 PRINT_ALARM Meaning There are one or more problems blocking the printing jobs Abbreviation PRINT_ALARM Severity Major Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to print reports Possible cause s There may be
400. he SDSL performance monitoring data Step Procedure 1 Click on the PM Data button in the SDSL Drop window The SDSL PM Data window pops up 2 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the desired SDSL drop NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 7 Performance monitoring SDSL performance monitoring data ee 3 Use the check box Log All PM Drops Data to define whether the moni toring data should be logged or not If you want to then retrieve the performance monitoring click on Get data restart the monitoring data counter for click on Reset Counts the selected drop restart the monitoring data counters for click on Reset ALL Drops Counts all drops within the NE exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 9 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring AFM feeder performance monitoring 9 4 AFM feeder performance monitoring The AFM feeder performance monitoring consists of retrieving displaying provi sioning and storing DS3 performance measurements detected by the AFM The NAM is able to retrieve the DS3 performance monitoring counts from the NE The interval data are retrieved and stored every 15 minutes the day data are re trieved and stored every 24 hours from each enabled NE The 24 hour data for feeders is updated every 15 minutes in the AFM The data are stored per day in a separate log file AdsIDsxE3StatisticsLog YYYYMMDD where YYYY year MM month and DD day loca
401. he Solaris Operating Environment Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q 12 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing Orbix 2 3c02 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 as lt LUuOX23RT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt lt files list gt verifying class lt bin gt lt files list gt verifying class lt cfg gt NAM R1 9 2 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS lt files list gt verifying class lt lib gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOX23RT log Installation of lt LuOX23RT gt was successful OrbixNames 1 1c Processing package instance lt LuOXNS gt from installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt OrbixNames 1 1c Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 sparc solaris Version 1 1c Run Time OK No previous package LUOXNSRT has been found Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c0O2MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail Capacity Mounted on
402. he data agent does not know if the NAM has received the trap or not As a result the NAM does not show an up dated view of the data agent To solve this problem the NAM periodically polls the data agent in order to retrieve the internal information the data agent stores in its NVDS This process is launched in a scheduled way as well as on user demand Autonomous re Each time a configuration synchronization process is done the NAM retrieves all ports the configuration information from the data agent and then updates the NAM data base to reflect the current state of the configuration information in the data agent During the process the data agent state will be moved from COMM_ESTABLISHED to COMM_ESTABLISHED_ SYNCHRONIZING Two NE configuration data synchronization states can be identified PROCESSING The NAM is processing all the traps concerning configura tion changes and is updating the NAM database in accordance with the traps NOT PROCESSING The NAM is discarding the configuration traps com ing from the data agent In this case it is possible that the NAM database and the data agent configuration data are out of synchronization 5 6 3 2 Alarm information synchronization Overview The data agent informs the NAM of changes in alarms the data agent has gener ated by using alarm traps Alarms can be considered independent of one of an other any alarm trap can be processed by the NAM independent of other alarm traps The
403. he directory example of the file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt COMDAC R1 and file name of the restore file 3 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field File name in the COMDAC NVDS Restore window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the restore A Warning window pops up NVDS Restore may be service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while the execution Continue anyway 5 Press Yes to confirm this message An n Progress window pops up NVDS restore on lt NE Name gt in progress After finishing the backup process successfully the n Progress window disappears 6 Press Close to exit the COMDAC Restore window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 91 NE management Network Element management gt NOTE When an NVDS restore process is started all NAM variables are set to their initial values to provoke a FULL synchronization The NE synchroniza tion state goes to ASYNC The association between NAM and NE is lost and recovered The FULL synchronization is launched for that NE Finally the NE is connected and perfectly synchronized 5 6 14 3 Data backup data agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data backup for a data agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Backups gt Data via the cursor menu The AFM NVDS Backup window pops up AFM NVDS Backup
404. he fault by testing at regular intervals whether the association to the particular NE is dropped In this case the NAM itself raises an alarm Alarm display on A complete alarm overview and a detailed alarm description is provided by the the user interface alarm viewer All relevant alarm data e g alarm severity are shown Alarm logs The NAM keeps alarm logs to store the alarm notifications Alarm logs are used among other things for long term observations e g of the fault behavior in the network Alarm logs exist for pending alarms for the alarm history and for clock events in the network 1 4 3 1 2 Fault localization and diagnosis Reaction to fault When a fault has been detected it is necessary to localize its source and diag identification nose its cause in order to initiate appropriate repair procedures To locate the cause of fault the NAM provides information gathered from alarm notifications and general network data Fault source Each alarm notification contains the name of the network component from which it originates This network component however need not always be the real fault source 1 4 3 1 3 Fault clearance Background The NAM detects faults automatically and clears various software errors by itself fault recovery The transmission characteristics of the network will not be im paired by this Recovery System recovery protects the NAM and associated users from unnecessary prob mechanisms lems and avoids or r
405. he following table available before starting the script Table 2 1 Parameters for CustomizeSADB Question Answer How many clients will be configured in the system maximum is 30 How many instances of NB R1 7 do you wish How many instances of BB R1 1 2 do you wish How many instances of BB R1 4 do you wish How many instances of BB R1 7 do you wish Procedure Proceed as follows to execute the scripts Step Procedure 1 Enter CustomizeSADB to create the SADbPopulate cfg 2 Enter SADbPopulate to apply the changes in the system administrator data base NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 79 Software installation and commissioning Set the system administrator data ee NAM R1 9 2 80 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Contents 3 1 Overview 3 2 System access 3 2 1 Login to operation system 3 2 2 Logout from operation system 3 2 3 NAM Access Bar 3 2 4 Capacity 3 3 General information on keyboard and windows 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 3 2 Mouse 3 3 3 Different aspects of the cursor 3 3 4 Basics on windows 3 3 5 Window menu 3 3 6 Menu bar 3 3 1 Cursor menu 3 3 8 Workspace manager 3 3 9 Workspace menu 3 3 10 Controls in NAM windows 3 4 System administration 3 4 1 General 3 4 1 1 Introduction and definitions 3 4 1 2 Start up shutdown and recovery 3 4 1 3 Scaling 3 4 1 4 Load balancing 3 4 2 Start up shutdown of server applications via command line 3 4 3 System administration window 3 4 3 1 Menus in
406. he network 5 2 6 3 DS3 OC 3c timing The AFM internal clock is synchronized to the network incoming DS3 1 OC 3c 1 port receive line by a phase locked loop If this timing source fails the AFM clock will free run In free running mode timing is derived from an internal quartz crys tal oscillator This mode is intended only for turn up and failure conditions DS3 OC 3c timing is independent of COMDAC E1 SCI timing Free running mode is selected by default for DS3 timing and loop timed mode in case of OC 3c tim ing 5 2 6 4 Equipment configuration related tasks data agent Unlike previous releases the NAM R1 9 integrates the management of the data agent R1 1 2 R1 7D and partial R1 11D in the AnyMedia Access System The NE equipment configuration facilities provided by the NAM for the data agent include the following tasks Configuration specific equipment data Circuit pack management AFM management ADSL AP management SDSL AP management Physical feeder management ADSL drop management SDSL drop management Date amp time management Enable disable traps generation m Maintaining a local copy of configuration data in the AFM s NVDS Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the AFM NAM R1 9 5 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Overview of the controlled systems E SS m Inventory Management system activity of collecting updating and re
407. he package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing JRE 1 2 2 05 for AnyMedia EM R1 9 as lt LUuJRERT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt jre gt NAM R1 9 2 56 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS opt lucent JDK_1 2 2_05 symantec symbeans jar verifying class lt symantec gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuJRERT 1log Installation of lt LUJRERT gt was successful OrbixWeb 3 1 in Processing package instance lt LuOXWRT gt from stallation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt OrbixWeb 3 1 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 sparc solaris Version 3 1 Run Time Installing Version 3 1 Run Time OK No previous package LUOXWRT has been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail Capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36997 92538 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401583 167406 713 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11974 74836 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 3401428 3123794 53 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1194528 8608 1185920 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cd1 500736 500736 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Enter install directory
408. helf Type This option menu shows the possible subshelf type that can be created in the NE Possible values IAT01 IAT02 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 43 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Command but The Provision button is used to provision a new subshelf tons This button is enabled only in case of creating a new sub shelf The Deprovision button is used to deprovision an already provisioned subshelf Cross Connec AP Server This option menu shows all free IAT servers tion Information slot_Id that can be cross connected to the IAT subshelf creation mode or that are cross connected to the provi sioned IAT subshelf edit mode The value NONE can be used to delete the cross connection to the subshelf Server Port This option menu shows all free server ports drop_id that can be cross connected to the selected IAT server creation mode or that are cross connected to the selected IAT server edit mode The value NONE can be used to delete the cross connection to the subshelf Feeder Port This option menu is used to select the feeder port to be used to cross connect the IAT subshelf A grey background indicates that the selected server port is already in use The Label button is used to confirm the changes Create Cross Connection the provisioned IAT subshelf is not cross connected Remove Cross Connection the provisioned IA
409. hey have the following meaning Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters as speci fied at NE creation time Physical Drop This field shows the port of the AP affected by the test Id Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x x depends on the card type Result This field displays the result of the test routines Possible values PASS or FAIL 5 Click on Close to exit the Port Test Result window NAM R1 9 8 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management E SS 8 4 1 2 AP Card Test Purpose By means of an AP card test you are able to start a series of self diagnostic rou tines for all port circuits on a specified AP plus its common circuitry Procedure Proceed as follows to start an AP card test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Open the Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 6 3 5 2 Use the option menu in the Test Management field to select AP Card Test and click on Apply After confirming the test execution a Warning window pops up showing the following message AP Card Test may be service affecting Do you want do continue After confirming this warning the following n Progress message pops up AP Card Test Launched 3 Wait until the AP Card Test Result window cf Figure 8 10 page 8 30 appears and view the test result NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 29 Fault ma
410. his state until a Inhibit or Clear is requested This button is available if the Active Switch Request is Clear or Manual Switch Manual Switch to Protection Switches service from ser vice pack to the protection pack if the protection pack is present functional and not carrying traffic Not applicable to the protection pack This button is only available if the Active Switch Request is Clear NAM R1 9 5 76 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS 5 6 10 4 Modify the IO DS1 protection mode Procedure Complete the following procedure to define protection switching for O DS1 Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf in the NE Browser and Protection via the cursor menu The Shelf Protection window pops up This window can also be reached from the O DS7 window cf Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 10 by clicking on Protection button 2 Click on tab O DS7 this step is not necessary when coming from the O DS1 window 3 Use the option menu IO DS1 to select an appropriate IO DS1 4 Use the radio buttons in the field Protection Switch to select the desired protection Clear or Inhibit or Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protection The Warning window pops up Protection switching may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the switch is finished to show
411. hole window File gt Print gt Print Preview Display print preview File gt Exit Close the System Administration window and exit the application View gt Reload Update the displayed values with the current ones The values in the System Administration window are not automatically updated Help gt On Window Display help for System Administration Help gt Contents Display help index Help gt About Display release version of the NAM Actions in the Sys The System Administration window displays different information and allows for tem Administra certain actions depending on the selected tab Packages DMGs MGs The fol tion window lowing table shows actions which do not depend on the selected tab Table 3 8 Basic actions in the System Administration window initiate an NAM press AEM Shutdown and confirm the The NAM is shut down Shutdown shutdown in the warning window which pops up initiate an NAM Re press AEM Recovery The NAM recovery starts covery close the System select File gt Exit or press Close The System Administration window is Administration win closed dows NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 19 System management System administration BE SeS 3 4 3 2 Administration of packages Overview The Package tab in the System Administration window allows for start up and shutdown of packages For each displayed package the contained DMGs can be viewed Package informa The table i
412. hony AP data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Mainshelf gt LPA380 LPA380C LPA300 LPA350 LPU116 in the NE Browser and View via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack Telephony AP in Shelf View window The Telephony Application Pack window pops up If you want to then unprovision the AP use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 change the required state use the check box Slot required add a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with no cross connection and press Add Logical DS0O The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 edit a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with an existing cross con nection and press Edit Logical DSO The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 The same result will be obtained by dou ble clicking in the corresponding row NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 25 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs LL If you want to then remove a cross connection select the desired Logical DSO id in the Physical DSO Information list and press Remove Logical DS0 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE
413. hony agent 5 78 5 6 11 2 COMDAC Software Download window 5 79 5 6 11 3 Software download to telephony agent 5 80 5 6 11 4 AFM Software Download window 5 83 5 6 11 5 Software download to data agent 5 84 5 6 12 COMDAC program copy 0 86 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 III o D Contents 5 6 13 AFM program copy and validation 5 6 14 Nonvolatile data storage NVDS 5 6 14 1 Data backup telephony agent 5 6 14 2 Data restore telephony agent 5 6 14 3 Data backup data agent 5 6 14 4 Data restore data agent 5 6 14 5 File Browser window 9 6 15 TL1 cut through telephony agent 5 6 16 Fiber Reach 5 6 16 1 Start a Fiber Reach session 5 6 16 2 Add a host 5 6 16 3 Delete a host 5 6 17 Delete network element NAM R1 9 5 IV Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management 5 1 Overview This chapter describes the Groups and NEs Management application of the Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 It addresses the following topics m overview of the controlled AnyMedia Access System m explanation of menu bar Network Browser and NE Browser map handling m screen navigation m NE management 5 2 Overview of the controlled systems General 363 211 497 This section provides a short overview of the controlled AnyMedia Access Sys tems The NAM R1 9 manages the following releases of the AnyMeoia telephony nar rowband agents m R1 2 2 5 R1 2 3 R1 7 0 R1 7 1 and R1 7 2 The NAM R1 9 manages the fo
414. hysical entity AlDs for slots and drops 5 2 3 Network element R1 7 1 telephony This release combines the characteristics of the two releases R1 2 2 5 and R1 7 0 into one platform 5 2 4 Network element R1 7 2 telephony This release is based on the previous R1 7 releases with the addition of two new IAT server packs mw LPS104 IAT server 4 port HDSL2 m LPS105 IAT server 5 port DS1 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 13 NE management Overview of the controlled systems ee 5 2 5 Navis AnyMedia new equipment con figuration features The NAM R1 9 manages the following releases of the AnyMedia telephony agent of the 24 channel families m R1 2 2 5 R1 7 0 R1 7 1 and R1 7 2 The support of all these releases means the following set of new tasks in the equipment configuration area of the NAM m New APs and CUs m COMDAC overload control m DSi regeneration m Pack provisioning m Subshelves management IATs R1 7 0 and the subsequent releases NAM R1 9 5 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Overview of the controlled systems E SS 5 2 6 Data applications This section gives an overview of the AnyMedia Access System data applications 5 2 6 1 Data system description Overview The AnyMedia Access System supports ATM xDSL services with high bit rates to end users via twisted copper pairs using ATM cell transfer ADSL and SDSL are the two kinds of ATM xDSL x stand for A asynchronous or S synchron
415. ia Edit button gt NOTE Default profiles can not be modified Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ATM traffic network profile Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu Network Profile Pattern to display the profile data in the Network Profile Data field 2 Use the option menu Service Category to define the quality of service 3 Use the option menus and text fields in the field QoS Parameters to mod ify the profile parameters and click on Apply 4 If you want to then modify the profile information use the text fields Network Profile Name and Description to change the information data and click on Apply view the affected objects click on Affected Objects button which is only available if the profile is in status Activated The Affected Objects window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 2 page 9 18 resynchronize the profile with all con use the option menu Status to select trolled AFMs Activated if necessary and click on Resynchronize 5 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 9 38 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring NE profiles 9 7 NE profiles 9 7 1 ADSL PM Thresholds NE Profile win dow This window can be reached from the ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 5 and is exclusively used to view the data of an ADSL PM thresholds NE profile ADSL PM Thresholds NE Profile Figure 9 13 ADSL PM Thresholds NE Profile window The following table shows the view optio
416. ic monitoring 9 5 ATM traffic monitoring Limited ATM traffic measurements for cells received on the AIM feeder are col lected by the AFM The NAM is able to display clear the ATM cell traffic data Interval data are re trieved and stored every 15 minutes from each enabled NE The data are stored per day in a separate log file AdsIAT MStatisticsLog YYYYMMDD where YYYY year MM month and DD day located in ANYMEDIAPATH log The file contains also hints about start log ging stop logging and error messages 9 5 1 ATM Traffic Monitoring window This window is used to display all ATM cell traffic data It also allows you to select data collection or to clear the counters ATM Traffic Figure 9 5 ATM Traffic Monitoring window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Log All Traffic This check box is used to specify whether the NAM is col Data lecting and logging the traffic monitoring data in the NE or not NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 13 Performance monitoring ATM traffic monitoring ee Parameters Buttons Description Traffic Monitor Two text fields show the values for two different time periods ing Current 15 min Previous 15 min for the following parame ters Receive Cells Errored Cells Tagged Cells Dropped Cells The Get button is used to retrieve the AIM traffic
417. ice which means that the circuit must be prepared to provide service by defining its function and setting of required options For example for creation of a service for a subscriber line it is first necessary to provision the corresponding application pack AP AP provisioning set up a desired pack type in a desired slot To be fully functional an AP must not only be inserted but also provisioned and the provisioned pack NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 6 1 Equipment configuration Introduction ME SS type must fit the actual type of the inserted pack A pack can be provisioned and configured by the NAM even when the slot is still empty Screen navigation Figure 6 1 page 6 2 shows an overview of the screen navigation for equipment configuration In this figure is assumed that the NE is already connected cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 36 Examples To open the COMDAC Shelf Protection window proceed as follows m Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COMDAC via the NE Browser and select Pro tection via the cursor menu or m Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COMDAC via the NE Browser open the COM DAC window by means of the menu bar View gt Object or by means of the tool bar open icon and click on the COMDAC Protection button in the COMDAC window Shelf View Shelf Protection oceania MDS2 B View e e I MDS2 B Packs U C I User Port j to Logical DSO window Service Provisioning cf Chapter 7
418. ich LAN component is on which port of the bridge Data packets are only trans ferred over the bridge if the participant is on another port of the bridge With a bridge data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN The inband management channel is a bearer ATM PVC that conveys manage ment information for a remote data agent AFM It can also be used for carrying NB management information in mixed configurations NAM R1 9 A 2 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Data communications network DCN configuration NE communication capabilities A 4 NE communication capabili ties In this section the management communication capabilities of an NAM R1 9 are described The AnyMedia Access System provides the following management in terfaces for operation administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P Craft interface terminal CIT The CIT port is an EIA TIA 232 E interface configured as a data communi cation equipment DCE and located on the CTU faceplate for local and re mote logins The CIT interface supports exchange of TL1 messages and file transfers There are two modes available for communications via the CIT interface dumb terminal which allows local access with the exchange of TL1 messages GSI without PPP capability which allows local exchange of TL1 messages and file transfers over a Lucent proprietary communicat ing protocol The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure
419. ick Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 3 2 page 4 10 4 3 2 Modify domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information of a domain e g which devices it includes etc Before modifying the information of a domain the NAM administrator must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information of a domain Step Procedure Te Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Domains via menu bar The Domains Table appears NAM R1 9 4 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management Domains User Administration amp Protiling Doman Darna 1 description Domain ___Datnain 2 description Domain 3 Domain 3 description Open Delete View dora Success Figure 4 9 User Administration amp Profiling window Domains Table 4 Select one domain in the Domain Name field and click Open The Domain Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected domain Domain Profile Domain Name Description Controlled Objects Controlled Objects Not Assigned Assigned a s Delete EM Anymedia User Groups User Groups Not Assigned Assigned Administrator ie group 7 Maintenance Monitoring Apply Cl
420. ick on Close to exit the window 7 4 1 3 Edit a subscriber identifier Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a Subscriber Identifier Step Procedure 1 Select Tools gt Subscriber Identifier in the Groups amp NEs Manage ment application menu bar or use the Subscriber Identifier icon in the Navis AnyMedia access bar The Subscriber Identifier window pops up cf Chapter 7 4 1 page 7 79 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 81 Service provisioning Subscriber Identifier ee 2 Use the option menus in the Filter filed to define the search criteria s and click on Search The result is displayed in the Search Result list 3 Select the desired row and click on Edit The Add Edit Subscriber Iden tifier window pops up cf Chapter 7 4 1 1 page 7 80 4 Use the text fields to change the values and click on Apply The Sub scriber Identifier will be changed in the SID database The window re mains open for further actions D Click on Close to exit the window 7 4 1 4 Delete a subscriber identifier Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete a Subscriber Identifier Step Procedure 1 Select Tools gt Subscriber Identifier in the Groups amp NEs Manage ment application menu bar or use the Subscriber Identifier icon in the Navis AnyMedia access bar The Subscriber Identifier window pops up cf Chapter 7 4 1 page 7 79 2 Use the option menus in the Filter filed to define the search c
421. ields SID NE Name and Physical Drop Id has to be not empty Example input file The following is an example input file for the populateSiIDdb command This is a comment Date 01 01 01 Time 18 00 0000000000 ne_1 drop 1 1 1 additional info 1000000000 ne_1 drop 1 2 2 additional info 2000000000 ne_1 drop 1 3 3 additional info 3000000000 ne_1 drop 1 4 4 additional info 4000000000 ne_1 drop 1 5 5 additional info 7 4 3 Hints for the administrator Free disk space re The managing of such a big database makes the execution of some extra mainte organize segments nance tasks necessary for the AEM administrator in order to free disk space from segments that have been removed at any moment from the database for example during a database populate in Replace mode or after several item were removed on user demand and to reorganize segments and databases Additional tools This can be done via the ObjectStore tools as for example the oscompact utility These maintenance tasks will not be integrated inside the AEM functionality It will be the administrator s responsibility to execute them periodically so that the mem ory resources of the machine will not be overloaded NAM R1 9 7 84 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Contents 8 1 Overview 8 2 Alarm management 8 2 1 Overview 8 2 2 Maintain up to date alarm information 8 2 3 Alarm notification to the user 8 2 4 Provide access to the current alarm
422. ile of a user Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up showing the Users Table User Administration amp Profiling User Name Description Default EM Administrator user userl te Figure 4 4 User Administration amp Profiling window Users Table 3 Select one user of the Login Name field and click Open The User Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 5 User management Change user name description Adding to user groups Removing from user groups Other fields read only User User Profile User user2 tc Disabled g Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Figure 4 5 User Profile window To change the user name description like last name first name email etc enter the new information in the User Name Description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed To assign the selected user to further user groups select one or more user groups in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 To remove the selected user from user groups select one or more user groups in the User Groups Assigned field and clic
423. indow The power test unit PTU pack provides power converters to distribute 5V and 5V power to the CUs and 5V power to the MSC Figure 6 12 PTU window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 29 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee This window contains all information related to PTU pack It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the PTU window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the PTU is plugged in Possible values ptu 1 1 2 Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information mation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values PTU Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble value BDJ200 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between C
424. ion menu Frame Format to change the value and click on Apply change the line code only possible for use the option menu Logical DS1 to INA or TR 08 select the desired logical DS1 grey background use the option menu Line Code to change the value and click on Apply edit a physical DS1 use the option menus Physical DS1 to select the desired physical DS1 and click on Edit Physical DS1 The Physical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 1 page 7 20 get the current service states click on Get in the Operational State field exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 7 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 7 2 4 Creation of VRT VB logical T0 sub scriber Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected the logical TO is not yet created and the physical line drop or roc is not in use by any other log ical TO The following figure shows a block diagram of TO cross connections Physical distribution ports in APs and CUs LLN CRV 1 PLN 1 Ap PLN 2 LLN CRV 2048 LLN 1 e Pies TO Cross ETT Ap connection 16 LLN 96 PLN 512 PLN 513 C CU INA VB PE 24 e e O CU o la PLN 608 Figure 7 12 T0 Cross connections NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 29 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BESS 7 2 4 1 Logical DSO list window This window displays the logical DSO list ba
425. ion state becomes COMM_ESTABLISHED If the received data from the data agent contains invalid data the state becomes COMM_TRYING_ PROBLEM DETECTED and the whole communication process will be repeated when a timer expires NAM R1 9 5 44 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Connect a Network Element COMM ESTABLIS When the communication state is COMM_ESTABLISHED HED COMM _ ESTABLISHED SYNCHRONIZING or COMM_TRYING and the user re quest to finish the communication with the data agent the communication state becomes COMM STOPPED RELEASING The NAM deletes all the data related to the communication and the state is moved to COMM STOPPED When the communication state is COMM ESTABLISHED or COMM_ESTABLISHED_ SYNCHRONIZING and the NAM detects the loss of communication with the data agent the communication state becomes COMM_TRYING The NAM starts the process to re establish the communication with the data agent The user can request to close a connection with an NE via the GUI When the communication session is closed by the NAM the connection state is changed to NOT CONNECTED When the connection state is CONNECTED and the con nection is lost the connection state becomes TRYING If a communication ses sion loss is detected and the connection is still established the NAM closes the connection and the connection state also becomes TRYING 5 5 3 2 Association maintenance Association An communication between the NAM and an data agent is e
426. ional State field use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DS1 and click on Add The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DSO and click on Add The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 1 page 7 30 click on Physical DS1 List The Physical DS1 List window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 2 page 7 16 click on Logical DSO List The Logical DSO List window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 1 page 7 30 Click on Close Issue 1 02 2001 7 11 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Ee 7 2 1 5 VRT TRO8 window This window provides access to the lists of physical DS1s and logical DSOs as well as allows addition of logical DS1s and logical DSOs to the selected VRT TRO8 Figure 7 6 VRT TRO8 window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters VRT VB id This option menu lists all VRT VB ids of the selected type Mode This text field shows the version of the TR 08 Network Loss The Network Loss slider can be used to define the network Information loss value Possible values 0 6 The Set button is used to set the network loss value Operational The Operational State shows the VRT VB service state ob State tained from the NE through the use of the Get
427. ironment variable Do you want to create links to ObjectStore libraries in usr 1lib yes 18 Press Return Since you have requested a File database configuration you must give a pathname for the transaction log file Where do you want to put the transaction log gt NOTE Depending on the number of NEs in the network the transaction log file consumes much memory space The path in the following step is an example for installing transaction log un der the main installation path This is recommended if the number of NEs in the network is low Otherwise the transaction log file should be put to a separate partition as described in Chapter 2 1 1 page 2 2 In this case the corresponding path has to be used for the following step 19 Type opt lucent transaction log and press Return NAM R1 9 2 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure You have configured this machine to run an ObjectStore server The server s transaction log is in opt lucent transaction log Do you want to proceed yes 20 Press Return Writing configuration files and initializing the server please wait 000613 091747 ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 2 Database Server The ObjectStore server is running ObjectStore includes a server daemon which must be running for any application to access an ObjectStore database It 1s recommended that you auto start the daemon via commands i
428. is green okay FAC1 Lit yellow when an OC 3c port 1 near end er ror is detected e g LOS yellow Lit green when the OC 3c port 2 facility is green okay FAC2 Lit yellow when an OC 3c port 2 near end er ror is detected e g LOS See Chapter 8 2 for more details about alarm handling 6 2 1 BAIU Shelf View window The principle of displaying inventory provisioning and alarm information is the same as for the main shelf cf Chapter 6 2 page 6 3 Although the BAIU shelf can accommodate data and telephony APs only the data APs can be managed by the NAM R1 9 NAM R1 9 6 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Shelf View Le EGN FEET EET AP 5 AF S 1 AP 2 AP 3 AP 4 AP 9 AP 10 AP 11 AP 12 AP 13 AP 14 AP 15 AP 16 AP 17 AP 18 AP 19 FLT FLT e reas j x lt _ AA Le TX 2 ES ie O a kj N eoowortur oC Pur ochrur cCochPr Ur ochPrur ochb Uur GOM1GOM2 AP 0 Fa Inserted View _ Provisioned View Figure 6 3 BAIU Shelf View window 6 2 2 MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window This window provides general inventory provisioning and alarm information through the pack LEDs Each slot will show the card type inserted and its alarms when applicable If the slot is empty no card will be shown LEL Ey DDSECLE al a a a a a a FLT FL FLT L L A A A A A 5 A G 0 Uy U U F LU A A A A Hi te M 1 i 14 2 a 4 S 5 H i i 2
429. is in progress Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check that the correct version of software is installed on the agent s sys tem controller card Yes Continue with step 2 No Install the correct SW version 2 Check if the COMDAC AFM is in the initialization process and wait until this process has finished 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 14 TCP_IP_CON_ REFUSED Meaning The TCP IP connection establishment could not be completed successfully for port numbers 11002 11004 11006 and 11008 Abbreviation TCP_IP_CON REFUSED Severity Critical Service affecting No NAM R1 9 8 54 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee Effects It is not possible to manage the telephony agent Possible cause s Some TCP IP protocol errors stopped the connection establishment process be tween the NAM and the telephony agent Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the TCP IP communication addresses Are the TCP IP communication addresses correct Yes Continue with step 2 No Correct the addresses Continue with step 4 2 Check the gateway telephony agent identification Is the gateway telephony agent identification correct Yes Continue with step 3 No Correct the identification Continue with step 4 3 Check the DCN Is the DCN in service Ye
430. is possible This button is enabled only if a physical DSO cross connected to a logical DSO is selected The Remove Logical DSO button removes the cross con nection selected in the list see above NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 33 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs Table 6 1 CU Cards Possible Values Card Type CLEI SPQ429 SAC1AKOAAA SPQ442 SAC1AHOAAA AUA41B 5SC3HJEAAA AUA45B 5SCUUJ5AAB AUA75 5SC1FF2AXX SPQ452 5SCTFFGAAB AUA200 5SCTBODAAA AUA232 5SCTCBOAAA SPQ444 SAC1BFOAAB SPQ454 SAC1BGOAAB MCU 5205 5SC26TI 2AA MCU 5405 5SC26TO2AA 6 3 8 1 Modify a CU Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the CU data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt MDS2 MDS2B Shelf gt CU in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or single click on the pack CU in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window The Channel Unit window pops up If you want to then change the required state use the check box Slot required add a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with no cross connection and press Add Logical DS0O The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 NAM R1 9 6 34 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs If you want to then edit a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with an existing cross con nection and press Edit Logical DSO The L
431. ist gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 NAM R1 9 2 24 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT 2 3c2 Creating data bases Starting AMDbPopulate process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting Alarm data base path OK Creating Alarm Data Base exit OK 24624 Killed orbixd daemon pid 24624 has been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAM 1log Installation of lt LuAM gt was successful Backup installation Processing package instance lt LuBack gt from lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Backup Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuBack_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuBack has been found NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 25 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Pro
432. itiated on it If the recov ery fails the NAM process enters out of service OOS state The user can re quest an on demand recovery on any OOS process An MG is able to detect that a module under it is not working properly its opera tional state is OOS and in that case a recovery is automatically initiated on it If the recovery fails the MG enters OOS state The user can request an on demand recovery on any OOS MG The NAM is able to detect that a package that is ON is not working properly its operational state is OOS and in that case a recovery is automatically initiated on it If the recovery fails the package remains OOS state The user can request an on demand NAM recovery The NAM recovery command can be manually issued via the System Administration window AEM Recovery button The manual NAM recovery request is ignored if none of the packages with administrative state ON has the operational state OOS The NAM administrator can shutdown from the GUI packages optional DMGs and processes An NAM shutdown terminates all server applications and all graphical user inter faces running at the moment This command can be issued via the System Ad NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 3 17 System management System administration ee ministration window Navis AnyMedia Shutdown button or the command line CLEAN 3 4 1 3 Scaling Several NEs and us The number of users the NAM supports and the number of NEs being managed is ers
433. k lt lt Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply The following fields are read only fields to display user data Login Name Displays the label which identifies the user User Status Displays if the system login associated to this user is created enabled or deleted disabled Number of sessions opened Displays the number of sessions opened into the NAM by the user NAM R1 9 4 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 User management User 4 2 3 Delete user Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a user from the NAM Before re moving a user please pay attention to the following remarks m To remove a user from the NAM the administrator must have a system login m When a user is deleted all related information and profiles are removed from the system This does not include the system login and any other system re sources such as home directories or system files which are not managed by the NAM Furthermore the user is automatically deleted from the user groups it was included in Before deleting any user assigned to the administrator user group the NAM checks that this is not the last user assigned to the administrator user group If this is the last one assigned the deletion is rejected Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user from the NAM Step Procedure 1 Login
434. kward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Not applicable ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack Software Ver This field shows the software version of the inserted sion AFM_OC8c pack Location Infor mation gt NOTE The following text fields must be filled up Empty fields are not supported by the AFM Location This text field is used to define a location name where the NE is placed Contact This text field is used to enter the name of the peo ple who manage the NE Name This text field can be used to enter a name for the mainshelf The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the text fields above Command but The Global Parameters button provides access to the tons AFM Global Parameters window The Soft Reset button is used to soft reset the AFM pack A warning indicates that the operation will drop the communi cation between NAM and AFM The Hard Reset button is used to hard reset the AFM pack A warning indicates that the operation is service affecting NAM R1 9 6 58 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS 6 4 3 1 Modify an OC3 AFM Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an OC3 AFM pack Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt LPA920 in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Obj
435. l uuu nuun Please provide details for the suggested improvement If we may contact you concerning your comments please complete the following Name ___ _ __ _ 22 2 Telephone Number ___________________ Company Organization __________ __ _ 2 Date 222222222222222 Address When you have completed this form please fax it to the address on top of this page Title Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel Release 1 9 User Service Manual 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 Contents About this document XIII 1 Overview XIII 2 Intended audience XIV 3 How to use this document XV 4 Conventions used XVI 6 General safety information XVII 6 1 General notes on safety XVII 6 2 General safety requirements XVIII 7 Related documentation XX 7 1 Print copy hard copy XX 7 2 CD ROM XX 8 How to order this document XX 9 How to comment on this document XXI Ce n M 1 Functional description 1 1 1 1 About this subject 1 1 1 2 Introduction 1 2 1 2 1 Main functions T 1 2 2 ISO functional areas 1 3 1 2 3 Applications 1 4 1 2 4 System working modes eS 1 2 5 Performance reliability and availability 1 6 1 3 System and software architecture 1 7 1 3 1 Functional groups def 1 3 2 Hardware platform 1 20 1 4 Working with NAM 1 22 1 4 1 Network planning and physical installation 1 23 1 4 2 Configuration management 1 24 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance 1 25 1 4 4 System security and use
436. l DS1 id and press Add Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 The same result is obtained by double click ing in the corresponding row edit a logical DS1 select the desired logical DS1 id and press Edit Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 The same result is obtained by double click ing in the corresponding row edit a physical DS1 select the desired physical DS1 id and press Edit Physical DS1 The Physical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 1 page 7 20 remove a logical DS1 Click on Remove Logical DS1 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Deleting Logical DS1 id may be service affecting and may remove existing semipermanent cross connections DSO end points OK to proceed If you decide to continue the NAM will send a delete cross connection mes sage to the NE exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 7 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 7 2 3 Creation of VRT VB logical feeder T1 cross connection For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected a logical feeder is not yet created and the physical feeder DS1 is not in use by any other logical feeder Assumptions The following figure shows a block diagram of T1 cross connections LOG FDR Logical feeder Physical feeder LOG FDR DS1 1 lO DS1 LOG FDR DS1
437. l Server Port iods1 1 1 5 DS1 Circuit Pack iods1p 1 DS1 protection pack m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf Drop mds2 1 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf msc 1 1 2 Metallic Shelf Controller ptu 1 1 2 Power Test Unit pwrf 1 1 2 48V Fast Distribution Bank pwrm 1 1 2 48V MDS2 Distribution Bank sh 1 Shelf telnet 1 2 Telnet virtual port tr8dl 1 20 1 TR 008 Mode 1 Data Link v08 1 20 TR 008 VRT v303 1 GR 303 VRT v3eoc 1 1 2 GR 303 Embedded Operations Channel v3tmc 1 1 2 GR 303 Timeslot Management Channel string NE TID Target Identifier a only available via NAM NTFCNCDE Notification code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 5 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee NTFCNCDE is the alarm level Abbreviation Meaning CL Cleared Alarm CR Critical Alarm MJ Major Alarm MN Minor Alarm CONDTYPE Condition type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes CONDTYPE is a code denoting the condition type A message reporting the clear ing of an alarm has the same condition type as the one reporting the alarm Abbreviation Meaning AIS Alarm indication signal BKUPMEMP System data memory mismatch CABLE Cable disconnect CPYMEMF Copy Memory Failed DATASYSCR Data system failed critical DATASYSMJ Data system failed major DATASYSMN Data system failed minor DBCRRPT Data memo
438. l installation 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package installations 2 2 5 PC GUI client installation 2 2 5 1 Customizing SystemPreferences ini 2 3 Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 2 3 1 Upgrade procedure 2 3 1 1 Overview 2 3 1 2 Stop Navis AnyMedia 2 3 1 3 Backup NAM databases and configuration files 2 3 1 4 Backup NAM log files 2 3 1 5 Backup NAM system variables and configuration parameters 2 3 1 6 Uninstall AEM R1 7 1 2 3 1 7 Install Navis AnyMedia R1 9 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 I o rr Contents 2 3 1 8 Restore NAM databases 2 77 2 3 1 9 Restore Navis AnyMedia logs 2 78 2 3 1 10 Update configuration parameters 2 78 2 3 1 11 Run Navis AnyMedia R1 9 2 78 2 3 1 12 Delete all temporary files 2 78 2 4 Set the system administrator data 2 79 NAM R1 9 2 II Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning 2 1 General 363 211 497 The Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus the patches recommended by SUN In order to successfully install the NAM for the SUN Solaris installation the follow ing has to be taken into account Disk partitioning HDD partitioning should include in addition to the standard UNIX entries e g usr var etc two entries for the NAM software and the transac tion log cf Chapter 2 1 1 page 2 2 for size requirements Additionally a temporal directory with 2 Gbytes is n
439. labeled Set if the current loopback state is clear and vice versa The Apply button is used to confirm the changes It is en abled when one ore more parameters have been changed Operational The field Service State shows the service state obtained State from the NE Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Service State shows the IAT server port secondary service state obtained from the NE The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State Command But The OK button is used to confirm the changes and to leave tons the window The AT Server window is visible again 6 3 12 1 Configure an IAT server port The AT Server Port Information window can be reached only from the IAT Server Procedure window cf Chapter 6 3 10 page 6 39 by clicking on Edit Physical Port buttom If you want to then change the value of the cable length Use the Equalization slider to define the desired value and click on Apply NAM R1 9 6 48 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs If you want to then change the degrade threshold Use the Degrade Threshold slider to define the desired threshold and click on Apply change the loopback state Press the Labe button at the right hand side of the Loopback field and click on Apply The following warning message pops up Loopback operation will be service affecting Do you want to continue exit
440. ld contains read only fields cf Chapter 6 3 2 page 6 14 NAM R1 9 5 68 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management For configuring the protection scheme the field Operation amp Protection is used Parameters Buttons Description Slot Required This check box displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the user from REQUIRED to NOT REQUIRED or vice versa as long as the pack is not inserted However it is not possible to set both COMDACs to not required The Apply button is available if a change in the Slot Re quired check box has been made Protection State This non editable field shows whether the selected COM DAC is working or not Possible states are Working providing service or Standby not in service or Not Equipped slot is un equipped COMDAC Pro This button provides access to the Shelf Protection window tection COMDAC tab to allow modification of the current protec tion scheme or for performing protection switching cf Chapter 5 6 10 1 page 5 70 5 6 9 2 Set the COMDAC protection to sim plex Procedure Complete the following procedure to set the COMDAC protection to simplex Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COM107 in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack COMDAC in the Shelf View window The COMDAC window pops up 2 Deselect the che
441. le some network disturbances can also originate in hardware faults Such hardware faults often require the faulty component to be replaced and this can only be done by maintenance personnel gt NOTE More detailed information about maintenance actions is provided in Chapter 8 Fault clearance Once the fault has been cleared the alarm is reset automatically 1 4 3 2 Network modification Types of network Usually network operation amp surveillance requires structural modifications in the modification network The NAM supports this There are two types of network modifications installation or removal of NES modification of NEs 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and removal of an NE Installation of an To install a new NE in an existing network the following steps must be carried out NE 1 Check whether the new NE can be incorporated in the existing DCN plan drawn up in the network planning phase otherwise the DCN plan must first be revised creation of the NE assignment of the NE to a domain logical connection of the NE selection of the timing synchronization source selection of the COMDAC protection scheme simplex duplex D prO E selection of those slots for which an absence of the pack will be alarmed COMDAC provisioning of card types which are inserted in a slot a provisioning of subshelves NAM R1 9 1 28 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Working with NAM Removal of an NE If an
442. le is indicated next to Expected Number of Processes This is the number of processes which are normally needed to manage the expected workload properly The table under Processes in Module displays the following information for the selected module Table 3 19 Process information Table entry Meaning ID The internally assigned ID of the process PID Process ID of this process Operational State The operational state of the process Possible val ues IS if the module is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise The process is running only if the module it belongs to is running Load Level Number of clients which use this process 0 or more The higher the number the higher the work load for the process Service Level Depending on the service the process provides the value FULL or DEGRADED is displayed Reason Short description why the service is DEGRADED NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 29 System management System administration Figure 3 14 Edit MG window NAM R1 9 3 30 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration ee N tons The following table lists all actions which can be performed in the Edit MG window Adding killing removing and recovering a process from a module is possible only after the view or change the processes of a module action was performed Table 3 20 Actions for editing an MG view or change the select the module under Modules in The
443. le screen Multiple user access Provide multiple users access to the NAM at the same time Multiple users may include multiple OSs or NMSs as well as multiple GUI access Time and date format Enables the user to use local preferred time and date format For example the local calendar is supported or optional use of 24 hour clock versus a 12 hour clock m User friendly GUIs Provides a user friendly interface and hides the complexities of the infor mation models m Manageable objects organized in a hierarchy The configuration is implemented within a GUI hierarchy Network level containing all groups of NEs NE group level containing a number of NEs or and other NE groups NE level starting with shelf view m Display of NEs in a map The NEs can be displayed in a map The display follows the GUI hierarchy m Map handling It is possible to use maps for displaying NEs The NAM provides a default map Other maps can be loaded in an easy way NAM R1 9 1 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture E SS m NE grouping Special graphical symbols are used to represent NE groups It is also pos sible to expand the NE group level to display the NEs which belong to a specific group as well as to provide access from the NE level to the Config uration Management application GUI process to be separated The graphical interface driver can be placed on a platform separate f
444. lected you can deselect a certain one by clicking on it again while the Ctrl key is pressed A range of consecutive entries can be selected simul taneously by clicking on the first entry of the range and then on the last while the Shift key is pressed m Drop Down List box A drop down list box allows you to enter data by selecting an entry from a list that drops down after clicking on the triangle on the right of the box m Spin box A spin box only allows a limited set of discrete ordered input values You have to use the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the value Tab A window can contain a register of several tabs Clicking on a tab displays the corresponding contents in the window m Option menu The option menu is used to set a certain option Its designation will indicate the option currently set Handling of the option menu is the same as for a menu Frequently used The table below provides an overview of buttons which have the same function in buttons every NAM window Table 3 3 Function of frequently used buttons Button Function OK Applies changes window is closed Apply Applies changes window stays open for further edits Cancel Discards changes running operation is cancelled window is closed Close Discards changes window is closed NAM R1 9 3 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management General information on keyboard Frequently Used Menus every NAM window Table 3 4 Menu
445. lephony agents based on data com munication network DCN SNMP NE access via UDP IP for data agents based on DCN m user security handling user profiles NE domains m online help multi user access m northbound interfaces TL1 pass through interface for telephony alarm collection and CORBA interface CORBA interface i e NAM CORBA IDLs are published so that a network management system can access to them directly or by means of a mediation device NAM R1 9 1 2 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Introduction a 1 2 2 ISO functional areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration management The configuration management supports the complete range of graphical func tions to provision and maintain the following NE releases R1 2 2 5 NB R1 2 3 R1 7 0 NB R1 7 1 NB R1 1 2 BB and R1 7 BB Network topologies shelf views and self explaining menus are navigating the operator to configure the following services m telephony POTS ISDN ATM virtual paths and AIM virtual channel connections carried over ADSL SDLS lines The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m inventory management equipment provisioning and maintenance subshelves packs ports m narrowband and data service provisioning m clock synchronization m system equipment service status software download m NE database backup and restore m system date time synchronization 12
446. licable Figure 7 4 VRI VB List window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Selection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis rion played in the field VRT VB List Selected criterion is All The list will display all VRT VB ids Selected criterion is TR 303 or TR 08 or INA In these cases only the VRT VB ids of the selected type will be displayed NAM R1 9 7 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Description VRT VB List This field contains a table displaying VRT VB information This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by VRT VB Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit VRT VBs and to add logical DSO and logical DS1 through the use of the corresponding buttons described below VRT VB ld Lists all ids of the VRT VB defined by the selection criterion Number of Logical DSO Informs about the number of already defined logical DSO for this VRT m Number of Logical DS1 Informs about the number of already defined logical DS1 for this VRT The Edit VRT VB button provides access to one of the VRT VB windows TR303 or TRO8 or INA Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to differen
447. line Remote operations channel Router Bridge Inband manage ment channel The DCN consists of the communication media and the interconnected devices which are used to exchange management information between the NAM the NEs and other management systems A semi permanent leased line SPLL is a service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is the re sponsible for the set up of this service The remote operations channel ROC is a bearer channel that conveys manage ment information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is expected to be used when the system is installed at locations where no ethernet local area net work LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists A router is a network layer device that forwards packets from one network to an other based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the router if the participant is on another port of the router A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than a bridge because the IP address is evaluated for traffic control A bridge is a network layer device that passes packets between two or more net work segments that use the same data link communications protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address wh
448. ll AMEM bat anymediaemr1 7 zip m jre 1_2 2 005 win i m cc32d473 Please read the readme txt file first and then follow the given instructions NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 71 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure gt NOTE In order to establish a communication it is necessary that the PC users and the server user are the same with the same log in gt NOTE For the NAM GUI on PC the resolution of the graphic card must be at least 1280 x 1024 pixel Otherwise some windows will not be displayed properly For this resolution a 19 inch monitor is recommended Procedure PC GUI is distributed on a compressed file named anymediaemr17 zip This sec tion contains instructions for installing the software once this file is in your system 1 Change to the appropriate directory on the CD ROM 2 Install jre by double click on jre 1_2 2 005 win i recommended path for jre is C jdk1 2 2 and if netscape 4 7 is not yet installed double click on cc32d473 3 Start installation script double click on install_ AMEM bat 4 Select the extract button and indicate the directory where the system should be installed This instruction generates five directories m Classes m configuration m HelpFiles m Libraries m cons OrbixWeb proper Under configuration directory OrbixWeb properties file should be updated with the ties name of the host its IP address and the address With the following fo
449. ll components of the system have direct access to the repository to store retrieve their own data Contained Information in the repository includes information m NE inventory for each NE the hardware identifiers and the software versions equipment and service provisioning data m history and security logs m external system communication parameters m NAM configuration data m alarms cache NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 17 Functional description System and software architecture ME SS 1 3 1 4 Graphical user interface GUI Introduction The Java based GUI is responsible for putting up forms collecting user input commands and data and routing it on to the correct component It also receives data from the relevant process which it uses to update its display The GUI has di rect access to the services provided by the NAM through the ORB Functionality The GUI provides the following functionality features features m Support TL1 messages Supports all TL1 messages for all NE products for dumb terminal access Allows direct input of TL1 messages In some markets direct input of TL1 messages may not be allowed and can be suppressed via the appropriate security permissions m Online help Provides access to online help which contains at least information on the operation of the NAM meaning of the buttons etc a Multiple windowing Provides multiple windowing for access to multiple NE information on a sin g
450. llowing releases of the AnyMedia data broadband agents m Ri1 1 2 R1 7D and partial R1 11D For more information please refer to the corresponding network element docu mentation NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 5 1 NE management Overview of the controlled systems E SS 5 21 Network element R1 2 2 5 telephony The architecture of the AnyMedia Access Systems is a single shelf with the follow ing main components as shown in Figure 5 1 page 5 3 Packs m Upto 610O_DS1 packs m Up to two common data and control COMDAC packs m One craft test unit CTU pack m Upto 16 application packs APs 32 line 2WCF programmable PROG2W POTS 32 512 or PROG32 32 line 2WCF POTS only POTS32 32 line 2W programmable special Coin PRCOIN or PROG1_CF 16 line ANSI ISDN ISDN AP or SDN16_u AFMDS3 The access feeder multiplexer card provides a DS3 ATM interface for ADSL traffic data application The AFMDS3 is inserted in slot 16 FAST shelf or slot 0 BAIU shelf ADSL The ADSL packs provide four eight ADSL subscriber line ter minations each LPA400 LPA408 data application SDSL The SDSL pack provides the termination of sixteen SDSL ports Metallic distribution server units MDSUs The AnyMedia Access System supports the MDS2 and MDS2B shelves Chapter 5 2 1 1 page 5 4 for installation of subscriber loop carrier SLC channel units Only narrowband transmission is planned for these shelves
451. log line terminations appearing on the CO MDF and the access DLC network The primary application is to interface with analog switches but COTs may be used for unbundling Shelf equipage for COT services and a typical application is illustrated in Figure 5 5 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 9 NE management Overview of the controlled systems cO vooo Fusing r r N Io a A OJO a x lt lelelexelxel lt el lt elelelelel e le lele x YM W OloOo oO 10 0 0 0 6 0 60 0 6 0 6 0 106 O IQ lalalalalala li li ailli AIA IA OOOO AOA A IA IA IA IAIA IQA OIO clelelelclelclelelelelclclclcle 17 JIO JO OO O O O09 O 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 oO OJO a a ololal o l olala ol aolaol owl ol ol olo T OO O O 0O O 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 O OQ slalalalslalslalalslsalals als i o O JIO olojoalalalolololalajalalalajalja e hle TONO LILILI LILI LILI LILI LILI LILI LJIL I lt Io a A OJO 12 01 05 10 16 c c Fuses and Jacks o N DID D DID D D D JD D D D 5 D D DIDIDIDID DD DI DID olololololololololololo MSCI MSC F ojoj ojojo JOJO jojojojojo 1 12 13 24 5 2 2 3 1 COT configuration COT configurations of the FAST shelf are similar to the RT configurations with the following major exceptions PTU 1 Figure 5 5 COT configuration m the AP slots are equipped with current sink APs m the ability to route messages to RTs via universal communication channel UCC based on IP address m
452. m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning In The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code shows formation SDSL for a provisioned slot and the value None for a non provisioned slot This option menu is available only if the ad ministrative state is Locked Operational The option menu Administrative State provides the possi State ble states that can be used Locked OOS Unlocked IS The field Service State shows the state of the AFM feeder obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Fault Condition Under Reboot Under testing Under SW Download Dormant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 71 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Drop Informa A table shows the SDSL drops and the created cross con tion nections The table is sorted by SDSL drops Drop ld Identifies the SDSL drop within the AP Administrative State Shows the current state Locked Unlocked ATM Cross Connections Indicates the number of created cross connections PM Thresholds Network Profile Identifies th
453. make Each time you make a new backup only those files are put on the back up media which were altered since the last backup with a lower backup level A backup level 0 means a full backup 3 6 4 1 Daily cumulative weekly cumulative backups This is the most commonly used backup schedule It is recommended for most sit uations Schedule character This schedule has the following characteristics ae m Each weekday backup accumulates all files changed since the end of the previous week or the initial level 0 backup NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 43 System management Backup and restore ee m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed since the first level 0 backup For the level 9 backups the previous level 0 or level 5 is the closest backup at a lower level m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed during the month to that point Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be performed Table 3 28 Backup levels of each backup 1st of month 1st week e p h p p p The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 29 Example for files in backup for two weeks 1st week 2nd week 3 6 4 2 Daily cumulative weekly incremental backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be performed T
454. me NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Configuration The Processing State represents the synchronization state between the NAM and NE This information is automatically updated Possible values PROC and BLOCK The Resync button is used to re synchronize the data from the NE to the NAM database for configuration data Alarms The Processing State represents the alarm processing state between the NAM and NE This information is automat ically updated Possible values PROC and BLOCK The Resync button is used to re synchronize the data from the NE to the NAM database for alarms NAM R1 9 5 54 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS Parameters Buttons Description Autonomous The check box Traps Disabled shows the state of this au Output States tonomous output check box is marked disabled check box is not marked enabled Apply This button confirms the changes of the autonomous output state 5 6 3 4 Modify the synchronization data pa rameter Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the synchronization data parameter Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Synchronization gt Data via the cursor menu The Synchronization Data window pops up This window can also be reached from the NE Management window tab Data cf Chapter 5 5 3 3 page 5 45 by pressing the More Details but ton If you want to then re synchronize the NAM datab
455. mple above until the backup which comes before the one which shall be restored is displayed If you do not know the order of the backups on the tape it can be deter mined as follows Rewind the tape and then repeatedly issue a tar command see example above until the backup to be restored is displayed while you note the order of the backups on tape Then you can position the tape as shown above 3 6 3 3 2 Full restoration procedure When the restore command is executed the user must decide which image type should be restored The restore script displays the following message Please enter the type of the image to be restored backup archive Type backup or archive and press Enter Copy of originals Copies of the original databases are saved to allow for a cancellation of the oper ation If such a copy could not be made the appropriate image can nevertheless be restored but a warning is issued For each database for which no copy could be made the following message is displayed NAM R1 9 3 42 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Backup and restore ee Actual lt DATABASE TYPE gt is not present or ObjectStore copy operation failed The AnyMedia NB EM system state cannot be recovered if a cancellation is requested Do you want to continue y n Type y and press Enter to continue with the restore procedure If you type n the restore command stops with an error message no data are restored and the sys tem will not work unle
456. n Block Type List Required Yes NAM R1 9 C 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages Abbreviation Meaning AIS Alarm indication signal BKUPMEMP System data memory mismatch CABLE Cable disconnect CPYMEMF Copy Memory Failed DATASYSCR Data system failed critical DATASYSMJ Data system failed major DATASYSMN Data system failed minor DBCRRPT Data memory corrupt DBMEMTRF Data memory update abort DIGRPF TR 08 major shelf alarm received EXT External IMPROPRMVL Improper removal INT Internal hardware failure INTRMVL Internal Fault or Pack Missing LOF Loss of frame LOS Loss of signal NE ASSOC_FAILED Assoc with NE failed POLL Not responding to poll PRCDERR Procedural error PWR Power fault RINGF Ringing source input failed SFTCRRPT Software program corrupt SFTERR Software version mismatch SWFTDWNF Software download failed SYNC Synchronization input failed SYNCOOS System free running T BERL BER exceeds threshold TSTRELAY Stuck Test Access Relay UNLATCH Pack unlatched YEL Yellow Alarm a only available via NAM NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 13 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages lt lt SRVEFF Service effect This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes This indicates the reported alarm condition is service effecting or non service ef fecting Abbreviation Meaning NSA Non service affecting SA Se
457. n be used to define whether the AP or CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Fixed This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 7 45 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Receive TLP This slider can be used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in RTLP dB Negative values define loss positive values define gain Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit TLP This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or TTLP loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de fine gain Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 7 24 12 2NOS Service Details window Overview The 2NOS 2 wire transmission only with sealing current is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs 2NOS Service Details Information Figure 7 20 Logical DSO window 2NOS Service Details Parameters Description Impeda
458. n describes the steps to upgrade an NAM from R1 7 1 to R1 9 These steps include the execution procedures Assumptions It is assumed that before starting this upgrade procedure m the NEs are stable meaning that no outstanding alarms are present in the NEs managed by the server to be upgraded and that no configuration changes will occur in parallel with the server upgrade m there are no outstanding communication alarms or platform alarms active m there is only one NAM server machine available Therefore the procedure is a single platform upgrade NE management service will be affected since the server is shut down during the operation After the upgrade the Alarm Viewer will not be able to display information of previ ous alarms acknowledged or cleared This information can be found in the Log Viewer In all the steps if a temporary directory is used it should be created outside of the AnyMedia Element Manager directory tree since during the uninstallation of the software these directories will be deleted It is assumed that the person who performs the upgrade m uses Chapter 2 2 for details about the installation procedures and Chapter 3 6 for details about the backup procedures m has a minimum knowledge of UNIX NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 73 Software installation and commissioning Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 lt A 2 3 1 Upgrade procedure 2 3 1 1 Overview The upgrade procedure consists
459. n loaded distribution cable Possible values N L Default N Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 150 600 1200 Default 600 7 dB J3 When the Black option is selected the channel unit sup ports an input TLP range of 15 0 to 1 dB When the White option is selected the channel unit supports an input TLP range of 8 0 to 8 5 dB Possible values Black White Default Black Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 53 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee Service Details Parameters Description Bandwidth BW This slider can be used to control the frequency response characteristic of the transmit equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O Height This slider can be used to control the amplitude of the trans mit equalizer s transfer function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default O Receive Attenu This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 7 24 19 FXO Service Details window Overview The FXO foreign exchange office func
460. n network profile NE profile Selection of a profile is possible only if the administrative state is locked The first two profiles are available by default m disable all_ Thresholds m default PM_ Threshold Edit This button provides access to the ADSL PM Thresh old Network Profile window cf Chapter 9 6 3 or ADSL PM Threshold NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 1 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes of the se lected profiles It is only enabled if any of the profiles have been modified and the administrative state of the port is Locked NAM R1 9 6 66 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs Parameters Buttons Description ADSL Dro Com This field shows the values of the following ADSL drop pa munication Pa rameters for upstream and downstream direction ramerers m Bit Rate kbps SNR margin dB m Signal Attenuation dB Output Power dBm Physical Layer Defects Possible values for Upstream No AP communication No defect Loss of Framing Loss of Signal Loss of Power Loss of Link Loss of Signal Quality Data init failure Config init failure Protocol init failure No peer ATU present Possible values for Downstream No AP communica tion No defect Loss of Framing Loss of Signal Loss of Power Loss of Signal Quality The Get button can be used to retrieve the current values from the NE Operational The option menu Administrative
461. n of a profile is possible only if the administrative state is locked The last three profiles are default profiles Edit This button provides access to the SDSL Transmis sion Network Profile window cf Chapter 9 6 6 or SDSL Transmission NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 4 PM Threshold Network Profile This option menu lists all PM threshold network profiles Unknown XX indicates a non network profile NE profile Selection of a profile is possible only if the administrative state is locked The first two profiles are available by default m disable all_ Thresholds m default PM_ Threshold Edit This button provides access to the SDSL PM Thresh old Network Profile window cf Chapter 9 6 4 or SDSL PM Threshold NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 2 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes of the se lected profiles It is only enabled if any of the profiles have been modified and the administrative state of the port is Locked NAM R1 9 6 76 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS Parameters Buttons Description SDSL Drop Tx Rx Bit Rate kbps This numeric field indicates the cur Communica rent SDSL data rate This rate may less than or equal to the tion Parameters provisioned rate Possible values 144 272 400 528 784 1168 1552 2320 Kbps Tx Rx Scramble This text field shows whether the SDSL Scramble function has been enable
462. n the Package tab displays the following information tion Table 3 9 Package information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the package Administrative State The administrative state of the package Possible values ON if the package is up OFF otherwise The Administrative State is changed whenever a startup or shutdown command is issued Operational State The operational state of the package displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise NAM R1 9 3 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration Figure 3 9 System Administration window Packages Actions in Package The following table lists all actions you can perform in the Package tab of the Sys tab tem Administration window Table 3 10 Actions for the administration of packages start up a package select the package in the table and The selected package is started up press Start Up The Administrative State of the package must be OFF shut down a pack select the package in the table press The selected package is shut down age Shutdown and confirm the shutdown in the warning window which pops up The Administrative State of the pack age must be ON determine which select the package and press DMGs in The DMGs in Package window is dis DMGs are in the Package played cf Chapter 3 4 4 p
463. n to a logical DSO id and Edit Logical DSO enabled if a physical DSO is selected which is cross connected with a logical DSO The Remove Logical DSO button can be used to remove the cross connection selected in the list See above 6 3 11 1 Modify an IAT subshelf Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an IAT subshelf Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Create Subshelf gt IAT via the cursor menu or select NE gt Subshelves in the NE Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar The IAT Subshelf window pops up If you want to then provision an IAT subshelf click on Provision deprovision a subshelf use the option menus Physical Index and Subshelf Type to select the de sired subsheltf and click on Deprovision NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 45 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee If you want to then create a cross connection to the IAT use the option menu Physical Index to subshelf select the desired subshelf use the option menus in the field Cross Connection Information to select the corresponding server and ports of the desired cross connection and click on Create Cross Connection in the Cross Connection Information field delete a cross connection to the sub use the option menus Physical Index shelf and Subshelf Type to select the de sired subshelf use the option menus in the field C
464. n your operating system startup scripts If you do not configure automatic startup you will have to start the server daemon by hand or re run this utility to configure auto start Would you like to configure automatic server startup and shutdown yes 21 Type n and press Return This script will now verify the installation The ObjectStore Server daemon process is accessible Schema databases are accessible The cache manager launcher for release 4 homelocal new OS51_SP2 ostore lib oscminit has correct modes and ownership ObjectStore configuration completed 2 2 1 1 2 Installation of the common packages Complete the following procedure to install the common packages Step Procedure iif Go to the directory where the installation script is placed on the CD ROM number one 2 Type install_AMEM gen and press Return NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 19 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 9 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y 2000 patches indicated in SRD pdf document 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to successfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP
465. nagement and maintenance Test management ee Test result The AP Card Test Result window shows the test results of a series of self diag nostic routines for all port circuits on a specified AP plus its common circuitry AF Card Test Result Figure 8 10 AP Card Test Result window The text fields are display only and have the following meaning Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters as speci fied at NE creation time Slot This field shows the slot number of the AP being used Possible values AP 1 16 Card Type Mnemonic used to identify the general type of function pro vided AP card type Possible values PROG2W PRCOIN ISDN AFM_DS3 ADSL4 MDSU Result List Port Id Identifies the port within the AP Possible values Port 1 Port 32 Result Shows the result of the test Possible values PASS or FAIL 4 Click Close to dismiss the AP Card Test Result window NAM R1 9 8 30 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management E SS 8 4 1 3 Stand by card test scheduling Side switch and During the execution of a standby card test scheduling a COMDAC side switch off line and off line diagnostics for the standby COMDAC or off line diagnostics for the diagnostics protection IO DS1 pack are performed Possible user The NAM provides the opportunity to set up the periodicity and the time of the day settings cf Figure 8 11 to perform a standb
466. nance Monitoring Administrator Groups and NEs Config uration Performance Manage ment Subscriber Identifier Management Administrator Maintenance Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring 1 Ifthe VIEW task is unassigned but other tasks are still assigned these tasks are left as assigned to this user group However the user is not able to perform any kind of operation over these tasks until the VIEW task is assigned again 363 211 497 NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 1 31 Functional description Network configuration 1 5 Network configuration The network configuration depends on the user applications The most common configurations are described below and illustrated in Figure 1 9 page 1 32 to Figure 1 12 page 1 35 gt NOTE If there are various configuration options of the DCN these are shown in the figures by means of dashed lines The hubs are optional depending on the number of client platforms and NEs 1 5 1 NAM server without clients and exter nal OS LAN NAM server connected to the NEs using a local area network LAN NAM server Hub TCP IP LAN i NE FRP PEL NE Figure 1 9 NAM server without clients and external OS LAN
467. nance uration Performance Manage Administrator Maintenance ment Monitoring Subscriber Identifier Subscriber Identifier Administrator Maintenance Management View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring a Ifthe VIEW task is unassigned but other tasks are still assigned these tasks are left as assigned to this user group But the user is not able to perform any kind of operation over these tasks until the VIEW task is assigned again NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 17 User management User groups ee Most of the task names are self described but other tasks need a deeper descrip tion Access Policy Management provides the functionality to m create modify delete NAM users m create modify delete NAM user groups m create modify delete NAM domains m create modify delete assignments between NAM users and NAM user groups m create modify delete access assignments between NAM user groups and applications tasks m create modify delete access assignments between NAM user groups and domains modify assignments between domains and controlled objects Domain Management provides the functionality to modify assignments between domains and controlled objects Autonomous Reports provides the functionality to m view logs or log types autonomous reports alarm and performance logs Groups and NEs Configuration provides the functionality to m create modify delete NEs m create modify delete groups of NEs 9
468. nce This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Equalization This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 NAM R1 9 7 46 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Service Details Parameters Description Balance Mode This option menu can be used to define whether the AP or CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Fixed Balance This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 Receive TLP This slider can be used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in RTLP dB Negative values define loss positive values define gain Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit TLP This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or TTLP loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de fine gain Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 7 2 4 13 BRI Service Details window Overview The BRI basic rate interface transmission extension 3 DSO ISDN BRITE is ap plicable to the AUA293 ISDN BRITE channel unit which uses the U Interface 2B1
469. nction is initiated by clicking the respective area of the workspace manager In Figure 3 6 only an example of the workspace manager is given as the entries are configurable General Personal Applications Lock Screen Log Out el 0 i ey Na ce REL Twa as ar Calendar Editor Other Workspaces Printer Tools Trash Can Clock File Manager Mailtool Workspace Solaris Help Configuration Figure 3 6 Workspace manager For a detailed description of the offered functions please refer to your Solaris Functions User s Guide and Solaris Common Desktop Environment User s Guide 3 3 9 Workspace menu General The workspace menu opens when you click with the right mouse button on the background of the workspace Workspace Menu Shuttle Up shuffle Down Refresh Minimize Restore Front Panel Restart Workspace Manager Log out Figure 3 7 Workspace Menu NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 11 System management General information on keyboard ee Workspace menu The workspace menu provides the functions listed in the following table functions Table 3 2 Menu items of the workspace menu Menu Item Function Programs A submenu offering several programs Shuffle Up If several windows on the screen are layered on top of one another Shuffle Up brings the window from the very bot tom to the top of the pile Shuffle Down If several windows on the screen are layered on top of
470. nd but The Affected Objects button provides access to the Af tons fected Objects window This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated The Resynchronize button can be used to force the re syn chronization of the selected profile with all the AFMs cur rently controlled by the NAM This button is enabled if the status of the profile is Activated 9 6 7 1 Create an ATM traffic network profile The ATM Traffic Network Profile can be launched from the ATM Cross Connection window cf Chapter 7 3 2 via Edit or from the Network Profile List window cf Chapter 9 6 1 page 9 15 via Add button Procedure Complete the following procedure to create an ATM traffic network profile Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu Network Profile to select New Network Profile if the window has been launched from the Network Profile List window this step is not needed 2 Use the text field Network Profile Name in the field Network Profile In formation to enter a profile name NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 37 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee 9 Add a description of the new profile in the corresponding list box and click on Apply to confirm 4 Click on Close to exit the window 9 6 7 2 Modify an ATM traffic network profile The ATM Traffic Network Profile can be launched from the ATM Cross Connection window cf Chapter 7 3 2 or from the Network Profile List window cf Chapter 9 6 1 page 9 15 v
471. nd is addressed ctag Correlation tag This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic This field is used to associate the command message to the response message NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 9 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee TMPER Accumulation Time Period This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type none min chars 0 max chars 0 Since the condition type is not supported this field does not pertain and will be ig nored AIDTYPE Access identifier type Type List Required No Default Type Fixed Default ALL Access identifier type Abbreviation Meaning ALL All T T EQPT Equipment C 3 2 4 Output format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID AIDTYPE NTFCNCDE CONDTYPE SRVEFF OCRDAT OCRTM CONDDESCR 7 NAM R1 9 C 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages a C 3 2 5 Output format parameters AID Access identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes Default Type Fixed Default It all This is the address of the equipment and or facility for which an alarm condition is being reported Abbreviation Meaning ap 1 1 16 Application Pack comdac 1 1 2 COMDAC ctu 1 Craft Test Unit cu
472. nd the related function is executed Example To execute the About option under Help menu see table above press Alt H followed by A m By using short cuts to cut to copy or to paste text strings The short cuts are the usual ones in the used platform Solaris or Windows 5 3 2 Tool bar The tool bar contains icons that provide quick access to the most commonly used actions New create a new object group NE pack Open edit an existing ob ject group NE pack Remove delete selected object group NE Print Help Exit Reload Show Parent Group Tooltips are also provided for these action icons File Edit View Window Help 5 3 3 Network browser The Network Browser displays all groups and NEs created in the NAM in a tree like structure The first level in the tree is the root group Alarm severity The icons change their color to reflect the highest severity alarm critical major minor indeterminate or warning alarms The highest severity alarm of a group is the highest severity alarm of all the alarms of its child groups and NEs The alarm status color is in accordance with the alarm viewer color set red for critical and major yellow for minor white for indeterminate and warning a pandas play Any level of the Network Browser e g Group_1 can be expanded to its compo nents e g groups and NEs by clicking on the symbol related to the object to NAM R1 9 5 20 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE man
473. nded DCN configurations A 6 1 ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN A 6 1 1 Router configuration A 6 1 2 AnyMedia network element configuration A 6 1 3 Navis AnyMedia server configuration A 6 1 4 Navis AnyMedia client configuration A 6 1 5 Local digital switch configuration A 6 2 Communication with remote NEs using inband ATM PVC A 6 2 1 Configuration of the router A 6 2 2 Configuration of AnyMedia Access System A 6 2 2 1 Configuration of COMDAC A 6 2 2 2 Configuration of AFM A 6 2 3 Navis AnyMedia server configuration A 6 2 4 Navis AnyMedia client configuration A 6 2 5 Transport elements configuration A 6 2 6 Connection diagram NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 A 1 T N N P oo m on T oO T op st fo T N P N r Co 7 Co i co P zA T r T 7 X 02 2001 A SSS Contents NAM R1 9 A II Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Data communications network DCN configuration A 1 Overview This appendix provides you with information about Data communication network DCN introduction m general definitions of terms m network element management communications m Navis AnyMedia management communications Sample DCN configurations A 2 DCN introduction NAM features Communication of NAM and NE DCN 363 211 497 The AnyMedia Access System is designed to provide a full range of telephony access services like POTS ISDN and leased lines and data se
474. ndow frame will follow the mouse movements until you press the left mouse button Size Allows interactive resizing of the window Move the cursor appear ing in the window to the window edge you wish to move The edge will follow the mouse movements until you press the left mouse button Minimize The window is shown as an icon Maximize The window is shown in its maximum possible screen size Lower If there are several overlapping windows the currently active win dow is shifted to the bottom of the pile Close This function will close the window and remove it from the user in terface exiting the application linked to the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 9 System management General information on keyboard BE SeS 3 3 6 Menu bar Menu options The menu bar of a window contains the menu names Once you click on a menu it opens and a series of related menu options will be displayed under the menu name Conventions Each option represents a function which can be used to control the application running in the window To call this function click on the required option A menu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option e g in the menu below Network View gt Maps A grayed menu name or option cannot be selected Submenu conven Submenus are menus opening under a certain menu option and containing a tions number of related menu options Some menu options are provided with a small ar
475. ned name of the DMG ID The internally assigned ID of the DMG Type The types of the MGs in this DMG Administrative State The administrative state of the DMG Possible val ues ON if the DMG is up OFF otherwise The Ad ministrative State is changed whenever a startup or shutdown command is issued Operational State The operational state of the MG displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of ser vice TRANSITORY otherwise Figure 3 12 DMGs in Package Window NAM R1 9 3 26 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration a SS 3 4 5 Editing distributed module groups Overview The Edit DMG window allows for setting up whether a DMG is automatically launched on system start up It also displays information for each module con tained in the DMG Launch DMG on The Launch on Package Start Up option allows for the configuration of the sys package startup tem to specific needs If some of the optional DMGs are not needed for a given network configuration they can be set not to be automatically started to save sys tem resources DMGs information Next to DMG Name the name of the selected DMG is displayed The type of the MG is indicated next to MG Type The table under MGs in DMG in the Edit DMG window displays the following information Table 3 16 DMG information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of
476. nformation 8 15 Menu Bar 8 13 System management functions 8 19 Toolbar 8 15 Alarm viewer Starting 8 11 ALARM_AO_ NOT PROCESS 8 47 ALARM_EVENT NOT PROCESS 8 47 Alarms Alarm classification 8 42 Reporting via EM 8 3 Alternate key 3 5 AMAS R1 2 shelf 5 2 AP card test 8 29 AP card test result 8 30_ AP provisioning 6 18 Applications start 3 4 Apply button 3 14 Archive database 3 38 Archive command 3 41 Assign controlled objects to domains 4 12 user groups access to applications 4 22 user groups access to domains 4 21 user groups access to tasks 4 23 users to user groups 4 6 Association NE Navis AnyMedia 5 40 Association state 5 40 ATM cell transfer 5 15 Autonomous Reports 1 15 3 46 8 10 Available Domains 5 37 363 211 497 B Background map 5 21 Backspace key 3 5 Backup command 3 40 level 3 43 schedules 3 43 types 3 38 Backup database 3 38_ Bridge definition A 2 Built in self test 8 32 Buttons often used Apply 3 14 Cancel 3 14 Close 3 14 OK 3 14 C Cancel button 3 14 CD ROM XX Channel Unit 5 5 Check box 3 13 CIT port protocol profiles A 3_ Click mouse 3 5 Client application 3 16 Close button 3 14 COMDAC protection mode simplex 5 68 5 71 COMDAC Protection State 5 69 COMM PROBLEM 8 49 Comments on document XXI COMMUNICATION LOST 8 48 CONFIG_AO_ NOT PROCESS 8 50 CONFIG_EVENT_ NOT PROCESS 8 51 Connection states BB agent Navis AnyMedia 5 43 Connection
477. ng ca pacities as start up or recovery on some of them Definitions The following table gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Table 3 5 Definitions Term Meaning Server applica Set of server processes that perform a certain functionality tion Server applications provide services for client applications Client applica Set of processes that use the services provided by the server tion applications e g GUI and Northbound users Package Logical parts of the NAM which provide specific functionality and can be started up used and shutdown independently There are three packages m Narrowband package for NB configuration and common functionality alarms logging and administration m Broadband package for BB configuration and common functionality alarms logging and administration m Administration package for common functionality alarms logging and administration Distributed Set of module groups of the same type distributed to provide Module Group load balancing and protection features DMG Module Group Set of modules with strong functional dependencies that influ MG ence the way they are installed and managed Module Executable that provides a subset of services in the NAM and describes a way to handle its process instances Process Entity of the NAM which has an physical operation system process associated NAM R1 9 3 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Le 3 4 1
478. ng of controlled objects Chapter 5 NE management Describes the connection establishment between NAM and NEs and the NE management possibilities of the NAM Chapter 6 Equipment configuration Describes the system configuration parameters and the equipment provi sioning tasks Chapter 7 Service provisioning Describes all actions necessary for provisioning both telephony and data services Chapter 8 Fault management maintenance Describes alarms and events how to use the Alarm Viewer how to perform tests and trouble clearing procedures Chapter 9 Performance monitoring Describes the display of performance monitoring data and traffic measure ments counts Appendix A Describes the Data Communications Network DCN configurations NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 XV About this document Conventions used B S Appendix B Provides information about the configuration parameters Appendix C Describes the TL1 Northbound Interface m Abbreviations and Acronyms Lists all abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual Glossary Defines special terms used in this manual m Index Alphabetical index to quickly search for paragraphs in the manual which provide more information on a certain keyword 4 Conventions used The following are terms used in this USM that may have a different meaning than the general or common use of the term m Inthe NAM the term access means that the system provides the primary servic
479. ng step is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment 7 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 as lt LuLUMRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuLUMRT 1log Installation of lt LUuULUMRT gt was successful NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 11 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ME SS RogueWave 1 0 7 amp Processing package instance lt LuRWRT gt from 1 1 2 installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt RogueWave Libraries Runtimes for AnyMedia EM R1 9 sparc std0130u thr0130u t1s0710u tpr0112u OK No previous package LuRWRT has been found Filesystem kbytes used avail Capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 713 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11256 75554 13 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4294968 2230254 66 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache Swap 1202064 48 1202016 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cdl1 500736 50073
480. nnection is in service a Warning window pops up Removing an ATM cross connection may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the NAM will send a delete message to the NE 4 Click on Close to exit the window 7 3 6 AFM Feeder VPs List window This screen lists the available VPs on the feeder side AFM Feeder VPs List Figure 7 36 AFM Feeder VPs List window The following table shows the view options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the AFM is inserted Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf In this release the only possible value is ap 1 16 for FAST shelf and ap 1 0 for BAIU shelf NAM R1 9 7 72 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning data E SS Parameters Buttons Description Feeder VPs List The information in this field is displayed in a 3 column table VP Number Shows a unique sequence number for each shelf VPI entry m Service Category Indicates the Quality of Service QoS class Possible values Unknown CBR rt VBR nrt VBR UBR m VP Type Indicates the type of the feeder VP Possible values Unknown Shelf VP1 Shelf VP2 Shelf VP3 Shelf VP4 Shelf OAM VP Local VP Downstream VP Upstream VP The Edit Add button provides acc
481. nnects an AP port circuit to the CPE The results are used to detect broken or bad quality wires even before the customer realizes a lack of quality LL PLL Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is not responsible for setting up this service Locale This is a geographic or political region that shares the same language and customs In this document a locale is also used to refer to the definition of the subset of a user s information technology environment that depends on language and cultural conventions Local Digital Switch LDS This is a switching machine that terminates a TR 303 VRT An example of an LDS is the Lucent 5ESS switch Localization This is the process of adapting a program for use in a specific locale LOG File This is the file used for listing all actions that have occurred in a system This information is generated and re corded concurrently and sequentially as transactions and events are processed in the system Logical DSO The descriptor used in this document to refer to parameters affecting a DSO 64 kbps service or facility TR 303 logical line DSO Logical DS1 The descriptor used in this document to refer to parameters affecting a DS1 1 544 Mbps service or facility TR 303 logical feeder DS1 Logical Feeder DS1 Numbers These are the identifiers 1 to 28 for the TR 303 VRT of the VRT feeder DS1s that are used
482. nnel protocol A 4 Repetitive Alarm 8 8 Restart Workspace Manager workspace menu 3 12 Restore database 3 38 Restore command 3 40 Return key 3 5 ROC over Semi Permanent Leased Lines DCN A 6 RogueWave Installation 2 12 Router definition A 2 ee S Safety Classification XIX screen navigation equipment configuration 5 49 6 2 Security Id 5 47 Selected Domains 5 37 Semi Permanent Leased Line definition A 2 Server application Definition 3 16 Server applications start up via a command line 3 18 o Shelf protection COMDAC 5 70 lO DS1 5 74 Shelf view 6 3 Shuffle Up Down workspace menu 3 12 Software installation 1 23 download 5 78 upgrade 5 78 Software copy COMDAC 5 86 Sorting Alarms 8 18 Spin box 3 14 sreen navigation service provisioning 7 4 Status Bar 5 18 status bar 5 22 Sub NetworkController 5 96 System security 1 30 System Internal Events 1 15 3 46 8 9 System management functions 8 19 T Tab 3 14 TAR command 3 41 Target ID 5 38 TCP IP_CON REFUSED 8 54 Terminating the Alarm Viewer 8 12 Testroutines Access tothe 8 26 AP card test 8 29 AP card test result 8 30 Built in self test 8 32_ Loopback test 8 33 Port test 8 27 Port test result 8 28 Standby card test scheduling 8 31 Text box 3 14 timing source 5 55 timing source control primary source 5 58 secondary source 5 58 timing sync mode 5 57 TL1 messages Path through interface C 3_ TLI COMM DENIED
483. nnel unit supports an in put TLP range of 16 0 to 0 5 dB Possible values Black White Default Black 7 dB Receive This option menu can be used to control a 7 dB pad in the receive path When the Black option Is selected the channel unit Supports an input TLP range of 16 to 0 dB When the White option is selected the channel unit supports an input TLP range of 9 5 to 7 dB Possible values Black White Default Black Receive Attenu This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 59 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Ee 7 2 4 24 FXOD Service Details window The FXOD foreign exchange office GS LS is intended for use in non locally switched special services ground start loop start This GSFN is only available for NE R1 7 0 FOD Service Details Information PROD Figure 7 32 Logical DSO window FXOD Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Loop Start This option menu can be used to defin
484. ns of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This text field shows the drop inside the NE with this NE pro Id file is associated NE Profile This text field shows the name of NE profile NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 39 Performance monitoring NE profiles ME SS Parameters Buttons Description NE Profile Data Errored Seconds ES Four text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two direc tions upstream and downstream Loss of Signal LOS Four text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two direc tions upstream and downstream High Bit Error Rate HBER Four text fields show the val ues for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two directions upstream and downstream Remote Failure Indication RFI Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the downstream direction Loss of Frame LOF Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the upstream direction 9 7 2 SDSL PM Thresholds NE Profile win dow This window can be reached from the SDSL Drop window cf Chapter 6 4 7 and is exclusively used to view the data of an SDSL PM thresholds NE profile SDSL PM Thresholds NE Profile Figure 9 14 SDSL PM Thresholds NE Profile window NAM
485. nt 8 4 7_ 8 5 6 Correlated alarms 8 60 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue1 02 2001 IX arr Contents 9 Performance monitoring 9 1 9 1 Overview 9 1 9 2 ADSL performance monitoring data 21 9 2 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window 9 2 9 2 2 Modify the ADSL performance monitoring 9 5 9 3 SDSL performance monitoring data 9 9 9 3 1 SDSL Performance Monitoring Data window 9 5 9 3 2 Modify the SDSL performance monitoring 9 7_ 9 4 AFM feeder performance monitoring 9 9 9 4 1 AFM PM Data window 9 9 9 4 2 Modify the PM data of the AFM feeder 9 10 9 4 3 AFM Feeder PM Threshold window 9 11 9 5 ATM traffic monitoring 9 13 9 5 1 ATM Traffic Monitoring window 9 13 9 5 2 Modify the ATM traffic monitoring 9 14 9 6 Network profiles ARE 9 6 1 Network Profiles List window 9 15 9 6 2 Affected Objects window 9 18 9 6 3 ADSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window 9 18 9 6 4 SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window 9 23 9 6 5 ADSL Transmission Network Profile window 9 26 9 6 6 SDSL Transmission Network Profile window 9 31 9 6 7 ATM Traffic Network Profile window 9 35 9 7 NE profiles 9 39 9 7 1 ADSL PM Thresholds NE Profile window 9 39 9 7 2 SDSL PM Thresholds NE Profile window 9 40 9 7 3 ADSL Transmission NE Profile window 9 41 9 7 4 SDSL Transmission NE Profile window 9 43 A Data communications network DCN configuration A 1 A 1 Overview A 1_ A 2 DCN introduction A 1_ A 3 Terms used in this chapter A 2 NAM R1 9 X Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Con
486. nter thresholds m Retrieve the performance data after selecting the record type 15 minutes or 24 hour only applicable to BB agents m Traffic monitoring only applicable to BB agents The NAM provides the ability to display traffic monitoring data Data performance The data performance management provides the following functions eres onc m Collect display ATM layer traffic counters current 15 minutes and previous 15 minutes m Collect display ADSL SDSL port performance counters current 15 minutes previous 15 minutes current day and previous day m Collect display DS3 feeder performance counters current 15 minutes previous 15 minutes up to 96 previous inter vals and total day m Management of performance features enabling disabling generation of feeder PM data clearing of ATM ADSL SDSL and DS3 PM counters Test The Test Management provides the following functionality features management Port test It is possible to request a test for a particular port on a specific application pack AP card test lt is possible to start a series of self diagnostic routines for all port circuits on a specified Application Pack plus its common circuitry m Standby card test scheduling via cut through It is possible to schedule a test to perform a COMDAC side switch or off line diagnostic for the standby COMDAC or the protection Built in self test Each NE performs a built in self test of plug
487. nyMedia EM R1 9 sparc solaris 1 2 2 05 OK No previous package LUJRERT has been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36997 92538 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401583 167406 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11928 74882 14 var NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 55 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 3366955 3158267 52 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1194560 8600 1185960 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cd1 500736 500736 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Enter install directory opt lucent JDK_1 2 2 05 q 5 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path A list of available users and groups pops up gt NOTE The following list is an example Other values may appear depending on the system Type always the number which represents the administrator user you have already created under the Solaris Operating Environment Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection 7 7 q 6 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as t
488. o start it click on the Groups and NEs Management icon in the access bar The menu bar the Network Browser and the Background Map pop up cf Figure 8 8 page 8 27 The tests can be executed from AP windows and User Port windows TL1 commands Most of the test routines can also be executed via TL1 commands by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 6 15 Please refer to the network element documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format restrictions error conditions etc Test Options The following test options are available for telephony application Port test cf Chapter 8 4 1 1 page 8 27 m AP card test cf Chapter 8 4 1 2 page 8 29 m Standby card test scheduling cf Chapter 8 4 1 3 page 8 31 m Built in self test cf Chapter 8 4 1 4 page 8 32 m Loopback test on the feeder side cf Chapter 8 4 1 5 page 8 33 The following test options are available for data application 8 26 Issue1 02 2001 xDSL test list cf Chapter 8 4 2 1 page 8 34 ADSL corrupted CRC test cf Chapter 8 4 2 2 page 8 36 ADSL port built in self test cf Chapter 8 4 2 3 page 8 38 SDSL port built in self test cf Chapter 8 4 2 4 page 8 40 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management Le Groups and NEs Management Group Map Root Group Network Browser Figure 8 8 Groups and NEs Management window 8 4 1 Telephony tests
489. ode that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ICC Indicates the interchangeability among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the Series Number SW Version Shelf Version The software version is only ap plicable for COMDACs and AFMs For these packs it is ob tained from the NE at connection time Internally the NAM verifies whether the mentioned SW Version is manageable by the system The shelf version applies to shelves and sub shelves NE Summary Apparatus Code Displays a mnemonic that identifies the apparatus code type Possible values COM101 COM102 FAC100 DTP101 LPS100 LPS104 LPS105 MSU100 LPA150 LPA380 LPA300 LPA300B LPA300C LPA350 LPU116 LPA900 LPA901 LPA400 LPA400B LPA404 LPA408 LPA414 LPA416 LPS716 Number of Units Displays two numbers the number of packs and the number of unplugged units NAM R1 9 5 66 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS 5 6 7 1 Get the NE inventory data Procedure Complete the following procedure to display the NE inventory data Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Browser and Inventory via the cursor menu The NE Inventory window pops up cf Chapter 5 6 7 page 5 6
490. ods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are stored in the NVDS and hence are the parameter values that will be used on subsequent NE power up Non Volatile Program Storage NVPS This keeps software program data It resides in the COMDAC Normal Hour Load The average load expected during the lifetime of the system O Off line Backups These are backups performed automatically via any scheduling mechanisms e g cron file On line Backups These are backups performed on user demand Operator This refers to the AnyMedia Element Manager users NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 GL 7 Glossary B Operator Mode Testing initiated by staff from the EM using the NE integrated capabilities These tests can last some time e g some measurements can be executed several times during a test session The results in this mode usually are val ues e g resistance voltage and pass fail decisions Overload The load that causes the system to take drastic measures to ensure its integrity During overload normal system function is disrupted and certain inputs the ones causing the overload are ignored After clearing the overload sit uation the system is left in asynchronous state for those inputs that generated the overload Re synchronization of this input retrieves synchronization OS This is any operations system or Element Manager connected to the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager b
491. of four main steps Back up databases and relevant configuration files m Uninstall AEM R1 7 1 m Install NAM R1 9 m Restore databases and relevant configuration files Databases to be backed up are m NER SANYMEDIAPATH NER db ner db m Security SANYMEDIAPATH Security db Security db m Performance Configuration SANYMEDIAPATH PerformanceCon fig db Performance db m Alarms SANYMEDIAPATH AM AlarmDataBase db NEM BAM databases depending on the AMU this is NarrowBand NB or BroadBand BB SANYMEDIAPATH AMU_BB_ R112 db bam_ db SANYMEDIAPATH AMU_BB_ R14 db bam_ db SANYMEDIAPATH AMU_NB_R17 db nem_ db Configuration Management SANYMEDIAPATH AMU_ db CM_ db m System Administrator SANYMEDIAPATH SystemAdministra tor db SysAdmDatabase db The Alarms and the Configuration Management databases respectively will be re moved later due to incompatibilities between AEM R1 7 1 and NAM R1 9 but it is recommend to back them up for safety reasons in case a roll back is needed The upgrade procedure affects only the server side of the NAM For the client part it will only be necessary to reinstall NAM R1 9 and adjust user preferences in the SystemPreferences ini configuration file if any change has been made 2 3 1 2 Stop Navis AnyMedia Before shutting down the NAM server applications it is recommended to log out from NAM clients connected to the server 1 Close the NAM access bar window to log ou
492. ogical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 The same result will be obtained by double clicking in the corresponding row remove a cross connection select the desired Logical DSO id in the Physical DSO Information list and press Remove Logical DS0 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 35 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs ee 6 3 9 MDSU window The metallic distribution server unit MDSU provides the interfaces to the MDS2 MDS2B subshelves MOSU Server D SGtReqiired Figure 6 14 MDSU window The following table shows the view edit options of the MDSU window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This option menu shows the slot which is being used as MDSU Possible values ap 1 1 16 NAM R1 9 6 36 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs Parameters Buttons Description Action Inventory In
493. oint RTU Remote Test Unit 2RVO 2 Wire Loop Reverse Battery Originate eee S SCC Secondary Channel SCEC Secondary Channel Error Correction SDEE Supported Entity Exists SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SGE Supported Entity Outage SL Slope SLC Subscriber Loop Carrier SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Line SW Software ee T TA Terminal Adapter Test Area TAP Test Access Path NAM R1 9 AB 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Abbreviations SS TCA Threshold Crossing Alert TCP Transmission Control Protocol TID Target Id TL1 Transaction Language 1 TLP Transmission Level Point TM Timeslot Management TMC Timeslot Management Channel TMN Telecommunication Management Network TNM Total Network Management TO Transmission Only TRMT Transmit Attenuator Parameter TS Test TS Timeslot TTLP Transmit Transmission Level Point TTMT Tandem Transmit Attenuator Parameter U UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UAS Unassigned UCC Universal Communication Channel UEQ Unequipped NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 AB 11 Abbreviations SS UI User Interface UID User Id UNI User Network Interface UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply USP Universal Serial Bus UX Unix V VB Virtual Bank VC Virtual Connection VCI Virtual Channel Identifier VE Voice Frequency VFDE Voic
494. ol Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP and is the way to the NAM ROC Remote operations channel ROC a remote LAN interface which uses TCP IP to communicate with the NAM The OAM amp P functionality is pro vided via a nailed up DSO link that is part of the DS1 payload connectivity to the AnyMedia Access System shelf The DSO link originates from a data communication network DCN that supports TCP IP over an Ethernet LAN connection on the NAM side and does a translation to a wide area network WAN via multiple DSOs on the other 5 2 1 4 External interfaces for circuit testing The AnyMedia Access System provides three external interfaces for circuit test Ing m Local access for manual testing via jacks on the CTU DTP 100 NAM R1 9 5 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Overview of the controlled systems E SS Connection to the TAP B Remote test unit RTU 2 via the tip ring leads from two APs VF port cir cuits 5 2 1 5 Synchronization interfaces The AnyMedia Access System supports four timing modes which can be provi sioned by the NAM m External DS1 m External composite office clock m Free running mode m Loop timed mode The provisioning options are described in Chapter 5 6 4 page 5 55 5 2 1 6 Plug amp play capabilities Inventory data The packs associated with the AnyMedia Access System have the capability to self identify themselves with inventory data This capability is very useful durin
495. om installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Logging Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuLogg_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuLogg has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 29 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee 1 package pathname is already properly installed Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Logging Release 1 9 Administration as lt LuLogg gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 Logging bin LogReader opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 Logging bin LogWriter opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 Logging cfg Logging cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuLogg gt was successful Performance Log Processing package instance lt LuPerf gt from ging installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Performace Release 1 7 1 Administration sparc LuPerf_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999
496. ommissioning Installation procedure ee 11 Type n and press Return lt user gt cron file has been modified to add the AEM cleanUp process File etc init d EMR17 amas has been created Links etc rc2 d S99EMR17 amas and etc rce2 d K99EMR17 amas to etc init d EMR17 amas have been created SystemAdministrator database must be customized Execute SystemAdministrator bin CustomizeSADB to replace the default configuration Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 9 was successful lt server side installation gt NAM R1 9 2 44 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS 2 2 1 1 3 Installation of the telephony agent optional General CD ROM 2 of 4 contains the installation script of the telephony agent The instal lation of this script is optional Complete the following procedure to install the telephony R1 7 agent Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed CD ROM 2 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM nb and press Return AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 9 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y 2000 patches indicated in SRD pdf document 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to suc
497. on Installing OrbixNames 1 1c Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 as lt LUOXNSRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 verifying class lt names gt lt files list gt verifying class lt bin gt lt files list gt verifying class lt lib gt Executing postinstall script Okay OrbixNames is now installed You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXNSRT 1log Installation of lt LUuOXNSRT gt was successful NAM R1 9 2 16 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS ObjectStore 5 1 in Processing package instance lt LuOSRT gt from stallation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_24 gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 9 sparc solaris 5 1_SP2 Run Time OK No previous package LuOSRT has been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11359 75451 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4383673 2141549 68 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache Swap 1201288 72 1201216 1 tmp vol dev dsk c0t2d0 cd1 500736 500736 0 100 cdrom cdl The values shown above are examples Other values may appear depending on the system Enter install directory opt lucent OS51_SP2 q 16 Type a valid path where the packag
498. on Close NAM R1 9 5 64 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E S 5 6 7 NE Inventory window This window provides inventory and summary information for both telephony and data services Two non editable tables display NE inventory information The first table contains per slot data while the second one provides summarized informa tion per card type Figure 5 25 NE Inventory window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 65 NE management Network Element management ee Parameters Buttons Description NE Inventory Shelf Number Slot Number Numeric field that identifies data the position of each pack Shelf Type Circuit Pack Type Mnemonic that identifies the shelf type and the pack type Possible shelf types AnyMediaAS IAT Possible values COMDAC IO_DS1 CTU IATS MDSU MSC PTU ATU PROG2W POTS32 PRCOIN ISDN16_U AFM_DS8 ADSL SDSL depending on the inserted packs Apparatus Code Identifies the specific function provided by the pack Possible values COM101 COM102 FAC100 DTP101 LPS100 LPS104 LPS105 MSU100 LPA150 LPA380 LPA300 LPA300B LPA300C LPA350 LPU116 LPA900 LPA901 LPA400 LPA400B LPA404 LPA408 LPA414 LPA416 LPS716 Serial Number A 12 character alphanumeric code that identifies each pack It includes the date and place of manu facture ECI C
499. on list use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select Physical Port and press Edit The IAT Server Port window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 12 page 6 47 remove a cross connection select the corresponding Physical Server Port Id in the Physical Server Port Information list and press Re move Cross Connection A Warning window pops up displaying the follow ing message Cross Connection will be re moved Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 6 42 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs 6 3 11 IAT Subshelf window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases This screen is composed of a set of pull down controls to select the subshelf to be created or edited and the command buttons to provision deprovision the sub shelf IAT Subshelt ene roel at fa r a a m z ammit v Pees Simas Seip cir tle Eerijesi Beit maina Masjiesi Brin Figure 6 16 IAT Subshelf window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Index This option menu provides the Physical Index or the sub shelf identifier Identifiers which have already been created and provisioned in the NE are shown with a grey background Subs
500. oned The following NAM subjects are described m basic functionality management features m system and software architecture m hardware and software platform m interfaces m applications NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 1 1 Functional description Introduction ee 1 2 Introduction General The NAM is part of a telecommunication management network TMN It repre sents the element management layer and fulfills the tasks of the ISO nternational Organisation for Standardization functional areas see Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 Benefits This provides some benefits for the operator m better control over revenue generating services by local and centralized management m reduced time and effort for provisioning tasks m fast and efficient fault detection and isolation m prevention of unauthorized access by appropriate security mechanisms m reduction of operator mistakes by easy to use Graphical User Interface GUI a integration with higher management levels for network service and busi ness purposes 1 2 1 Main functions The NAM provides the following main characteristics functions support of all AnyMedia Access Systems features telephony and data equipment overview m telephony and data service provisioning common alarm handling for all network elements NEs m test management m data performance monitoring m report log backup and restore functions southband interfaces TL1 NE access via TCP IP for te
501. onnected to a VRT or VB it takes over the characteristics defined by the DSO data for the corresponding logical port e g if a line from a PROG2W LPA380 AP is cross connected to a logical port that is pro visioned for POTS service it provides a loop start interface if the line is then cross connected to a logical port that is provisioned for foreign exchange FX ser vice it provides a ground start interface Logical configura The NE logical configuration supports a combined maximum of 672 DSO records tion among all VRTs and VBs This number exceeds the total number of physical sub scriber lines that the system supports Physical ports The physical ports of the AnyMedia Access System provide feeder DS1 connec tions and subscriber tip ring pairs The physical ports are associated with lO DS1 FAC100 packs and APs respectively Service provision Service provisioning for voice frequency VF services requires that feeder and ing distribution ports be associated with a VRT VB through T1 and TO cross connec tions respectively and that TO provisioning data be entered for the desired ser vice Finally the required physical packs must be equipped Figure 7 2 represents the composite provisioning data required to bring a single subscriber line into ser vice on a TR 08 VRT v8dp 1 1 ds1 1 1 1 O drop 1 1 1 v8fdr 1 a UO IO_DS1 O U AP 1 C TR 08 VRT 7 i i J O O U 96 T1 Cross Connection TO Cross Connection
502. ons Info and or the Authentication Information fields have been changed 9 Click on the Provision button Once the NE is provisioned the Administrative State becomes avail able 10 Change the Administrative State to Managed The NAM starts the connection and synchronization processes with the NB agent The progress of these processes can be watched in the field Operational State Possible values are Communication Stopped Communication Stopped Releasing Communication Trying Communication Trying Problem De tected Communication Established Communication Established Syn chronizing When the Administrative State has been changed to Managed the More Details button becomes available 11 Click on More Details to open the Synchronization window cf Chapter 5 6 2 page 5 50 in order to view or modify the synchronization data Edit and provisioning actions are only possible once the connection is established Only in this case the NE can be displayed on the Browsers and the background map 5 5 2 Connection states NAM telephony agent There are three NAM telephony agent connection states m NOT CONNECTED Initial connection state when there is no connection between NAM and the telephony agent and the NAM is in a passive state avoiding any possibil ity of connection establishment with the telephony agent m TRYING Initial connection state when the TL1 communication session between the NAM and the telephon
503. or TR 08 DS1 a not reprovisionable m SF for TR 08 DS1 b d not reprovisionable m ESF for INA ESF or SF Values are only changeable for INA VB Line Code This option menu shows the line coding values Possible values are m ZCS Zero Code Suppression or B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero Suppression The default is B8ZS for TR 303 TR 08 and INA VRT VBs Values only changeable for TR 08 and INA ZCS is blocked for TR 303 VRTs NAM R1 9 7 26 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Cross Connec tion Information Operational State Apply 363 211 497 Description Physical DS1 id These fields display the physical DS1id by means of three option menus m The first menu contains the shelf number ds1 1 m The second menu contains the slot number inside the shelf 1 5 m The third menu shows the feeders 1 4 inside the se lected slot Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Selecting a slot number second option menu results in an update of the third option menu feeder Edit Physical DS7 This button provides access to the Physical DS1 window The button is available only if a physi cal DS1 has been selected The Operational State shows the service state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the
504. or a result alarm of the correlation process For this release only duplicated alarms are consid ered NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 17 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring ME SS 8 3 3 4 2 Sorting alarms Summary The user can sort alarms by the different fields by clicking on the respective header The sort can be ascending or descending order The sort order is re versed by clicking on the respective header All alarm fields are sorted by alohanumeric order except date and time field and severity field In the severity field the alarms are sorted in ascending descending severity order Effects The alarms are re arranged according to the selected criteria Sorting alarms Proceed as follows to sort the alarm display Step Procedure 1 Click on the header according to which the alarms are to be sorted Response The alarms are sorted according to the selected alarm field in ascending or descending order 2 Check if the list was sorted as desired Yes O K No Continue with step 3 3 Click again on the header to sort the list in the reverse order The sort can be in ascending or descending order each time the user clicks on the same header again the list is sorted the other way NAM R1 9 8 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring E SS 8 3 4 System management functions The general system management functions comprise the functions for file man a
505. ork Profile Name This text field shows the profile Information name The entry can be changed in create and edit mode Status This option menu is used to define the status of the profile Activated Deactivated Activated means that the pro file can be used in cross connections Description This field can be used to include a description of the network profile Network Profile Pattern This option menu is used to select a template for a new profile and to display its data in the field Network Profile Data see below None can also be se lected In this case all parameters in the field Network Pro file Data are set to default values Network Profile Data Service Category This option menu is used to select the quality of service QoS Possible values CBR rt VBR nrt VBR UBR QoS Parameters The parameters in this field are en abled disabled depending on the selected service category For rt VBR and nrt VBR all parameters are enabled For CBR only PCR CDVT and Peak Cell Rate PCR are en abled For UBR AAL5 Frame Discard Cell Tagging PCR CDVT and Peak Cell Rate PCR are enabled gt NOTE For rt VBR and nrt VBR the combination of CLP 0 1 and Cell Tagging No is not allowed m Cell Loss Priority CLP This option menu is used to specify whether the SCR MBS and CLR apply to the CLP 0 1 stream or the CLP 0 stream Possible val ues 0 0 1 Unknown edit mode 0 1 is not allowed if Cell Tagging No m AAL
506. ormat seen by this network interface e g analog voice frequency ISDN U interface etc and the internal format i e 4 Mbps timeslots Distribution Ports are con tained in Application Packs Channel Units for the AnyMedia Access System A maximum of 32 Distribution Ports are supported on POTS COIN Application Packs APs and a maximum of 16 Distribution Ports are supported on ISDN APs Download The process of moving information from a server to a client at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Expected applications of this capability are database retrievals Drop This comprises the wire to the customer and customer premises equipment CPE In some documents this is also called equipment NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 GL 3 Glossary he DS1 ports DS1 circuits are used to provide the AnyMedia Access System shelf virtual remote terminal VRT or INA Virtual Bank feeder facilities and are physically located on the IO_DS1 circuit packs in the NE shelf i E EAS Element Access Server This is a CORBA server developed by Lumos Technologies which provides an interface between TL1 messages and CORBA methods EM Application A group of one or more modules that offers related functionality EM Domain An assigned collection of Controlled Objects EM Task This represents a subset of the management functions supported by EM applications EM User An entity defined via login name that can be assign
507. ort BIST test 8 4 2 4 SDSL port BIST test 8 5 Alarms 8 5 1 Overview 8 5 2 Alarm types 8 5 3 Network element alarms 8 5 4 General element manager platform alarms 8 5 4 1 AGENT _NP_SYNC_PROBLEM 8 5 4 2 LOG _DEL_ FULL 8 5 4 3 LOG_DEL_PART 8 5 4 4 NP_SYNC_PROBLEM 8 5 4 5 PRINT ALARM 8 5 5 Element manager alarms concerning network element 8 5 5 1 ALARM_AO_NOT_ PROCESS 8 5 5 2 ALARM_EVENT_ NOT PROCESS 8 5 5 3 COMM_DENIED 8 5 5 4 COMMUNICATION_LOST 8 5 5 5 COMM PROBLEM 8 5 5 6 COMM_RES_NOT_AVAILABLE NAM R1 9 8 II Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Contents 8 5 6 363 211 497 8 5 5 7 8 5 5 8 8 5 5 9 8 5 5 10 8 5 5 11 8 5 5 12 8 5 5 13 8 5 5 14 8 5 5 15 8 5 5 16 8 5 5 17 8 5 5 18 8 5 5 19 8 5 5 20 8 5 5 21 CONFIG_AO_NOT_PROCESS CONFIG_EVENT_ NOT PROCESS CX_CONN_ NOT VISIBLE INVALID MIB_IDENTIFIER NB_ASSOC_ FAILED NB_ASSOC_LOST SW_VR_ILLEGAL TCP_IP_CON REFUSED TL1_COMM_DENIED UNABLE_TO_SYNC_ALARM UNABLE _TO SYNC_CONFIG UPLOAD PROBLEM AGENT _RPOFILE_WITH_NO_NP DUPLICATED AGENT PROFILE UNSYNC_NETWORK_PROF Correlated alarms NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 8 IIT BE OOOO OOOO O Contents NAM R1 9 IV Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance 8 1 Overview This chapter provides you with informations about m basics on the alarm management m basics on alarms m maintenance actions if certain alarms are pending m using the Alarm Viewer m performing test actions with
508. ory and the result of the software download operation successful or unsuccessful This information is shown for each NE to the software download is being performed gt NOTE The software download process cannot be cancelled 8 After the download process is finished click on Close to exit the AFM Software Download window This button is disabled while the SW download process is being executed 5 6 12 COMDAC program copy Overview This function is used to copy a newly loaded software from the currently active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC During normal operation both COMDACs should have the same software version Therefore the software copying should al ways be the next step after software download except when software copying is started automatically after software download cf Chapter 5 6 11 2 page 5 79 Duplex configura For the following description it is assumed that the NE is configured in duplex con tion figuration NAM R1 9 5 86 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS Procedure Complete the following procedure to copy the new software from the active COM DAC to the standby COMDAC Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Program Copy gt Telephony via cur sor menu The COMDAC Program Copy window pops up Be Te AppIY Figure 5 33 COMDAC Program Copy window This is a dialogue window requesting information from the user to con tinue There are two
509. ose gt See Figure 4 10 Domain Profile window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 11 User management Domains ee Change domain To change the domain name enter the new name in the Domain Name field 3 to name 30 characters Any characters are allowed Change domain To change the domain description enter the new information in the Description description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed Adding To assign further controlled objects to the selected domain select one or more controlled objects controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Adad gt gt gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Removing To remove assigned controlled objects from the selected domain select one or controlled objects more controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Adding user groups To give further user groups access to the selected domain select one or more user groups in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 Removing user To remove assigned user groups from the selected domain select one or more groups user groups in the User Groups Assigned field and click lt lt Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If
510. ossible cause s The sysObjectid MIB variable retrieved from the data agent is not valid Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the IP address of the data agent Yes Continue with step 2 No Correct the IP address 2 Check for correct sysObjectld MIB variable Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Correct the IsysObjectld MIB variable 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 11 NB _ASSOC_FAILED Meaning The communication association with the telephony agent has failed NAM R1 9 8 52 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarms Abbreviation NB ASSOC_FAILED Severity Critical Service affecting No This alarm covers the following alarms m TCP IP_CON REFUSED cf Chapter 8 5 5 14 page 8 54 m TL1_COMM_DENIED cf Chapter 8 5 5 15 page 8 55 m NB ASSOC _LOST cf Chapter 8 5 5 12 page 8 53 gt NOTE This alarm is only used in NBI applications 8 5 5 12 NB ASSOC_LOST Meaning The NAM lost the management association with the telephony agent Abbreviation NB ASSOC_LOST Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when the TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session are available and the software version currently stored in the NE is sup ported by the NAM i e when the association process between the NAM and the NE is completed NE state is CONNECTED
511. other words the standby source becomes the working source and the working source becomes the standby source This button is disabled if the Active Timing Sync Source is Free Running or the Active Timing Sync Source field is empty because the Get button has not been pressed yet gt NOTE During the switch operation the Apply and Get but tons are disabled All fields will be updated as a result of this operation NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 59 NE management Network Element management I ee 5 6 4 2 Modify the timing source Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the timing source control parameter for telephony services Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Timing Source Control gt Telephony via the cursor menu The Timing Source Control Telephony window pops up If you want to then change the provisioned timing synchro use the corresponding option menu in nization mode the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply change the provisioned primary source use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply change the provisioned secondary use the corresponding option menu in source the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply change the line code parameter use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply change the framing format parameter use the
512. oup B as their parent groups respectively see Figure 5 11 page 5 28 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 27 NE management Groups and NEs management Root Group l not allowed Figure 5 11 Group names allowed Group identifier To uniquely identify a group a concatenation of all the group names from the root group to the group being identified is necessary e g the identifier of Group 1 2 1 in the Figure 5 10 page 5 27 is Root group Group 1 Group 1 2 Group 1 2 1 However when logging data related to a group that identifier will be truncated due to log requirements Only the name of the group and the name of the parent group will be logged as the identifier of a group e g the log identifier of Group 1 2 1 in the Figure 5 10 page 5 27 is Group 1 2 Group 1 2 1 Alarm handling The only items in the tree hierarchy allowed to report alarms are the NEs Groups do not generate alarms by themselves but they show the highest severity of the alarms reported by the contained NEs included in the operator domains This se verity is called group status Example Root Group Group 1 2 Figure 5 12 Alarm handling example Reported group sta For instance supposed that NE1 have reported a critical alarm and NE 2 have re tus ported a minor alarm Group 1 2 will report a minor alarm in its group status be cause that is the highest severity of the alarms it contains Nevertheless group 1 will report a critic
513. ous ser vices available The AnyMedia Mainshelf provides end to end ATM cell transfer between cus tomer premise equipment ADSL modems and network ATM switches A mixed telephony data mainshelf is shown in Figure 5 1 page 5 3 Also BAIU shelf will be managed by NAM only data agent cf Figure 5 2 page 5 3 This configuration allows subscriber access to Internet service providers ISP remote LAN applica tions or any other related ATM services ATM connections are established using permanent virtual channels PVC ADSL pack The ADSL lines to subscribers are over twisted copper pairs with rate adaptive downstream transmission rates in the initial release of up to 6 144 Mbps and up stream rates of up to 640 Kbps Carrier Serving Area CSA ranges i e 12 000 feet 3 658 meters are supported using DMT modulation for the ADSL service The twisted pair can carry combined analog POTS and ADSL or ISDN and ADSL service using splitters Splitters are located on the ADSL application packs At the customer premises corresponding splitters allow the separation of data and POTS service SDSL pack SDSL supports data rates up to 2 3 Mbps SDSL requires a special SDSL mo dem SDSL is called symmetric because it supports the same data rates for up stream and downstream traffic It was designed for applications requiring high bandwidth in both directions User interfaces ADSL SDSL customer terminal equipment is provided by an outside vendor for
514. ow Band NE Network Element NEM Network Element Management AnyMedia EM subsystem NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 AB 7 Abbreviations SS NIC Network Interface Card NM Network Management NMA Network Monitoring and Analysis NMS Network Management System NTP Network Time Protocol NVDS Nonvolatile Data Storage NVPS Nonvolatile Program Storage O OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance OCU Office Channel Unit OMG Object Management Group OODB Object Oriented Database OOS Out Of Service OPS Operations System ORB Object Request Broker OS Operation System Dn P PBX Private Branch Exchange PC Personal Computer NAM R1 9 AB 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Abbreviations SS PCM Pulse Code Modulation PCR Peak Cell Rate PGTC Pair Gain Test Controller PID Password Identifier PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol PLN Physical Line Number PLR Pulse Link Repeater POTS Plain Old Telephone Service PPP Point to Point Protocol PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PT Power Test PTU Power Test Unit PVC Permanent Virtual Channels R RAM Random Access Memory RCV Receive RDLD Red Lined REPT Report RFI Remote Failure Indication ROC Remote Operations Channel NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 AB 9 Abbreviations Se SSS ROM Read Only Memory RT Romote Terminal RTLP Receive Transmission Level P
515. ows to view the ADSL SDSL test list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Lists gt ADSL SDSL Test via the cur sor menu The ADSL Test List window pops up xDSL Test List Figure 8 12 xDSL Test List window This window lists all the tests stored in the data agent In this window it is possible to delete stored tests NAM R1 9 8 34 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management E SS The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Table This table shows all tests currently stored in the data agent The table is sorted by entities Test Identifier Indicates the test identifier inside the AFM test number Access Identifier Indicates the object for which the test has been executed m Type Indicates the test type which has been executed Possible values CRC test BIST Built in self test LED test m Status Result Indicates the status of the test Possible values In Progress Passed Could not be started Passed with warning Aborted Start Time Indicates the date and time when the test was Started Command but The Get Test List button is used to display the list above tons The Remove button can be used to remove a test from the list in the data agent It is enabled only if a test has been se lected 2 Click on Get Test List to display the list of the ADS
516. page 1 26 shows the general fault handling The individual phases are handling described next in more detail NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 25 Functional description Working with NAM ee Fault localization and diagnosis e Identification of the alarm source e Identification of the fault source Fault identification e Detection of faults e Alarm display on the user interface e Alarm logs Fault clearance e Recovery mechanisms e Interactions between operator and NAM e Initiation of maintenance actions Cel Cal Cal Figure 1 8 General fault handling 1 4 3 1 1 Fault identification Background The NAM gathers information about faults occurring in the network and forwards this information to the network operator This procedure is comprised of two tasks the fault must be identified and the fault information must be processed as alarm notifications in order to be displayed on the user interface Detection of faults If an NE fault is detected the NE notifies the NAM The notification is comprised of the type of fault and the address of the originating NE The NAM detects and processes such a notification automatically NAM R1 9 1 26 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Working with NAM lf the circuit responsible for the communication between an NE and the NAM fails the fault is identified differently No alarm notification will be sent to the NAM The NAM detects t
517. page 7 34 open the Physical DS1 List window click on Physical DS1 List The Physical DS1 List window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 2 page 7 16 open the Logical DSO List window click on Logical DSO List The Logical DSO List window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 1 page 7 30 close the window Click on Close NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 13 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ME SS 7 2 1 7 VB INA window This window provides access to the lists of physical DS1s and logical DSOs as well as allows addition of logical DS1s and logical DSOs to the selected VB INA Figure 7 7 VB INA window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons NE Name VRT VB id Operational State Command But tons 7 14 Issue1 02 2001 Description NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters This option menu lists all VRT VB ids of the selected type The Operational State shows the VRT VB service state ob tained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Get button retrieves the VRT VB service state Three buttons provide access to other windows Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to different windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DSO window Physical DS1 List This button provides access to the Physical DS1 List window Logical DSO List This button p
518. paths which carry the ATM information need to be pro visioned A 6 2 6 Connection diagram Configuration of the ATM PVC in the ATM ye switch i e VPIVCI a ATM DS3 ATM card SENET E switching Switch or other interface y A C DE 10BaseT DS3 re 100BaseT A ATM router optional a Le Transport network optional Ethernet 10BaseT e g two SDH ADMs in a 100BaseT card point to point configuration IP over ATM 10BaseT PVC service 100BaseT TCP IP al DS3 Configuration of the ATM PVC in the AFM ff Configuration of IP addresses in AFM and COMDAC N client DCN1 NE2 ee 10BaseT ports from AFM and COMDAC LAN ports joined by means of LAN crossover cable Figure A 6 Communication with remote NEs using in band ATM PVC NAM R1 9 A 12 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Configuration parameters Contents B 1 Overview B 1_ B 1 1 NAM server configuration variables B 1 B 7 B 1 2 NAM client GUI configuration variables NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 B I A SSS Contents NAM R1 9 B II Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Configuration parameters B 1 Overview This chapter provides information about all the configuration parameters that are used with Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 as follows m an alphabetical list of all configuration parameters that
519. pdated Add the following parame ter to the execParamsList attribute of each MT module type with name SBI lt amu_name gt where lt amu_name gt is NBR17 BBR112 BBR17 or BBR14 depending on the AMU release described by the MT Dcloudscape system home opt lucent LUMOS db 1f_ lt amu_name gt 2 3 1 11 Run Navis AnyMedia R1 9 Reboot the machine now This will update the new values for the environment var lables configured in the AnyMedia sh script If the option to launch the NAM after reboot was not chosen during installation the system must be started manually from the command line 1 Type SANYMEDIAPATH SystemAdministrator bin SystemAdmin When all server applications are up and running start NAM clients refer to Chapter 3 2 1 for a detailed description on the clients start up proce dure A splash screen is displayed and then the NAM access bar is shown 2 3 1 12 Delete all temporary files Delete all temporary files and directories created in previous steps NAM R1 9 2 78 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Set the system administrator data E SS 2 4 Set the system administrator data To be able to start up the server processes it is necessary to execute the two scripts CustomizeSADB and SADbPopulate in ANYMEDIAPATH SystemAd ministrator bin Before you begin The CustomizeSADB script will ask some information from you Make sure that you have answers to the questions in t
520. pened EM is displayed if the log messages is related to the NAM Object Id Unique identification of the object for which the log mes sage has been sent Parameters m For Actions and System Internal Events Shows all parameters involved in the action m For Autonomous Reports Shows all TL1 message parameters in the order they were received for TL1 messages sent from NE and the TCAs information from the data agent by SNMP trap For Alarms Shows the rest of the alarm parameters except de scription Port Id Indicates the Port Id where the performance data has been recollected BB Probable Cause A unique identification string for each alarm type shows the probable cause of the alarm RevCells High Indicates the number of cells received BB formatted into RcevCells Low two 32 bits integers high and low part of the counter RevErroredCells Indicates the number of wrong cells received BB format High RevErrored ted into two 32 bits integers high and low part of the Cells Low counter NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 49 System management Log management ee Table 3 35 Information displayed in the Log Viewer table Column Meaning RFI Indicates the Remote Failure Indication data BB Severity Severity of an alarm on the object for which the log mes sage has been sent Shelf Id Indicates the Shelf Id where the data agent is placed BB Slot Id Indicates the Slot Id where the performance data
521. played log select File gt Print gt Print Table or The Log Viewer table or a screenshot of File gt Print gt Print Window the window is printed out display updated log select View gt Reload Log Data Newly logged entries are displayed display updated select View gt Reload NE List The NEs Selection list is updated NEs Selection list NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 51 System management Log management ee Table 3 38 Actions in the Log Viewer window If you want to then Result sort the log click on one of the column headers to The Log Viewer table is displayed sorted sort the log according to the column en alphabetically or by date and time tries alphabetically or by date and time Click again to reverse the sort order close one Log select File gt Close or press Close The selected Log Viewer window is Viewer window closed close all Log Viewer select File gt Exit windows All Log Viewer windows are closed NAM R1 9 3 52 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Disaster recovery 3 8 Disaster recovery The NAM software has built in auto recovery features that will allow it to continue working after a problem except in the most critical situations i e corrupted files hardware failure In case of a disaster the following steps should be performed by the system administrator to repair the NAM and minimize the data loss 1 Repair replace any hardware and OS
522. plications or only some of them JRE m the NAM includes as part of its environment the Java Runtime Environment JRE Release 1 1 7 JRE is included here free of charge for the final user 2 1 1 Introduction System require This document is intended as a guide for the people responsible for the installa ments tion and configuration of the hardware and software required for the NAM installa tion The AnyMedia distribution can be divided into two parts server side installation and client side installation Both include specific third party applications needed to run the AnyMedia successfully The server side application includes obligatory modules and optional ones which will be installed depending upon the customer needs Disk space To store the NAM files your system must have the following amount of free disk space mw NAM client 60MB m NAM server The space will depend upon the number of NEs managed by the system because of the data size The recommended size for n NEs is obtained from adding the following numbers in kbyte software 1000 aprox logs 35000 per NE databases 0 8 n transactions 2 0 8 0 35 n 4 n 25 The size calculated is based on maximum configurations and includes the overhead necessary for the temporary data used in operation Transaction log file It is recommended to create a separate partition to locate the transaction log file needed by ObjectStore This partition would be used for this purpose
523. ponses C 22 NAM R1 9 C IE Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface C 1 Overview This appendix provides you with information about the m Northbound interface basics and m Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 2 Northbound interface basics C 2 1 Northbound interface description General The Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 offers to any external OS a straight TL1 connection with the set of NEs in the OS s network Using this link any external OS with access rights to open a northbound interface session can configure test or monitor a set of NEs using a TL1 interface and can receive the responses to the TL1 commands and the autonomous outputs which are gener ated by the NE depending on the northbound interface application type selected Two types of north The NAM provides two different types of northbound interface applications bound interfaces m general northbound interface all types of autonomous messages received from the NE are send to the OS None NE autonomous messages will be inhibited m alarm only northbound interface only alarm and environment alarm autonomous message received from the NE are sent to the OS the NAM will inhibit the rest of NE autonomous messages database changes evenis etc NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 1 Northbound interface Configure terminal for session Restrictions with multiple sessions Avoid interference with other EM
524. porting data on equipage and system status including providing users with access to the entire equipment information whether locally maintained or not AFM memory administration which means the management of the non volatile data storage NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System including AFM for Backup and Restore AFM software administration which involves tasks to manage the non volatile program storage NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System including AFM for software download software validation and activation etc Subshelves management for subshelf creation subshelf edition with cross connection and subshelf deletion m Profile management for creating deleting or applying threshold and transmission profiles Edit profile variables using a previously defined tem plate 5 2 7 Configuration of combined tasks The integrated management of both agents telephony and data requires not only the equipment configuration features described previously for each agent but also a unique view of some areas for example subshelf management pack provision ing etc NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 17 NE management Initial windows a SS 5 3 Initial windows This major application provides the user with the facilities needed to fully config ure AnyMedia network elements both equipment and services Groups and NEs Management Group Map Root Group Network Browser E Figure 5 7 Groups and NEs Managemen
525. press Return AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkkxk WARNING REMOVE MODE In this mode you are going to remove packages kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Would you like to continue y n q 2 Type y and press Return to continue AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the remove mode 1 ADM lt Administration package removal gt 2 NB BB lt Narrow Broad Band package removal gt 3 GUI lt Client package removal gt Enter selection 7 7 q NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 69 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure 3 Enter 1 and press Return gt NOTE The following procedure describes the removal of the ADM packages Re moval of the NB BB and GUI packages can be done in the same way The package lt LuSysAdm gt is going to be removed from the system The package lt LUAM gt is going to be removed from the system The package lt LuBack gt is going to be removed from the system lt list of packages installed on the system gt Packages to remove lLuSysAdm LuAM LuBack LuFiBrow LUNER LuNBI LuLogg LuPerf LuPerCo LuNeED LuSec LuShelf LuSysED LuTrap LuPerTr LuTeSc LuNPB LuSID The following package is currently installed LuSysAdm AnyMedia Element Manager System
526. process information for this module processes of a MG and press Processes in Module is displayed under Processes in Mod module ule These processes can now be ed ited add a process tothe press Add The list of processes must If the maximum number of processes module not be empty which are allowed to run is reached the status bar displays a message that no more processes can be added other wise a process is added to the module remove a process select the process which shall be re If the minimum number of processes from the module moved and press Remove Confirm the which have to run is reached the status removal in the warning window which bar displays a message that no more opens processes can be removed otherwise the process is removed from the NAM killa process from select the process which shall be killed The physical process is killed the module and press Kill Confirm the killing in the warning window which opens recover a process of select the process which shall be recov The process is recovered the module ered and press Recover 3 4 7 Contents of packages and distributed module groups The following tables show which distributed module groups are contained in a cer tain package also which module groups are in a certain distributed module group and finally which modules are contained in a certain module group Table 3 21 Module group types in a certain package Package Module group typ
527. program data It resides in the NE lt COMDAC gt Default value CM nefiles NVPS gt NOTE The path is relative to the AnyMedia in Sstallation path CM FTPtimeOut Time out in seconds for all FTP commands The FTP command is aborted if there is no progress of file transfer during the interval Possible values 90 to 900 seconds Default value 300 CM maxTriesCounter Maximum number of SNMP PDUs retransmis sions when time out Possible values O to upper limit not defined Default value 3 Gen directory Temp Temporary directory of the NAM application Default value tmp Gen orbixTracesInEm Orbix daemon trace level Possible values 0 to 2 Default value 0 Gen timeout Time out in milliseconds for CORBA calls Possible values 0 to Default value 480 000 ms FB Root NVDS_BB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVDS_ BB NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 B 3 Configuration parameters Overview BE S Name Description FB Root NVDS_NB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVDS_ NB FB Root NVPS_BB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVPS_ BB FB Root NVPS_NB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVPS_NB FB Root ALARM_FILTERS Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value ALARM_FILTERS NEM association timeSync Indicates if the time and
528. propri ate value types etc an error message indicates the nature of the error The checking of wrong data is performed when the Apply or Ok button is clicked m Failed window opening Failed window refresh For windows without status bar the error message will be shown by means of a warning window This window will be automatically closed after a time default 10 seconds which is configurable lf the error cannot be identified a general error message recorded in a catalog will be presented e g Last Operation or Data request could not execute 5 3 7 Cursor menu Menu at the cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop position up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a menu bar or a window frame The cursor menu is not available in all dialogue boxes The functions which can be executed using this Cursor menu depend on the application of the respective dialogue box Select menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu option Step Procedure 1 Press and hold down the right mouse buiton 2 Drag the cursor onto the desired menu option 9 Release the right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and release the right mouse button NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 23 NE management Initial windo
529. pter 8 4 Apply This button is used to confirm edit or add logical DSO NAM R1 9 7 36 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony o BE SS Table 7 1 GSFN and related CLEIs GSFN CLEI Described in DFLT E5ISFAOAAA ES5ISFBOAAA Chapter 7 2 4 8 page 7 41 SLCUVROBAA SAC1ACOAAA EMOINERTTO oo FXSO NE R1 7 0 2LS E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA Chapter 7 2 4 10 page 7 43 SLCUVROBAA Chapter 7 2 4 9 page 7 42 SAC 1ACOAAA SAC1ACOAAA 2RVO Chapter 7 2 4 11 page 7 45 2NOS Chapter 7 2 4 12 page 7 46 BRI Chapter 7 2 4 13 page 7 47 TO SAC1AHOAAA Chapter 7 2 4 14 page 7 48 SAC1AEHAAB SLCUVNOBAA 2RVT Chapter 7 2 4 15 page 7 49 DX4 N R Chapter 7 2 4 16 page 7 50 PXOPIN23 5 XS TIN 235 EM4 C H SAC1BGOAAB Chapter 7 2 4 17 page 7 52 PLR 1 2 SAC1BGOAAB ETO4 5SC3HJEAAA Chapter 7 2 4 18 page 7 53 FXO SAC1AHOAAA Chapter 7 2 4 19 page 7 54 SLCUVNOBAA OCU 1 2 3 Chapter 7 2 4 20 page 7 56 SW56 Chapter 7 2 4 21 page 7 57 TD O SI A B C D Chapter 7 2 4 22 page 7 58 TO4 Chapter 7 2 4 23 page 7 59 FXOD NE Chapter 7 2 4 24 page 7 60 R1 7 0 DPT SCA1AHOAAA Chapter 7 2 4 25 page 7 61 SACPDCOBAA SLCUVNOBAA NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 37 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee 7 2 4 4 Add a logical DSO Launch the Logical The Logical DSO window can be reached from VRT VB windows DSO window cf Chapter 7 2 1 3 p
530. py COMDAC NVDS Backup AFM NVDS Backup COMDAC NVDS Restore Main set AFM NVDS Restore Cut Through NE Management M Synchronization Timing Source Control Date amp Time NE Inventory External Equipment Shelf Protection COMDAC In Progress ry Nindows with Object f several tabs Browser Window IO DS1 a BoE BEB BB u ee Set of windows Figure 5 19 Screen navigation for NE management NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 49 NE management Network Element management ee 5 6 2 NAM NE synchronization telephony agent 5 6 2 1 Configuration information synchroni zation Overview The possibility exists for the NAM database to become inconsistent with the infor mation stored locally in the telephony agent non volatile data storage NVDS A database re synchronization capability provides a mechanism for the NAM data base to be made consistent synchronized with the locally stored NE information Two NE configuration data synchronization states can be identified mw SYNC The NAM database is consistent with the locally stored telephony agent information and all the autonomous messages concerning configura tion changes are enabled database changes LED status reports switch reports and some events of type protection switches lockout and loop back m ASYNC The NAM database
531. r m One remote operation channel is used for communicating with each NE 64 kbit s ROC carried on a SPLL For managing up to 24 NEs connected to the LDS a single T1 interface for the router bridge is sufficient A 6 1 1 Router configuration Configuration The minimal requirements for the router bridge for supporting this scenario are m Minimal WAN Interface Requirements The router bridge must have one or more channelized 1 544 Mbit s T1 in terfaces ITU G 703 G 704 An IP address may be assigned to each time slot or channel group m 8 Minimal LAN Interface Requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purposes Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BaseT ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing is supported For the router bridge the following has to be provisioned m 11 interface functionality line code framing type etc Time slot mapping each needed serial interface will be a channel group mapped on a time slot of the channelized T1 m Protocols and encapsulations m P addresses for IP routing routing tables m Ethernet media The initial provisioning of a router bridge is typically performed by a VT 100 ANSI terminal connected to a RS 232C port When the IP address of the router is pro visioned the router may be configured via LAN TELNET SNMP depending on the router bridge used NAM R1 9 A 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configura
532. r groups 1 30 1 5 Network configuration 1 32 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 II rr Contents 1 5 1 NAM server without clients and external OS LAN 1 32 1 5 2 NAM server with clients and without external OS LAN 1 33 1 5 3 NAM server without clients and with external OS WAN 1 34 1 5 4 NAM Server with Clients and external OS WAN 1 35 E SSS 2 Software installation and commissioning 2 1 2 1 General 2 1 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 2 2 Installation procedure 2 7 2 2 1 Full installation 2 7 2 2 2 Installing individual packages 2 66 2 2 3 Cancel installation 2 68 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package installations 209 2 2 5 PC GUI client installation 2 71 2 3 Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 2 13 2 3 1 Upgrade procedure 2 4 2 4 Set the system administrator data 2 79 E SSS 3 System management 3 1 3 1 Overview 3 1 3 2 System access 3 2 3 2 1 Login to operation system 3 2 3 2 2 Logout from operation system 3 3 3 2 3 NAM Access Bar 3 4 3 2 4 Capacity 3 9 3 3 General information on keyboard and windows 3 0 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 9 3 3 2 Mouse To 3 3 3 Different aspects of the cursor 3 6 3 3 4 Basics on windows 3 6 Sieis Window menu 39 3 3 6 Menu bar 3 10 NAM R1 9 IV Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Contents 93 7 Cursor menu 310 3 3 8 Workspace manager 3 11 3 3 9 Workspace menu 3 11 3 3 10 Controls in NAM windows 3 12 3 4 System administration 3 16 3 4 1 General 3 16 3 4 2 Start up shutdown of server applications
533. racter alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble value DTP101 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp The check box Slot Required displays the required state of Protection the shelf slot This state can be changed in the case of CTU regardless of the slot status Default state for CTU Not Required empty check box 2 Use the check box Slot Required to define the slot state 3 Click on Close to exit the window 6 3 4 Common Application Pack window Background AP provisioning will be performed to establish a desired pack type in a desired slot xx To be fully functional operational an AP must both be inserted and provi sioned In addition the provisioned AP must match the actual type of the inserted pack An AP can be provisioned and configured by the NAM even if the slot is still empty Mixed configura In a mixed configuration telephony data the AP provisioning is performed in a tion separate way telephony provisioning an
534. rameter setting modification of the different subscriber services The NAM service activation enables and disables the service 2 Mbps network services TR 303 TR 08 INA Telephony subscriber services analog telephone POTS ISDN Data service The data service management provides the following functions management func Configuration of ATM layer functions tions shelf virtual path identifier Shelf VPI OAM amp P virtual path virtual channel i e configuration of ATM em bedded management channel m Management of ATM virtual path services creating and deleting virtual path services i e by means of creating and deleting virtual path links and virtual path cross connections changing the administrative state of a virtual path cross connection obtaining the operational state of a virtual path cross connection assigning one AIM traffic profile at virtual path creation time m Management of ATM virtual channel services creating and deleting virtual channel services i e by means of cre ating and deleting virtual channel links and virtual channel cross connections changing the administrative state of a virtual channel cross connec tion assigning one AIM traffic profile at virtual channel creation time Alarm The Alarm Management provides the following functionality features management Integrated display of all the alarms The NAM provides a
535. ration amp Profiling window Domains Table 4 Select the domain which shall be deleted in the Domain Name field and click Delete 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 4 13 User management User groups 4 4 User groups 4 4 1 Create user groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new user group Before creating a new user group please pay attention to the following remarks m By default the NAM provides three user groups Administrator Mainte nance and Monitoring m The administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and tasks m Before a user group can be created modified or deleted the NAM adminis trator must have a system login m Applications are divided into tasks A user can be assigned a whole appli cation or only a subset of its tasks Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as NAM administrator and start the NAM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administra tion amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt User Groups via menu bar The User Groups Table ap pears User Administration amp Profiling User Group Name Description Administrator Group Description Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Group Description group 7 d
536. ration processes The chapter is structured with respect to the various network life cycle phases see further be low User profiles There are 3 default user profiles the administrator maintenance and monitoring profile The rights belonging to these profiles are described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 30 Life cycle of a The individual life cycle of a telecommunication network has the following phases network planning installation provisioning operation amp surveillance modification and fi nally decommissioning Modification of a network may take the form of fine adjust ment expansion or restructuring of the network and addition of new functionality Figure 1 6 shows the life cycle of a network Modification Installation te Operation amp rovisioning surveillance Decommissioning Figure 1 6 Life cycle of a network Support by The NAM is mainly used in three life cycle phases during network provisioning NAM network modification and network operation amp surveillance The installation phase is supported by the graphical system interface for telephony services GSI NB NAM R1 9 1 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Working with NAM a 1 4 1 Network planning and physical installation Network planning In the network planning phase all specifications and requirements of the future network operation are translated into a concrete network structure That means the network planning phase d
537. rect CTAG ICNV Input Command Not Valid The command verb or a modifier is invalid not recogniz able by the system PICC Privilege Illegal Command Code Command not supported at this interface NAM R1 9 C 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 rrr Abbreviations A ACO Alarm Cut off ADSL Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line AEM AnyMedia Access System Element Manager AFM Access Feeder Multiplexer AID Access Identifier AMAS AnyMedia Access System ANR Abnormal ANSI American National Standards Institute AO Autonomous Output Message AP Application Pack APOG Applications Planning and Ordering Guide ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATU Alarm and Test Unit AUTO Automatic a B BAIU Broadband Access Interface Unit NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 AB 1 Abbreviations ST SSS BAL Balance BB Backus Naur Form BCL Bank Controller Link BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply BRA Basic Rate Access C CD Compact Disk CDE Common Desktop Environment CDV Cell Delay Variation CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CLR Cell Lost Radio CFL Customer Feature List CIT Craft Interface Terminal CIU Communication Interface Unit CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore CMIP Common Management Information Protoco CO Central Office COMDAC Common Dada and Control COT Central Office Terminal
538. red by the NE AMS Platform alarms are cleared automat ically e g NE NAM association alarms or by a user at the user interface e g log alarms Users can only clear specific platform alarms Users cannot clear the as sociation alarms for the NE alarms When an alarm is cleared its severity is up dated and the time is registered too Clearing an alarm causes a change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm is logged beforehand in the alarms log if the user clears an alarm this will be logged in the action log if an alarm is cleared by the NE it will be logged in the action log If the raise is newer then it is a repetitive raise the alarm state is set to the raised state If the raise is older then this message is ignored the alarm state stays in the cleared state and the relevant data is updated Automatic alarm If network and platform alarms are cleared at their source the NAM clears them clearance after a variable period of time in the NAM database This period of time is set by default to 3 days and can be configured by the user via the system variable AM minimumClearPeriod in the file SANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg 8 2 8 Alarm data synchronization The AMS is responsible for the performance of NE alarm synchronization To ac complish this the AMS requests all the current alarms normal and environment of the NE that is being synchronized Once the AMS has received these alarms it compares them with the alarms stored in
539. regenerator terminations are disabled NAM R1 9 5 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Overview of the controlled systems E SS 5 22 2 Pack provisioning The AnyMedia Access System has the ability to specify any system slot as an equipment required or non required slot The purpose of this is to give the craft personnel the ability to specify on an individual shelf slot basis that the NE reports an alarm if a pack is removed from that slot 5 2 2 3 Central office terminal mode AnyMedia R1 2 3 only Common shelf The central office terminal COT re uses the common FAST shelf assets shelf amp assets backplane IO_DS1 COMDAC and CTU packs in conjunction with APs imple menting current sink line terminations Additional APs Two narrowband APs are required current sink PROG32CS and ESPOTS16CS APs to provide analog service node interfaces in COT applications These packs are the COT counterparts to the POTS32 and PROG32 current feed packs used in the AnyMedia remote terminals RTs In addition an optional MDS2 or MDS2B shelf can be attached to the COT FAST shelf and equipped with SLC current sink CUs to provide additional service capabilities Alarm and test unit The COT FAST shelf is augmented with an alarm and test unit ATU required to interface between the FAST shelf and the central office alarm and loop testing network In universal COT applications the AnyMedia system acts as an interface between the switch ana
540. required Viewer application Filter syntax This filter consist of a combination of logical expressions over the so called field value tuples of the alarm database Each logical expression consists of an alarm field a relational operator gt lt and a value for the specified alarm field Pa renthesis can be used for grouping expressions Filter file If the administrator specifies a logical expression in the filter file the AMS will query the alarm database to return the list of alarms that match this logical ex pression For instance an administrator can request all critical alarms of an NE or all platform alarms or all alarms which are service affecting and are raised at the same time 8 3 4 4 1 Syntax rules The following rules have to be obeyed for building a filter expression m The filter file must contain a single line only m A space has to be used between field names possible values operators and brackets m The expression NULL has to be used to represent an empty string NAM R1 9 8 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring E SS Logical operators The following symbols for logical operators must be used Table 8 8 Logical operators Operation Symbol AND amp amp OR NOT Brackets must be used to group the expressions if more than one logical ex pression is needed Relational opera The following symbols for relational operators must be used
541. riteria s and click on Search The result is displayed in the Search Result list 3 Select one or more rows in the Search Result list and click on Remove A Warning window pops up Subscriber ID will be removed OK to proceed 4 Confirm the message and click on Close to exit the window 7 4 2 Manage the SID database General The SID is a label used by the call center to identify the subscribers mainly for failures or testing of the subscriber lines The managing of this label in the NAM provides the following advantages for the system administrator Incase of failure or disruption of the service the customer gives the SID to the call center Then it is easier to manage the issue if the SID is somehow linked with all subscriber facilities in the NAM because one does not have to fall back on the customer database to find the according subscriber Also the subscriber identifier would only be included to the fault report m It is also much easier on the time of portation to the AnyMedia Access Sys tem if all performance tests can be made from this SID In this case one can go forward with the help of the SID list without consulting the cus tomer s database NAM R1 9 7 82 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Subscriber Identifier ae The SID database is a part of the NAM databases that contains the SID NE Name Physical Drop Id and additional info per subscriber 7 4 2 1 Commands for managing the SID da
542. rm identifier Unique identifier within each type of alarm In order to ease possible communication between different users an index number is provided as a temporal alarm identification It is temporal because the index number will be used as a circular sequence the maximum sequence number is 100 000 It is provided only for user convenience It will not be used to identify an alarm within the AMS For this purpose the multiple key defined above has to be used NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 43 Fault management and maintenance Alarms BE SeS 8 5 3 Network element alarms Alarm descriptions Please refer to the network element documentation for detailed alarm descriptions of network element alarms 8 5 4 General element manager platform alarms This chapter provides alarm descriptions of general NAM platform alarms includ ing proposals for corrective maintenance actions Alphabetical order In the following the NAM platform alarms are listed alphabetically 8 5 4 1 AGENT_NP_SYNC_PROBLEM Meaning The network profile synchronization in the current agent has not finished success fully Abbreviation AGENT_NP_SYNC_PROBLEM Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The network element profiles are not completely synchronized Possible cause s NAM internal problem Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Resynchronize the configuration part of the agent 8 5 4 2 LOG_DEL_FULL
543. rmat OrbixWeb IT_NS_HOSTNAME Name0OfYourServerMachine OrbixWeb IT_NS_IP_ADDR IP address of your ServerMachine OrbixWeb IT LOCAL _HOSTNAME SIP address of this PC If name of the PC where installation is taking part is not known by the server then update OrbixWeb IT_ IORS USE _DNS false NAM users file In the NAM users file include the logging and password of the users that will used the PC client The NAM users contains the mappings of logging to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The name of the user should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding encrypted password ob NAM R1 9 2 72 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 tained by ypcat command on server side The user name and password should end with a colon For example syi_snni aZv4IkMOIVyD6 After installation indicate where the PC GUI had been installed in the file Enviroment_Varialbes bat in CURRENT_DIR entrance If java is installed in different directory that the recommended one indicate the path on the bat file Enviroment_Variables bat in the variable JDK_PATH 2 2 5 1 Customizing SystemPreferences ini Please modify the SystemPreferences ini as follows m update the variable IS_NAR_MARKET to true value The SystemPreferences ini variables are described in Appendix B 2 3 Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 General This sectio
544. rocedure Complete the following procedure to install the NAM application gt NOTE Lines with indentation are the system responses They are included here to guide the installation procedure 2 2 1 1 Server side installation The installation of the AnyMedia server side is divided into the following parts m Installation of the third party software m Installation of the common packages m Installation of the optional packages currently there are 4 optional pack ages 2 2 1 1 1 Installation of the third party software Complete the following procedure to install the third party software Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed on CD ROM 1 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM gen and press Return AnyMedia NB EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 9 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y 2000 patches indicated in SRD pdf document 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to successfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so NAM R1 9 2 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211
545. rocessing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 9 for NE release 112 as lt LuAMBB112 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 Object Store path set to LuOSRT ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 3 5 1 SP2 Run Time bin 1ib osversion Creating data bases NAM R1 9 2 50 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SS You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAMBB112 log Installation of lt LuAMBB112 gt was successful NE Data support Processing package instance lt LuAMBB17 gt from for R1 7 installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 9 sparc LuAMBB17_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 AnyMedia EM R1 9 path opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuAM gt Alarms LuAM 59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNER gt NER LuNER_59 2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 Package lt LuNeED
546. rogram Copy amp Validation window The fields Version Now Running currently running NE software and Version Available for Activation standby software downloaded via FTP display the corresponding versions 2 Click on Get to retrieve the current version information 3 Click on Apply to initiate the validation of the new software the exchange of the software versions and the reboot to make the changes valid A Warning window pops up AFM Program Copy amp Validation is service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while its execution Continue anyway After confirmation an In Progress window pops up AFM Program Copy and Validation from active version to standby version on lt NE NAME gt in Progress NAM R1 9 5 88 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management E SS After finishing the process successfully the n Progress window disap pears 4 Press Close to exit the AFM Program Copy amp Validation window 5 6 14 Nonvolatile data storage NVDS Overview This section describes the backup and restore processes The backup procedure uploads the data from the NE s COMDAC or AFM to the NAM The restore func tion deals with the downloading of a previous backup NVDS from the NAM to the NE Both functions apply to both simplex and duplex NE configurations Backup restore data For database backup and restoration the NAM is able to create maintain a copy of provisioning data from the a
547. rom the rest of the EMS application m MDS2 B GUI The NAM is able to detect and display the MDS2 shelf NE R1 2 and the MDS2 b shelf NE R1 5 1 3 1 5 Northbound interface Tasks The northbound interface NBI performs all the tasks needed to communicate to other OSs It allows external OSs access to the NEs managed by the NAM di rectly This access is controlled by the NBI until the OS is disconnected Two kinds of NBIs are available m The CORBA NBI is for telephony and data It allows an external OS access to the NEs managed by the NAM directly using the IDLs that NAM pub lishes or via a mediation device Full access to the full functionality of the NAM is supported The TL1 NBI is a adapted NBI version for telephony only 1 3 1 6 Southbound interface Tasks The southbound interface performs all the tasks needed to communicate to the NEs managed by the NAM It provides distributed CORBA access which includes implementation and translation of TL1 commands response and autonomous messages into equivalent CORBA requests and events TL1 southbound The TL1 southbound adaptors isolate the main NAM functionality from the specific pro adaptors tocol used by the NEs They are responsible for translating actions and state changes conveyed through CORBA messages from into the NE specific message formats Functionality The southbound interface provides the following functionality features re m Southbound TCP IP TL1 client application
548. ross Connection Information to select the corresponding values for AP Server NONE Server Port NONE and Feeder Port and click on Remove Cross Connec tion in the Cross Connection Infor mation field A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Cross connection will be re moved Ok to proceed add a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with no cross connection and press Add Logical DSO The Logi cal DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 edit a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with an existing cross con nection and press Edit Logical DSO The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 The same result will be obtained by double clicking in the corresponding row NAM R1 9 6 46 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs If you want to then remove a logical DSO select the desired Logical DSO id in the Physical DSO Information list and press Remove Logical DSO A Warn ing window pops up displaying the fol lowing message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show
549. router s multicast address so that the NE points to the router on the other side of the ROC interface Example of TL1 The following TL1 commands are an example of ROC over SPLL configuration commands for TR 303 in the NE ent t0 v3dp 1 49 gsfn 4do ent crs t0 v3dp 1 49 roc 1 ent crs t1 ds1 1 1 1 v3fdr 1 3 set ip shelf 135 5 78 2 defrouter 224 0 0 2 submask 255 255 255 0 The nail up of the DSO channel must also be provisioned in the LDS Then the ROC over SPLL is provisioned Once communications with the element manager is established via the ROC over SPLL remote operations on the NE can be exe cuted as over a connection via LAN Also either the GSI or a standard windows FTP TELNET can be used A 6 1 3 Navis AnyMedia server configuration Server IP Parame The server on which the NAM application resides must have its IP parameters ters configured m IP address e g 135 88 20 234 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 A 7 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations o BE S m default router e g 135 88 17 1 Configuration In the NAM the following parameters have to be configured to be able to communi cate with the NEs m TCP IP configuration related to NEs For every NE the NAM wants to communicate with its IP address e g 135 88 4 2 must be introduced in the NAM provisionable with the NAM GUI via cut through As
550. rovides access to the Log ical DSO List window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a 7 2 1 8 Modify the VB INA The VB INA window can be reached only from the VAT VB List window via Edit VRT VB button Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the VB INA Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu VRT VB id to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to then get the current service states of the click on Get in the Operational State VRT VB field add a logical DS1 use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DS1 and click on Add The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 add a logical DSO use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DSO and click on Add The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 open the Physical DS1 List window click on Physical DS1 List The Physical DS1 List window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 2 page 7 16 open the Logical DSO List window click on Logical DSO List The Logical DSO List window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 1 page 7 30 close the window Click on Close NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 15 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony lt lt 1 2 2 Physical DS1 List window This window displays physical DS1 id list based on a selection criteria It provides access to the Physical DS1
551. rporation Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Windows 95 and Windows 98 are copyrights of Microsoft Corporation Quality Management System The Quality Management System QMS for Lucent Technologies Product Realization Center PRC Access has been registered to ISO 9001 under the Norwegian Scheme by Det Norske Veritas DNV since June 1993 ISO 9001 is an international quality standard recognized by more than 90 countries worldwide It is a model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing Telefax to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH How Are We Doing Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation Please use a copy of this page for your comments Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas feof o an f 7 f T C PP C E A Ce a a a Ce rr rr rr E a T a a a es mas ____ ______ ____ ___ Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document Make it more brief concise Add more step by step procedures tutorials Add more troubleshooting information Make it less technical Add more better quick reference aids Improve the index Improve the overview introduction Improve the tables of contents Improve the organization structure Include more figures Add more examples Add more detai
552. rt of these IP packets those with IP address of AFM which carry BB management information are terminated in AFM Part of these IP packets those with IP address of COMDAC which carry telephony management information are forwarded to AFM LAN port which is joined to COMDAC LAN port located on the SCP of the AnyMedia Main shelf these IP packets will be terminated in the COMDAC A 6 2 1 Configuration of the router The router at central office need to be configured The minimal requirements for the router for supporting this scenario are m 8 Minimal WAN interface requirements The router must have one or more ATM DS8s interfaces with the ATM net work or any other physical interface e g STM 1 DS1 depending on the edge ATM switch to interface with It is in charge of mediating from 10BaseT MAC amp LLC1 IP to DS3 ATM AAL5 802 2 LLC 802 2 SNAP IP The logical WAN interface should be compatible with that of the connected ATM switch e g Support of UNI 3 1 ATM cell switching This router must support RFC 1483 multiprotocol over ATM encapsulation since AFM sup ports it m Minimal LAN interface requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purpose Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BaseT 100BaselT ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing should be supported The configuration tasks to be performed on router are m Configure ATM DS3 interface Configure LAN interface m Configure ATM PVCs inside the ATM D
553. rvice affecting OCRDAT Occurrence date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes This indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respectively 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively OCRTM Occurrence time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes This indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format hours minutes seconds NAM R1 9 C 14 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages CONDDESCR Condition description Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 68 This is the text description for the reported alarm condition This information can be found in the Correlations Tables The 68 characters included a pair of escaped quotes C 3 2 6 Generic error responses Code Definition Reason for code CLOS NE Connection Not Available Connection with the lt NE TID gt is not available IITA Input Invalid Target Identifier TID does not match with SID has not allowed characters or string is too long Io Input Invalid Correlation Tag Incorrect CTAG ICNV Input Command Not Valid The command verb or a modifier is invalid not recogniz able by the system PICC Privilege Illegal Command Code Command not supported at this interface a only available via NAM NAM R1 9 363 2
554. rvices The Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 will provide the standard man agement configuration equipment configuration fault and testing performance and security functions capabilities to do service management monitoring gener ate reports and printouts do backup and restore functions for example to improve the customer s day to day business The NAM communicates with the telephony agents by using TL1 commands and file transfer protocol FTP over TCP IP The NAM communicates with the data agents by using simple network management protocol SNMP over UDP IP and FTP over TCP IP The NAM is also prepared to communicate with other legacy OSs by means of TL1 northbound interfaces and via CORBA interface TL1 is used for request response and autonomous reports commands and FTP is used for software and database upload download operations The DCN is the communications infrastructure routers WAN links etc needed for communication of the NAM with the NEs it manages This manual refers to NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 A 1 Data communications network DCN configuration Terms used in this chapter NAM release 1 9 and the supported NE releases For these releases many DCN configurations and protocol profiles can be used according to the network opera tors needs and scenarios Two sample DCN scenarios are given at the end of this chapter A 3 Terms used in this chapter Data communica tions network Semi permanent leased
555. ry Processing package instance lt LuNER gt from installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt AnyMedia Network Register Element Manager Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuUNER_ 59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 9 OK No previous package LuNER has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia Network Register Element Manager Release 1 7 1 Administration as lt LuNER gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time has been found in opt lucent 0OS51_SP2 ObjectStore path set to opt lucent 0S51_SP2 ostore NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 27 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c0O2MT Run Time has been found in opt lucent OrbixMT 2 3c2 Creating data bases Starting CreateNER_db process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting NER data base path Creating NER data base OK exit OK 24815 Killed orbixd daemon pid 24815
556. ry corrupt DBMEMTRF Data memory update abort DIGRPF TR 08 major shelf alarm received EXT External IMPROPRMVL Improper removal INT Internal hardware failure INTRMVL Internal Fault or Pack Missing LOF Loss of frame LOS Loss of signal NE ASSOC_FAILED Assoc with NE failed POLL Not responding to poll PRCDERR Procedural error PWR Power fault NAM R1 9 C 6 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages a Abbreviation Meaning RINGF Ringing source input failed SFTCRRPT Software program corrupt SFTERR Software version mismatch SWFTDWNF Software download failed SYNC Synchronization input failed SYNCOOS System free running T BERL BER exceeds threshold TSTRELAY Stuck test access relay UNLATCH Pack unlatched YEL Yellow Alarm a only available via NAM SRV EFF Service effect This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes SRVEFF indicates the effect of the reported alarm on service Abbreviation Meaning NSA Non Service Affecting SA Service Affecting OCRDAT Occurrence date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes OCRDAT indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respec tively 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 C 7 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 mes
557. s including providing users with access to the entire equipment information whether locally maintained or not NE memory administration this means the management of the nonvola tile data storage NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System for backup and restore NE software administration this involves tasks to manage the nonvola tile program storage NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System for software download copying the NVPS between controller packs etc MDS2 MDS2B management which in this release involves m MDS2 MDS2B shelf slots alarming configuration Retrieve and maintain MDS2 MDS82B inventory information For more information please refer to the network element documentation 5 2 2 Network element R1 2 2 R1 2 3 and R1 7 0 telephony AnyMedia Access System R1 7 0 adds a set of new features which have to be supported by the NAM i e m New APs and CUs DS1 regeneration R1 2 2 only m Pack provisioning R1 2 1 and all subsequent releases m Subshelves management integrated access terminals IATs R1 7 0 and all subsequent The following sections provide some details on these features For more details please refer to the related network element documentation 5 22 1 DS1 regeneration AnyMedia R1 2 2 only This feature controls the DSX 1 regeneration feature for an O_DS1 pack When this feature is activated the designated pack provides two regenerator termina tions When it is deactivated both
558. s signment de assignment is done on a per call basis under control of the LDS Semi permanent time slot assignment a time slot assignment made via the embedded operation channel EOC for providing a dedicated voice data path This time slot assignment de assignment is done on a per service order basis The LDS will manage the semi permanent cross connections in the TR 303 VRT TR 08 VRT A TR 08 VRT supports up to 96 physical lines The logical lines are identified by logical line numbers LLNs which are integer values ranging from 1 to 96 A physical distribution port may be assigned to any LLN within any TR 08 VRT There is a fixed mapping between TR 08 LLN number and the TR 08 feeder DSO used for the circuit This allows the FAST to make the cross connection between the TR 08 physical port and the feeder DSO without explicitly provisioning the feeder DSO to be used INA VB An INA VB supports a maximum of 24 physical lines The logical lines are num bered from 1 to 24 A physical distribution port may be assigned to any logical line within any INA VB There is a fixed mapping between the INA LLN number and the INA feeder DSO used for the circuit This allows the AnyMedia Access System to make the cross connection between the INA physical port and the feeder DSO without explicitly provisioning the feeder DSO to be used The access identifier AID of an INA log ical line and its INA feeder DSO are the same For more information refer to
559. s Continue with step 4 No Bring the DCN into service 4 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 8 5 5 15 TLI_COMM_DENIED Meaning User login for a TL1 communication session was denied by the telephony agent for all TCP IP connections opened Abbreviation TL1_COMM_DENIED Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when a TL1 communication session between the NAM and the telephony agent has been successfully opened Effects lt is not possible to manage the telephony agent because there is no TL1 commu nication session available NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 55 Fault management and maintenance Alarms ee Possible cause s A user login error is stopping the TL1 communication session establishment pro cess between the NAM and the telephony agent Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct user identification user login password and telephony agent target identifier TID 2 Check with the GSI that the four VCs in the telephony agent are not busy RTRV STATUS TL1 command 8 5 5 16 UNABLE_TO_SYNC_ALARM Meaning The Alarm Synchronization process has failed n times Abbreviation UNABLE_TO_SYNC_ALARM Severity Major Service affecting No Effects An updated view of the alarm data of the data agent cannot be uploaded Possible cause s The communication with the data agent may be int
560. s in alphabetical order in columns the Log Viewer table Table 3 35 Information displayed in the Log Viewer table Column Meaning Conditions The condition of a performed action to indicate whether it is the request or the response E g START END SUCCESS END ERROR CANCEL Date amp Time Date and time when the event was registered in the log file Format yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Date amp Time Last Indicates the last severity change ES PSES Indicates the Errored Second data for a E3 or DS3 feeder BB ES Up ES Down Indicates the Errored Second data BB NAM R1 9 3 48 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Log management E SS Table 3 35 Information displayed in the Log Viewer table Column Meaning Event Type The event which happened in the NAM Feeder Type Indicates the feeder type DS3 HBER Up Indicates the High Bit Error Rate data BB HBER Down Index A sequence number for each different alarm reported to the NAM Interval Interval which is used in the performance data This value can be 15 minutes or one day BB IP Address Indicates the IP Address of the data agent BB LOF Indicates the Loss of Frame data BB Login The user name of the user performing an action or EM LOS Up LOS Indicates the Loss of Signal data BB Down Method A string explaining the performed action NE Name Indicates in Autonomous Report Performance Logs and Alarms the NE in which the event has hap
561. s NE Profile window 9 39 9 7 2 SDSL PM Thresholds NE Profile window 9 40 9 7 3 ADSL Transmission NE Profile window 9 41 9 7 4 SDSL Transmission NE Profile window 9 43 NAM R1 9 9 II Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring 9 1 Overview This chapter provides you with informations about m ADSL performance monitoring m SDSL performance monitoring m AFM feeder performance monitoring a AIM traffic monitoring a AIM traffic profiles Network profiles m NE profiles It describes the collection display logging and threshold reporting for perfor mance monitoring PM and traffic measurements counts 9 2 ADSL performance monitor ing data The NAM is able to retrieve the ADSL performance monitoring counts from the NE via FTP The interval data are retrieved and stored every 15 minutes the day data are retrieved and stored every 24 hours from each enabled NE The data are stored per day in a separate log file AdslLineStatisticsLog YYYYMMDD where YYYY year MM month and DD day located in ANYMEDIAPATH log The file contains also hints about start log ging stop logging and error messages NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 1 Performance monitoring ADSL performance monitoring data LL 9 2 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window This window is used to display all ADSL performance monitoring parameters This window also allows you to select data collection or clear counters of either the se l
562. s a network oriented manual and will be shipped to all sites where an NAM is available It provides the provisioning operator s with necessary informa tion to configure or re configure network elements after local installation The philosophy behind the provisioning of network elements within a network is that the network is already installed configured and service has been provided to the network after first installation and that re configuration of the NE is necessary Provisioning takes place from the NAM located in one or more central offices NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 XIII About this document Intended audience B SS 2 Intended audience The USM is intended for personnel who take care of deploying NEs by carrying out all provisioning activities of the NEs using the NAM Tasks to be performed by the Provisioning personnel are m collect information of provisioning data e g check shelf layout units list m put ports in service and out service m assign timeslots Cross Connections m download and upload the provisioning data to and from the NEs m testing of assigned ports m recognize interpret analyze or correct failures caused by provisioning data that is configured incorrectly The personnel should at least have the following education level m computer knowledge e g windows applications and or SUN applications m telecommunication network knowledge NAM R1 9 XIV Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 About thi
563. s and responses from operations Note that local copy may not be synchronized because not all the configuration changes provoke traps AFM memory administration Management of non volatile data storage NVDS of the AFM Provides a storage medium for maintaining a copy of the NVDS for backup and restore purposes m AFM software management Management of non volatile program storage NVPS of the AFM software download software validation amp activation etc m Subshelf management Subshelf creation Subshelf configuration and cross connection Subshelf deletion m ADSL SDSL profiles management The NAM allows to create delete or change of the performance monitoring and transmission profiles related to ADSL SDSL ports m Obtain operational state and other status attributes of different entities i e packs ports subshelves on user demand Service The Service Management provides the following functionality features management m NE Service status Provides the aliveness status of the individual NEs providing a customer s service across all NEs under the NAM s control NAM R1 9 1 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture E SS Network interfaces and subscriber service provisioning and activation The NAM supports all provisioning functions related to 2 Mbps network in terfaces and subscriber services Provisioning contains the creation dele tion and pa
564. s are FAC100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot Protection This state can be changed by the user as long as the pack is not inserted Default state for iods1 Not Required with the exception of iods1p whose default is Required The Apply button is available only if the IO DS1 is not in serted and the required state of the IO DS1 has been modi fied by the user The read only text field Protection State shows whether the selected IO DS1 is working or not Possible values Working providing service or Standby not in service The O DS1 Protection button provides access to the Shelf Protection window tab IO_DS1 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 11 Equipment configuration 6 12 Issue 1 Parameters Buttons Physical DS1 Information DS1 Regenera tion only for NE R1 2 2 02 2001 Configuration of the telephony packs Description The information in this field is displayed in a table 4 rows one per physical DS1
565. s document How to use this document 3 How to use this document 363 211 497 The guide is divided into a number of sections Subjects clearly separated by numbered tabs The front pages of the guide also describe this division and list the titles of the subjects together with the corresponding tab numbers Through this readers can quickly select the subject of their interests and needs How are we doing A comment form so readers can give feedback to improve the next revision of the document Table of contents list of figures list of tables Overview Defines the purpose of the document and the intended audience Also in cluded are topics about the conventions used in the document related doc umentation how to order documents and how to comment on this docu ment Chapter 1 Functional Description Contains a short overview over the system its features and capabilities Chapter 2 Software Installation Describes the standard procedure to install the NAM R1 9 server package server applications and client package client applications Also included is a description of the upgrade procedure from AEM R1 7 to NAM R1 9 Chapter 3 System Management Provides the system administrator with all information necessary to admin ister the NAM so that it can be used as a centralized management system Chapter 4 User Management Describes all actions necessary to create modify delete users user groups and domains and the handli
566. s due to hsfs imposing a suffix on the file names If the machine is not running the vold type mount F hsfs o ro notraildot dev dsk c0t6d0s2 cdrom The device identifier cOt6d0s2 is configuration dependent and as such will vary from machine to machine This will mount the CD on cdrom depending on your system configura tion cdrom might have to be replaced with a different mount point For more information about on how to mount a CD ROM drive refer to your SUN documentation 2 2 1 Full installation This type of installation uses the install_AMEM scriptin order to install all packages contained in the distribution For the following description it is assumed that m The hardware and software requirements to install the NAM are prepared m NAM software has not been installed previously Common actions described above have been made m Anew user shall be created on the target system who will be the owner of the NAM files The server workstation shall be a NIS server and the client workstations shall be NIS clients All the users shall be included in NIS and exported through the network in order to be recognized by the NAM soft ware For more information about the NIS tools refer to your SUN docu mentation NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 7 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure m A NIS group is also necessary Typically a new group shall be created to in clude all the NAM users P
567. s period the alarm has been raised all the time or it may have been raised cleared several times it is not relevant to distinguish both cases Correlated dupli Alarms coming from the same NE through telephony and data agents i e the cated alarms same alarm reported via both controller cards are correlated into a unique new alarm Although the result alarm is generated by the NAM it is handled as an NE alarm The perceived severity of the result alarm is the highest severity value of the re ceived source alarms The service affecting of the result alarm will be the highest value of the received source alarms where service affecting SA is the highest value and not service affecting NSA is the lowest 8 2 6 Manage alarm acknowledgment Alarms can only be acknowledged by a user at the user interface It is possible to acknowledge all alarms types If an alarm is acknowledged its state is updated ac cordingly and the user identification is registered Acknowledging an alarm causes a Change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm was logged before in the action log It is possible to acknowledge an alarm that has already been ac knowledged The user identification and the new acknowledge time are registered as well overwriting the previous acknowledge data NAM R1 9 8 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management E SS 8 2 7 Managing the clearing of alarms General The NE alarms are clea
568. s slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 NAM R1 9 7 48 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony TC E SS 7 2 4 15 2RVT Service Details window Overview The 2RVT 2 wire loop reverse battery CS is applicable to the SPQ442 LPA356 APs This GSFN is only available for NE R1 2 2 ZRYVT Service Details Information au Figure 7 23 Logical DSO window 2RVT Service Details Parameters Description Loss This option menu can be used to determine the bidirectional loss Possible values 0 dB 2 5 dB Default 0 DB Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 49 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee 7 2 4 16 DX4N DX4R FX O PII 1 2 3 5 FX S TI 1 2 3 5 Service Details windows Overview The DX4 N R 4 wire duplex signaling normal simplex and reverse simplex is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which provides one channel of service to be used in the MDS2 MDS2B The FX O P 1 2 3 5 4 wire foreign Xoffice no toll
569. s the profile Information name The entry can be changed in create and edit mode Status This option menu is used to define the status of the profile Activated Deactivated Activated means that the pro file can be used in cross connections Description This list box can be used to include a descrip tion of the network profile Network Profile Pattern This option menu is used to select a template for a new profile and to display its data in the field Network Profile Data see below None can also be se lected In this case all parameters in the field Network Pro file Data are set to default value Network Profile Data Line Type This option menu is used to select a sub type of the profile Full Lite Type of Rate Adaptation This option menu is used to se lect one of the following values Explicit default Flexible Options Rate The parameters in this field are enabled or disabled depending on the selected value in the Type of Rate Adaptation field The following two parameters are en abled only if the Type of Rate Adaptation is Flexible m Max Bit Rate kbps Two numeric fields upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the maximum bit rate Possible values for upstream 32 1440 Possible values for downstream 32 13120 m Min Bit Rate kbps Two numeric fields upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the minimum bit rate Possible values for upstream 32 14
570. sAdmDbPopulate process Getting SystemAdmin Database path OK Creating SystemAdmin Database OK Population successful 24476 Killed orbixd daemon pid 24476 has been killed Was mine 24482 Killed ns daemon pid 1196 has been killed Was mine NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 23 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxk Please execute AnyMediaEM sh to set the environment kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk You have the installation logfile in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_ R1 9 tmp EM_Install log Installation of lt LuSysAdm gt was successful Alarm Manage Processing package instance lt LuAM gt from ment installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9_ 24 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Alarms Release 1 9 Administration sparc LuAM_59 2 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 59_2 4 has been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 OK No previous package LuAM has been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 9 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Alarms Release 1 7 1 Administration as lt LuAM gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files l
571. sages ee OCRTM Occurrence time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes OCRITM indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format HH MM SS hours minutes seconds CONDDESCR Condition description Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 68 This is the text description for the reported alarm condition This information can be found in the Correlations Tables The 68 characters included a pair of escaped quotes AIDTYPE Access identifier type Type List Required Yes MODIFIER is the message modifier to the REPT ALM message Abbreviation Meaning T T EQPT Equipment NAM R1 9 C 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 3 2 1 Purpose The RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms command instructs the system to retrieve 1 all currently active alarms 2 currently active equipment alarms 3 currently ac tive facility alarms or 4 currently active system level alarms from the system C 3 2 2 Input format RTRV ALM AIDTYPE tid ctag TMPER Abortable Yes Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None C 3 2 3 Input format parameters tid Target ID This parameter appears in the TID Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic Target ID is the name of the system to which the comma
572. se the option menu PM Threshold Network Profile to select the desired profile and press Ediit The SDSL PM Threshold Network Profile window cf Chapter 9 6 4 or the SDSL PM Threshold NE Profile window cf Chapter 9 7 2 pops up Back in the SDSL Drop window after modifying the profile press Apply to confirm the changed profile use the option menu Administrative State gt NOTE When changing from Un locked to Locked the following warning message pops up Changing the administrative state of the SDSL drop may be service affecting Do you want to continue Issue 1 02 2001 6 79 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee If you want to then get access to the ATM Cross Connec click on Cross Connections List tion List window The ATM Cross Connection List win dow pops up cf Chapter 7 3 1 start the BIST test use the option menu near the Apply button to select BIST Test and press Apply See also Chapter 8 4 2 4 edit the SDSL PM data click on PM Data The SDSL PM Data window pops up cf Chapter 9 3 1 2 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 6 80 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs E SS 6 4 8 ONU Application Pack window The ONU Application Pack window contains all information related to the ONU server Only the AFM view is displayed The following table shows the view edit options of this window
573. sed on a selection criterion It provides access to the Logical DSO window to edit logical DSOs Logical DSO List Figure 7 13 Logical DSO List window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 7 30 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis ria played in the field Logical DSO List see below m All VRT The list displays all logical TOs currently present in the NE for all VRT VBs m TR 303 TR 08 INA In all these cases except TR 303 a non editable option list is available showing the pos sible options Selection of one of these VRT VB ids au tomatically sets the corresponding radio button If no VRT VB id is selected the radio button is not editable i e the user will not be able to set it Possible values vrt303 or ALL for TR 303 1 20 or ALL for TR 08 1 20 or ALL for INA Logical DSO The information in this field is displayed in a table ee Logical DSO id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id Possible values v3dp 1 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inads0 1 20 1 24 for INA m Physical DSO Id Displays the physical DSO id cross connected to the logical DSO id shown in the row Possible values
574. sed to add or modify logical DSO The parameters shown in this window are enabled or disabled depending on the action selected and where this action has been selected from This window allows cross connection of physical DSO0 logical DSO TO cross connections as well as service configuration and modification Figure 7 14 Logical DSO window tab General The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 7 34 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Description Logical DSO GSFN The generic signalling function identifies the signal General Infor ling and transmission function of the provisioned service mation This option menu provides access to the Service Details windows cf Chapter 7 2 4 7 page 7 40 to Chapter 7 2 4 25 page 7 61 gt NOTE GSFN type is NOT modifiable in R1 9 A change in the GSFN of a logical DSO implies deletion and new cre ation of a logical DSO Depending on the GSFN se lected the list of parameters needed for configuring a subscriber differs The GSFN parameters are dependent on the GSFN type and they are shown in each GSFN group table There are some services which do not have special details COIN ISDN only for TR 303 AC DATA EBS LR NO 1 2 OCUO NE R1 7 NO NE R1 7 COIN2 R1 2 3 DFLT2 R1 2 3 and
575. shelf or subshelf 1 16 for the AP slots 1 24 for the MDS2 slots 1 for the IAT slots m the third menu contains the port number inside the slot 1 32 for the AP ports 1 4 for the MSD2 ports 1 24 for the IAT ports After changing the drop shelf type first option menu the other two option menus are set None After changing the slot number Second option menu the port number third option menu is set to None CLEI In order to provide service the subscriber has to be assigned to the proper AP To ensure that the service re quested will work the user should enter the CLEI code of the AP that is supposed to provide that type of service cf Table 7 1 Red Line This check box is used to identify red lined sub scribers A warning message appears when red lined logical DSOs are to be edited More Details This button provides access to a specific Service Details window The button is enabled only if a GSFN has been selected Operational The Operational State shows the service state obtained State from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button The Get button is used to retrieve the service states Port Test This button can be used to start the port test The button is enabled only if a physical DSO has been selected For more information refer to Cha
576. shment of log in procedures and an associated set of passwords Screen locks are used as well User access is based upon domain partitioning Controls the access to the data and capabilities inherent within a fixed partition of the network including unbundling Server A network element that waits for requests from clients to perform specific tasks This is the function performed by the AnyMedia Access System Server Application This is a set of server processes that perform a certain function Server Host This is the machine where the system server modules are installed Server Module This is the module that provides a subset of the system services Service This is a piece of functionality provided by a server module Service State of an object or entity This represents the current availability status of an associated resource or service in the NE from the management point of view e g memory administration maintenance Side Switching This refers to the operation of deactivating the active core entity and activating the standby core entity COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs Software Download The transport of the information required to upgrade update a given NE s generic program SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is responsible for setting up this service NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 GL 9 Glossary
577. sioned NE click on Deprovision in the Provision ing Information field change the administrative state use the corresponding option menu in the Operational State field show edit the synchronization data click on More Details exit the window click on Close 5 5 3 Communication states NAM data agent There are three general NAM data agent communication states x Communication Stopped Initial communication state when there is no communication between NAM and the data agent xs Communication Trying The NAM is in an active state trying to start the communication with the data agent Communication Established The NAM and the data agent are able to communicate with each other The three described states can be divided in six NAM data agent communication states as follows NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 43 NE management Connect a Network Element ee COMM_STOPPED Initial connection state when there is no connection between NAM and the data agent and the NAM is in a passive state avoiding any possibility of communication establishment with the data agent COMM TRYING The NAM is in an active state trying to start a communication with the data agent by sending SNMP PDUs m COMM TRYING PROBLEM DETECTED The NAM has detected a failure in the communication process COMM_ESTABLISHED The NAM and the data agent are able to communicate with each other The NAM is able to request data to the data
578. sioning Figure 1 7 provides an overview of the provisioning actions and the text which fol actions lows gives a detailed description Configuration management NE and domain creation gt Equipment configuration Service provisioning Figure 1 7 Network provisioning NE and domain cre Prior to equipment configuration and service provisioning the NEs must be known ation in the NAM To achieve this the following 4 steps are necessary 1 creation of domains creation of NEs assignment of NEs to any domain s oe oN logical connection of NEs All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Equipment NEs can be configured if they are known in the NAM The following measures configuration should be performed m selection of the timing synchronization source m selection of the COMDAC simplex duplex and IO DS1 protection scheme m selection of those slots for which an absence of the pack will be alarmed only applicable for COMDAC NAM R1 9 1 24 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Working with NAM m include data equipment configuration provisioning of card types and IAT Subshelves ADSL SDSL drops configuration m provisioning of card types which are inserted in a slot m configure ISDN in POTS mode via cut through provisioning of the protection switching All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Service If the NEs are configured and integrated in the network cross conne
579. sociation configuration related to NEs For every NE with which the NAM has to communicate the NEs Tar get Identifier TID must be known by the NAM provisionable with the NAM GUI via cut through For every NE with which the NAM wants to communicate the LO GIN and the PASSWORD information related to that NE must be in troduced in the NAM provisionable with the NAM GUI via cut through A 6 1 4 Navis AnyMedia client configuration Client IP parame The workstation with the NAM client has the following IP parameters configured ters Note that if the client is located at the same machine as the server these parame ters are already configured m IP address e g 135 88 20 230 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 m default router e g 135 88 17 1 The client workstation has to be configured as a client machine of the server workstation where the NAM server is going to run The SystemPreferences ini file includes the LOGTELNET PASSTELNET and SERVER variables that have to be configured only it the user wants to open a cut through session in the NAM client A 6 1 5 Local digital switch configuration Management operations have to be performed on the LDS to create the SPLL ser vice and associate this service to the DSO channel which will be cross connected with the ROC The provisioning of this DSO channel will be static with TR 08 and dynamic with TR 303 A separate SPLL needs to be established with every NE which
580. software download Dormant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 81 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Cross Connec The field Server Port identifies the port within the AP tion Information Possible values svrprt 1 1 15 1 The field Physical Feeder indicates the ONU port which is cross connected to the server port Possible values subfdr 1 1 8 1 1 In case of a cross connection mismatch the different two feeder ports are displayed separated by the character The COMDAC reported feeder is displayed first Reset This button can be used to reset the data part of the pack This button is available only for data agents 6 4 8 1 Modify an OAP Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an OAP Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt LPF500 in the NE Browser and View via the cursor menu or single click on OAP in the Shelf View window The OAP window pops up This window can also be reached from the Common AP window by provi sioning a slot not yet provisioned cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 If you want to then unprovision the OAP use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code to select NONE The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 change the administrative state use the option menu Administrative State gt
581. ss a correct restore is performed When the original data bases are present the message above is not displayed Additional incre While the different databases are restored certain information is displayed on the mental backups screen Then the restoration tool asks whether additional databases should be re stored Do you wish to restore from any additional incremental backups yes no Type no and press Enter After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental restoration procedure Before a certain incremental backup can be restored the previous full backups and possibly some previous incremental backups must be restored The procedure to restore an incremental backup is the same as the above de scribed procedure for a full backup except for the last Additional Incremental Backups step In that step the restore tool asks for a confirmation that all needed full backups which are a prerequisite for the incremental backup are present An swer this question affirmatively After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 4 Examples for backup schedules Introduction This section gives you some examples for typical backup schedules and explains the backup level Backup level Crucial for the understanding of the backup schedules is understanding the backup level The backup level is a number which is assigned by you to every backup you
582. stablished if the NAM can send SNMP input commands and can receive SNMP output commands to from the data agent for management purposes The connection state is COMM_ESTABLISHED Agent monitoring The NAM monitors the communication state with the data agent by periodically sending messages to the data agent If the NAM does not receive a response to a certain number of messages within a certain time it assumes that the connection to the data agent is lost and tries to connect to the data agent again Default values for By default these messages are sent by the NAM every five minutes The response monitoring to a message must be received within four minutes and not more than two re sponses may be lost otherwise the connection is closed by the NAM These values can be configured by the user via the system variables NEM asso ciation heartBeatNumber and NEM association heartBeatTime in the file SANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg 5 5 3 3 NE Management window tab Data This window shows the provisioning information and allows the provisioning and deprovisioning of an NE data agent NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 45 NE management Connect a Network Element ee NE Management Opts Pee EE Hilma Marsis ae Figure 5 18 NE Management window tab Data Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 5 46 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Connect a
583. states NB agent Navis AnyMedia 5 39 Control key 3 5 Controlled Objects 4 26 Craft interface terminal A 3 Create domain 4 8 user 4 3 user group 4 14 Cursor aspects 3 6 Cursor menu 3 10 CX_CONN_NOT_VISIBLE 8 51 NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 IN 1 Index D Data Communications Network definition A 2 Database Archive 3 38 Backup 3 38 Full backup 3 38 Incremental backup 3 38_ Off line backup 3 38 On line backup 3 38 Restore 3 38 DCN configurations A 5 DCN introduction A 1_ Delete domain 4 12 user 4 7 user group 4 24 Delete key 3 5 disk space 2 2 Documentation XX Comment procedure XXI Packaging and format XX Domain Create 4 8 Delete 4 12 Modify 4 10 Double click mouse 3 5_ Drag mouse 3 6 Drop down list box 3 14 rr E Environment Alarms 8 42 Escape key 3 5 External LAN AEM system interface A 5 External LAN interface profiles A 4 External system LAN interface A 3_ ee F Fault clearance 1 27 identification 1 26 source 1 2 fault management overview 1 3 Fiber Reach 5 96 rr File Close 8 13 8 19 Exit 8 13 8 19 New 8 13 8 19 Print 8 13 8 19 Reload 8 14 File Browser 5 94 Full backup database 3 38 H Help icon 3 4 Icon 3 7 Icons greyed 3 4 ILLEGAL_SW_VERSION_ 8 54 Incremental backup database 3 38 Input focus 3 6 Installation third party software 1 23 INVALID_MIB_IDENTIFIER 8 52 Inventory Management 5 8 IP Address 5 38
584. stem Configuration Management This consists of a set of functions for controlling the network elements including initialization parameter setting starting and stopping and collecting information about the NE configuration Controlled Objects An entity defined via type and value Where type is defined as NE for NAM but later when unbundled it requires the ability to configure type as VRT for the 24 channel product Value will identify one specific managed NE or VRT Interface CIT Craft Interface Terminal A local RS232 connection on the AnyMedia access system to which a PC GUI can be connected D Date This refers to the day month and year and represents a calendar function that needs to include a calculation for leap years and a capability of determining the day of the week from the date and must be Y2K compliant DCN Data Communications Network the communication media and interconnected devices used to exchange manage ment information between the NAM NB the NEs and other OSs Defaults These are the parameter values built into the NE when it is shipped from the factory Default values are restored upon execution of an INIT SYS command Device Driver A program that controls a specific device such as a cartridge tape DAT Distribution Port The circuitry that provides narrowband access i e up to the 1 544 Mbps DS1 rate to a single network interface over one 2 or 4 wire metallic facility and converts between the f
585. stemEventDistributor NamingService NamingService SIDService SIDService OrbixDaemon OrbixDaemon 3 4 8 Changed NE software When the NE software is changed the number of Agent Management Units AMU which are started on the NAM should be adapted This assures that not more processes than necessary run on the NAM The script CustomizeSADB cf Chapter 2 4 should be used to update these system parameters NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 33 System management Print out reports ee 3 5 Print out reports General The Print windows cf Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 and Figure 3 17 are used from any application within NAM to generate an output of data System details for If the Unix command 1p does not exist or is not configured on your system the printing NAM software will not be able to print This is because the print out is first con verted to PostScript format and then piped to the Unix command lp d printer_name where printer_name is replaced by the value en tered in the Printer field of the Print Dialog Print options de The available options in the print dialogue depend on the used operating system pend on operation and may slightly differ from the descriptions below e g under Solaris it is not pos system sible to change the orientation of the printed page 3 5 1 Page Setup dialog Page Setup The Page Setup dialog pops up after the selection of Print Window in a window or Print in the Preview Frame dialog Fig
586. t 3 Click on the cross connection to be changed and press Edit The ATM Cross Connection window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 2 page 7 67 If you want to then change the name of the cross connec use the text field Circuit Id and click on tion Apply edit the ATM traffic network profile as use the option menu ATM Traffic Net sociated with the cross connection work Profile to select the desired net work profile and click on Edit The ATM Traffic Network Profile window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 7 page 9 35 change the administrative state use the corresponding option menu If the administrative state has been changed from Unlocked to Locked a Warning window pops up Changing the administrative state of an ATM cross connec tion may be service affect ing Do you want to continue 4 Click on Close to exit the window 7 3 5 Remove an ATM cross connection Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove an ATM cross connection Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt ATM Cross Connections List via the cursor menu The ATM Cross Connection List window pops up cf Chapter 7 3 1 page 7 64 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 71 Service provisioning Service provisioning data lt A 2 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the drop for display in the cross connection list 3 Click on the cross connection to be removed and press Remove f the cross co
587. t 5 48 NAM R1 9 5 II Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Contents 5 6 Network Element management 5 49 5 6 1 Screen navigation 5 49 5 6 2 NAM NE synchronization telephony agent 5 50_ 5 6 2 1 Configuration information synchronization Tou 5 6 2 2 Alarm information synchronization 5 50_ 5 6 2 3 Synchronization Telephony window 5 51 5 6 2 4 Modify the synchronization telephony parameter 5 52 5 6 3 NAM NE synchronization data agent 2 93 5 6 3 1 Configuration information synchronization 99 5 6 3 2 Alarm information synchronization 5 53 5 6 3 3 Synchronization Data window 5 54 5 6 3 4 Modify the synchronization data parameter 5 55 5 6 4 Configuration of timing source for telephony only 5 55 5 6 4 1 Timing Source Control Telephony window 5 57 5 6 4 2 Modify the timing source 0 60 5 6 5 Date amp Time Telephony window 5 61 5 6 6 Date amp Time Data window 5 63 5 6 7 NE Inventory window 5 65 5 6 7 1 Get the NE inventory data oy 5 6 8 Network element working mode 5 67 5 6 9 Simplex COMDAC protection scheme 5 68 5 6 9 1 COMDAC window 5 68 5 6 9 2 Set the COMDAC protection to simplex 5 69 5 6 10 Equipment protection switching 5 70 5 6 10 1 COMDAC protection switching 5 70 5 6 10 2 Modify the COMDAC protection mode Fra 5 6 10 3 10O DS1 protection switching 5 74 5 6 10 4 Modify the IO DS1 protection mode 5 _ 5 6 10 5 Alarm configuration 5 77 5 6 11 Network element software upgrade 5 78 5 6 11 1 Network element software download telep
588. t download and automatic activation after the next reboot Activate and reboot now download and automatic activation immediately Download Infor Directory name This text field shows the name of the file mation which will be downloaded The Browse button opens the File Browser window where the directory can be selected Apply This button is used to start the software download 5 6 11 5 Software download to data agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to start the software download Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and Software Download gt Data via the cursor menu The AFM Software Download window pops up 2 Use the radio buttons in the field Selection Criteria to define single or multiple download For single download proceed with step 4 for multiple download proceed with step 3 3 Use the Add gt gt button in the field Target to move the desired NEs to the Available NEs list NAM R1 9 5 84 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management 4 Use the radio buttons FTP only Activate after next reboot or Activate and reboot now in the Target field to define the desired download man ner Please note that the copying and activation can also be done later by means of the AFM Program Copy amp Validation window cf Chapter 5 6 13 page 5 88 5 Click on the Browse button in the Download Information field to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 6 14 5
589. t from NAM client 2 Log in as Navis AnyMedia Administrator 1 ANYMEDIAPATH is an environment variable defined in AnyMedia sh and contains the main installation path of NAM NAM R1 9 2 74 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 a 3 Type SystemAdmin CLEAN and press Return 2 3 1 3 Backup NAM databases and configu ration files Proceed as follows 1 Login aS Navis AnyMedia Administrator 2 The backup must include all configuration files To ensure this edit the da tabaseNames cfg file located in SANYMEDIAPATH Backup cfg and set all the empty variables to the proper directory 3 Type cd SANYMEDIAPATH Backup bin to change to the NAM direc tory where the NAM backup utility is 4 Type AEM_backup p lt path gt f lt file gt and press Return p lt path gt path is the directory or device to back up The default path is defined by the NAM general configuration file under the OAM backup backupDirectory variable gt NOTE Take into account that the backup path must never be in the NAM tree or it will be lost during the uninstall process f lt file gt Location of the backup file file can be a local file or a locally mounted file in case a local tape device is used file specifies a soft label Default file name is EM _SYSBCK_yyyymmdd fullbck for full backup with yyyy year mm month dd day of the backup Refer to the
590. t of NEs that can be managed by the NAM as well as the addition of their attributes It also involves the movement of an NE from an old group to a new group The user can create NEs within the groups The NEs are also represented by an icon and coordinates to situate it on the background map of the parent group Each NE must therefore have the following parameters when being created m NE name This identifier must be unique in the whole tree m NE icon to graphically identify the NE when displaying the items of its par ent group m Domains m NE coordinates to specify the position of the NE icon on the background map of its parent group The NE shows the highest severity of all the alarms it reports The NEs can be edited deleted and moved When an NE is moved from an old parent group to a new parent group the group status of both parent groups must be updated NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 29 NE management Groups and NEs management 5 4 3 Groups and NEs window This window is used to create edit and delete NEs and Groups The window is subdivided in two panes Groups and NEs gt NOTE The windows shown in this chapter are merely meant as an example The contents text within a window as well as the window itself may slightly dif fer from the window as shown on your system 5 4 3 1 Groups window Figure 5 13 Groups amp NEs window tab Groups NAM R1 9 5 30 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 4
591. t system only after having read and under stood the chapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation For complex systems additional training is recommended Any obligatory training for operating and service personnel must be carried out and documented m Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system in cluding the software must be carried out by qualified Lucent Tech nologies personnel or by expert personnel authorized by Lucent Technologies All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability No components spare parts must be used other than those recommended by the manufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents The unit system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reported immediately by the user to a person in responsibility The equipment must be supplied with Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV of 48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be cor rectly connected to the protective earth Never connect to 60 V The unit system must be operated only with the connections and un der the environmental conditions as described in the documentation The removal or disabling of safety facilities the clearing of faults and errors and the maintenance of the equipment must be carried out by specially qualified personnel only The respective parts of the
592. t test rather depend on the hardware function of the circuit e g POTS pulse metering ISDN These tests are performed on each AP using part of their self test capabilities R RDT This refers to the physical Remote Digital Terminal A Remote Digital Terminal is a physical section of the NE that interfaces to the LDS at DS1 rate NAM R1 9 GL 8 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Glossary Response Time The real elapsed time between detectable start of an action and its completion Restore The process of copying backup files from removable media to a working directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged ROC Remote Operations Channel The bearer channel that conveys management information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is in tended to be used when the system is installed at locations where no local Ethernet LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists Router A network layer device that forwards packets from one network to another based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the router if the participant is connected to another port of the router With a router data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than a bridge because the IP address is evaluated for traffic control S Security Management This restricts access based upon the establi
593. t window The initial window consists of three windows Atthe top the menu bar cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 19 and the tool bar cf Chapter 5 3 2 page 5 20 m On the left hand side the Network Browser cf Chapter 5 3 3 page 5 20 m On the right hand side the Background Map window shows a background map of a selected NE group cf Chapter 5 3 5 page 5 21 Depending on previous actions the following frames are additionally available m On the right hand side a common area is used for the display of the infor mation requested through the menu bar cursor menu or tool bar if present ANE Browser cf Chapter 5 3 4 page 5 21 shows all the components of the NE which has been selected via the Network Browser A Status bar is incorporated at the bottom of screens which execute com mands cf Chapter 5 3 6 page 5 22 NAM R1 9 5 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Initial windows The cursor menu will pop up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed cf Chapter 5 3 7 page 5 23 5 3 1 Menu bar The menu bar entries are enabled disabled depending on the object selected in one of the browser list NE Browser or Network Browser The following table de scribes the menu bar s main entries and subsequent submenus The right column identifies the item that needs to be selected to have this menu option available Menu entries Enable Disable File gt New Any item in Network Bro
594. t windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DSO window 7 2 1 2 Use the VRT VB List Procedure Complete the following procedure to use the VRT VB list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the NE Browser and List gt VRT VB via the menu bar The VRT VB List window pops up 2 Use the radio buttons to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to edit the selected VRT VB add a logical DS1 add a logical DSO close the window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 then click on Edit VRT VB The corre sponding VRT VB window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 1 3 page 7 8 Chapter 7 2 1 7 page 7 14 select the desired VRT VB id in the list an click on Add Logical DS1 The Log ical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 3 3 page 7 25 select the desired VRT VB id in the list an click on Add Logical DSO The Log ical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 7 2 4 3 page 7 34 Click on Close Issue 1 02 2001 7 7 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p o BESS 7 2 1 3 VRT TR303 window This window provides access to the lists of physical DS1s and logical DSOs as well as allows addition of logical DS1s and logical DSOs to the selected VRT TR303 It also displays on demand the VRT operational state This window shows also the VFDE state enable or disable and datalink protection informa tion HEEE esr Poman Siiri Figure 7 5 VRT TR303 window The following table shows the view edit option of this window
595. ta base Alarms It contains all alarms received from the platform Navis AnyMedaia teleph ony agent and data agent m ADSL Performance m SDSL Performance m AIM Performance a AIM Traffic Statistics m DS3 Feeders Performance 8 2 10 Periodical deletion of cleared alarms By default alarms with cleared status are maintained for at least three days in cluding the current day in the database This value can be configured by the user via the system variable AM minimumClearPerioa in the file SANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg and is an integer multiple in days The default value is 3 days The NAM performs a periodical deletion of the alarms with cleared status that ex ceed the specified time This is done during the night time period in low load hours NAM R1 9 8 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring 8 3 Alarm monitoring 8 3 1 General Overview The NAM provides a process to monitor and display all alarms stored in the data base Using this system the Alarm Viewer the user is able to see many different alarm attributes such as Alarm Type Severity Status Summary and the date and time when the alarm was raised Via this tool the user can perform actions e g acknowledge clear for some of these alarms What you will find In this chapter you will find the following information m Instructions for starting and terminating the alarm viewer Chapter 8 3 2 page 8 11
596. tarting time of the day of exercise The first exercise will start within the next 24 hours at the time specified The Apply button is used to request the standby card test execution This button is enabled only if one of the parame ters in this field has been changed 2 Use the parameter in the New field to change the data oe Click on Apply to request the execution A Warning window pops up showing the following message The operation may be service affecting Do you want to continue After confirming this warning the new standby card test execution is initi ated 4 Click on Close to exit the Standby Card Test Schedule window 8 4 1 4 Built in self test Test Request Each NE performs a built in self test of plug in circuit packs periodically gt NOTE The built in self test is not requested from the NAM it will be always started from the NE Procedure If a failure occurs the NE will raise an alarm REPT ALM which contains the AID of the failed pack The alarm is then visible in the Alarm Viewer of the NAM For more information about possible alarms see Chapter 8 5 4 page 8 44 describes NAM R1 9 8 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Fault management and maintenance Test management NAM alarms or refer to the network elements documentation describes NE alarms 8 4 1 5 Loopback test on the feeder side lt is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders gt NOTE Executing a loopback test on an E
597. ted drop The Reset Counts button is used to restart the performance monitoring of the selected drop The Reset All Drops Counts bution is used to restart the performance monitoring of all the xDSL drops within the NE NAM R1 9 9 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring SDSL performance monitoring data 9 2 2 Modify the ADSL performance moni toring Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the ADSL performance monitoring data Step Procedure 1 Click on the PM Data button in the ADSL Drop window The ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window pops up 2 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the desired ADSL drop 3 Use the check box Log All PM Drops Data to define whether the moni toring data should be logged or not If you want to then retrieve the performance monitoring click on Get data restart the performance monitoring click on Reset Counts data counter for the selected drop restart the performance monitoring click on Reset ALL Drops Counts data counters for all drops within the NE exit the window click on Close 9 3 SDSL performance monitor ing data The NAM is able to retrieve the SDSL performance monitoring counts from the NE via FTP The interval data are retrieved and stored every 15 minutes the day data are retrieved and stored every 24 hours from each enabled NE The data are stored per day in a separate log file SdslLineStatisticsLog_YYYYMMDD where YYYY y
598. ted in ANYMEDIAPATH log The file contains also hints about start logging stop logging and error messages 9 4 1 AFM PM Data window This window displays the AFM performance monitoring parameter of the selected feeder This window also allows to select data collection for all the feeders in the NE or clear counters of one feeder AFM PM Data Figure 9 3 AFM PM Data window NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 9 Performance monitoring AFM feeder performance monitoring ee The following table shows the view options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Feeder This option menu can be used to select an appropriate Id feeder Possible values ds3 1 16 1 2 If coming from the DS3 AFM Feeder window the previous selected feeder is shown Log All PM This check box can be used to define whether the NAM is Feeders Data collecting and logging the performance monitoring data for all the feeders in the NE or not Performance Three text fields show the values for three different time peri Monitoring ods Current 15 minutes Previous 15 minutes Previous day m PSES P bit Severely Errored Second Possible val ues 0 900 for 15 minutes 0 86400 for one day m Unavailable Seconds UAS Possible values 0 900 for 15 minutes 0 86400 for one day Valid Data Three check boxes show whether the data for the time period are reliabl
599. ted or unpro tected In duplex operation the COMDAC will run in an active and standby mode NAM R1 9 5 70 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Network Element management The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then the alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Re quired and the NAM is not able to change it until one of the COMDACs is re moved When a COMDAC is removed the NAM is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled simplex Shelf Protection Figure 5 27 Shelf Protection window tab COMDAC This window provides COMDAC protection information It also provides the mech anisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection switches NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 71 NE management 5 72 Issue 1 Network Element management LL The following table shows the view edit options of the Shelf Protection window tab COMDAC Parameters Buttons NE Name Protection Scheme COMDAC Infor mation Protection Switch Protection Mode 02 2001 Description NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Represents the protection scheme used in the NE If only one COMDAC is present in the shelf the protection scheme is Simplex If both COMDACs are present Duplex is the value shown Only in this case duplex configuration is the Protection Switch pane availabl
600. tem administration m User administration and profiling m Log management m Alarm management m Groups amp NEs management m Subscriber Identifier Each application is composed by one or more tasks The default user group as signment to the individual applications tasks is described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 30 1 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclu sively through X Open Company Limited 2 provided by the OS System SUN Solaris NAM R1 9 1 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Introduction 1 2 4 System working modes The NAM can work in the following two modes m stand alone mode m integrated management mode These modes are not mutually exclusive i e the NAM is always able to perform the element management tasks even if it is connected to any higher management system OS via northbound interface Stand alone mode In the stand alone mode the NAM performs the whole management of the NEs on its own The user is able to perform all management tasks via the GUI Figure 1 1 shows the system architecture in the stand alone mode Navis AnyMedia Figure 1 1 Stand alone Mode Integrated In the integrated management mode the NAM works as an integral part of the management mode customer s management network providing higher management systems OSs with services necessary to manage NEs in their domains The NAM allows other OSs to pass provisioning tes
601. tents A 4 NE communication capabilities A 3 A 5 NAM communication capabilities A 5 A 6 Recommended DCN configurations A 5 A 6 1 ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN A 6_ A 6 2 Communication with remote NEs using inband ATM PVC A 9 WRU B Configuration parameters B 1 B 1 Overview B 1 B 1 1 NAM server configuration variables B 1 B 1 2 NAM client GUI configuration variables B 7_ C Northbound interface C 1 C 1 Overview C 1 C 2 Northbound interface basics C 1 C 2 1 Northbound interface description C 1 C 3 Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 3 C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 4 C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 9 C 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment C 16 C 3 4 RTRV HDR Retrieve Header C 21 AB Abbreviations AB 1 GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 XI arr Contents NAM R1 9 XII Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 LL SS About this document 1 Overview Purpose This user service manual USM provides the following information for Lucent Technologies Navis AnyMedia NAM 24 Channel R1 9 m A product overview and a functional product description m system turn up procedures and system modifications m user management m configuration management m fault management and maintenance m performance monitoring The purpose of the USM is to provide the provisioning personnel with all informa tion necessary to provision an AnyMedia Access System via the NAM The USM i
602. teristic of the transmit equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 150 600 1200 Default 600 Height This slider can be used to control the amplitude of the trans mit equalizer s transfer function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 51 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony lt A SS 7 24 17 EM4C EM4H PLR1 PLR2 Service De tails windows Overview EM4 C H 4 wire E amp M Type I and Type Il The E amp M function is used in PBX tie trunks to provide the E amp M signaling interface It is applicable to the SPQ454 chan nel unit which is intended for used in PBX tie trunks and it can interface with a PBX or other transmission equipment PLR 1 2 4 wire pulse link repeater Type and Type II The primary application of the PLR function is also in PBX tie trunks providing the E amp M signaling interface with inverted polarity It is also applicable to the SPQ454 channel
603. the Administrative State of the agent is Managed NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 5 47 NE management Connect a Network Element ee 5 5 3 4 Modify NE Management data data agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to manage an NE data agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Browser or in the background map and NE Management via the cursor menu The NE Management window pops up This window can also be reached from the Groups amp NEs window tab NEs by clicking on NE Management cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 30 If you want to then provision the NE enter or change the values for IP Ad dress or Security Id in the Provision ing Information field and press Provi sion deprovision an provisioned NE click on Deprovision in the Provision ing Information field change the administrative state use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Information field show edit the synchronization data click on More Details exit the window click on Close NAM R1 9 5 48 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management 5 6 Network Element manage ment 5 6 1 Screen navigation Screen navigation Network Element management The following figure shows an overview of the screen navigation for NE manage ment In this figure is assumed that the NE is already connected cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 36 COMDAC SW Download AFM SW Download COMDAC Program Copy AFM Program Co
604. the FAST shelf is augmented with the SLC 2000 ATU to interface with the central office alarm and metallic loop testing network System capacity COTs operate in TR 08 Mode 1 and INA only no concentration meaning that the limits system capacity is limited to 480 DSO channels 20 DS1s by the FAST shelf I O structure NAM R1 9 5 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Overview of the controlled systems E SS Interoperability The AnyMedia COT is inter operable with the AnyMedia RT a single shelf RT to a with RT single shelf COT The COT FAST shelf may have one MDS2 COT shelf associated with it The FAST and MDS2 MDS82B shelves may be provisioned as either COT or RT via TL1 5 2 2 3 2 Routing One feature that is specific to the AMAS COT is the ability to route craft interface terminal CIT messages from an external source at the COT to from the RT based on the message s IP address i e messages either terminate at the COT or are routed to the RT The benefit of such an arrangement is that the RT can be provi sioned from the TL1 message based interface at the COT 5 2 2 3 3 Alarm test unit ATU The COT FAST shelf is augmented with an ATU required to interface between the FAST shelf and the central office alarm and loop testing network It is controlled by AMAS COT via a data link over an asynchronous RS 232 serial interface The ATU can support multiple RT sites with a a DC test pair Capabilities The ATU provides the follo
605. the MG ID The internally assigned ID of the MG The ID of an MG contains the ID of the DMG it belongs to Administrative State The administrative state of the MG Possible values ON if the MG is up OFF otherwise The Adminis trative State is changed whenever a startup or shut down command is issued Operational State The operational state of the MG displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the MG is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 27 System management System administration ee Figure 3 13 Edit DMG window Actions The following table lists all actions which are possible in the Edit DMG window Table 3 17 Actions for editing a DMG launch the DMG select the check box Launch on Pack Next time when any package containing when the package age Start Up and press Apply the DMG is started the DMG is starts up launched not launch the DMG deselect the check box Launch on Next time the package is started the when the package Package Start Up and press Apply DMG is not launched starts up 3 4 6 Editing module groups Overview The Edit MG window displays the modules contained in the module group The processes which make up a module can be added or removed from the module These processes can also be killed or recovered Add a process Each process in the module has a certain load level assigned The load level is
606. the System Administration window 3 4 3 2 Administration of packages NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 T h a N 7 N GO F D i on vis on rs on rs on sm op rs op rs Go an Se a I as ook Go as s Sr ai ho E ss D Go alk op i h D T l N n aa o0 o a o0 d 2 oo Q CO Q CO M 02 2001 3 I o rr Contents 3 4 3 3 Administration of distributed module groups 3 22 3 4 3 4 Administration of module groups 3 24 3 4 4 View distributed module groups of a package 3 26 3 4 5 Editing distributed module groups 3 27 3 4 6 Editing module groups 3 28 3 4 7 Contents of packages and distributed module groups 3 31 3 4 8 Changed NE software 3 33 3 5 Print out reports 3 34 3 0 Page Setup dialog 3 34 3 5 2 Print dialog 3 35 3 5 3 Preview Frame dialog 3 36 3 6 Backup and restore 3 38 3 6 1 Basics on backups and NAM databases 3 38 3 6 2 Commands for backup archive and restore 3 39 3 6 3 Backup archive and restore procedures 3 41 3 6 3 1 Backup procedure 3 42 3 6 3 2 Archive procedure 3 42 3 6 3 3 Restore procedure 3 42 3 6 3 3 1 General 3 42 3 6 3 3 2 Full restoration procedure 3 42 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental restoration procedure 3 43 3 6 4 Examples for backup schedules 3 43 3 6 4 1 Daily cumulative weekly cumulative backups 3 43 3 6 4 2 Daily cumulative weekly incremental backups 3 44 3 6 4 3 Daily incr
607. the file AnyMediaEM cfg f backup_file_name Location of the backup file backup_file_name can be a lo cal file or a locally mounted file in case of a local tape device is used backup_file_name specifies a soft label Default file name EM_SYSARCH_yyyymmdd arc with yyyy year mm month dd day of the archive TAR command The tar command is used in backup and restore scripts tar c r v tarfile file tar x t v tarfile Parameter description Cc Create a tar file An already existing tar file is overwritten r Replace a tar file An already existing tar file is not overwrit ten and the new information is appended at its end X Extract the data from the tar file t Display the table of contents of the tar file V The tar command verbosely displays what it does f tarfile tarfile is the name of the tar file file Name of the file or a list of files separated by blanks which shall be added to the tar file Omitted for extract operations 3 6 3 Backup archive and restore proce dures This section gives an overview of the steps necessary for a backup archive or re store operation Prerequisite for The backup archive or restore commands require that some path system vari backup restore and ables are properly set This is done by the command AnyMediaNBEM sh during archive the installation of NAM NB If this command was not executed the backup archive or restore commands will not work NAM R1 9 36
608. the management access via the NAM is finished until the NE is created and connected again NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 99 NE management Network Element management ee NAM R1 9 5 100 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Contents 6 1 Introduction 6 2 Shelf View 6 3 363 211 497 6 2 1 BAIU Shelf View window 6 2 2 MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window Configuration of the telephony packs 6 3 1 IO DS1 window 6 3 1 1 Configure lO_DS1 6 3 2 View the COMDAC parameters 6 3 3 View the CTU parameters 6 3 4 Common Application Pack window 6 3 4 1 Provisioning a slot via common AP 6 3 5 Telephony Application Pack window 6 3 5 1 Modify a telephony AP 6 3 6 MSC window 6 3 6 1 Modify an MSC 6 3 7 PTU Window 6 3 7 1 Configure a PTU 6 3 8 Channel Unit Window 6 3 8 1 Modify a CU 6 3 9 MDSU window 6 3 9 1 Modify an MDSU 6 3 10 IAT Server window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases 6 3 10 1 Modify an IAT Server 6 3 11 IAT Subshelf window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases 6 3 11 1 Modify an IAT subshelf 6 3 12 IAT Server Port information window NE R1 7 and the subsequent releases NAM R1 9 Issue 1 02 2001 6 I o rr Contents 6 3 12 1 Configure an IAT server port 6 48 6 4 Configuration of the data packs 6 50_ 6 4 1 DS3 AFM window 6 50 6 4 1 1 Modify a DS3 AFM 6 52 6 4 2 DS3 AFM Feeder window 6 54 6 4 2 1 Modify an DS3 AFM feeder 6 56 6 4 3 OC3 AFM window 6 57 6 4 3 1 Modify
609. the name of the printer in Printer print to a file enter the name of the file in File have a title over the printed pages enter the title in Banner Page Title NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 35 System management Print out reports ee Table 3 24 Print dialog actions If you want to then apply UNIX print options enter the options in Print Command Options start printing and close the window click on Print close the print window without printing click on Cancel 3 5 3 Preview Frame dialog Preview Frame The Preview Frame dialog pops up after the selection of Preview in a window The following figure shows an example of the Preview Frame dialog Preview Frame 6900 5 37 PM Tres Cantos Groups and NEs Management SHELF17_EE Figure 3 17 Preview Frame dialog NAM R1 9 3 36 Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Print out reports Adions in Preview The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Preview Frame dialog Frame dialog Table 3 25 Preview Frame dialog actions If you want to then print out click on the printer icon cancel the print out click on Close view a single page preview click on the single page icon view a multi page preview click on the multi page icon change the magnification of the preview select another magnification with the option menu maximize restore the preview window click on the monitor icon NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 3
610. the network elements documentation Screen navigation Figure 7 3 page 7 5 shows an overview of the screen navigation for service provi sioning The arrows represent the order in which the windows can be opened Example To open the Logical DSO list m select NE in the NE Browser and List gt Logical DSO via the cursor menu NAM R1 9 7 4 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony v from O DS1 window from AP Telephony CU or IAT Equipment Configuration VRT VB List window Equipment Configuration cf Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 10 cf Chapter 6 3 11 page 6 43 VRTs VBs Physical DS1 List Logical DSO List Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Logical DSO Ho MR EE BE BE BE BEB SB TR to Timing Source window y Details 4 Equipment Configuration cf Chapter 5 6 4 1 page 5 57 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 T a M a Select Logical DSO Cc Object NE Browser T Windows with several tabs Window Figure 7 3 Screen navigation for service provisioning telephony NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 5 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee 7 2 1 Network interface 7 2 1 1 VRT VB List window This window displays the VRT VB id list based on a selection criterion It provides access to the VRT VBs windows for addition or deletion of logical DSO and or log ical DS1 and for modifying the VRT VB specific parameters if app
611. the package Possible values ON if the MG is up OFF otherwise The Ad ministrative State is changed whenever a startup or shutdown command is issued Operational State The operational state of the package displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise NAM R1 9 3 24 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration Figure 3 11 System Administration window MGs Actions in MGs tab The following table lists all actions you can perform in the MGs tab of the System Administration window Table 3 14 Actions for the administration of MGs recover an MG select the MG in the table and press Re The selected MG is recovered cover The Administrative State of the MG must be OFF edit an MG select the MG and press Edit MG The Edit MGs window is displayed cf Chapter 3 4 6 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 3 25 System management System administration SU ee 3 4 4 View distributed module groups of a package Overview The DMGs in Package window allows for viewing the DMGs which make up pack aged Additional information for each DMG is displayed DMGs information Next to Package Name the name of the selected package is displayed The table under DMGs in Package displays the following information Table 3 15 DMGs Information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assig
612. the versions of the NE software running in the NEs managed by the NAM Generally only one version of NE software per NE type is used by all the NEs in a network but the NAM must have the ca pacity to manage two software versions during the upgrade period NAM R1 9 1 8 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture E SS m NAM database synchronization Automatic update of the NAM database records based on NE database changes m Internal audits only applicable to data agents The NAM performs periodic internal audits to ensure the integrity of the configuration data with the NE Protection control The management system provides a facility to allow the user to switch op eration of one unit in an NE to a standby unit if that unit exists m Telephony equipment protection The NAM allows the user to provision the equipment information for the protection scheme Also the user can force protection switching NB R1 2 and subsequent releases COMDAC simplex duplex 0 DS1 m NE timing synchronization The NAM supports the user to configure the NE synchronization clock sources NE date and time The NAM allows the user to set and retrieve the date and time of the NE and allows to automatically configure NEs with NAM date and time m Subshelf management IAT Support of NE standby configuration The NAM supports the NE standby configuration via cut through interface Th
613. the window press Close NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 49 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs 6 4 Configuration of the data packs 6 4 1 DS3 AFM window This screen is used to show modify the DS3 AFM parameters It can also be used to reset and to edit the feeder ports Figure 6 18 DS3 AFM window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters NAM R1 9 6 50 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs Parameters Buttons Description Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the AFMDS3 is inserted Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf In this release the only possible values are ap 1 16 for FAST shelf and ap 1 0 for BAIU shelf Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth mation erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values AFM_DS38 Serial Number 12 character alohanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPA900 LPA901 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number an
614. ting or fault information to and from the NEs e g a fault management surveillance system can collect fault data using the pass through interface NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 5 Functional description 1 2 5 1 6 Introduction Figure 1 2 shows the system architecture of the integrated management mode l TL1 CORBA Navis AnyMedia Figure 1 2 Integrated Management Mode The complete system and software architecture of the NAM is described in Chapter 1 3 page 1 7 Performance reliability and availability Issue 1 The NAM fulfils the following features 02 2001 30 simultaneous users depending on the used hardware Support of 600 NEs in the server configuration depending on the used hardware Database re synchronization The NAM can re synchronize its database with the 600 NE data bases within 24 hours Priority of synchronization The NAM provides a mechanism to define the order in which the NEs will be synchronized Large number of simultaneous downloads It is possible to perform software download actions on 80 NEs in 6 hours Scaling The NAM provides a scaling capability which defines the most suitable cost effective configuration depending on the number of NEs and number of us ers to be supported NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Functional description System and software architecture E SS 1 3 System and software architec ture 1 3 1 Functional groups The NAM so
615. tion is used for a non locally or locally switched loop or ground start application It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit FXO Service Details Information Figure 7 27 Logical DSO window FXO NAM R1 9 7 54 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Service provisioning E SS 363 211 497 Service Details Parameters Trunk Condition Impedance Loop Start Ground Start On Hook Trans mission Toll Diversion Slope Balance Receive Gain Transmit Gain Service provisioning telephony Description This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Default 600 This option menu can be used to define whether loop start or ground start is used Possible values LS GS Default GS When a check mark is set the channel unit is configured for full time on hook transmission Possible values Set Not set Default Not set This check box can be used to prevent allow that the channel unit transmit the reverse loop current feed signalling state to ward the digital facility Possible values Set Not set Default Not set This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0
616. tions a A 6 1 2 AnyMedia network element configura tion The ROC over SPLL is the management interface used to access the NE The initial provisioning has to be done via pre provisioning factory settings or a local GSI LAN or RS 232C because the SPLL service carrying the remote operations channel must be in service to get remote access to the NE via remote operations channel Provisioning the The following actions have to be made to provision the ROC over SPLL manage ROC over SPLL ment interface Provision the Local Digital Switch LDS that is connected to the NE shelf to associate the DSO channel to a SPLL service m Provision the NE using the ENT T0 TL1 command to indicate that the re ceived DSO is a 64 Kbps clear channel gsfn 4do m Provision the NE using the ENT CRS T0 command to indicate that the re ceived DSO should be cross connected to the logical ROC port Note that the remote operations port TO cross connection created for a TR 08 VRT will cause system bandwidth to be allocated while for TR 303 this com mand is more an association function than a cross connection No actual cross connection is made in TR 303 until a request to connect the logical line specified in this command is received from the LDS over the EOC data link for semi permanent connections m Provision the NE using the SET IP command to an unique IP address Note that the default router address of the NE must be set to 224 0 0 2 universal
617. to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install _AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment NAM R1 9 2 54 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client RKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK Would you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia EM R1 9 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode 1 ADM lt Administration package installation gt 2 GUI lt Client package installation gt Enter selection 7 7 q 4 Type 2 and press Return Packages to be installed LuJRERT LuOXWRT LUNETSCP LUANYHL LuGUI24 Java 1 2 2 05 runt Processing package instance lt LuJRERT gt from ime installation lt cdrom cd1 CD1 AnyMediaEMR1 9 24 gt JRE 1 2 2 05 for A
618. tore command osrestore must be used to restore the data bases that were backed up manually in Chapter 2 3 1 3 to the proper di rectory Go to SANYMEDIAPATH type osrestore a f lt file gt and press Return 5 Due to incompatibilities between databases of AEM R1 7 1 and NAM R1 9 the Alarms database must be removed Type osrm ANYMEDIAPATH AM db AlarmDatabase db and press Return 6 A new empty database must be created before the alarms servers are launched Type SANYMEDIAPATH AM bin AMDbPopulate and press Return NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 2 77 Software installation and commissioning Navis AnyMedia upgrade from R1 7 1 to R1 9 BE S 7 Configuration Management databases CM_ db of each AMU are also incompatible and should be removed For all AMUs type osrm SANYMEDIAPATH lt amu_directory gt db CM_ db 2 3 1 9 Restore Navis AnyMedia logs lf Chapter 2 3 1 4 was executed restore the backed up log files 1 Log in as Navis AnyMedia Administrator 2 Type cd SANYMEDIAPATH to change to the NAM directory 3 Type cp r lt backup_logs_directory gt lt logs_directory gt backup_logs_directory is the directory where logs were placed in Chapter 2 3 1 4 logs_directory is where the logs are placed This directory is defined by the AnyMedia EM general configuration file under the OAM log di rectoryCurrentLogs variable 2 3 1 10 Update configuration parameters SADbPopulate cfg configuration file must be u
619. ts Contains all information implying changes in the database such as information about alarms NE and platform the performance and all TL1 messages sent from all managed NEs Alarms Performance Data feeders Performance Data ADSL SDSL Performance Data ATM m Possibility to sort logs It is possible to sort items in the logs for visualizing saving or printing EM time and data source The user can set the date amp time of the NAM from the platform clock i e operating system from a network management system or from an exter nal clock source using Network Time Protocol NTP m SW upgrade The NAM provides an easy and transparent mechanism to upgrade the system from one release to the next NAM NE loss of communication The NAM periodically polls the NEs heartbeat to detect loss of communi cation and or NE failures Loss of communication is reported as an alarm NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 15 Functional description System and software architecture I ee 2 Security Possibility of creating deleting modifying NAM users The NAM uses the security mechanisms provided by the SOLARIS Operat ing System m NAM security privilege levels Allows at least three privilege levels within the managed domain This is mapped to the NE privilege levels accordingly Administrator has all the permissions Maintenance has configuration and monitoring permissions Monitoring
620. u select No the creation of the NE is rejected Otherwise the Domain Selection window is activated The window remains on the screen until you make a decision NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 37 NE management Connect a Network Element ee The NE Management button is now enabled 6 Press the NE Management button The NE Management window pops up NE Management Optus el mem Previa falas Mariji aa Figure 5 16 NE Management window tab Telephony The following steps describe the procedure for the telephony agent The procedure for data agents is similar The corresponding window NE Man agement tab Data is described in Chapter 5 5 3 3 page 5 45 NE provisioning 7 Enter the IP Address and TID Target ID the name of the NE to which the data connection is addressed of the new NE in the field Communications Info IP Address format xxx xxx xxx xxx where x is a numeric 0 9 the TID has a range from 1 to 20 characters gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is interrupted 8 Enter the Login and Password in the Authentication Information field NAM R1 9 5 38 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Connect a Network Element gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is interrupted The Provision button becomes available when the Communicati
621. ulate A running populate of the SID database can be cancelled with the command populateSIDdb c Clean up database Redundant entries in the SID database can removed with the command cleanupSIDdb Cancel a clean up A running clean up of the SID database can be cancelled with the command cleanupSIDdb c NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 7 83 Service provisioning Subscriber Identifier BE SeSe Export database The contents of the SID database can be exported to the text file info_file with the command copySIDdb info file Cancel an export A running export of the SID database can be cancelled with the command copySIDdb c 7 4 2 2 Input file format Format The input file for the populateSiIDdb command is a text file Each line in this file contains four fields separated by semicolons The general structure of a line is as follows lt SID gt lt NE name gt lt Physical Drop Id gt lt Additional info gt Blank lines and comments lines starting with a can be inserted at will to structure the file These lines are ignored by the script Field formats The format of each of the fields is as follows m 8 SID 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters m NE Name 3 to 30 alphanumeric characters m Physical Drop Id drop x x x with x being a number for details cf Chapter 6 m Additional Info 1 to 100 alphanumeric characters Empty fields are allowed with the restriction that for each database record at least one of the f
622. up the NAM log files before you continue with the next steps 1 Go to the directory where the logs are placed This directory is defined by the NAM general configuration file under the OAM log directoryCur rentLogs variable 2 Type cp r lt logs_directory gt lt destination_directory gt to copy all files and directories to a temporary directory logs_directory is where the logs are placed This directory is defined by the NAM general configuration file under the OAM log directory CurrentLogs variable 2 3 1 5 Backup NAM system variables and configuration parameters The main system configuration file must be backed up in order to keep the existing situation of the AMUs instances and system configuration This is done automati cally by the NAM backup utility backing up the following files m SANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMedia cfg m SANYMEDIAPATH SystemAdministrator cfg SADbPopulate cfg Changes to the user preferences configuration file SANYMEDIAP ATH GUI_24 SystemPreferences ini on the client side will not be backed up 2 3 1 6 Uninstall AEM R1 7 1 The uninstallation removes all AEM related items databases 3rd party software etc which were copied to the system at installation time from your system This full uninstallation uses the remove_ANY scriptin order to uninstall all pack ages contained in the distribution This script is used to uninstall all packages on both sides AEM server side and AEM client side Ref
623. ure 3 16 shows an example of the Page Setup dialog Page Setup Paper Size US Letter Orientation Portrait Landscape Reverse Landscape oK Cancel Figure 3 15 Page Setup dialog Actions in Page The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Page Setup Setup dialog dialog Table 3 23 Page Setup dialog actions If you want to then select the paper size use the option menu Paper Size NAM R1 9 3 34 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Print out reports Table 3 23 Page Setup dialog actions If you want to then select the orientation of the print out click one of the radio buttons below Orientation start printing and close the window click on OK close the print window without printing click on Cancel 3 5 2 Print dialog Print dialog The Print cf Figure 3 16 and the Page Setup cf Figure 3 15 dialog pop up af ter the selection of Print Table in a window Figure 3 16 shows an example of the Print dialog Print Print Copies Print to File BULE s E UE Pava Printing Print Command Options Cc OE Print cancel Figure 3 16 Print dialog Actions in print The following table provides an overview of the possible actions which can be per dialog formed in the Print dialog Table 3 24 Print dialog actions If you want to then print multiple copies enter the number of copies in Copies print to a printer enter
624. uring which a decision on the network topology equipment and components is made has to take place before the operation with the NAM starts Physical The installation of the network follows the planning phase The installation in installation cludes the following steps Physical NE installation This includes the installation of racks packs and cabling of the NEs m Creation of a data communication network DCN plan Communication between the NAM and the NEs is carried out via the DCN A DCN plan should be drawn up before provisioning the network to ensure that the NAM can reach all NEs and that the administration of the DCN does not lead to an undue increase in performance requirements m NEconnection to the NAM server m OS connection to the NAM server optional m Installation of the third party application and NAM software on the NAM server Network status After completion of these steps the network operator has at his disposal a net after physical work which is connected physically with NAM and which is in principle ready for installation operation NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 1 23 Functional description Working with NAM ee 1 4 2 Configuration management Introduction The configuration management in accordance with the specific operating condi tions of the network operator is performed by special provisioning actions It is as sumed that the NEs and NAM have already been physically connected Provi
625. use this form to fax your comments and suggestions concerning the USM ment procedure 363 211 497 to Attention Lucent Technologies Attn Customer Documentation Coordinator Room 2D302B PO Box 903 67 Whippany Road Whippany NJ 07981 0903 Fax 973 386 4195 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 XXI About this document How to comment on this document C O NAM R1 9 XXII Issue 1 02 2001 363 211 497 Functional description Contents 1 1 About this subject 1 2 Introduction 1 2 1 Main functions 1 2 2 ISO functional areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration management 1 2 2 2 Fault management 1 2 2 3 Performance management 1 2 2 4 Security management 1 2 3 Applications 1 2 4 System working modes 1 2 5 Performance reliability and availability 1 3 System and software architecture 1 3 1 Functional groups 1 3 1 1 NE Management 1 3 1 2 General components 1 3 1 3 Software platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software bus 1 3 1 3 2 Repository 1 3 1 4 Graphical user interface GUI 1 3 1 5 Northbound interface 1 3 1 6 Southbound interface 1 3 2 Hardware platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture 1 3 2 2 Requirements 14 Working with NAM NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 a s I s s I DO ooh I DO 1 oo s I Q3 h I Q3 h D k D s D s I O1 ss op _s I N s I N ooh I 00 I k a N h a N an N h as oo hk a an
626. used dump_level Specifies the backup level Files modified since last backup at a lower level are copied dump_level 0 9 This parame ter is ignored if t FULL is used Restore files Use the following command to restore a database or directory AEM restore c h H p backup_file_ path f backup_file_name Parameter description C Aborts a running restore operation h H Display command syntax h or additional help H p backup_file_path backup_file_path is the directory or device from where the restored data should be read Default value of the variable OAM backup backupDirectory which is set in the file Any MediaEM cfg f backup_file_name Location of the backup file backup_file_name can be a lo cal file a locally mounted file or a local tape device NAM R1 9 3 40 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management Backup and restore a SeSe Archive files Use the following command to archive log files This function is primarily intended to archive the NAM log files If you enter none of the optional parameters the NAM log files will be archived AEM archive c h H p backup_file_ path backup_file_name Parameter description C Aborts a running archive operation h H Display command syntax h or additional help H p backup_file_path backup_file_path is the directory or device to archive De fault value of the variable OAM backup archiveDirectory which is set in
627. ut dow to start up or shut down server applications down Table 3 6 Commands for start up and shut down If you want to type in a terminal window start up all NAM packages SystemAdmin shut down all NAM packages except NS SystemAdmin CLEAN and AEM_SystemAdmin process start up the Administration NAM package SystemAdmin Administration start up the NarrowBand NAM package SystemAdmin NarrowBand start up the BroadBand NAM package SystemAdmin BroadBand SystemAdmin com mand Any combination of the parameters Administration NarrowBand and BroadBand of the SystemAdmin is possible NAM R1 9 3 18 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 System management System administration 3 4 3 System administration window Overview The System Administration window provides functions for NAM recovery and shutdown Via three tabs Packages DMGs and MGs in this window the pack ages as well as optional distributed module groups DMGs can be started and shutdown The MGs can be recovered and processed be added to modules or re moved from them as well as killed and recovered 3 4 3 1 Menus in the System Administration window Menus and func The following table provides an overview of the menus of the System Administra tions tion window and its functions Table 3 7 Menus and functions Menu Item Function File gt Print gt Print Table Print out all items displayed in the window File gt Print gt Print Window Print a screenshot of the w
628. vailable if the profile is in status Activated The Affected Objects window pops up cf Chapter 9 6 2 page 9 18 resynchronize the profile with all con use the option menu Status to select trolled AFMs Activated if necessary and click on Resynchronize 3 Click on Close to exit the window NAM R1 9 9 22 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Performance monitoring Network profiles E SS 9 6 4 SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window This window is used to create view modify the SDSL PM thresholds network pro files SDSL PM Threshold Network Profile New Network Profile z profite15 f Figure 9 9 SDSL PM Thresholds Network Profile window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile This option menu contains all the SDSL PM thresholds net work profiles for editing existing in the NAM and the entry New Network Profile for creating a new profile Default profiles are available These profiles cannot be modi fied NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 9 23 Performance monitoring Network profiles ee Parameters Buttons Description Network Profile Network Profile Name This text field shows the profile Information name The entry can be changed in create and edit mode Status This option menu is used to define the status of the profile Activated Deactivated Activated means that the pro file can be used in cross connections
629. ve State provides the possi State ble states that can be used Locked OOS Unlocked IS The field Service State shows the state of the AFM feeder obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Fault Condition Under Reboot Under testing Under SW Download Dormant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 61 Equipment configuration Configuration of the data packs ee Parameters Buttons Description Drop Informa A table shows the ADSL drops and the created cross con tion nections The table is sorted by ADSL drops Drop ld Identifies the ADSL drop within the AP Administrative State Shows the current state Locked Unlocked ATM Cross Connections Indicates the number of created cross connections PM Thresholds Network Profile Identifies the PM threshold profile assigned to this port Unknown XX indicates a non network profile NE profile m Transmission Network Profile Identifies the trans mission network profile assigned to this port Un known XX indicates a non network profile NE pro file The Edit button provides access to the ADSL Drop win dow It is enabled if a drop is selected in the table above The Deprovision button is used to deprovision superfluous ports which are not supported by the inserted ADSL type The button is enabled only if a drop is selected and provi sioned
630. ve View gt Reload Reloads alarms in the table Only alarms which alarms match the filter criteria are included The Alarm Viewer is blocked until the reload is finished Same functionality as Reload in the tool bar To customize the displayed alarm list perform the ac tions described in Chapter 8 3 4 3 page 8 20 and Chapter 8 3 4 2 page 8 19 All selected alarm items are acknowledged Their sta tus immediately changes to acknowledge acknowledge alarms Actions gt Acknowledge Same functionality as Acknowledge in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 8 3 3 4 2 page 8 18 clear alarms Actions gt Clear All selected alarm items are cleared Their status im mediately changes to cleared Same functionality as Clear in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 8 3 3 4 2 page 8 18 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 25 Fault management and maintenance 8 4 Test management Test management Main functions Test management provides all the general purpose test functionality The main functions are m Providing the user with different test options see below Starting the test execution by means of the NAM m Displaying the test results on the NAM user interface m Setting and clearing of loopbacks Access to the test The test routines are available via the Groups and NEs Management applica routines tion T
631. visioned inserted and mismatch until a re sync is done NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 6 9 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs 6 3 Configuration of the tele phony packs 6 3 1 IO DS1 window The IO DS1 pack provides four physical DS1 interfaces to accommodate tele phony via standard TR 08 TR 303 and INA network interfaces Figure 6 6 IO DS1 window This window can be displayed even when the pack is not inserted NAM R1 9 6 10 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Equipment configuration Configuration of the telephony packs E SS The following table shows the view edit options of the O_DS1 window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This option menu lists all IO DS1 of the NE Slot format iods1 1 shelf slot e g iods1 1 2 4 for working IO DS1s and iods1p shelf e g iodsp1 1 for the protection IO DS1 Possible values iods1 1 1 5 for working IO DS1 iods1p 1 for protection IO DS1 Inventory Infor The following fields are empty if no pack is inserted Other mation wise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value IODS1 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible value
632. want to continue 2 Enter y and press Return to confirm NAM R1 9 5 32 Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 NE management Groups and NEs management 5 4 3 4 NEs window P MEMerSrisrit Figure 5 14 Groups amp NEs window tab NEs The following table shows the view edit options of the NE parameters Parameters Buttons Description NE Name Selec This option menu shows all defined NEs belonging to the tion user domain The first option is NEW If NEW is selected all parameters within the fields NE Identification and NE Rep resentation are deleted for a new definition NE Identifica NE Name This text field shows the selected NE name or is tion empty if NEW is selected Parent Group This option menu shows all defined group names of the system One of them must be selected to en able the creation of a subordinate group or NE NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 33 NE management Groups and NEs management I ee Parameters Buttons Description NE Representa NE Icon This text field is used to enter the path to the icon tion related to the NE Browse This button is used to open the File Browser win dow in order to select the icon X Coord This text field is used to set the x coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Y Coord This text field is used to set the y coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Command but Apply This
633. wing capabilities m Interface to the pair gain test controller PGTC for channel testing m DC bypass pair connections Office alarm closures for audible and visual alarms m Parallel telemetry outputs When action in the RT is required the COMDAC will perform the message conver sion on the ATU datalink signal and route it to the RT via the TR 08 datalink Through the ATU communication link the AnyMedia COT can receive external signals and control external outputs For the test function the ATU can support up to 4 simultaneous test sessions and 8 DC bypass pairs with inhibit leads With eight DC bypass pairs eight TR 08 RTs can be at different locations 5 2 2 4 Subshelves management Integrated access terminal IAT R1 7 0 and the subsequent releases Overview The integrated access terminal server IATS feature supports DS1 fed IATs hosted by IATS APs in the RT These terminals are fed by one or more in some cases up to eight DS1 feeders and provide up to 24 equivalent DSO services switched or non switched voice or data per feeder DS1 Up to two DS1 fa The IATS AP hosts up to two DS1 facilities using the signalling and facility data cilities link FDL services provided by the extended superframe ESF DS1 format The DS1 facilities connect to IATs via existing transmission infrastructure or via lines on a transmission network with DS1 add drop capability NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 11 NE management
634. ws o E 5 3 7 1 Cursor menus entries 5 3 7 1 1 Selected icon on Network Browser Group NE 5 24 Issue1 02 2001 Network Browser NAM R1 9 Cursor menu entries New Groups amp NEs window Edit Groups amp NEs window Show Map background map Remove groups Alarm Monitoring group specific alarms Edit Groups amp NEs window NE Management NE Management window Remove NE Open NE Browser Alarm Monitoring NE specific alarms Log Viewer 363 211 497 NE management Initial windows 5 3 7 1 2 NE Browser Selected icon on Browser NE Main Shelf Subshelves AP Cursor menu entries Inventory Date amp Time gt Telephony Date amp Time gt Data Synchronization gt Telephony Synchronization gt Data Timing Source Control gt Telephony Create Subshelf gt IAT from NE R1 7 0 on Create Subshelf gt ONU only for data agent Alarms Logs List gt VRT VB List gt Physical DS1 List gt Logical DSO List gt ATM Cross Connections only for data List gt Data Test only for data List gt Feeder VP only for data List gt Network Profiles only for data Backups gt Telephony Backups gt Data Restore gt Telephony Restore gt Data Software Download gt Telephony Software Download gt Data Program Copy gt Telephony Program Copy gt Data Cut Through gt Telephony Profiles gt ADSL Transmission Profiles
635. wser Group or NE File gt _Remove Any item in Network Browser Group or NE File gt TL1 Scripting Always File gt Print gt Print window Always File gt Print gt Print table Always File gt Print gt Preview Always File gt Exit Always Edit gt Cut Text editing field Edit gt Copy Text editing field Edit gt Paste Text editing field Edit gt Clear Text editing field View gt Object Always View gt Toolbar Always View gt Reload Always gt NOTE This operation is not supported for the Network Browser The menu appears only when no other Groups amp NEs Management window is open Tools gt Subscriber Identifier Always Window gt Window 1 Window gt Window 2 Help gt Contents Always displays the help index for naviga tion through the EM help information NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 19 NE management Initial windows ME SS Menu entries Enable Disable Help gt On Window Always case sensitive online help Help gt About Always The options hidden under the menu name in the menu bar may also be executed via the keyboard This can be done using various methods There are two ways to open a menu using the keyboard m By simultaneously pressing the Alt key and the underlined character in the menu name e g Alt F for File Then select the desired option by typing in the letter underlined in this op tion The menu will close a
636. y 5 13 5 2 4 Network element R1 7 2 telephony 5 13 5 2 9 Navis AnyMedia new equipment configuration features 5 14 5 2 6 Data applications glo 5 2 7 Configuration of combined tasks S 5 3 Initial windows tlio 5 3 1 Menu bar 5 19 5 3 2 Tool bar 5 20 5 3 3 Network browser 5 20 5 3 4 NE Browser 5 21 5 3 5 Background Map 5 21 5 3 6 Status bar 5 22 5 3 7 Cursor menu 5 23 5 4 Groups and NEs management 5 26 5 4 1 Groups management 0 26 5 4 2 NEs management ged 5 4 3 Groups and NEs window 5 30 5 5 Connect a Network Element 5 36 NAM R1 9 VI Issue1 02 2001 363 211 497 Contents 5 5 1 Add a network element 5 936 5 5 2 Connection states NAM telephony agent 5 39 5 5 3 Communication states NAM data agent 5 43 5 6 Network Element management 5 49 5 6 1 Screen navigation 5 49 5 6 2 NAM NE synchronization telephony agent 5 50 5 6 3 NAM NE synchronization data agent ae foe 5 6 4 Configuration of timing source for telephony only 5 55 5 6 5 Date amp Time Telephony window 5 61 5 6 6 Date amp Time Data window 5 63 5 6 7 NE Inventory window 5 65 5 6 8 Network element working mode 0 67 5 6 9 Simplex COMDAC protection scheme 5 68 5 6 10 Equipment protection switching 5 70 5 6 11 Network element software upgrade 5 78 5 6 12 COMDAC program copy 0 86 5 6 13 AFM program copy and validation 5 88 5 6 14 Nonvolatile data storage NVDS 5 89 5 6 15 TL1 cut through telephony agent 5 95 5 6 16 Fiber Reach 5 96 5 6 17 Delete network elem
637. y agent is not available but the NAM is in an active state trying to open a connection with the telephony agent NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 5 39 NE management Connect a Network Element ee m CONNECTED The connection between the NAM and the telephony agent is available and the software version currently stored in the telephony agent is supported by the NAM When the association process between the NAM and the data agent is completed the telephony agent state changes to CONNECTED and remains like this until the TL1 communication session is closed on user request or the connection is lost closed 55 2 1 Changing connection states The connection state changes can be initiated by the user via the GUI cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 36 section Add a network element or they are initiated by the NAM Communication The NAM communicates with the telephony agent by using TL1 commands and file transfer protocol FTP over TCP IP Not connected The user can initiate the connection establishment process with an telephony agent in connection state NOT CONNECTED After initiating this process the connection state changes to TRYING Trying When the connection state is TRYING the NAM tries to establish a connection with the telephony agent After the successful connection the NAM checks if the NAM supports the software version of the telephony agent If the software version is Supported the connection state becomes CONNECTED if not it rem
638. y card test over m the standby COMDAC pack or m the protection IO DS1 pack Procedure Proceed as follows to define the test scheduling Step Procedure 1 Select Main shelf gt Scheduling Exercise in the NE Browser The Standby Card Test Schedule window pops up Figure 8 11 Standby Card Test Schedule window The following table describes the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters as speci fied at NE creation time Protection This option menu can be used to select the desired protec Group Type tion group type COMDAC IODS1 NAM R1 9 363 211 497 Issue 1 02 2001 8 31 Fault management and maintenance Test management ME Se Parameters Buttons Description Current The parameters in this field show the current settings Periodicity days This field shows the number of days be tween exercise Possible values 1 365 Starting Time This field identifies the starting time of the day of exercise The first exercise will start within the next 24 hours at the time specified Next Date This text field shows the next date om which the test will be executed The Get button is used to retrieve the current data from the NE New This field is used to define new schedule data Periodicity This field is used to define the number of days between exercise Possible values 1 165 Starting Time This field is used to define the s
639. y some means of communication For the AnyMedia Element Manager R1 7 1 the communication method is TCP IP eee P Password PID This is always associated with a login UID PID is a case sensitive string containing 6 to 10 alphabetic numeric and symbolic characters where at least two characters are non alphabetic and one is symbolic PCM Highway The COMDAC pack is connected to each AP by the PCM highway which consists of two 4 096 Mbps serial links a 4 096 MHz clock and an 8 kHz sync signal The AnyMedia Access System uses two PCM highways between the COMDAC the IO_DS1s and each of the 16 AP slots Performance Management For receiving detecting time stamping analyzing displaying and storing performance data Plain Old Telephone Service POTS The conversional 2 wire analog subscriber service Platform The hardware on which any AnyMedia EM module server or client is running Platform Alarm This is an alarm related to the AnyMedia Element Manager application or its hardware software platform It usually refers to an Element Manager function or hardware software platform object Port This is circuitry built on an AP to provide an interface for subscribers Note that more than one port can be housed on an AP e g the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Port Test Also called circuit test Verifies the ability of an AP port to provide proper transmission and signaling It is the test ing of the port hardware The functions of the por

Contents - Alcatel-Lucent Documentation Center

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents